Owner's Manual

5FJ012720BD

Owner’s manual

Tarraco Inglés (11.19) SEAT Tarraco

Inglés 5FJ012720BD (11.19) SEAT SEAT Tarraco FR Vehicle identification data Confirmation of receipt of documentation and vehicle keys Model: The following items were delivered YES NO with the vehicle: Vehicle Registration: On-board documentation Vehicle identification number: First key

Date of vehicle registration Second key or vehicle delivery: Correct working order of all keys was checked SEAT Official Service: Location:

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no Date: right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook. All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print. Signature of owner: Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form. SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act. Service advisor: All rights on changes are reserved.

This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose. Telephone: ❀ © SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.11.19 Introduction

Thank you for your trust choosing a SEAT ve- WARNING hicle. Read and always observe safety infor- With your new SEAT, you will be able to enjoy mation concerning the passenger's a vehicle with state-of-the-art technology front airbag ››› page 32, Fitting and us- and top quality features. ing child seats. We recommend reading this Instruction Man- ual carefully to learn more about your vehicle so you can enjoy all its benefits in your daily driving. Information about handling is complemented with instructions regarding the operation and maintenance of the vehicle in order to ensure its safety and maintain its value. Moreover, we want to give you valuable advice and tips to drive your vehicle efficiently and respecting the environment. We wish you safe and enjoyable motoring. SEAT, S.A. ® Trademarks are marked with ®. The ab- Note About this manual sence of this symbol does not guarantee that the term is not a trademark. Texts after this symbol contain addition- This manual describes the features of the ve- al information. hicle at the time of drafting this text. Some of  It indicates that the section continues on the features described below will be intro- the next page. duced in the future or will only be available in You can access the information in this manual certain markets. using: Some of the features described here are not included in all the types or variations ● Thematic table of contents that follows the of the model and they can be varied or manual’s general chapter structure. modified based on technical or marketing ● Visual table of contents that uses graphics requirements without it being considered to indicate the pages containing “essential” misleading advertising. information, which is detailed in the corresponding chapters. Some details on the drawings may vary from its vehicle and must be interpreted as a ● Alphabetical index with many terms and standard representation. synonyms to help you find information.

The direction indicators (left, right, forwards, WARNING backwards) in this manual refer to the travel direction of the vehicle unless otherwise sta- Texts after this symbol contain informa- ted. tion about safety and warn you about possible accident or injury risks. The audiovisual material is only meant to help the users better understand some features of the car. It is not a replacement for the CAUTION instruction manual. Access the instruction Texts after this symbol indicate possible manual to see the complete information and damage to the vehicle. warnings.  The features marked with an asterisk For the sake of the environment are included by default only in certain Texts after this symbol contain informa- versions of the model, supplied as option about the protection of the environ- tional only for certain versions or only of- ment. fered in certain countries. Printed and digital instruction man- Related videos ual The operation of some of the vehicle's fea- The printed instruction manual contains rele- tures can be shown as an instruction video: vant information about the use of the vehicle and the Infotainment System. The digital version of the manuals contains more in-depth information. It is available on

SEAT's official website.

To view the digital version of the manual: Fig. 2 SEAT website

● scan the QR code Fig. 2 ››› ● OR enter the following address in the navigator website:

http://www.seat.com/owners/your- Fig. 1 SEAT website seat/manuals-offline.html

● scan the QR code ››› Fig. 1 choose your vehicle and then “Multimedia”. ● OR enter the following address in the navigator website: Note Video instructions are only available in http://www.seat.com/owners/your- certain languages. seat/manuals-offline.html and select your vehicle.

How do you repair a tyre with the anti-puncture How do you check and top up the brake fluid? Frequently Asked Ques- kit? ››› page 43 ››› page 357 tions How do you change a wheel? page 45 How do you check and adjust tyre pressure val- ››› ues? ››› page 365 Before driving How do you change a fuse? ››› page 57 Vehicle washing tips ››› page 376 How do you adjust the seat? ››› page 123 How do you change a light? ››› page 61 How do you adjust the steering wheel? How do you tow a vehicle? ››› page 52 Functions of interest

››› page 14 Easy Connect, Car menu ››› page 82 Useful tips How do you adjust the exterior mirrors? How does the START-STOP system work?

››› page 121 How do you set the time? ››› page 75 ››› page 250 How do you turn on the exterior lights? When should the vehicle inspection should be What parking assistants are available?

››› page 109 performed? ››› page 77 ››› page 306 How does the automatic gearbox selector lever What functions do the buttons/thumbwheels on How does the rear assist work? ››› page 327 work? ››› page 254 the steering wheel perform? ››› page 85 How does the adaptive cruise control work? How do you refuel? ››› page 342 How do you remove the luggage compartment ››› page 277 cover? ››› page 135 How do you activate the windscreen wipers and How can the SEAT driving mode be adjusted? windscreen washer system? ››› page 118 How do you drive in an economical and environ- ››› page 263 mentally-friendly way? ››› page 266 Emergency situations How does the lane departure warning system How do you check and top up the engine oil? work? ››› page 286 A warning lamp lights up or flashes. What does ››› page 352

this mean? page 79 How does tyre pressure monitoring work? ››› How do you check and top up the engine cool- ››› page 369 How do you open the bonnet? ››› page 350 ant? ››› page 355 How do you open the vehicle without a key (Key- How do you top up the windscreen washer fluid? How do you perform a jump start? ››› page 51 less Access)? ››› page 92 ››› page 357 Where is the vehicle tool kit located? Interior lighting and ambient light ››› page 117

››› page 41 Table of Contents

Jump start ...... 51 Seats and headrests ...... 123 Table of Contents Tow start and towing ...... 52 Adjusting seats ...... 123 Fuses and bulbs ...... 57 Headrest ...... 125 General views of the vehicle ...... 7 Fuses ...... 57 Seat functions ...... 128 Exterior view ...... 7 Bulbs ...... 61 Transport and practical equipment ...... 134 Overview (left hand drive) ...... 8 Storing objects ...... 134 Overview (right hand drive) ...... 9 Operation ...... 63 Luggage compartment ...... 135 Interior view ...... 10 Controls and displays ...... 63 Net partition* ...... 142 Interior view ...... 63 Safety ...... 11 Roof carrier* ...... 143 Instruments and warning/control Safe driving ...... 11 Storage compartment ...... 145 lamps ...... 64 Advice about driving ...... 11 Drink holder ...... 148 Instrument panel ...... 64 Correct sitting position of vehicle occu- Power sockets ...... 150 Using the instrument panel ...... 78 pants ...... 12 Air conditioning ...... 152 Control lamps ...... 79 Pedal area ...... 15 Heating, ventilation and cooling ...... 152 Easy Connect system ...... 82 Seat belts ...... 16 Auxiliary heating (additional heating)* . . . . . 161 Multifunction steering wheel* ...... 85 The whys and wherefores of seat belts . . . . . 16 Opening and closing ...... 87 Infotainment System ...... 165 How to properly adjust your seat belt ...... 19 Set of vehicle keys ...... 87 Introduction ...... 165 Seat belt tensioners ...... 21 Central locking ...... 89 Safety warnings ...... 165 PreCrash system* ...... 22 Anti-theft alarm system* ...... 96 Overview of the unit ...... 167 Airbag system ...... 23 Doors ...... 98 General instructions for use ...... 170 Brief introduction ...... 23 Rear lid ...... 100 Voice control ...... 177 Operation of the airbags ...... 25 Window controls ...... 104 Connectivity ...... 180 Transporting children safely ...... 31 Sunroof* ...... 106 Data transfer ...... 180 Safety for children ...... 31 Lights ...... 109 Full Link* ...... 180 Emergencies ...... 41 Vehicle lighting ...... 109 SEAT Media Control* ...... 186 Self-help ...... 41 Interior lights ...... 117 WLAN access point* ...... 187 Emergency call service* ...... 41 Visibility ...... 118 Operating modes ...... 190 Emergency equipment ...... 41 Windscreen wiper and rear window wiper Radio ...... 190 Tyre repairs ...... 42 systems ...... 118 Media ...... 198 Changing a wheel ...... 45 Mirrors ...... 121 Navigation ...... 215 Changing the windscreen wiper blades . . . . 49 Sun protection ...... 123 Navigation in Offroad mode* ...... 227 Vehicle Menu ...... 229 Telephone ...... 233 Multimedia ...... 244

5 Table of Contents

Driving ...... 246 Trailer Assist ...... 320 Vehicle maintenance ...... 376 Start and driving ...... 246 Peripheral view system (Top View Cam- Maintenance and cleaning ...... 376 Starting and stopping the engine ...... 246 era)* ...... 323 Accessories and modifications to the ve- Start-Stop system* ...... 250 Reverse Assist (Rear View Camera)* ...... 327 hicle ...... 381 Manual gearbox ...... 253 Towing bracket device* ...... 332 Accessories, spare parts and repair work . . . 381 Trailer mode ...... 332 Automatic gearbox/DSG automatic gear- Information for the user ...... 384 box* ...... 254 Electrically unlocking trailer hook* ...... 339 Information for the user ...... 384 Gear-change recommendation ...... 261 Retrofitting a towing bracket ...... 340 Information stored by the control units ...... 384 Hill Descent Control (HDC) ...... 261 Practical tips ...... 342 Other important information ...... 384 Steering ...... 262 Checking and refilling levels ...... 342 Information about the EU Directive SEAT Driving modes (SEAT Drive Pro- Refuelling ...... 342 2014/53/EU ...... 385 file)* ...... 263 Fuel types ...... 343 Driving tips ...... 265 Technical data ...... 389 AdBlue® ...... 345 Driver assistance systems ...... 268 Indications about the technical data . . . . 389 Engine management and emissions control Cruise control system (CCS)* ...... 268 Important information ...... 389 system ...... 347 Speed limiter ...... 270 Engine compartment ...... 349 Index ...... 395 Emergency brake assistance system (Front Engine oil ...... 352 Assist)* ...... 273 Cooling system ...... 355 ACC - Adaptive Cruise Control* ...... 277 Brake fluid ...... 357 Lane Assist* ...... 286 Windscreen washer reservoir ...... 357 Traffic Jam Assist ...... 289 Battery ...... 358 Emergency Assist ...... 290 Energy management ...... 361 Using the blind spot detector (BSD) with Wheels ...... 363 parking assistant (RCTA)* ...... 291 Wheels and tyres ...... 363 Braking and parking ...... 297 Tyre pressure loss indicator ...... 369 Braking system ...... 297 Spare wheel ...... 371 Stabilisation and brake assistance systems ...... 302 Maintenance ...... 373 Parking ...... 305 SEAT Maintenance Programme ...... 373 Help with parking and manoeuvring . . . . . 306 Service intervals ...... 373 Assisted parking system (Park Assist)* ...... 306 Additional service offers ...... 375 Parking aid parking and manoeuvring Warranty ...... 376 (ParkPilot) ...... 314 Parking System Plus* ...... 315 Rear parking aid* ...... 319 6 General views of the vehicle

Exterior view

1 Rear lid 4 Bonnet 7 Action in the event of a puncture – Opening from outside ››› page 101 – Unlocking lever ››› page 350 – Anti-puncture kit ››› page 42 – Emergency opening ››› page 104 – Open/close ››› page 350 – Wheel change ››› page 45 2 Fuel tank 5 Levels control – Fuel capacity ››› page 389 – Oil ››› page 352 – Open/Close cap ››› page 342 – Brake fluid ››› page 357 3 Opening and closing – Battery ››› page 358 – Doors ››› page 98 6 Towing the vehicle – Central locking ››› page 89 – Towline anchorage ››› page 55 – Manual release ››› page 99 – Tow start ››› page 53 7 General views of the vehicle

Overview (left hand drive)

1 Electric windows ››› page 104 8 Wipers and rear window wiper 16 Hazard warning lights ››› page 115 2 Central locking ››› page 89 ››› page 118 3 Exterior mirror adjustment ››› page 121 9 Driver information system ››› page 78 4 Open bonnet lever ››› page 350 10 Easy Connect ››› page 82 5 Headlight switch ››› page 110 11 Front passenger airbag disconnection display ››› page 27 6 Turn signal and main beam lever ››› page 112 12 Fuses ››› page 57 Cruise control ››› page 268 13 Steering wheel adjustment ››› page 14 7 Warning lamps ››› page 79 14 Starter button ››› page 246 15 Air conditioning ››› page 152

8 General views of the vehicle

Overview (right hand drive)

1 Open bonnet lever ››› page 350 7 Driver information system ››› page 78 2 Easy Connect ››› page 82 8 Headlight switch ››› page 110 3 Front passenger airbag disconnection 9 Central locking ››› page 89 display page 27 ››› 10 Exterior mirror adjustment ››› page 121 4 Turn signal and main beam lever 11 Electric windows ››› page 104 ››› page 112 12 Fuses ››› page 57 Cruise control ››› page 268 13 Hazard warning lights ››› page 115 5 Warning lamps ››› page 79 14 Air conditioning ››› page 152 6 Wipers and rear window wiper 15 Starter button page 246 ››› page 118 ››› 16 Steering wheel adjustment ››› page 14 9 General views of the vehicle

Interior view

1 Folding the third row of seats 7 Panoramic roof ››› page 106 ››› page 137 8 Interior mirror ››› page 121 2 Access to the third row of seats 9 Disconnecting the front passenger front ››› page 129 airbag ››› page 27 3 Armrest page 133 ››› 10 Electronic parking brake ››› page 299 4 Isofix anchors page 34 ››› 11 Seat adjustment ››› page 123 5 Headrest adjustment ››› page 125 6 Seat belts ››› page 16 10 Safe driving

– Ensure that all windows provide a clear and – Always pay attention to traffic and do not Safety good view of the surroundings. get distracted by passengers or telephone calls. – Make sure all luggage is secured Safe driving ››› page 134. – Never drive when your driving ability is impaired (e.g. by medication, alcohol, drugs). – Make sure that no objects can interfere with Advice about driving the pedals. – Observe traffic laws and speed limits. – Adjust front seat, headrest and mirrors – Always reduce your speed as appropriate Safety first! properly according to your size. for road, traffic and weather conditions.

– Ensure that the passengers in the rear seats – When travelling long distances, take breaks WARNING always have the headrests in the in-use po- regularly - at least every two hours. ● This manual contains important informa- sition ››› page 125. tion about the operation of the vehicle, – If possible, avoid driving when you are tired both for the driver and the passengers. The – Instruct passengers to adjust the headrests or stressed. other sections of the on-board documenta- according to their height. WARNING tion also contain further information that – Protect children with appropriate child you should be aware of for your own safety seats and properly applied seat belts Driving under the influence of alcohol, and for the safety of your passengers. ››› page 31. drugs, medication or narcotics may result ● Ensure that the on-board documentation in severe accidents and even loss of life. – Assume the correct sitting position. Instruct is kept in the vehicle at all times. This is es- ● Alcohol, drugs, medication and narcotics your passengers also to assume a proper pecially important when lending or selling may significantly alter perception, affect sitting position page 12. the vehicle to another person. ››› reaction times and safety while driving, – Fasten your seat belt securely. Instruct your which could result in the loss of control of passengers also to fasten their seat belts the vehicle. Before driving properly ››› page 16.

For your own safety and the safety of your Safety equipment passengers, always note the following points Factors influencing safety before every trip: Never put your safety or the safety of your – Make sure that the vehicle's lights and turn As a driver, you are responsible for yourself passengers in danger. In the event of an acci- signals are working properly. and your passengers. dent, the safety equipment may reduce the »

– Check tyre pressure.

11 Safety

risk of injury. The following points cover part Safety is everyone's business! of the safety equipment in your SEAT1):

● three-point seat belts, ● belt tension limiters for the front and rear Correct sitting position of side seats, vehicle occupants ● belt tensioners for the front and rear side seats, Correct position on the seat ● Belt height adjustment for the front seats ● front airbags, Fig. 4 Correct belt web and headrest positions ● knee airbags, ● side airbags in the front seat backrests, The correct sitting positions for the driver and passengers are shown below. ● head-protection airbags, ● “i-Size” anchor points for child seats in the If your physical constitution prevents you rear side seats and front passenger seat with from maintaining the correct sitting position, the “i-Size” system, contact a specialised workshop for help with any special devices. The seat belt and airbag ● height-adjustable front headrests, can only provide optimum protection if a cor- ● rear headrests with in-use position and Fig. 3 The correct distance between the driver rect sitting position is adopted. SEAT recom- non-use position, and the steering wheel must be at least 25 cm mends taking your car in for technical serv- ● adjustable steering column. (10 inches). ice. For your own safety and to reduce the risk of The safety equipment mentioned above injury in the event of an accident or sudden works together to provide you and your pas- braking or manoeuvre, SEAT recommend the sengers with the best possible protection in following positions: the event of an accident. However, these safety systems can only be effective if you Valid for all vehicle occupants: and your passengers are sitting in a correct position and use this equipment properly. ● Adjust the headrest so that its upper edge is at the same level as the top of your head, or

1) Depending on the version/market. 12 Safe driving as close as possible to the same level as the and the dashboard of at least 10 cm (4 in- 5 seats 7 seats top of your head and under no circumstances ches) ››› Fig. 3. below eye level. Keep the back of your neck ● Adjust the height of the seat so that you Seats in the 2 2 front as close as possible to the headrest ››› Fig. 4. can reach the top of the steering wheel. ● Short people must lower the headrest com- ● Always keep both feet in the footwell so Seats in the 3 3 second row pletely, even if your head is below its upper that you have the vehicle under control at all edge. times. Seats in the – 2 ● Tall people must raise the headrest com- third row pletely. For the passenger, the following applies: ● Always keep your feet in the footwell while ● Given that the vehicle is equipped with ad- WARNING the vehicle is in motion. justable headrests, move the headrest as Sitting in an incorrect position may in- ● Adjust and fasten your seat belt correctly close as possible to the rear of the head. crease the risk of severe or lethal injuries in ››› page 19. ● Move the seat backrest to an almost up- the event of sudden braking or manoeu- right position so that your back rests com- vring, in case of collision or accident and if the airbags deploy. The following also applies to the driver: pletely against it. ● Before starting the car, all passengers ● Given that the vehicle is equipped with ad- ● Move the seat as far back as possible (mini- must be sitting in a correct position and justable headrests, move the headrest as mum 25 cm between the chest and the dash- stay like that for the entire journey. This al- close as possible to the rear of the head. board check translation). If you are sitting so applies to a correct use of the seat belt. closer than 25 cm, the airbag system cannot ● Move the seat backrest to an almost up- ● The maximum amount of people in the protect you properly. right position so that your back rests com- vehicle is the same as the amount of seats pletely against it. with seat belts. ● Move the steering wheel so it is at least ● For children, always use a certified pro- 25 cm (10 inches) away from the sternum Number of seats tection system, certified and suited for their ››› Fig. 3 and you can hold it with both hands weight and height ››› page 31. The vehicle has 5 or 7 seats, depending on on both sides, on the outer part, with your the features. All seats are equipped with a ● While driving, always keep your feet in arms slightly bent. the footwell. Never place them over the safety belt. ● The steering wheel must always point to- seat or the dashboard, for example, or outwards the chest and never towards the face. No one taller than 1.60 m should sit on the side the window. Otherwise the airbag and third row of seats. seat belt may offer insufficient protection ● Move the seat in such a way that you can and also increase the risk of injury in the step on the pedals with your knees slightly event of an accident. » bent and with a distance between the knees

13 Safety

WARNING When the vehicle is in motion: ● Occupants of the vehicle that are not sitting correctly, not wearing the seat belt or Risk of suffering severe head injuries If peo- ● Never stand in the vehicle. are not at a proper distance of the airbag ple taller than 1.60 m travel in the third row, ● Never stand on the seats. risk suffering very serious or lethal injuries, they may receive severe head injuries in ● Never kneel on the seats. especially if the airbags deploy and strike the event of an accident. ● Never tilt your seat backrest too far to the them. ● Never travel with anyone taller than 1.60 rear. m on the third row. ● ● When closing the rear lid, always be Never lean against the dash panel. mindful of the passengers of the rearmost ● Never lie on the rear seats. Steering wheel position adjustment seats. ● Never sit on the front edge of a seat. ● Never sit sideways. ● Risks of sitting in an incorrect posi- Never lean out of a window. tion ● Never put your feet out of a window. ● Never put your feet on the dash panel. If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all, ● Never place your feet on the bench or on the risk of severe or lethal injuries increases. the backrest of the seat. Seat belts can provide optimal protection on- ● Never travel in a footwell. ly if the belt web is properly worn. Incorrect sitting positions substantially reduce the pro- ● Never sit on the armrests. tective function of seat belts and, therefore, ● Never travel without wearing the seat belt. Fig. 5 Lever in the lower left side of the steering increase the risk of severe or even lethal inju- ● Never travel in the luggage compartment. column. ries. The risk of severe or fatal injuries is especially heightened when a deploying airbag WARNING Adjust the steering wheel before your trip and strikes a vehicle occupant who has assumed only when the vehicle is stationary. an incorrect sitting position. The driver is re- Sitting in an incorrect position increases the risk of severe or fatal injuries in the sponsible for all people, particularly children, ● Pull the ››› Fig. 5 1 lever down, move the inside the vehicle. event of accidents and sudden braking or steering wheel to the desired position and lift manoeuvres. the lever back up until it locks. The following list contains examples of incor- ● All occupants must sit correctly during rect sitting positions that could be dangerous the journey and wear the seat belt correct- for all vehicle occupants. ly.

14 Safe driving

WARNING Pedal area ● Never lay or fit floor mats or other floor coverings over the original floor mats. This Incorrect use of the steering wheel adjust- would reduce the pedal area and could ob- ment function and an incorrect adjustment Pedals struct the pedals. Risk of accident. of the steering wheel can result in severe or fatal injury. – Ensure that you can always press the ac- ● Never place objects in the driver footwell. An object could move into the pedal area ● After adjusting the steering column, push celerator, brake and clutch pedals unim- and impair pedal operation. the lever ››› Fig. 5 1 firmly upwards to en- paired to the floor. sure the steering wheel does not acciden- – Ensure that the pedals can return unim- tally change position while driving. paired to their initial positions. ● Never adjust the steering wheel while the vehicle is in motion. If you need to adjust – Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas- the steering wheel while the vehicle is in tened during the trip and do not obstruct motion, stop safely and make the proper the pedals ››› . adjustment. Only use floor mats which leave the pedals ● The adjusted steering wheel should be clear and which are secured to prevent them facing your chest and not your face so as from slipping. You can obtain suitable floor not to hinder the driver's front airbag pro- mats from a specialised dealership. Fasten- tection in the event of an accident. ers* for floor mats are fitted in the footwells. ● When driving, always hold the steering wheel with both hands on the outside of the If a brake circuit fails, the brake pedal must be ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions pressed down thoroughly in order to stop the to reduce injuries when the driver's front vehicle. airbag deploys. ● Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 Wear suitable footwear o'clock position or in any other manner Always wear shoes which support your feet (e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel). In properly and give you a good feeling for the such cases, if the driver's airbag deploys, pedals. you may sustain injuries to your arms, hands and head. WARNING ● Restricting pedal operation can lead to critical situations while driving.

15 Safety

Seat belts Rear seat belts fastened display* If a seat belt is fastened or unfastened while driving in some of the rear seats, the seat belt status is displayed for approximately 30 sec- The whys and wherefores of onds. The indication can be hidden by press- seat belts ing the  button on the dash panel.

Control lamps The protective function of seat belts  It lights up red

Driver or passenger has not fastened seat belt.

The control lamp  lights up to remind the Fig. 6 Instrument panel: left rear seat occu- driver to fasten their seat belt. pied and corresponding seat belt fastened display. Before starting the vehicle: Depending on the model version, when the ● Fasten your seat belt securely. ignition is switched on, the seat belt status ● Instruct your passengers to fasten their display ››› Fig. 6 on the instrument panel in- seat belts properly before driving off. forms the driver whether the passengers in ● Protect children by using a child seat ac- the rear seats have fastened their seat belts. Fig. 7 Drivers with properly worn seat belts will cording to the child's height and weight It indicates that the corresponding seat not be thrown forward in the event of sudden page 31.  ››› is empty. braking. When starting to drive, if the vehicle's speed  A green light indicates that the seat is Properly worn seat belts hold the occupants exceeds approx. 25 km/h (15 mph) and the occupied and the occupant is wearing in the proper position. They also help prevent seat belts are not fastened or are unfastened the seat belt. uncontrolled movements that may result in while driving, a warning sound will be heard A red light indicates that the seat is oc- serious injury and reduce the risk of being for a few seconds. The warning light will also  cupied and the occupant is not wearing thrown out of the vehicle in case of an acci- flash . the seat belt. In this case, the seat belt dent. The lamp  goes out when the driver and control lamp will also light up in red and, Vehicle occupants wearing their seat belts passenger seat belts are fastened with the if driving over 25 km/h (15 mph), a warn- correctly benefit greatly from the ability of ignition switched on. ing sound will be emitted for a few sec- the belts to absorb kinetic energy. In addition, onds. 16 Seat belts the front part of your vehicle and other pas- Important safety instructions for ● Never use seat belt clips, fastening rings sive safety features (such as the airbag sys- the use of seat belts or similar items to alter the position of the tem) are designed to absorb the kinetic ener- belt webbing. gy released in a collision. Taken together, all – Always wear the seat belt as described in ● Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to these features reduce the releasing kinetic this section. the connections, belt retractors or parts of energy and consequently, the risk of injury. the buckle could cause severe injuries in – Ensure that the seat belts can be fastened This is why it is so important to fasten seat the event of an accident. Therefore, you at all times and are not damaged. belts before every trip, even when "just driving must check the condition of all seat belts around the corner". at regular intervals. WARNING Ensure that your passengers wear their seat ● Seat belts which have been worn in an belts as well. Accident statistics have shown ● If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at accident and have been stretched must be all, the risk of severe injuries increases. The that wearing seat belts is an effective means replaced by a specialised workshop. Re- optimal protection from seat belts can be of substantially reducing the risk of injury and newal may be necessary even if there is no achieved only if you use them properly. improving the chances of survival when in- apparent damage. The belt anchorage volved in a serious accident. Furthermore, ● Never allow two passengers (even chil- should also be checked. properly worn seat belts improve the protec- dren) to share the same seat belt. ● Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat tion provided by airbags in the event of an ● Never unbuckle a seat belt while the ve- belt yourself. The seat belts must not be re- accident. For this reason, wearing a seat belt hicle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury. moved or modified in any way. is required by law in most countries. ● The seat belt should never lie on hard or ● The belts must be kept clean, otherwise fragile objects (such as glasses or pens, the retractors may not work properly. Although your vehicle is equipped with air- etc.) because this can cause injuries. bags, the seat belts must be fastened and worn. The front airbags, for example, are only ● Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged triggered in some cases of head-on collision. or jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges. The front airbags will not be triggered during ● Never wear the seat belt under the arm or minor frontal or side collisions, rear-end colli- in any other incorrect position. sions, overturns or accidents in which the air- ● Bulky and unfastened clothing (such as bag trigger threshold value in the control unit an overcoat over a sweater) impairs the is not exceeded. proper fit and function of the seat belts, reducing their capacity to protect. ● The slot in the seat belt buckle must not be blocked with paper or other objects, as this can prevent the latch plate from engaging securely.

17 Safety

Head-on collisions and the laws of ergy called “kinetic energy” starts acting on possible to brace oneself with one's hands. In physics both the vehicle and its passengers. a frontal collision, unbelted passengers are thrown forward and will make violent contact The amount of “kinetic energy” depends on with the steering wheel, dash panel, wind- the speed of the vehicle and on the weight of screen or whatever else is in the way the vehicle and of its passengers. The higher ››› Fig. 8. they are, the more energy there is to be “absorbed” in the event of an accident. It is also important for rear passengers to wear seat belts properly, as they could other- The most significant factor, however, is the wise be thrown forward violently through the speed of the vehicle. If the speed doubles vehicle interior in an accident. Passengers in from 25 km/h (15 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph), the rear seats who do not use seat belts en- for example, the corresponding kinetic ener- danger not only themselves but also the front gy is multiplied by four. occupants ››› Fig. 9. Fig. 8 A driver not wearing a seat belt is thrown Given that the passengers of the vehicle in forward violently. our example do not have their seat belts fastened, in the event of a collision the entire amount of the passengers' kinetic energy will be only absorbed by the mentioned impact. Even at speeds of 30 km/h (19 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph), the forces acting on bodies in a collision can easily exceed one tonne (1000 kg). At greater speed these forces are even higher. Vehicle occupants not wearing seat belts are not “attached” to the vehicle. In a head-on collision, they will move forward at the same Fig. 9 The unbelted passenger in the rear seat is thrown forward violently, hitting the driver speed their vehicle was travelling just before who is wearing a seat belt. the impact. This example applies not only to head-on collisions, but to all accidents and The effects of the laws of physics in the case collisions. of a head-on collision are easy to explain: the Even at low speeds the forces acting on the moment a vehicle starts moving, a type of en- body in a collision are so great that it is not

18 Seat belts

How to properly adjust your Properly worn seat belts hold the vehicle oc- WARNING cupants in the position that most protects seat belt them in the event of an accident or sudden ● The seat belt cannot offer its full protection unless the seat backrest is in an up- braking ››› . right position and the seat belt is worn cor- Fastening and unfastening the seat rectly, according to your size. Fastening the seat belt belt ● Unbuckling your seat belt while the vehi- Fasten your seat belt before each trip. cle is in motion can cause severe or fatal injuries in the event of an accident or sud- ● Adjust the front seat and headrest correctly den braking. ››› page 12. ● The seat belt itself, or a loose seat belt, ● Engage the seat backrest of the rear seat in can cause severe injuries if the belt moves an upright position ››› . from hard areas of the body to soft areas ● Pull the latch plate and place the belt web- (e.g. the stomach). bing evenly across your chest and lap. Do not twist the seat belt when doing so ››› . ● Engage the latch plate in the buckle of the corresponding seat ››› Fig. 10. Fig. 10 Insert the latch plate of the seat belt into the buckle. ● Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is securely engaged in the buckle.

Releasing the seat belt Only unfasten the seat belt when the vehicle has come to a standstill ››› .

● Press the red button on the buckle ››› Fig. 11. The latch plate is released from the buckle. ● Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls up easily and the trim will not be damaged. Fig. 11 Release the seat belt's buckle.

19 Safety

Correct seat belt position belt will hold the vehicle occupants in the op- WARNING timum position to ensure the airbag provides the maximum protection. The seat belt must An incorrectly worn seat belt web can cause severe or fatal injuries in the event of therefore always be worn and the webbing an accident. correctly positioned. ● The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause severe on the centre of the shoulder, never across or even fatal injuries ››› page 12, Correct sit- the neck or the arm. ting position of vehicle occupants. ● The seat belt must lie flat and fit comfort- ● The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie ably on the torso on the centre of the shoulder, never across ● The lap part of the seat belt must lie the neck or the arm, under the arm or behind across the pelvis, never across the stomach. The seat belt must lie flat and fit com- Fig. 12 Correct seat belt and headrest posi- the shoulder. fortably on the pelvis Pull the belt tight if tions, viewed from front and the side. ● The lap part of the seat belt must lie across necessary to take up any slack. the pelvis, never across the stomach. ● For pregnant women, the lap part of the ● The seat belt must lie flat and fit comforta- seat belt must lie as low as possible over bly. Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up the pelvis and always lie flat, “surrounding” any slack. the stomach››› Fig. 13. In the case of pregnant women, the seat belt ● Do not twist the seat belt while it is fas- must lie evenly across the chest and as low tened. as possible over the pelvis, never across the ● Once the seat belt is positioned correct- stomach and must be worn properly at all ly, don't pull it away from your body with times during the pregnancy ››› Fig. 13. your hand. ● Do not lie the seat belt across rigid or Adapting the position of the belt webbing fragile objects, e.g. glasses, pens or keys. to your size ● Never use seat belt clips, retaining rings Fig. 13 Position of seat belt during pregnancy. The seat belt can be adapted using the fol- or similar instruments to alter the position of the belt webbing. Seat belts offer their maximum protection in lowing equipment: the event of an accident and reduce the risk ● Belt height adjustment for the front seats. of sustaining severe or fatal injuries only when Note ● Front seat height adjustment. they are properly positioned. Furthermore, if If your physical constitution prevents you the webbing is correctly positioned, the seat from maintaining the correct position of the 20 Seat belts

belt webbing, contact a specialised work- ● Move the guide device up or down until the Reversible seat belt tensioning shop for help with any special devices to seat belt lies over the centre of your shoulder In specific driving situations, a reversible ten- ensure the optimum protection of the seat ››› page 19. sioning of the seat belts might take place belt and airbag. SEAT recommends taking ● Release the guide device. ››› page 22. For example: your car in for technical service. ● Pull the belt sharply to check that the de- ● in the event of sudden brakes vice is engaged securely. ● in the event of oversteering or understeer- Seat belt height adjustment WARNING ing Never adjust the belt height while the vehi- ● in the event of minor collisions cle is in motion. Note ● If the seat belt tensioners are triggered, a fine dust is produced. This is normal and it Seat belt tensioners is not an indication of fire in the vehicle. ● The relevant safety requirements must be How the seat belt tensioner works observed when the vehicle or components of the system are scrapped. Specialised The seat belts for the front seats and the side workshops are familiar with these regula- rear seats on the second row1) are equipped tions, which are also available to you. Fig. 14 Next to the front seats: belt height ad- with belt tensioners. juster. The belt tensioners are activated by sensors, Using the height adjusters for the front seats although only in severe head-on, lateral and Maintenance and disposal of seat and the outer seats of the second row, the rear-end collisions. This retracts and tightens belt tensioners position of the seat belts can be adjusted in the seat belts, reducing the forward motion of the shoulder area according to the height of the occupants. The belt tensioners are components of the seat belts that are installed in the seats of the occupant: The belt pre-tensioners work in combination your vehicle. If you work on the belt tension- with the airbag system. In case of overturn, ● Keep the guide device pressed down in the ers or remove and install parts of the system the pre-tensioners do not activate unless the direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 14. when performing other repair work, the seat head airbags are deployed. belt may be damaged. The consequence »

1) Depending on version/market. 21 Safety

may be that, in the event of an accident, the PreCrash system* In addition, in vehicles with an emergency belt tensioners function incorrectly or may brake assistance system (Front Assist) not function at all. How it works In vehicles with Front Assist ››› page 273, So that the effectiveness of the seat belt ten- within the limits of the system, information is sioner is not reduced and that removed parts The PreCrash system is an assistance system used to assess the risk of collision with the do not cause any injuries or environmental that actives a series of measures to protect previous vehicle. If there is a high risk of rear pollution, regulations, which are known to the the occupants of the vehicles in potentially collision or during the activation of Front As- specialised workshops, must be observed. risky situations, but which cannot prevent a sist in this type of situations, the PreCrash collision. system functions can also be enabled. WARNING It only works completely if no special driving Driving profile selection settings ● Improper use or repairs not carried out by profile is selected ››› page 22 and if there qualified mechanics increase the risk of se- are no operating anomalies ››› page 263, In vehicles with driving profile selection, the vere or fatal injuries. The belt tensioners ››› page 22. PreCrash system adapts to the selected set- may fail to trigger or may trigger in the tings ››› page 263. wrong circumstances. Basic features ● The seat belt tensioner, seat belt and au- Limited operation tomatic retractor cannot be repaired. Depending on the legal provisions of the country and the features of the vehicle, in crit- The PreCrash system is not available or only ● Any work on the belt tensioners and seat ical situations (e.g. in certain cases of emer- has limited availability in the following situa- belts, including the removal and refitting of gency braking or loss of control of the vehicle tions: system parts in conjunction with other re- by the driver) the following functions can be pair work, must be performed by a special- ● When ESC is activated, the reversible ten- activated separately or at the same time ised workshop only. sioning of the seat belts or the control unit of from a specific speed. ● The belt tensioners will only provide pro- the airbag do not work correctly tection for one accident and must be ● Reversible tensioning of front seat belts that ››› page 21, ››› page 23 changed if they have been activated. are fastened. ● When ASR or ESC are disabled and when ● Depending on the features, automatic clo- driving in reverse ››› page 302. For the sake of the environment sure of the glass roof and the windows to a ● When there is a fault in the Front Assist sys- Airbag modules and belt tensioners may slit. tem ››› page 273. contain perchlorate. Observe the legal re- ● In the event of the vehicle overturning, acti- quirements for their disposal. vation of the seat belt tensioners and head- Problems and solutions protection airbags. If the PreCrash is not working correctly, the message System unavailable or System

22 Airbag system with limited features is shown perma- WARNING Airbag system nently on the dashboard display. Distracting the driver in any way can lead Have the system checked by a specialised to an accident and cause injuries. Brief introduction workshop. ● Never change settings on the Infotain- ment System while driving. WARNING Related video The PreCrash system cannot overcome the limits imposed by the laws of physics; it only works within the limits of the system. Risks that compromise safety are never jus- tified by the use of this system. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness and cannot prevent a collision. Fig. 15 Vehicle interior ● Adapt your speed and safe distance to the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit the visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. Why is it so important to wear a ● The system is not always able to recog- seat belt and to sit correctly? nise objects. For the inflating airbags to achieve the best ● The system may not react to people or protection, the seat belt must always be worn animals or objects that cross length-wise properly and the correct sitting position must or that are hard to detect. be assumed. ● Metallic objects (e.g. fences) or other elements of the public road or adverse The airbag system is not a substitute for seat weather conditions can hinder its operation belts, but it is an integral part of the vehicle's and thus its ability to detect collision risk. overall passive safety system. Please bear in ● Never ignore the warning lamps that light mind that the airbag system can only work up or the messages shown on the dash- effectively when the vehicle occupants are board. wearing their seat belts correctly and have adjusted the headrests properly. Therefore, it is most important to properly wear the seat belts at all times, not only because this is required by law in most countries, but also for »

23 Safety

your safety ››› page 16, The whys and how serious, is not a determining factor for ● Head airbag wherefores of seat belts. the airbags to have been triggered. ● Airbag control lamp  on the instrument The airbag inflates in a matter of seconds, so panel ››› page 25 WARNING if you are not properly seated when the air- ● Key-operated switch for front passenger bag is triggered, you may sustain fatal inju- ● Wearing the seat belt incorrectly or as- airbag ries. Therefore, it is essential that all vehicle suming an incorrect sitting position can ● Control lamp for disabled/enabled status occupants assume a correct sitting position lead to critical or fatal injuries. of the front passenger airbag. while travelling. ● All vehicle occupants, including children, who are not properly belted can sustain Sharp braking before an accident may cause The airbag system operation is monitored critical or fatal injuries if the airbag is trig- electronically. The airbag control lamp will il- a passenger not wearing a seat belt to be gered. Children up to 12 years old should thrown forward into the area of the deploying luminate for a few seconds every time the ig- always travel on the rear seat. Never trans- nition is switched on (self-diagnosis). airbag. In this case, the inflating airbag may port children in the vehicle if they are not inflict critical or fatal injuries on the occupant. restrained or the restraint system is not ap- There is a fault in the system if the control This also applies to children. propriate for their age, size or weight. lamp : Always maintain the greatest possible dis- ● To reduce the risk of injury from an inflat- ● does not light up when the ignition is tance between yourself and the front airbag. ing airbag, always wear the seat belt prop- switched on page 25, This way, the front airbags can completely erly ››› page 16. ››› deploy when triggered, providing their maxi- ● turns off after 4 seconds after the ignition is mum protection. switched on, The most important factors for triggering the Description of the airbag system ● turns off and then lights up again after the airbag are the type of accident, the angle of ignition is switched on, impact and the vehicle speed. The airbag system offers additional protec- ● illuminates or flashes while the vehicle is tion for the occupants in combination with the moving. Whether or not the airbags are triggered de- seat belts. pends primarily on the vehicle deceleration The airbag system is not triggered if: rate resulting from the collision and detected The airbag system comprises the follow- by the control unit. If the vehicle deceleration ing modules (as per vehicle equipment): ● the ignition is switched off occurring during the collision and measured ● ● Electronic control unit there is a minor frontal collision by the control unit remains below the speci- ● there is a minor side collision fied reference values, the front, side and/or ● Front airbags for driver and passenger ● head-protection airbags will not be triggered. ● Knee airbag for the driver there is a rear-end collision Take into account that the visible damage in ● ● Side airbags the vehicle turns over. a vehicle involved in an accident, no matter 24 Airbag system

WARNING alised. Some factors play an important role, In an accident with airbag activation: such as the properties of the object the vehi- ● the interior lights switch on (if the interior ● The seat belts and airbags can only pro- cle hits (hard/soft), angle of impact, vehicle vide maximum protection if the occupants light switch is in the courtesy light position); speed, etc. are seated correctly ››› page 12. ● the hazard warning lights switch on; Deceleration trajectory is key for airbag acti- ● If a fault has occurred in the airbag sys- ● all doors are unlocked; tem, have the system checked immediately vation. ● the fuel supply to the engine is cut; by a specialised workshop. Otherwise The control unit analyses the collision trajec- ● an emergency call is started* page 41. there is a danger that during a collision, the tory and activates the respective restraint ››› system may fail to trigger, or not trigger system. correctly. If the deceleration rate is below the prede- fined reference value in the control unit the Operation of the airbags Airbag activation airbags will not be triggered, even though the accident may cause extensive damage to the Airbag system control lamps car. The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, within thousands of a second, to provide additional  It lights up on the combi-instru- protection in the event of an accident. A fine The following airbags are triggered in seri- ment dust may develop when the airbag deploys. ous head-on collisions: Fault in the airbag system and seat belt tensioners . This is normal and it is not an indication of fire ● Driver airbag. Have the system checked immediately by a special- in the vehicle. ● Front passenger front airbag ised workshop. The airbag system is only ready to function ● Knee airbag for the driver. when the ignition is on.   It lights up on the dash panel The following airbags are triggered in seri- In special accidents instances, several air- Fault in the airbag system. bags may activate at the same time. ous side-on collisions: Have the system checked immediately by a special- ● Front side airbag on the side of the acci- ised workshop. In the event of minor head-on and side colli- dent. sions, rear-end collisions, overturning or roll- Front passenger front airbag deactivated. over of the vehicle, airbags do not activate. ● Curtain (head) airbag on the side of the ac- Check if the airbag should be kept deactivated » cident. Activation factors The conditions that lead to the airbag system activating in each situation cannot be gener-

25 Safety

  It lights up on the dash panel belts may not trigger correctly, may fail to Front airbags trigger or may even trigger unexpectedly. Front passenger front airbag activated. ● The vehicle occupants run the risk of sus- The control lamp turns off automatically 60 seconds after the ignition is switched on taining severe or fatal injuries. Have the system checked immediately by a special- Several warning and control lamps light up ised workshop. for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- ● Do not mount a child seat in the front ed on, signalling that the function is being passenger seat or remove the mounted verified. They will switch off after a few sec- child seat! The front passenger front airbag onds. may deploy during an accident in spite of the fault. If the airbag and seat belt tensioner system control lamp  remains on or flashes, it indi- CAUTION cates a malfunction in the airbag and seat belt tensioner system ››› . Have the system Always pay attention to any lit control checked immediately by a specialised work- lamps and to the corresponding descrip- shop. tions and instructions to avoid damage to the vehicle or harm to the occupants. If the front passenger airbag is deactivated, the warning lamp      remains lit on the dash panel to remind you that the airbag is deactivated. If, with the front Fig. 16 Driver airbag located in steering passenger airbag deactivated, this lamp wheel. does not remain lit or if it is lit along with the control lamp  on the instrument panel, there is a fault in the airbag system ››› . If the control lamp is flashing, there is a fault in the disabling of the airbag system ››› . Have the system checked immediately by a specialised workshop.

WARNING In the event of a fault in the airbag and seat belt tensioner system, the airbags and seat

26 Airbag system

ditional protection for the head and chest in Activate and deactivate front pas- the event of a severe frontal collision ››› . senger front airbag* Their special design allows the controlled escape of the propellant gas when an occupant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and chest are protected by the airbag. After the collision, the airbag deflates sufficiently to allow visibility.

WARNING ● The deployment space between the front passengers and the airbags must not in any case be occupied by other passenger, pets and objects. Fig. 18 Switch for activating and deactivating ● The airbags provide protection for just the front passenger airbag. one accident; replace them once they have deployed. ● It is also important not to attach any ob- Fig. 17 Front passenger airbag located in dash jects such as cup holders or telephone panel. mountings to the surfaces covering the airbag units. The front airbag for the driver is located in the steering wheel ››› Fig. 16 and the airbag for the front passenger is located in the dash panel ››› Fig. 17. Airbags are identified by the word “AIRBAG”. When the driver and front passenger airbags Fig. 19 Dash panel: control lamp for the deac- are deployed, the covers remain attached to tivation of the front passenger front airbag. the steering wheel and dashboard, respec- Deactivate the front passenger front airbag tively ››› Fig. 16 ››› Fig. 17. only if you have to use a rear-facing child In conjunction with the seat belts, the front seat in the front passenger seat. » airbag system gives the front occupants ad-

27 Safety

SEAT recommends fitting the child seat in the WARNING rear seat to avoid having to deactivate the front passenger airbag. ● The driver of the vehicle is responsible for disabling or switching on the airbag. When the front passenger airbag is deacti- ● Always switch off the ignition before dis- vated, this means that only the front passen- abling the front passenger airbag! Failure ger front airbag is deactivated. All the other to do so could result in a fault in the airbag airbags in the vehicle remain activated. deactivation system. ● Never leave the key in the airbag disa- Deactivate and activate the front passen- bling switch as it could get damaged or en- ger front airbag able or disable the airbag during driving. Fig. 21 On the driver side: airbag action radius ● Switch the ignition off. ● If for any reason an airbag is deactivated, for the knees. ● Open the door on the front passenger side. reactivate it as soon as possible so that it can fulfil its protective function. ● Insert the key into the slot of the switch for The knee airbag is located on the driver side deactivating the front passenger airbag below the dash panel ››› Fig. 20. Airbags are ››› Fig. 18. About 3/4 of the key should enter; identified by the word “AIRBAG”. this is as far as it will go. Knee airbag* The area framed in red (deployment area) ● Turn the key gently to change its position to ››› Fig. 21 is covered by the knee airbag when  (deactivate) or to  (activate). If you have it is deployed. Objects should never be difficulty, ensure that you have inserted the placed or mounted in this area. key as far as it will go. WARNING ● Close the front passenger door. ● The knee airbag is deployed in front of ● When deactivating the airbag, switch the the driver's knees. Always keep the deploy- ignition on and check that the control lamp ment areas of the knee airbags free.   remains lit where it says      in the central part of the ● Never not fix objects to the cover or in the dashboard ››› Fig. 19. deployment area of the knee airbag. ● Adjust the driver's seat so that there is a ● When reactivating the airbag, check that Fig. 20 On the driver side: location of the knee distance of at least 10 cm (4 inches) be- when the ignition is switched on, the   airbag tween your knees and the location of the control lamp does not light up and the   this airbag. If your physical constitution lamp lights up for 60 seconds and then turns off.

28 Airbag system

prevents you from meeting these require- In a side collision, the side airbags reduce the equipment are fitted inside the door pan- ments, make sure you contact a special- risk of injury to passengers to the areas of the els. body facing the impact. In addition to their ised workshop. ● Occupants of the outer seats must never normal protection, the seat belts also hold carry any objects or pets in the deploy- the passengers in the event of a side collision; ment space between them and the airbags, this is how these airbags provide maximum Side airbags* or allow children or other passengers to protection. travel in this position. It is also important not to attach any accessories (such as cup WARNING holders) to the doors. This would impair the ● If you do not wear a seat belt, if you lean protection offered by the side airbags. forward, or are not seated correctly while ● The built-in coat hooks should be used the vehicle is in motion, you are at a greater only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave risk of injury if the side airbag system is any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the triggered in an accident. pockets. ● In order for the side airbags to provide ● Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks, their maximum protection, the prescribed must not be exerted upon the backrest bol- sitting position must always be maintained ster because the system may be damaged. with seat belts fastened while travelling. In this case, the side airbags would not be ● In a side-on collision the side airbags will triggered. Fig. 22 Side airbag in driver's seat. not work if the sensors do not correctly ● Under no circumstances should protec- measure the pressure increase on the inte- tive covers be fitted over seats with side The side airbags are located in the driver's rior of the doors, due to air escaping airbags unless the covers have been ap- seat and front passenger seat backrests through the areas with holes or openings in proved for use in your vehicle. Because the ››› Fig. 22. the door panel. airbag deploys from the side of the back- ● Never drive if the interior door panels rest, the use of conventional seat covers The locations are identified by the text “AIR- have been removed or if the panels have would obstruct the side airbag, seriously BAG” in the lower region of the backrests. not been correctly fitted. reducing the airbag's effectiveness. In conjunction with the seat belts, the side air- ● Never drive the vehicle if the loudspeak- ● Any damage to the original seat uphols- bags system gives additional protection for ers in the door panels have been removed, tery or around the seams of the side airbag the head and upper body in the event of a unless the holes left by the loudspeakers units must be repaired immediately by a severe side collision and, depending on the have been closed properly. specialised workshop. features, also in the event of the vehicle over- ● Always check that the openings are ● The airbags provide protection for just turning ››› . closed or covered if loudspeakers or other one accident; replace them once they have deployed. » 29 Safety

● Any work on the side airbag system or re- The area framed in red is covered by the ● The built-in coat hooks should be used moval and installation of the airbag com- head-protection airbag when it is deployed only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave ponents for other repairs (such as removal ››› Fig. 23 (deployment area). Therefore, ob- any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the of the front seat) should only be performed jects should never be placed or mounted in pockets. Please, do not hang the clothes on by a specialised workshop. Otherwise, this area ››› . coat hangers. faults may occur during the airbag system In the event of a side collision the head-pro- ● The airbags provide protection for just operation. tection airbag is triggered on the impact side one accident; replace them once they have of the vehicle. deployed. ● Any work on the head-protection airbag The head-protection airbags reduce the risk Head-protection airbags* system or removal and installation of the of injury to passengers in the front and rear airbag components for other repairs (such side seats facing the impact. as removal of the roof lining) should only be performed by a specialised workshop. WARNING Otherwise, faults may occur during the air- ● In order for the head-protection airbags bag system operation. to provide their maximum protection, the ● The side and head airbags are managed prescribed sitting position must always be through sensors located in the interior of maintained with seat belts fastened while the front doors. To ensure the correct oper- travelling. ation of the side and head-protection air- ● For safety reasons, the head-protection bags neither the doors nor the door panels airbag must be disabled in those vehicles should be modified in any way (e.g. fitting fitted with a screen dividing the interior of loudspeakers). If the front door is dam- Fig. 23 Location of head-protection airbags. the vehicle. See your technical service to aged, the airbag system may not work cor- make this adjustment. rectly. All work carried out on the front door The head-protection airbags are located on must be done in a specialised workshop. both sides in the interior above the doors ● There must be no other persons, animals ››› Fig. 23 and are identified with the text “AIR- or objects between the occupants of the BAG”. outer seats and the deployment space of the head-protection airbags so that the In conjunction with the seat belts, the head- head-protection airbag can deploy com- protection airbag system gives the vehicle pletely without restriction and provide the occupants additional protection for the head greatest possible protection. Therefore, and upper body in the event of a severe side sun blinds which have not been expressly collision ››› . approved for use in your vehicle may not be attached to the side windows

30 Transporting children safely

Transporting children tures. This means that children are subject to stalling and using child seats. Always read a greater risk of injury. and note ››› page 32. safely To reduce the risk of injuries, children must al- We recommend you always carry the manu- ways use special child restraint systems facturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual to- Safety for children when travelling in the vehicle. gether with the on-board documentation. We recommend the use of child safety prod- Related video ucts from the SEAT Original Accessories Pro- gramme, which includes systems for all ages Child seats group classification made by “Peke” (not for all countries) (see www.seat.com). These systems have been especially designed and approved, complying with the ECE-R44. regulation. Fig. 24 Vehicle interior SEAT recommends securing the child seats shown on the website as described below:

Introduction ● Child seats in the opposite direction of travel (group 0+): ISOFIX and support peg (RO- MER BABY SAFE PLUS SHR II + ISOFIX BASE / For safety reasons, as we have learned from Fig. 25 Examples of child seats. accident statistics, we recommend that chil- PEKE G0 I-SIZE + I-SIZE BASE). dren under 12 years of age travel in the rear ● Child seats in the direction of travel (group Use only child seats that are officially ap- seats. Depending on their age, height and 1): ISOFIX and Top Tether (ROMER DUO PLUS proved and suitable for the child. weight, children travelling in rear seats must + TOP TETHER / PEKE G1 TRIFIX I-SIZE). Child seats are subject to the regulation ECE- use a child seat or a seat belt. For safety rea- ● Child seats directed towards the front of R 44 or ECE-R 129. ECE-R stands for: Eco- sons, the child seat should be installed in the the vehicle (group 2): safety belt and ISOFIX nomic Commission for Europe Regulation. rear seat, behind the front passenger seat or (ROMER KIDFIX XP). in the centre back seat. ● Child seats directed towards the front of Child seats by weight group The physical laws involved and the forces the vehicle (group 3): safety belt and ISOFIX The child seats are grouped into 5 catego- acting in a collision apply also to children (ROMER KIDFIX XP). ries: » ››› page 18. But unlike adults, children do not have fully developed muscle and bone struc- Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory requirements when in- 31 Safety

Age group Weight of the child (all according to the ECE-R 44 standard) or i- Fitting and using child seats Size (according to the ECE-R 129 standard). Group 0 Up to 10 kg ● Universal: child seats with universal appro- Group 0+ Up to 13 kg val can be installed in all vehicles. There is no Group 1 From 9 to 18 kg need to consult any list of models. In the case of universal approval for ISOFIX, the child Group 2 From 15 to 25 kg seat is additionally provided with a Top Tether belt. Group 3 From 22 to 36 kg ● Semi-universal: semi-universal approval, Child seats that have been tested and ap- in addition to the standard requirements of proved under the ECE-R 44 or ECE-R 129 universal approval, requires safety devices to Fig. 26 Airbag sticker: on the passenger’s sun standard bear the test mark ECE-R 44 or lock the child seat, which require additional visor ECE-R 129 on the seat (the letter E in a circle testing. Child seats with semi-universal ap- with the test number below it). proval include a list of vehicle models for which they can be installed. Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory requirements when in- ● Vehicle-specific: vehicle-specific approval stalling and using child seats. requires a dynamic test of the child seat for each vehicle model separately. Child seats We recommend you to always include the with vehicle-specific approval also include a manufacturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual list of vehicle models for which they can be together with the on-board documentation. installed. SEAT recommends you use child seats from ● i-Size: child seats with i-Size approval must the Original Accessories Catalogue. These meet the requirements prescribed in the ECE- child seats have been designed and tested R 129 standard in relation to installation and for use in SEAT vehicles. You can find the right safety. Child seat manufacturers can tell you Fig. 27 Airbag sticker: on the rear frame of the child seat for your model and age group at which seats have i-Size approval for this vehi- passenger side door SEAT dealers. cle. Warnings about fitting a child seat Child seats by approval category Take the following general warnings into ac- Child seats may have the approval category count if you are going to fit a child seat. They of universal, semi-universal, vehicle specific are valid for all child seats regardless of their attachment system.

32 Transporting children safely

● Please read and follow the child seat man- ● For a correct assembly of the children's fatal injuries. Children up to 12 years old ufacturer's operating instructions. seat on the second row, adjust or dismount should always travel on the rear seat. the headrest, in order to prevent contact with ● The child seat should preferably be fitted to Therefore we strongly recommend you to the chair. the rear seat behind the front passenger seat transport children on the rear seats. This is so that the child can exit the vehicle on the ● When fitting a child seat on the front pas- the safest location in the vehicle. Alternative- pavement side. senger seat, the seat must be moved back- ly, the front passenger airbag can be disa- ● Set the height of the seat belt such that it wards as far as possible and placed in the bled with a key-operated switch ››› page 27. adapts to the child seat naturally, without highest position. The backrest must also be When transporting children, use a child seat 1) twisting. The lowest position of the seat belt put in a vertical position . suitable for the age and size of each child height regulator must be used with rear-fac- ››› page 31. ing child seats. Important information about the front passenger front airbag WARNING ● To correctly use a child seat in the back, the front backrest must be adjusted so that A sticker with important information about the ● If a child seat is secured to the front pas- there is no contact with the child seat in the passenger airbag is located on the passeng- senger seat, the risk to the child of sustain- back in the case that it goes opposite to the er's sun visor and/or on the passenger side ing critical or fatal injuries in the event of an direction of the car. In the case of front facing door frame ››› Fig. 26. accident increases. restraint systems, the front backrest must be Read and always observe the safety informa- ● An inflating front passenger airbag can adjusted so that there is no contact with the tion included in the following chapters: strike the rear-facing child seat and project child's feet. it with great force against the door, the roof or the backrest. ● If a semi-universal type chair is to be instal- ● Safety distance with respect to the passen- led, in which the method of attachment to the ger airbag ››› page 23. ● Never install a child seat facing back- car is through the seat belt and support ● Objects between the passenger and the wards on the front passenger seat unless bracket, it should never be installed in the passenger side airbag ››› in Front airbags the front passenger front airbag has been central rear seat as the ground clearance is on page 27. disabled. Risk of potentially fatal injuries to the child! However, if necessary, the front lower than in other places and the support passenger front airbag must be deactiva- bracket will not allow the seat to remain suffi- The passenger side front airbag, when ena- ted ››› page 27. If the passenger seat has a ciently stable. bled, is a serious risk for a child that is facing backward since the airbag can strike the seat height adjustment option, move it to the with such force that it can cause serious or highest, most upright position. If you have a »

1) Compliance with current national legislation and the manufacturer's instructions is required when using or installing child seats. 33 Safety

fixed seat, do not install any child restraint Attachment systems overview The support bracket prevents the child seat system in this location. ● ISOFIX: ISOFIX is a standardised attach- from tipping forward in the event of impact. Child seats fitted with a support bracket ● For those vehicles that do not include a ment system allowing quick and safe attach- should only be used in the passenger seat key lock switch to deactivate the airbag, ment of child seats in the vehicle. ISOFIX at- the vehicle must be taken to a technical tachment establishes a rigid connection be- and side rear seats ››› . For the assembly of service. Do not forget to reconnect the air- tween the child seat and the car body. this type of seat you should also consult the bag when an adult wants to sit in the front list of approved vehicles for this assembly, passenger seat. The child seat has two rigid attachment clips, available in the instructions for child restraint called connectors. These connectors are fit- systems. ● Never allow a child to be transported in a vehicle without being properly secured, or ted into the ISOFIX attachment rings found to stand up or kneel on a seat while travel- between the seat cushion and the backrest Recommended systems for attaching ling. In an accident, the child could be flung of the vehicle's back seat (on the sides). ISO- child seats through the vehicle, causing possibly fatal FIX attachment systems are used mainly in SEAT recommends attaching child seats as injuries to themselves and to the other vehi- Europe ››› page 35. If necessary, ISOFIX at- follows: cle occupants. tachment may have to be supplemented with ● Never leave a child alone in the child seat a Top Tether belt or a support bracket. ● Baby carriers or child seats in the oppo- or in the vehicle. site direction of travel: ISOFIX and support ● Automatic three-point seat belt. When- bracket or i-Size. ● Children who are less than 1.5 metres tall ever possible, it is preferable to attach the ● must not wear a normal seat belt without a child seats with the ISOFIX system rather than Child seats in the direction of travel: ISO- child seat, as this could cause injuries to attaching them with an automatic three-point FIX and Top Tether. the abdominal and neck areas during a seat belt ››› page 39. sudden braking manoeuvre or in an acci- WARNING dent. Additional attachment: Incorrect use of the support bracket can ● When a child seat is mounted in the rear cause serious or fatal injury. seats, the door child-proof lock should be ● Top Tether: the Top Tether belt is guided ● Make sure the support bracket is correct- activated ››› page 100. over the back of the rear seat and attached to an anchor point with a hook. Anchor points ly and safely installed. are located at the back of the rear seat backrest on the boot side ››› page 38. The rings Attachment systems for retaining the Top Tether belt are marked with an anchor symbol. Depending on the country, different attachment systems are used for safely installing ● Support bracket: some child seats rest on child seats. the floor of the vehicle with a support bracket.

34 Transporting children safely

Securing the child seat with the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether system

Fig. 28 Side seats of the second row: ISOFIX/i- Fig. 29 Front passenger seat: ISOFIX securing Size securing rings. rings.

Child seats can be secured quickly, easily the rings are secured to the seat frame. The hind the seat backrest or in the boot) and safely on the rear side seats of the sec- “ISOFIX” rings are located between the back- ››› Fig. 30. For the front passenger seat, the ond row of seats and the front passenger rest and the seat cushioning of the rear seat ring is below the backrest ››› Fig. 31. seat with the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether system. ››› Fig. 28 and of the front passenger seat To understand the compatibility of the "ISO- ››› Fig. 29. Each of the side rear side seats of the second FIX" systems in the vehicle, consult the table row of seats and the front passenger seat has The Top Tether rings are located on the rear below. two “ISOFIX” fastening rings. In some vehicles, part of the backrests of the rear seats (be-

Vehicle Isofix positions Size Electrical Weight group Front passenger seat Second row of seats: classa) equipment Third row of b) airbag enabled airbag disabled side centre seats

Group 0 to 10 kg E ISO/R1 X IL IL X X

IUF: Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX universal child restraint systems approved for use in this weight group. IL: It is suitable for certain ISOFIX child restraint systems (CRS) that can be for the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal categories. Take the child seat manufacturer's vehicle list into account. X: ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems for this weight group or size class. »

35 Safety

Vehicle Isofix positions Size Electrical Weight group Front passenger seat Second row of seats: classa) equipment Third row of b) airbag enabled airbag disabled side centre seats

E ISO/R1 X IL IL X X

Group 0+ to 13 kg D ISO/R2 X IL IL X X

C ISO/R3 X IL IL X X

D ISO/R2 X IL IL X X

C ISO/R3 X IL IL X X

Group I 9 to 18 kg B ISO/F2 X IL, IUF IL, IUF X X

B1 ISO/F2X X IL, IUF IL, IUF X X

A ISO/F3 X IL, IUF IL, IUF X X

Group II 15 to 25 kg ------X IL IL X X

Group III 22 to 36 kg ------X IL IL X X

a) The indication of class according to size corresponds to the authorised bodyweight for the child seat. In child seats with universal or semi-universal approval, the class according to size is indicated on the ECE approval label. The indication of class according to size is stated on the corresponding child seat. b) Third row not available for all versions.

36 Transporting children safely

Vehicle i-Size positions

Front passenger seat Second row of seats: Third row of airbag ena- airbag disa- a) side centre seats bled bled

i-Size child seats X i-U i-U X X

i-U: Position suitable for front-facing and rear-facing child restraint systems approved under ECE R129. X: Invalid position for child restraint systems approved under ECE R129. a) Third row not available for all versions.

Securing the child seat with the “ISOFIX/i- WARNING Size” system The retaining rings are designed only for You are obliged to follow the seat manufac- use with “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* system turer's instructions. child seats.

● Press the child seat onto the “ISOFIX” re- ● Never secure other child seats that do taining rings ››› Fig. 28 and ››› Fig. 29 until the not have the “ISOFIX” or Top Tether* system, or retaining belts or objects to the fas- child seat is heard to engage securely. If the tening rings - this can result in potentially child seat is equipped with Top Tether anchor fatal injuries to the child. points, secure it to the correspondent ring ››› page 38. Observe the manufacturer's in- ● Ensure that the child seat is secured cor- structions. rectly using the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* securing rings. ● Pull on both sides of the child seat to ensure that it is properly anchored.

Child seats with the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether attachment system are available from Tech- nical Services.

37 Safety

Top Tether* securing belts Using the Top Tether in rear-facing mounted seats Currently, there are very few rear-facing child safety seats that have Top Tether. Please carefully read and follow the seat manufacturer instructions to learn the proper way to install the Top Tether strap.

Securing the retainer strap ● Follow the manufacturer's instructions to deploy the child seat Top Tether retaining strap. ● Position the belt under the headrest ››› Fig. 30  or , ››› Fig. 31  or (depending on the instructions of the seat itself, lift or remove the headrest if necessary). ● Slide the strap and secure it properly with the anchorage of the backrest ››› Fig. 30 , ››› Fig. 31 . Fig. 31 Front passenger seat: adjustment and ● Firmly tighten the strap following the manu- assembly according to the Top Tether belt. facturer's instructions. Fig. 30 Side seats of the second row: adjust- Child seats with the Top Tether system come ment and assembly according to the Top Tether Releasing the retaining strap belt. with a strap for securing the seat to the vehicle anchor point and provide greater re- ● Loosen the strap following the manufactur- straint. er's instructions. The objective of this strap is to reduce for- ● Push the lock and release it from the an- ward movements of the child seat in a crash, choring support. to reduce the risk of injuries to the head from hitting the inside of the vehicle.

38 Transporting children safely

WARNING ● Never tie the retainer strap to a hook in the luggage compartment. An undue installation of the safety seat will increase the risk of injury in the event of a ● Never secure or tie luggage or other crash. items to the lower anchorages (ISOFIX) or the upper ones (Top Tether).

Fitting a child seat using the seat belt

If you want to fit a universal approval catego- cle. You will find any necessary information bel. The following table shows the different ry (U) child seat in your vehicle, you must on the child seat’s orange ECE approval la- fitting options. check that the seat is approved for your vehi-

Seat positions

Weight group Front passenger seata) Second row of seats: Third row of seatsb) airbag enabled airbag disabledc) side centred)

Group 0 to 10 kg X U U U X

Group 0+ to 13 kg X U U U X

Group I 9 to 18 kg X U U U X

Group II 15 to 25 kg X UF UF UF X

Group III 22 to 36 kg X UF UF UF X

X: Not compatible for the installation of seats install chairs in this configuration. U: Suitable for universal restraint systems for use in this weight group. UF: Acceptable for front-facing universal-category child restraint systems approved for this mass group. a) Compliance with current national legislation and the manufacturer's instructions is required when using or installing child seats. b) Third row not available for all versions. c) Seats without height adjustment should be placed in their rearmost position. Seats with height adjustment should be placed in their rearmost and highest position. d) For semi-universal chairs where the securing system is the car safety belt and the support bracket, do not use them in the centre rear seat or the third row. » 39 Safety

Fitting a child seat using the seat belt ● Set the height of the seat belt such that it adapts to the child seat naturally, without twisting. The lowest position of the seat belt height regulator must be used with rear-facing child seats. ● Put the seat belt in place and pass it through the child seat according to the instructions of the child seat manufacturer. ● Make sure that the seat belt is not twisted. ● Insert the latch plate into the seat's buckle until you hear the engagement click.

WARNING When travelling, children must be secured in the vehicle with a restraint system suitable for age, weight and size. ● Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of child seats ››› page 32.

40 Self-help

● It lights up red: System malfunction. The tor may not be available; in this case, the sys- Emergencies voice service is available with some restric- tem will connect to a network with a good tions. SEAT suggests going to a specialised enough signal to make the emergency phone Self-help workshop. call. ● It lights up green: The voice service is avail- ● In some countries, the emergency phone Emergency call service* able. The system works correctly. call service may not be available. ● Flashes green: There is an ongoing voice ● The components of the vehicle required for connection. the emergency phone call are damaged or How it works do not get enough power.  Emergency call service ● If an emergency call is conducted manually or activated automatically in the event of Emergency equipment an accident with an airbag triggering, information relevant to the emergency is broadcast, e.g. the current location of the vehicle Vehicle tool kit ››› page 384. Fig. 32 On the roof console: control for the ● The person on the phone will always speak emergency call service the local language of the country. Press the  ››› Fig. 32 button on the top cen- Emergency number 112 tre console to start the “Emergency call” service. The call is made directly to the 112 emergency number of the country. A built-in control unit establishes the connection. When a voice service is activated, a con- The following conditions may cause limited nection is established with a phone line. functionality of the emergency call service:

● The emergency call is made from an area Fig. 33 Underneath the floor panel of the lug- Control lamp with weak or no mobile and GPS signal, as gage compartment: vehicle tool kit. The control has a warning lamp ››› Fig. 32 well as e.g. tunnels, between very tall build- (arrow). It shows the following statuses: ings, garages, underground walkways, moun- The vehicle tool kit is located under the floor tains and valleys. panel in the luggage compartment. To ac- ● Off: The voice service is disabled. cess the vehicle tools ››› page 135. ● In areas with sufficient mobile and GPS signal, the mobile phone network of the opera- The tool kit includes: » 41 Emergencies

1 Adapter for the anti-theft bolt* Note ● If you have been driving with very low pressure or a completely flat tyre. 2 Towing eye, removable The jack does not generally require any ● 3 Wheel spanner* maintenance. If required, it should be If the sealant bottle has passed its use by greased using universal type grease. date. 4 Crank handle for jack 5 Jack* WARNING 6 Hook for extracting the central wheel Using the tyre mobility system can be dan- trims* Tyre repairs gerous, especially when filling the tyre at 7 Clip for removing the wheel bolt caps the roadside. Please observe the following TMS (Tyre Mobility System)* rules to minimise the risk of injury: 8 Screwdriver with hexagon socket in the handle for screwing and unscrewing the ● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi- The Anti-puncture kit* (Tyre Mobility System) ble. Park it at a safe distance from sur- wheel nuts will reliably seal punctures caused by the rounding traffic to fill the tyre. Some of the items listed are only provided in penetration of a foreign body of up to about ● Ensure the ground on which you park is certain model versions, or are optional extras. 4 mm in diameter. Do not remove foreign flat and solid. objects, e.g. screws or nails, from the tyre. ● All passengers and particularly children WARNING After inserting the sealant residue in the tyre, must keep a safe distance from the work When the vehicle tool kit, tyre mobility set you must again check the tyre pressure area. and spare wheel are loose in the interior about 10 minutes after starting the engine. ● Turn on the hazard warning lights to warn they can be violently thrown in case of a other road users. You should only use the tyre mobility set if the sudden manoeuvre or braking and espe- vehicle is parked in a safe place, you are fa- ● Use the tyre mobility system only if you cially in accidents, causing serious injury. miliar with the procedure and you have the are familiar with the necessary procedures. ● Ensure that the vehicle tool kit, the tyre necessary tyre mobility set! Otherwise, you Otherwise, you should seek professional mobility set and the spare wheel or tempo- should seek professional assistance. assistance. rary spare wheel are safely secured in the ● The tyre mobility set is intended for tem- luggage compartment. Do not use the tyre sealant in the following porary emergency use only until you can cases: reach the nearest specialised workshop. WARNING ● Replace the repaired tyre with the tyre ● If the wheel rim has been damaged. Unsuitable or damaged vehicle tools can mobility set as soon as possible. ● In outside temperatures below -20°C cause injury or accidents. ● The sealant is a health hazard and must (-4°F). ● Never work with inappropriate or dam- be cleaned immediately if it comes into aged tools. ● In the event of cuts or perforations in the contact with the skin. tyre greater than 4 mm. 42 Self-help

● Always keep the tyre mobility set out of Note 3 Filler tube with cap the reach of small children. Take into account the separate instruction 4 Air compressor ● Always stop the engine, apply the elec- manual of the tyre mobility set* manufac- 5 ON/OFF switch tronic parking brake and put it in gear when turer. 6 Air bleed screw (it can also be integrated using a manual gearbox, in order to reduce in the inflator tube). the risk of involuntary movement of the vehicle . 7 Warning provided by tyre pressure moni- Anti-puncture kit contents* toring system (it can also be integrated in WARNING the inflator tube). 8 Tube for inflating tyres A tyre filled with sealant does not have the same performance properties as a conven- 9 12 volt connector tional tyre. 10 Bottle of sealant ● Never drive faster than 80 km/h 11 Spare tyre valve (50 mph). ● Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking The valve insert remover 1 has a gap at and fast cornering. the lower end for a valve insert. The valve insert can only be screwed or unscrewed in this ● Drive for only 10 minutes at a maximum speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and then check way. This also applies to its replacement part the tyre. 11 .

For the sake of the environment Fig. 34 Standard representation: anti-puncture kit contents. Sealing and inflating a tyre Dispose of used or expired sealant observing any legal requirements. The anti-puncture kit is located underneath Sealing the tyre the floor covering in the luggage compart- ● Unscrew the tyre valve cap and insert. Use Note ment. It includes the following components the ››› Fig. 34 1 tool to remove the insert. A new bottle of sealant can be purchased ››› Fig. 34: Place it on a clean surface. at SEAT dealerships. 1 Valve insert remover ● Shake the tyre sealant bottle vigorously ››› Fig. 34 10 . 2 A sticker to be adhered to the instrument cluster, within the driver's visual field, to ● Screw the inflator tube ››› Fig. 34 3 into remind that the maximum advisable the sealant bottle. The bottle's seal will break speed “max. 80 km/h” or “max. 50 mph” automatically. » 43 Emergencies

● Remove the lid from the filling tube ● If the indicated pressure still cannot be CAUTION ››› Fig. 34 3 and screw the open end of the reached, the tyre is too badly damaged. Stop tube into the tyre valve. and request assistance from an authorised Switch off the air compressor after a maximum of 8 operational minutes to avoid technician. ● With the bottle upside down, empty all of overheating! Before switching on the air the contents into the tyre. ● Disconnect the air compressor. Unscrew compressor again, let it cool for several mi- ● Remove the bottle from the valve. the tyre inflator tube from the tyre valve. nutes. ● Place the insert back into the tyre valve us- ● When the tyre pressure is between 2.5 and ing the tool ››› Fig. 34 1 . 2.0 bars, continue driving without exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph). Check after 10 minutes of driving Inflating the tyre ● Attach the sticker ››› Fig. 34 2 to the instrument cluster, within the driver's visual Screw the inflator tube ››› Fig. 34 5 again ● Screw the compressor tyre inflator tube field. and check the pressure on the gauge 6 . ››› Fig. 34 8 into the tyre valve. ● Check the pressure again after 10 minutes ● Check that the air bleed screw is closed ››› page 44. 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower: ››› Fig. 34 6 . ● Stop the vehicle! The tyre cannot be ● Start the engine and leave it running. WARNING sealed sufficiently with the tyre mobility set. ● Insert the connector ››› Fig. 34 9 into the When inflating the wheel, the air compres- ● You should obtain professional assistance vehicle's 12-volt socket ››› page 150. sor and the inflator tube may become hot. ››› . ● Turn the air compressor on with the ● Protect hands and skin from hot parts. ON/OFF switch ››› Fig. 34 5 . 1.4 bar (20 psi / 140 kPa) and higher: ● Do not place the hot flexible inflator tube ● Keep the air compressor running until it rea- or hot air compressor on flammable mate- ● Set the tyre pressure to the correct value ches 2.0 to 2.5 bar (29-36 psi/200-250 kPa). rial. again. A maximum of 8 minutes. ● Allow them to cool before storing the de- ● Carefully resume your journey until you ● Disconnect the air compressor. vice. reach the nearest specialised workshop with- ● If it does not reach the pressure indicated, ● If it is not possible to inflate the tyre to at out exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph). unscrew the tyre inflator tube from the valve. least 2.0 bars (29 psi / 200 kPa), the tyre is ● Have the damaged tyre replaced. too badly damaged. The sealant is not in a ● Move the vehicle 10m so that the sealant is good condition to seal the tyre. Do not con- distributed throughout the tyre. WARNING tinue driving. Seek specialist assistance. ● Screw the compressor tyre inflator into the Driving with an unsealed tyre is dangerous valve. and can cause accidents and serious injury. ● Repeat the inflation process. 44 Self-help

● Do not continue driving if the tyre pres- ● Have the vehicle tool kit ››› page 41 and the Removal sure is 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower. spare wheel* ready ››› page 371. ● Fit the plastic clip (vehicle tools ››› Fig. 33) ● Seek specialist assistance. ● Observe the applicable legislation for each over the cap until it clicks into place country (reflective vest, warning triangles, ››› Fig. 36. etc.). ● Remove the cap with the plastic clip. ● All occupants should leave the vehicle and Changing a wheel wait in a safe place (for instance behind the The caps protect the wheel nuts and should roadside crash barrier). be remounted after changing the tyre. Related video The anti-theft wheel locking bolt has a WARNING special cap. This only fits on anti-theft locking ● Always observe the above steps and pro- bolts and is not for use with standard wheel tect yourself and other road users. nuts. ● If you change the wheel on a slope, block the wheel on the opposite side of the car with a stone or similar to prevent the vehi- Anti-theft wheel nuts Fig. 35 Wheels cle from moving.

What to do first Wheel bolt caps*

● Park the vehicle on a horizontal surface and in a safe place as far away from traffic as possible. ● Apply the electronic parking brake. ● Switch on the hazard warning lights. ● Manual transmission: select the 1st gear. Fig. 37 Anti-theft wheel bolt with cap and adapter. ● Automatic transmission: Move the selector lever to position P. Loosening the anti-theft wheel bolt ● If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it from ● Remove the wheel cover* or the cap*. » your vehicle. Fig. 36 Wheel: wheel nuts with caps.

45 Emergencies

● Insert the special adapter ››› Fig. 37 1 (ve- Important information about wheel nuts hicle tools ››› page 41) onto the anti-theft Factory-fitted rims and wheel nuts are spe- wheel bolt and push it on as far as it will go. cially matched during construction. There- ● Insert the wheel brace (vehicle tools) onto fore, if different rims are fitted, the correct the adapter as far as it will go. wheel nuts with the right length and heads ● Remove the wheel bolt ››› page 46. must be used. This ensures that wheels are fitted securely and that the brake system Note functions correctly. Make a note of the code number of the an- In certain circumstances, you should not even ti-theft wheel bolt and keep it in a safe use wheel nuts from vehicles of the same Fig. 39 Wheel change: tyre valve 1 and the place, but not in your vehicle. If you need a model. correct position for the anti-theft wheel locking new adapter, you can obtain it from the bolt 2 or 3 . In wheels with full hubcaps, the anti-theft SEAT Official Service, indicating the code locking bolt must be threaded onto positions number. Use only the wheel wrench belonging to the ››› Fig. 39 2 or 3 , taking the tyre valve’s po- car to loosen the wheel nuts. sition as reference 1 . Otherwise it will not be Loosen the wheel nuts only about one turn possible to mount the hubcap. Loosening wheel nuts before raising the vehicle with the jack. WARNING If the wheel bolt is very tight, carefully push on the end of the wheel wrench with your If the wheel nuts are not properly tight- foot. Hold on to the vehicle for support and ened, they could come loose while driving and cause an accident, serious injury and take care not to slip during this operation. loss of vehicle control. Loosening wheel nuts ● Use only wheel nuts which correspond to the rim in question. ● Fit the wheel wrench on as far as it will go ● Never use different wheel nuts. ››› Fig. 38. ● Wheel nuts and threads should be clean, ● Hold the wrench at the end and rotate the free of oil and grease, and it should be pos- bolt approximately one turn anticlock- sible to screw them easily. Fig. 38 Wheel change: loosen the wheel nuts. wise ››› . ● To loosen and tighten wheel nuts, only use the wheel wrench that came with the car from the factory.

46 Self-help

● The wheel nuts should only be loosened WARNING slightly (about one turn) before raising the The factory-supplied jack* is only de- vehicle with the jack. Risk of accident! signed for changing wheels on this model. ● Never apply grease or oil to wheel nuts or On no account attempt to use it for lifting to the wheel hub threads. Even if the bolts heavier vehicles or other loads. Risk of in- have been tightened to the prescribed tor- jury. que, they could come loose while driving. ● Make sure that the jack* remains stable. ● Never loosen the screwed joints of wheel If the surface is slippery or soft, the jack* rims with bolted ring trims. could slip or sink, respectively, with the re- ● If wheel nuts are tightened below the sultant risk of injury. Fig. 41 Cross member: positioning the jack on prescribed torque, the bolts and rims could ● Only raise the vehicle with the jack* sup- the vehicle. come loose while driving. If tightening tor- plied by the manufacturer. Other jacks, que is too high, the wheel nuts or threads even those approved for other SEAT mod- ● Place the jack* (vehicle tools) on firm can be damaged. els could slip, with the consequent risk of ground. If necessary use a large, strong injury. board or similar support. If the surface is slippery (for example tiles) place the jack on a ● Only mount the jack* on the support points designed for this purpose on the Raise the vehicle rubber mat or similar to prevent it from slip- strut, and always align the jack correctly. If ping ››› . you do not, the jack* could slip as it does ● Find the support point on the strut (sunken not have an adequate grip on the vehicle: area) closest to the wheel to be changed risk of injury! ››› Fig. 40. ● You should never place a body limb such ● Turn the jack* crank handle, located below as an arm or leg under a raised vehicle that the strut support point, to raise it until the is solely supported by the jack. tab 1 ››› Fig. 41 is below the housing provi- ● If you have to work underneath the vehi- ded. cle, you must use suitable stands addition- ● Align the jack* so that tab 1 “grips” onto ally to support the vehicle, there is a risk of the housing provided on the strut and the mo- accident!. Fig. 40 Jack position points. bile base 2 is resting on the ground. The ● Never raise the vehicle if it is tilting to one base plate 2 should fall vertically with re- side or the engine is running. spect to the support point 1 . ● Never start the engine when the vehicle is ● Continue turning the jack* until the wheel is raised. The vehicle may come loose from slightly lifted off the ground. the jack due to the engine vibrations. » 47 Emergencies

CAUTION Taking off the wheel Tightening torque of the wheel nuts The vehicle must not be raised on the ● Using the hexagonal socket in the wheel The recommended tightening torque for crossbar. Only place the jack* on the brace ››› Fig. 42, unscrew the slackened wheel nuts for steel and alloy wheels is points designed for this purpose on the wheel nuts and place them on a clean sur- 140 Nm. After changing a wheel, have the strut. Otherwise, the vehicle may be dam- face. tightening torque checked immediately with a aged. ● Unscrew the wheel nuts using the box torque wrench that is working perfectly. spanner and place them on a clean surface. Before checking tightening torque, have any ● Take off the wheel. rusty wheel nuts that are difficult to screw re- Removing and installing a wheel placed and clean the wheel hub threads. Putting on the spare wheel Never apply grease or oil to wheel nuts or to Check the direction of rotation of the tyre the wheel hub threads. Even if the bolts have ››› page 48. been tightened to the prescribed torque, they could come loose while driving. ● Place the spare wheel or temporary spare wheel into position. WARNING ● Replace the wheel nuts and tighten slightly The hexagonal socket in the wheel brace using the hexagonal socket on the end of the should be used for turning wheel nuts only. wheel brace. Do not use it to loosen or tighten the wheel ● To tighten the anti-theft locking wheel nuts nuts. use the corresponding adaptor. Fig. 42 Wheel change: loosen wheel nuts with the socket in the handle of the screwdriver. ● Carefully lower the vehicle using the jack*. ● Use the wheel spanner to tighten all of the Tyres with directional tread pattern Change the wheel after loosening the wheel wheel nuts clockwise. Tighten the bolts in di- nuts and raising the vehicle with the jack. Tyres with directional tread pattern have agonal pairs (not in a circle). been designed to operate best when rotating When removing/fitting the wheel, the rim may ● Fit the wheel caps ››› page 45. in only one direction. An arrow on the tyre hit and damage the brake disc. For this rea- sidewall indicates the direction of rotation on son, please take care and get a second per- The wheel nuts should be clean and turn tyres with directional tread. Always observe son to assist you. easily. Before fitting the spare wheel, inspect the indicated direction of rotation in order to the wheel condition and hub mounting surfa- guarantee optimum grip and help avoid ces. These surfaces must be clean before fit- aquaplaning, excessive noise and wear. ting the wheel.

48 Self-help

If the tyre is mounted in the opposite direction Changing the windscreen Note of rotation, drive with extreme caution, as the tyre is no longer being used correctly. This is wiper blades ● The windscreen wiper arms can be moved to the service position only when of particular importance when the road sur- the bonnet is properly closed. face is wet. Change the tyre as soon as pos- Wiper service position sible or remount it with the correct direction ● You can also use the service position, for of rotation. example, if you want to fix a cover over the windscreen in the winter to keep it clear of ice. Works after changing a wheel

● Alloy wheels: replace the wheel bolt caps. ● Plate wheels: replace the wheel hubcap . ● Return all tools to their proper storing location. ● If the replaced wheel does not fit in the Fig. 43 Wipers in service position. spare wheel housing, store it safely in the luggage compartment ››› page 134. Ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen. ● Check the tyre pressure of the newly moun- The wiper arms can be raised when the wip- ted tyre as soon as possible. ers are in service position ››› Fig. 43. ● In vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure indicator, adjust the pressure and store it in memory ● Close the bonnet ››› page 349. ››› page 369. ● Switch the ignition on and off. ● Have the tightening torque of the wheel ● Press the windscreen wiper lever down- nuts checked as soon as possible with a tor- wards briefly ››› page 118 4 . que wrench ››› page 48. Meanwhile, drive carefully. Before driving, always lower the wiper arms. Using the windscreen wiper lever, the wind- ● Have the flat tyre replaced as quickly as screen wiper arms return to their initial posi- possible. tion.

49 Emergencies

Changing the wiper rear wiper the water as it is wiped across the windscreen Changing the windscreen wiper blades blades will be louder. ● Lift and unfold the wiper arms. Check the condition of the wiper blades reg- ● Press and hold release button ››› Fig. 44 1 ularly. If the wipers scrape across the and pull gently on the wiper blade in the di- glass, they should be changed if they are rection of the arrow. damaged, or cleaned if they are dirty ››› . ● Fit a new wiper blade of the same length If this does not produce the desired results, and design on to the wiper arm and hook it the setting angle of the windscreen wiper into place. arms might be incorrect. They should be ● Rest the wiper arms back onto the wind- checked by a specialised workshop and cor- screen. rected if necessary. Damaged windscreen wiper blades should Changing the rear wiper blade Fig. 44 Changing the windscreen wiper be replaced immediately. These are availa- ● Lift and fold the wiper arm. blades ble from qualified workshops. ● Turn the blade slightly ››› Fig. 45 (arrow A ). Raising and lowering windscreen wiper ● Hold down the release button 1 while gen- arms tly pulling the blade in the direction of arrow B . ● Place the windscreen wipers in the service position ››› page 49. ● Insert a new blade of the same length and type in the rear wiper arm in the opposite di- ● Grip the wiper arms only by the blade's rection to the arrow B and hook into place fastening point. button 1 . ● Cleaning windscreen wiper blades Replace the wiper arm on the rear window. ● Raise the wiper arms. WARNING Fig. 45 Changing the rear wiper blade ● Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt Worn or dirty windscreen wiper blades re- from the windscreen wiper blades. duce visibility and increase the risk of acci- The windscreen wiper blades are supplied as ● If the blades are very dirty, a sponge or dent and serious injury. standard with a layer of graphite. This layer is damp cloth may be used ››› . ● responsible for ensuring that the wipe is silent. Always replace damaged or worn windscreen wiper blades or blades that no lon- If the graphite layer is damaged, the noise of ger clean the windscreen properly.

50 Self-help

CAUTION If the engine fails to start because of a discharged battery, the battery can be connec- ● Damaged or dirty windscreen wipers ted to the battery of another vehicle to start could scratch the glass. the engine. ● If products containing solvents, rough sponges or sharp objects are used to clean Jump leads must comply with standard DIN the blades, the graphite layer will be dam- 72553 (see cable manufacturer's instruc- aged. tions). The wire cross section must be at least 25 mm2 for petrol engines and at least ● Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint 2 thinner or similar products to clean the win- 35 mm for diesel engines. dows. Note Fig. 47 Diagram of connections for vehicles ● In icy conditions, always check that the with Start Stop system wiper blades are not frozen to the glass be- ● The vehicles must not touch each other, fore using the wipers. In cold weather, it otherwise electricity could flow as soon as Jump lead terminal connections may help to leave the vehicle parked with the positive terminals are connected. 1. Switch off the ignition of both vehicles the wipers in service position ››› page 49. ● The discharged battery must be properly . connected to the on-board network. ››› CAUTION 2. Connect one end of the red jump lead to the positive + terminal of the vehicle ● To prevent damage to the bonnet and the with the flat battery A ››› Fig. 46. wiper arms, only leave them in the service Jump start: description position. 3. Connect the other end of the red jump lead to the positive terminal + in the ve- ● Before driving, always lower the wiper hicle providing assistance B . arms. 4a. In vehicles without a Start-Stop system: connect one end of the black jump lead to the negative terminal – of the vehicle Jump start providing the current B ››› Fig. 46. 4b. In vehicles with a Start-stop system: Jump leads connect one end of the black jump lead X to a suitable ground terminal, to a sol- The jump lead must have a sufficient wire id piece of metal in the engine block, or cross section. Fig. 46 Diagram of connections for vehicles to the engine block itself ››› Fig. 47. » without Start Stop system

51 Emergencies

5. Connect the other end of the black jump Make sure the battery clamps have sufficient ● Never attach the negative cable to fuel lead X to a solid metal component bol- metal-to-metal contact with the battery ter- system components or the brake lines in ted to the engine block or to the engine minals. the other vehicle. block itself of the vehicle with the flat If the engine fails to start after about 10 sec- ● The non-insulated parts of the battery battery. Do not connect it to a point near onds, switch off the starter and try again after clamps must not be allowed to touch. The the battery A . about 1 minute. jump lead attached to the positive battery 6. Position the leads in such a way that terminal must not touch metal parts of the they cannot come into contact with any WARNING vehicle, this can cause a short circuit. moving parts in the engine compart- ● Position the leads in such a way that they ● Please note the safety warnings referring ment. cannot come into contact with any moving to working in the engine compartment parts in the engine compartment. ››› page 349. Starting ● Do not lean on the batteries. This could ● The battery providing assistance must result in chemical burns. 7. Start the engine of the vehicle with the have the same voltage as the flat battery boosting battery and let it run at idling (12V) and approximately the same capaci- speed. ty (see imprint on battery). Failure to com- Note ply could result in an explosion. 8. Start the engine of the vehicle with the The vehicles must not touch each other, flat battery and wait for 2 or 3 minutes ● Never use jump leads when one of the otherwise electricity could flow as soon as until the engine is running. batteries is frozen. Danger of explosion! the positive terminals are connected. Even after the battery has thawed, battery Removing the jump leads acid could leak and cause chemical burns. If a battery freezes, it should be replaced. 9. Before you remove the jump leads, ● Keep sparks, flames and lighted ciga- switch off the dipped beam headlights if Tow start and towing rettes away from batteries, danger of ex- they are switched on. plosion. Failure to comply could result in an Introduction 10. Turn on the heater blower and heated explosion. rear window in the vehicle with the flat ● Observe the instructions provided by the Tow-starting means starting the engine of battery. This helps minimise voltage manufacturer of the jump leads. the vehicle while another pulls it. peaks which are generated when the ● Do not connect the negative cable from leads are disconnected. Towing means one vehicle pulling another the other vehicle directly to the negative that is not roadworthy. 11. When the engine is running, disconnect terminal of the flat battery. The gas emit- the leads in reverse order to the details ted from the battery could be ignited by Always consider the legal provisions relating given above. sparks. Danger of explosion. to tow-starting and towing.

52 Self-help

For technical reasons, towing a vehicle WARNING Instructions for tow-starting with a discharged battery is not allowed. Vehicle handling and braking capacity The jump start should be used instead Vehicle's should not generally be tow- change considerably during towing. Please ››› page 51. started. The jump start should be used in- observe the following instructions to mini- stead page 51. If the vehicle comes with the Keyless Access mise the risk of serious accidents and in- ››› system, towing is only allowed with the igni- jury: For technical reasons, towing the following tion on! ● As the driver of the vehicle being towed: vehicles is not allowed:

The vehicle battery drains if the vehicle is – You should depress the brake much ● Vehicles with an automatic gearbox. towed with the engine switched off and the harder as the brake servo does not op- ● If the vehicle battery is discharged, be- ignition connected. Depending on the battery erate. Pay the utmost attention to avoid cause in vehicles with the Keyless Access charge status, the drop in voltage may be so crashing into the towing vehicle. locking and ignition system the steering re- large, even after just a few minutes, that no – More strength is required at the steer- mains locked and the electronic parking electrical device in the vehicle may work e.g. ing wheel as the power steering does brake cannot be deactivated nor can the the hazard warning lights. In vehicles with the not operate when the engine is switch- electronic lock of the steering column be re- Keyless Access system, the steering wheel ed off. leased if they are activated. could lock ››› . ● As the driver of the towing vehicle: ● If the battery is flat, it is possible that the – Accelerate with particular care and engine control units may not operate correct- WARNING caution. ly. A vehicle with no power should never be – Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres. towed. – Brake earlier than usual and more However, if the vehicle must absolutely be ● During towing, never switch off the igni- smoothly. tow-started (in the case of manual gear- tion with the starter button. Otherwise, the boxes): electronic lock of the steering column could suddenly get blocked and it would be CAUTION ● Engage the 2nd or 3rd gear. impossible to steer the vehicle. This could ● To avoid damaging the vehicle, for exam- ● Keep the clutch pressed down. cause an accident, serious injury and loss ple the paint, remove and replace the lid ● Switch on the ignition and the hazard warn- of control of the vehicle. and towing eye carefully. ing lights of both vehicles. ● If during towing the vehicle runs out of ● Unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic power, stop towing immediately and re- converter and damage it during towing. ● Once both vehicles are moving, release the quest the assistance of specialist person- clutch. nel. ● Once the engine starts, press the clutch and disengage the gear to avoid colliding with the towing vehicle. » 53 Emergencies

CAUTION During towing, the towing vehicle can signal Tow rope or tow bar the change of direction even with the hazard It is safer for the vehicle to be towed using a ● When tow-starting, unburnt fuel could warning lights turned on. To do so, at the enter the catalytic converter and damage tow bar, avoiding damage to the vehicle. A same time, the turn signal lever must be oper- it. tow rope should only be used if a tow bar is ated with ignition switched on. Meanwhile, the not available. ● Do not tow a vehicle for more than 50 m hazard warning lights will go off. When the in attempt to start it. There is risk of dam- turn signal lever is returned to the rest posi- A tow rope should be slightly elastic to avoid age to the catalytic converter. tion, the hazard warning lights will be auto- damage to both vehicles. It is advisable to matically reactivated. use a tow rope made of synthetic fibre or sim- Note ilarly elastic material. The vehicle can only be tow-started if the Notes for the driver of the towed vehicle Only attach the tow rope or the tow bar to electronic parking brake and, if appropri- ● Leave the ignition on, so that the steering is the towing eyes provided or a towing bracket. ate, the electronic lock of the steering col- not blocked, and the electronic parking brake If the vehicle has a factory-fitted towing de- umn are deactivated. If the vehicle has no may be deactivated and the turn signals and vice, towing with a tow bar is only permitted power supply or there is an electric system wash/wipe operated. fault, the engine must be tow-started to de- if it has been specially designed to be instal- ● activate the electronic parking brake and More strength is required at the steering led on a tow hitch ››› page 332. the electronic lock of the steering column. wheel as the power steering does not operate when the engine is switched off. When the vehicle has to be towed: ● You should depress the brake much harder Check whether the vehicle may be towed Towing instructions as the brake servo does not operate. Avoid ››› page 55, Cases where towing the ve- hitting the towing vehicle. hicle is not permitted. ● Towing requires some expertise and experi- Bear in mind the information and instruc- The vehicle can be towed using a tow bar or ence, especially when using a tow rope. Both tions in the manual of the vehicle to be towed. tow rope in the normal way, with all four drivers should be familiar with the difficulties wheels on the road; it can also be towed with involved in towing. For this reason, inexper- Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle either the front or rear wheels lifted off the ienced drivers should abstain from towing. ● Accelerate with particular care and cau- road. During towing, it should be ensured that no tion. Avoid sharp manoeuvres. ● Switch the ignition on. impermissible tractive forces or shocks are ● Brake earlier than usual and smoothly. generated. When towing on an unpaved ● Put the gearbox lever in neutral or the se- ● Bear in mind the information and instruc- road, there is always a risk of overloading and lector lever in the N ››› page 253 position. tions in the manual of the towed vehicle. damaging the anchorage points. ● Do not allow the vehicle to be towed at speeds of over 50 km/h (30 mph).

54 Self-help

● The vehicle must not be towed further than ● Keep in mind the instructions in the manual Front towline anchorage 50 km (30 miles). on towing vehicles. ● If a breakdown lorry is used, vehicles with automatic transmission are only allowed to CAUTION be towed with the front wheels suspended. If there is no oil in the gearbox or no lubri- cant in the automatic transmission the car Towing vehicles with four-wheel drive may only be towed with the driven wheels (4Drive) lifted clear of the road, or transported on a special car transporter or trailer. Four-wheel drive vehicles (4Drive) can be towed using a tow bar or tow rope. If the vehicle is towed with the front or rear axle sus- Note pended, the engine must be switched off, The vehicle can only be towed if the elec- otherwise the transmission may be damaged. tronic parking brake and the electronic Fig. 48 On the right side of the front bumper: remove the cover. lock of the steering column are deactiva- Cases where towing the vehicle is not per- ted. If the vehicle has no power supply or mitted there is an electric system fault, the engine must be tow-started ››› page 51 to deacti- ● If, due to a fault, the gearbox is out of lubri- vate the electronic parking brake and the cant. electronic lock of the steering column. ● If the vehicle battery is discharged, because the steering remains locked and, if appropriate, the electronic parking brake cannot be deactivated or the electronic lock of the steering column released. ● If a distance above 50 km needs to be travelled. Fig. 49 On the right side of the front bumper: towline anchorage in position. ● When, for example, after an accident, the smooth rotation of the wheels or the steering The housing of the removable towline an- operation cannot be guaranteed. chorage is on the right side of the front bumper underneath a cover ››› Fig. 48. When the vehicle is to tow another vehicle: The towing eye should always be kept in the ● Observe legal requirements. vehicle. »

55 Emergencies

Bear in mind the instructions for towing Rear towline anchorage screw towing eye behind the lid. In this case, ››› page 54. the tow hitch needs to be extracted or installed and used for towing ››› page 332, ››› . Fitting the towline anchorage Bear in mind the instructions for towing ● Remove the towing eye from the vehicle ››› page 54. tool kit in the luggage compartment ››› page 41. Assemble the rear towing eye (cars with- ● Remove the cover by pressing down on its out a factory-equipped towing bracket) base and leave it hanging from the vehicle ● Remove the towing eye from the vehicle ››› Fig. 48. tool kit in the luggage compartment ● Screw the towing eye in the housing by ››› page 41. turning it as far as it will go anticlock- Fig. 50 On the right side of the rear bumper: ● Press the bottom side of the lid ››› Fig. 50 to wise ››› Fig. 49 ››› . Use a suitable object remove the cover. unclip it. that can completely and securely tighten the ● Remove the lid and let it hang from the ve- towing eye in its housing. hicle. ● After towing, unscrew the towing eye ● Screw the towline anchorage into the hous- clockwise with a suitable object. ing by turning it as far as it will go anticlock- ● Insert the upper flange of the lid into the wise ››› Fig. 51››› . Use a suitable object that opening of the bumper and press the lower can completely and securely tighten the tow- side of the lid until it is inserted into the bump- ing eye in its housing. er. ● After towing, unscrew the towing eye ● Clean the towing eye if necessary and then clockwise with a suitable object. store it in the luggage compartment along ● Insert the upper flange of the lid into the with the other vehicle tools. Fig. 51 On the right side of the rear bumper: opening of the bumper and press the lower towline anchorage in position. side of the lid until the upper flange is inserted CAUTION into the bumper. The towing eye must always be completely The housing of the screw towing eye is on the ● Clean the towing eye if necessary and then and firmly tightened. Otherwise, it could be right side of the rear bumper behind a lid store it in the luggage compartment along released while towing and tow-starting. ››› Fig. 50. with the other vehicle tools. Vehicles equipped as standard with a towing bracket do not have any housing for the

56 Fuses and bulbs

CAUTION Fuses and bulbs perage (same colour and markings) and size. ● The towing eye must always be completely and firmly tightened. Otherwise, it Fuses ● Never replace a fuse by a metal strip, sta- could be released while towing and tow- ple or similar. starting. Introduction ● If the vehicle is factory-equipped with a CAUTION towing bracket, it is only allowed to tow In general, a fuse can be assigned to various ● To prevent damage to the vehicle's elec- with a tow bar if this has been specially de- tric system, before replacing a fuse always signed to be installed with a tow hitch. If an electrical components. Likewise, an electrical turn off the ignition, the lights and all elec- unsuitable tow bar is used, both the tow component can be protected by several trical elements and remove the key from hitch and the vehicle may be damaged. In- fuses. the ignition. stead, a tow rope should be used. Only replace fuses when the cause of the ● Protect the fuse boxes when open to pre- problem has been solved. If a newly inserted vent the entry of dust or humidity as they fuse blows after a short time, you must have can damage the electrical system. the electrical system checked by a specialised workshop as soon as possible. Note WARNING ● One component may have more than one The high voltages in the electrical system fuse. can give serious electrical shocks, causing ● Several components may run on a single burns and even death! fuse. ● Never touch the electrical wiring of the ● In the vehicle, there are more fuses than ignition system. those indicated in this chapter. ● Take care not to cause short circuits in the electrical system.

WARNING Using unsuitable fuses, repairing fuses or bridging a current circuit without fuses can cause a fire and serious injury. ● Never use a fuse with a higher value. Only replace fuses with a fuse of the same am-

57 Emergencies

Fuses inside the vehicle Opening and closing the fuse box situated against the resistance of the end axes below the dash panel (left-hand steering ››› Fig. 53 2 . wheel) ● Open the storage compartment on the Identifying fuses below below the dash- driver side ››› Fig. 52. board by colours ● In this case, empty the storage compart- Colour Amp rating ment. Black 1 ● Press the locking lid ››› Fig. 52 1 upwards, in the direction of the arrow, and at the same Purple 3 time open the storage compartment even Light brown 5 more and remove it until the fuse box is ac- cessible. Brown 7.5 Fig. 52 On the dashboard on the driver's side (left-hand drive): fuse box cover. ● To attach the storage compartment, insert Red 10 it in the openings of the dashboard and press it until you hear it click on both sides. Close it. Blue 15 Yellow 20 Fuses behind the glove compartment (right-hand steering wheel) White or transparent 25 ● Open the glove compartment and, if nec- Green 30 essary, empty it. Orange 40 ● Move the braking element ››› Fig. 53 1 into the support hole facing downwards and re- CAUTION move it to one side. ● Always carefully remove the fuse box ● Press the end axes Fig. 53 2 upwards, in ››› covers and refit them correctly to avoid the direction of the arrows, and at the same problems with your vehicle. Fig. 53 glove compartment (right hand drive): time open the glove compartment even more. fuse box access. ● Protect the fuse boxes when open to ● To mount the glove compartment, place it avoid the entry of dust or humidity. Dirt and in the correct position. Insert the braking ele- humidity inside fuse boxes can cause dam- ment into the hole of the base and move it age to the electrical system. upwards until you hear it click. Carefully press the glove compartment to the front,

58 Fuses and bulbs

Fuses in the engine compartment Replace a blown fuse ● Replace the cover again or close the fuse box lid.

Fuse placement

Only replace fuses with a fuse of the same amperage (same colour and markings) and size.

Fuses in the vehicle interior No. Consumers/Amps Fig. 54 In the engine compartment: fuse box Fig. 55 Image of a blown fuse. cover. 1 Adblue (SCR) 30

Preparations DWA warning horn, on-board To open the engine compartment fuse box 4 7.5 ● Switch off the ignition, lights and all electri- computer ● Open the bonnet  ››› page 349. cal equipment. 5 Gateway 7.5 ● Press the locking tabs to release the fuse ● Open the corresponding fuse box box cover ››› Fig. 54. 6 Automatic gearbox lever 7.5 ››› page 58, ››› page 59. ● Then lift the cover out. Air conditioning and heating control panel, back window ● To fit the cover, place it on the fuse box. Recognise a blown fuse 7 10 Push the locking tabs down until they click heating, auxiliary heating, rear A fuse is blown if its metal strip is ruptured heating audibly into place. ››› Fig. 55. Diagnosis, electronic parking ● Point a lamp at the fuse to see if it has brake switch, light switch, reverse light, interior lighting, driv- blown. 8 7.5 ing mode, lit-up door sill, light/humidity/rain sensor, To replace a fuse curve lighting control unit ● Remove the fuse. 9 Steering column control unit 7.5 ● Replace the blown fuse by one with an identical amperage rating (same colour and 10 Radio display 7.5 markings) and identical size. 11 On-board computer control unit 40 »

59 Emergencies

No. Consumers/Amps No. Consumers/Amps Fuse arrangement in engine compartment No. Consumers/Amps 12 Infotainment radio 20 Control unit for parking aid, 32 10 front camera and radar 1 ABS/ESP control unit 25 13 Driver seat belt pre-tensioner 25 33 Airbag 7.5 2 ABS/ESP control unit 40/60 14 Air conditioner fan 40 Reverse switch, climate sensor, Engine control unit (petrol/die- 15 Steering column release 10 3 15/30 34 electrochromic mirror, electro- 7.5 sel) mechanical brake GSM signal reception and sta- Engine sensors, electric fans, bilisation, mobile phone inter- 16 7.5 35 Diagnosis connector 7.5 pressure regulator, flow rate face, USB connections control 4 7.5/10 meter, spark plug relay (die- unit 38 Trailer 25 sel), PTC relays Dashboard, OCU navigation in- 39 Right doors 30 17 7.5 5 Engine sensors 10 terface 40/1 12V socket 20 6 Brake light sensor 7.5 Surroundings camera and rear 18 7.5 Passenger seat belt pre-ten- camera control unit 41 25 7 Engine power supply 7.5/10 sioner 19 Kessy 7.5 8 Lambda probe 10/15 42 Central locking 40 20 SCT 1.5 L engine vacuum pump 7.5/15 9 Engine 10/20 43 Digital sound control unit 30 21 4x4 Haldex Control Unit 15 10 Fuel pump control unit 15/20 44 Trailer 15 22 Trailer 15 11 PTC 40 45 Electric driver's seat 15 23 Electric sunroof 20 12 PTC 40 47 Rear window wiper 15 24 On-board computer 40 Automatic transmission oil 49 Starter motor 7.5 13 30 cooling pump 25 Left doors 30 51 Rear AC 25 15 Horn 15 26 Heated seats 30 52 Driving mode. 15 16 Ignition coil relay (2.0 petrol) 20 27 Interior light 30 53 Heated rear window 30 Engine control unit, ABS/ESP 28 Trailer 25 17 7.5 control unit, primary relay 31 Electrical lid control unit 30

60 Fuses and bulbs

No. Consumers/Amps Bulbs

Terminal 30 (positive refer- 18 7.5 ence) Changing bulbs

19 Front windscreen washer 30 Your vehicle is equipped with full-lead head- 21 Automatic gearbox control unit 15 light systems. Full-LED headlights handle all light functions 22 Engine control unit 7.5 (daylight, side light, turn signal, dipped beam 23 Starter motor 30 and route light) with light emitting diodes (LEDs) as a light source. 24 PTC 40 Full-LED headlights are designed to last 36 Left headlight 15 the lifetime of the car and light bulbs can- 37 Parking heating 20 not be replaced. In case of headlight failure, go to an authorised workshop to have 38 Right headlight 15 it replaced.

Note Side turn signals ● In the vehicle, there are more fuses than The side turn signals are LEDS and are inte- those indicated in this chapter. These grated in the exterior mirrors. should only be changed by a specialised workshop. In case of failure, go to an authorised work- ● Positions not containing a fuse do not ap- shop to have them replaced. pear in the following tables. Additional brake light ● Some of the equipment listed in the tables below pertain only to certain versions Taking into account that it consists of LED of the model or are optional extras. bulbs, the change should be made at a tech- ● Please note that the above lists, while nical service centre. correct at the time of printing, are subject to change.

61 Operation

Fig. 56 Instruments and controls.

62 Controls and displays Operation 7 Digital dashboard (SEAT Digital – Storage compartment ...... 145 Cockpit) ...... 64 19 Depending on the equipment, but- 8 Control lever for: tons for: Controls and displays – Windscreen wipers and washer . . . 118 – Start-Stop system ...... 250 – Wipe and wash system ...... 118 – Parking aid system (Park As- Interior view 9 Hazard warning lights ...... 115 sist) ...... 306 – 10 Infotainment System ...... 165 Park Pilot system ...... 314 Overview – 11 Front passenger airbag disconnec- Peripheral view system (Top View ...... Camera) ...... 323 1 Door handle tion display 27 20 12 Rotating control(Driving Experience 2 Central locking switch ...... 92 Depending on the equipment, glove compartment with: ...... 146 button) for driving modes ...... 263 3 Air vents ...... 158 – CD player* and/or SD card* . . . . . 206 21 Auto Hold switch ...... 301 4 Control lever for: 22 13 Front passenger airbag ...... 26 Electronic parking brake switch . . . . . 299 – Turn signals and main beam 23 Start-up push button (Keyless Ac- headlights ...... 112 14 Switch for switching off the front passenger airbag ...... 27 cess closing and start-up sys- – Cruise control system (GRA) and tem) ...... 246 speed limiter ...... 268,. . . 270 15 Thermal seat controls ...... 159 24 Steering column adjustment lev- 16 Depending on the equipment, con- – Driver assistance systems ...... 79 er ...... 14 trols for: 5 According to features, lever for: 25 Location of the knee airbag ...... 28 – Manual AC ...... 155 – Speed limiter ...... 270 26 Storage compartment / fuse box . . . 57 – Automatic AC (Climatronic) ...... 154 – Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) . . . 277 27 Bonnet lock release ...... 350 17 Gear lever for: 6 Steering wheel with horn and 28 Headlight switch ...... 109 – Manual gearbox ...... 253 – Driver airbag ...... 25 29 Button to open rear lid ...... 101 – Automatic gearbox ...... 254 – On-board computer controls . . . . . 78 30 Control for the electric adjustment 18 Area for: – Controls for radio, telephone, of the exterior mirrors ...... 121 – USB/AUX-IN input...... 244 navigation and speech dialogue 31 Electric windows ...... 104 » system ...... 165 – 12 volt socket ...... 150 – Paddle levers for tiptronic gear- – Connectivity Box/Wireless Charg- shift (automatic gearbox) ...... 256 er* ...... 244 63 Operation

Note Instruments and warn- changed some system settings (such as the time, the date, the personalised comfort set- ● Some of the equipment listed in this sec- tings and the programming) might be altered tion is only fitted on certain models or are ing/control lamps or deleted. Check and correct these settings optional extras. once the battery is sufficiently charged. ● The arrangement of switches and con- Instrument panel trols on right-hand drive models* may be WARNING slightly different from the layout shown in Introduction ››› page 62. However, the symbols used to Any distraction may lead to an accident, identify the controls are the same. with the risk of injury. ● Do not operate the instrument panel controls when driving. ● To reduce the risk of accident and injury, only make adjustments to the instructions Fig. 57 Related video: on the screen of the instrument panel and Dash panel to the instructions on the screen of the Info- tainment system when the vehicle is sta- After switching the engine on with a 12-volt tionary. battery that is heavily discharged or newly

64 Instruments and warning/control lamps

Digital dashboard (SEAT Digital Cockpit)

Fig. 58 SEAT Digital Cockpit on the instrument panel (classic view).

Details of the instruments: The Digital SEAT Cockpit is an instrument All views will display information on the 1 Engine coolant temperature display panel digital with monochrome screen in col- screen about audio, phone, travel data, vehi- 1) 1) ››› page 76 our high resolution. It has a 3 views accessi- cle status, navigation and driving aids . ble using the button  of the multifunction 2 Revolution counter. Revolutions per mi- In Classic View and Semicircular watches it is steering wheel. By selecting different infor- nute the engine is running page 75. possible to customise the information dis- ››› mation profiles, indications other than the played under Information Profiles 3 Gear engaged or position of the selec- classic circular instruments can be displayed, ››› Fig. 58 8 . tor lever currently selected such as navigation data, multimedia information or travel data. 4 Screen display ››› page 67 Information profiles 5 Speedometer The 3 views are: With the INSTRUMENT CLUSTER option (info- 6 Digital speed display – Classic View tainment button  > View > Instrument 7 Fuel gauge page 76. cluster) you can choose between the dif- ››› – Digital maps (no information profiles) ferent information display options that will be 8 Information Profile ››› page 65. – Semicircular watches shown in the SEAT Digital Cockpit. »

1) Depending on the version. 65 Operation

Classic View ● Operating range. Digital display of the re- Navigation map in the SEAT Digital The revolutions per minute and speedometer maining range. Cockpit* needles appear along the entire length ● Travel time. ››› Fig. 58. ● Route guidance. ● Journey. Digital display of the distance View 1, 2, 3 or AUTOMATIC*1) travelled. Personalisation of the information that ap- ● Assistance systems. Graphic representa- pears in the Digital SEAT Cockpit. Only 2 of tion of different assistance systems. these items of information can be displayed ● Traffic signs. Display of traffic signs detec- at the same time, but the user chooses which ted. to display, and in what order, by moving the finger vertically over the dials. ● Navigation. Graphical representation of the navigation with arrows. Depending on the version, the Views can be Fig. 59 Infotainment system:: map transfer key memorised by exiting the menu or keeping It may vary based on the features, the num- the View button pressed. ber and the contents of the selectable infor- Depending on the features, the SEAT Digital mation profiles.. Cockpit can display a detailed map. To do ● Consumption. Graphic representation of this, select the Navigation option in the the current consumption and digital display menu menu on the instrument panel of the average consumption. ››› page 68. ● Audio. Digital display of the current audio playback. Depending on the features or the navigation map, it can be shown in the Digital SEAT ● Altitude. Digital display of the current alti- Cockpit or on the Infotainment system or on tude above sea level. both at the same time. If it is displayed only in ● Compass. Digital display of the compass. the Infotainment system, the SEAT Digital ● Information about the final destination. Cockpit will only display the arrows for ma- Digital display of the remaining travelling noeuvres. time, distance to the destination and the estimated time of arrival.

1) Pre-set information depending on the “Driving mode” selected. 66 Instruments and warning/control lamps

Transfer of navigation map ● Display of travel data (multifunction dis- Selector lever positions (DSG® dual clutch Using the map transfer key ››› Fig. 59, the play) and menus for different settings shift) map is transferred from the Infotainment sys- ››› page 68 The current position of the selector lever is tem to the Digital SEAT Cockpit and vice ver- ● Service interval display ››› page 77 shown on the side of the lever and on the in- sa. ● Speed warning ››› page 69 strument panel display. When the lever is in the D/S position or in the Tiptronic position, in Using the right thumbwheel of the multifunc- ● Speed warning for winter tyres some cases, the gear engaged in each case tion steering wheel, in the Navigation menu, ● Start-Stop system status display is shown on the instrument panel display . you can transfer the map back to the Info- ››› page 250 tainment System. ● Signs detected by the traffic signal detec- Outside temperature indicator tion system ››› page 72 If the outside temperature is lower than ap- Status display ● Indication of active cylinder management proximately +4 °C (+39 °F), the “ice crystal status (ACT®) ››› page 266 symbol”  on the outside temperature dis- Possible indications on the instrument ● Low consumption driving  play also lights up. This symbol remains lit until the outside temperature exceeds +6 °C panel display ● Identifying letters on engine (LDM) (+43 °F) ››› . Different pieces of information can be dis- ● Driver assistance system display When the vehicle is stationary, when the aux- played on the screen of the instrument panel, ››› page 268 depending on the features of the vehicle. iliary heater is switched on or when driving at ● Copyright very low speeds, the outside temperature in- ● Doors, bonnet and rear lid open dicated may be higher than the actual tem- ● Warning and information messages Doors, bonnet and rear lid open perature due to the heat produced by the en- ● Odometer When the vehicle is unlocked and while driv- gine. ● Time ››› page 75 ing, the instrument panel display shows if any The margin of measurement ranges from of the doors, the bonnet or rear lid are ● Indications of the radio and navigation sys- -45 °C (-49 °F) to +76 °C (+169 °F). opened and, in some cases, it is also indica- tem ted by an audible warning. The display may Gear-change recommendation ● Indications of the phone vary according to the type of instrument pan- ● Outside temperature el fitted. While driving, the instrument panel of certain vehicles may indicate a gear recommenda- ● Indications of the compass tion for saving fuel ››› page 261. » ● Selector lever positions ● Gear-change recommendation ››› page 261 67 Operation

Odometer Low consumption driving * ● Some indications on the instrument panel The odometer registers the total distance Depending on the equipment, when driving, screen may be concealed by a sudden travelled by the car. the  display appears on the instrument event, e.g. an incoming call. panel when the vehicle is in low consumption ● Depending on the equipment, some set- The partial odometer (trip) shows the dis- status due to active cylinder management tings and instructions can be carried out or tance travelled since the last time it was reset (ACT®)* ››› page 266. displayed on the infotainment system as to zero. well. ● Set the odometer to zero via the Infotain- Copyright ● If there are several warnings at the same ment system or the multifunction steering Legal text about the property rights and time, the symbols will be displayed one af- wheel ››› page 69. copyrights of the instrument cluster. ter the other for a few seconds. The symbols will stay on until you remove the cause. Speed warning for winter tyres WARNING ● If when switching on the ignition warnings If the maximum speed set is exceeded, this is Even when the outside temperature is high- are shown about existing faults, it might not displayed on the instrument panel er than freezing temperature, some roads be possible to change the settings or show page 68. ››› and bridges could be frozen. the information as described. In this case, Speed warning settings can be changed in ● The “ice crystal symbol” indicates that go to a specialised workshop and request a the infotainment system, by pressing the info- there may be a risk of freezing. repair. tainment button  > SETTINGS > Driver ● At outside temperatures above +4 °C assistance ››› page 82. (+39 °F), there may be ice even when the “ice crystal symbol” is not on. Instrument panel menus Indications of the compass ● The outside temperature sensor takes a Depending on the equipment, when the igni- guideline measurement. The number of menus and information items tion is on, the instrument panel display indi- available will depend on the vehicle’s elec- cates the direction in which you are driving Note tronics and features. with a symbol, e.g. NW for Northwest. ● There are different instrument panels and A specialised workshop can programme or When the Infotainment system is on and there therefore the versions and instructions on modify additional functions, according to the is no route guidance active, the graphic rep- the display may vary. In the case of dis- vehicle equipment. SEAT recommends visiting resentation of a compass is also shown. plays without warning or information texts, a SEAT dealership for this. faults are indicated exclusively by the con- Some menu options can only be read when trol warning lamps. the vehicle is stationary. ■ Driving data ››› page 69

68 Instruments and warning/control lamps

■ Assistance systems Restart the service interval display Driving data indicator (multifunc- ■ Lane Assist On/Off ››› page 286 Select the Service menu and follow the in- tion display) ■ Front Assist On/Off ››› page 273 structions on the screen of the instrument ■ Blind spot detector On/Off ››› page 291 panel. The display of the travel data (multifunction display) shows different values about the ■ ACC (only display) ››› page 277 Restart the oil service journey and the consumption. ■ Navigation Select the Restore Oil service menu and ■ Audio Change from one display to another follow the instructions on the instrument pan- ■ Telephone el display. ● Turn the right thumbwheel of the multifunc- ■ Vehicle status ››› page 70 tion steering wheel ››› page 78. Restart journey data Changing memory Service Menu Select the Reset trip menu and follow the instructions on the instrument panel display ● While in Travel data > General infor- to reset the value. mation press  on the multi-function steer- In the Service menu various settings can be ing wheel to switch between the 3 memo- adjusted depending on the features. Identifying letters on engine (LDM) ries1):

Open the Service menu Select the menu Engine code. The identify- – Since start: The memory is deleted if ing letters of the engine will be shown on the To open up the Service menu, select the the journey is interrupted for more than 2 instrument cluster display at the bottom left. Range information profile while in the Driv- hours. ing data menu, and keep the  key press- – Since refuelling: Display and stor- Setting the clock ed on the multifunction steering wheel for ap- age of the journey data and the con- proximately 4 seconds. When it is released, Select the Time menu and set the correct sumption values collected. When refuel- the Service menu will be displayed. Now time by turning the right thumbwheel of the ling, the memory is deleted. you can browse through the menu using the multifunction steering wheel. – Long-term: This memory contains trav- keys on the multifunction steering wheel as el data up to a maximum of 19 hours and usual. 59 minutes or 99 hours and 59 minutes, or up to a maximum of 1999.9 km or »

1) This will show all data on the display at the same time: distance travelled, average consumption, average speed and autonomy. 69 Operation

9999.9 km. When one of these values is – AdBlue range or : Approximate ● Deactivate: press the  button. The stored exceeded (varies depending on the ver- distance in km that can still be travelled speed is deleted. sion of the instrument panel), the memo- with the current level of the AdBlue® tank ry is deleted. with the same driving style. The indica- The warning can be adjusted for speeds be- tion appears from a range of less than tween 30 km/h (18 mph) and 250 km/h Delete journey data presets 2,400 km and cannot be deactivated.1) (155 mph). ● – Distance: Distance covered in km (m) Select the memory that you wish to erase. Display Oil temperature after switching on the ignition. ● Keep the  button on the multi-function The engine reaches its operating tempera- steering wheel pressed for approximately 2 – Average speed: The average speed ture when, under normal driving conditions, seconds. will be shown after driving for approxi- the oil temperature is between 80°C (176°F) mately 100 metres. and 120°C (248°F). If a great effort is required Select the instructions – Digital speed display: Current from the engine and the outside temperature In the Infotainment system, in the menu Vehi- speed displayed in digital format. is high, the engine oil temperature may in- cle settings, you can display different travel – Convenience consumers: Displays a crease. This does not present any problem as data ››› page 82. list of the connected comfort systems long as the warning lamps  or  that increase energy consumption, e.g. ››› page 353 do not appear on the display. – Current consumption: The current air conditioning. fuel consumption display operates throughout the journey, in litres/100 km; Setting a speed warning and with the engine running and the ve- Warning and information messages hicle stopped, in litres/hour. ● Select the display Warning at --- km/h (Vehicle status) or Speed warning at --- mph. – Average consumption: The average The system runs a check on certain compo- fuel consumption is displayed after driv- ● Press the  button on the multi-function nents and functions when the ignition is ing for approximately 300 metres. steering wheel to memorise the current speed and activate the warning. switched on and while the vehicle is moving. – Travelling time: This indicates the Faults displayed on the instrument panel as ● hours (h) and minutes (min) since the ig- Activate: set the desired speed within 5 red and yellow warning symbols accompa- nition was switched on. seconds by rotating the wheel on the multi- nied with messages and, depending on the function steering wheel. Next, press the  – Range: Approximate distance in km that case, even an audible warning ››› page 79. button again or wait several seconds. The can still be travelled if the same driving The representation of the messages and speed is stored and the warning activated. style is maintained.

1) Not available in all countries. 70 Instruments and warning/control lamps symbols may vary depending on the version Driver alert system (break recom- ton on the multi-function steering wheel of the instrument panel. mendation)* ››› page 78. Existing faults can also be checked manually. The message can be recalled to the instru- To do so, open the menu Vehicle status or ment panel display using the multifunction Vehicle ››› page 68. display ››› page 69.

Priority 1 warning (red) Conditions of operation The symbol lights up or flashes (in part ac- Driving behaviour is only calculated on companied by audible warnings).  Stop speeds above about 65 km/h (40 mph) up to driving! Danger! Check the fault and elimi- around 200 km/h (125 mph). nate the cause. If necessary, seek professional assistance. Switching on and off Drowsiness detection can be activated or de- Priority 2 warning (yellow) Fig. 60 On the instrument panel display: driver alert system symbol. activated in the Easy Connect system with The symbol lights up or flashes (in part ac- the key  > SETTINGS > Driver assis- companied by audible warnings). Operating Function and operation tance ››› page 82. A mark indicates that the faults or the lack of operating fluids can adjustment has been activated. Fatigue detection determines the driving because damage to the vehicle or a fault. haviour of the driver when starting a journey, Check the faulty function as soon as possible. System limitations making a calculation of tiredness. This is con- If necessary, seek professional assistance. stantly compared with the current driving be- The Fatigue detection has certain limitations haviour. If the system detects that the driver is inherent to the system. The following condi- Information message tired, an audible warning is given with a tions can limit the Fatigue detection or pre- It provides information about processes in the sound and an optic warning is shown with a vent it from functioning. vehicle. symbol and complementary message on the instrument panel display ››› Fig. 60. The mes- ● At speeds below 65 km/h (40 mph) sage on the instrument panel display is ● At speeds above 200 km/h (125 mph) shown for approximately 5 seconds, and de- ● When cornering pending on the case, is repeated. The system ● On roads in poor condition stores the last message displayed. ● In unfavourable weather conditions The message on the instrument panel display can be switched off by pressing the  but- ● When a sporty driving style is employed »

71 Operation

1) ● In the event of a serious distraction to the ● In some situations, the system may incor- Road signs detection system* driver rectly interpret an intended driving manoeuvre as driver tiredness. Fatigue detection will be restored when the vehicle is stopped for more than 15 minutes, ● No warning is given in the event of the ef- when the ignition is switched off or when the fect called microsleep! driver has unbuckled their seat belt and ● Please observe the indications on the in- opened the door. strument panel and act as is necessary. In the event of slow driving during a long period of time (below 65 km/h, 40 mph) the sys- Note tem automatically re-establishes the tired- ● Fatigue detection has been developed ness calculation. When driving at a faster for driving on motorways and well paved speed the driving behaviour will be recalcula- roads only. ted. ● If there is a fault in the system, have it checked by a specialised workshop. WARNING Do not let the comfort afforded by the Fati- gue detection system tempt you into taking any risks when driving. Take regular breaks, sufficient in length when making long journeys. ● The driver always assumes the responsibility of driving to their full capacity. Fig. 61 On the instrument panel display: examples of speed limits or overtaking prohibi- ● Never drive if you are tired. tions with their respective additional signs. ● The system does not detect the tiredness of the driver in all circumstances. Consult The traffic sign detection system records the the information in the section ››› page 71, standard traffic signs in front of the vehicle System limitations. with a camera located on the base of the interior mirror and provides information about speed limits and overtaking prohibitions.

1) System available depending on the country. 72 Instruments and warning/control lamps

Within its limitations, the system also displays Speed warning currently unavailable signs in front of the vehicle. After checking additional signals, such as time-specific pro- ● The speed warning function of the road and evaluating the information from the cam- hibitions, signs for vehicles towing trailers sign detection system is faulty. Have the sys- era, the navigation system and the current ››› page 332 or limitations that only apply in tem checked by a specialised workshop. vehicle data, up to three valid road signs are the event of rain. Even on journeys without displayed, ››› Fig. 61  with their additional signs, the system may display any applicable Dynamic Road Sign Display: please signs. speed limits. clean the windscreen. ● First: The sign that is currently valid for the ● The windscreen is dirty in the camera area. The traffic sign detection system does not driver is shown in the left side of the screen Clean the windscreen. work in all countries. Keep this in mind when For example, a maximum speed limit of travelling abroad.  Dynamic Road Sign Display currently 130 km/h (100 mph) ››› Fig. 61 . restricted. ● Second: A sign valid only in certain circum- Shown on the display ● The navigation system is not transmitting stances, e.g. 100 km/h (60 mph) is shown sec- In Germany, on motorways and vehicle data. Check if the navigation system has up- ond, together with the additional rain sign. roads, besides speed limits and overtaking dated maps. ● Additional sign: If the windscreen wiper is provisions the system also displays the end of ● OR: the vehicle is in a region not included working while you are driving, the signal with prohibition signs. The valid speed limit at the on the navigation system's map. the additional rain sign will be shown first, on time in other countries is always shown. the left, as it is the one that is applicable at The traffic signs detected by the system are No data available the time. displayed on the dash panel display ● The traffic sign detection system does not ● Third: A sign valid only with restrictions, e.g. ››› Fig. 61 and, depending on the navigation work in the current country. No overtaking at certain times, will be dis- system fitted in the vehicle, on the infotain- played in third place ››› Fig. 61 . ment system as well ››› page 82. Activate and deactivate the road sign display on the instrument panel Speed warning Road sign detection system messages: The permanent display of road signs on the If the system detects that the permitted There are no traffic signs available instrument panel can be activated or deacti- speed is exceeded, it may warn the driver ● The system is in its start-up phase. vated in the infotainment system using the  with a “gong” and visually with a message on > SETTINGS > Driver assistance button. the dash panel display. ● OR: the camera has not recognized any mandatory or prohibitive sign. The speed warning can be adjusted or deac- Display of traffic signs tivated completely in the infotainment system Error: Dynamic Road Sign Display When the traffic sign detection system is con- using the  > SETTINGS > Driver assis- ● There is a fault in the system. Have the sys- nected, a camera located on the base of the tance ››› page 82 button. The speed is ad- tem checked by a specialised workshop. interior rear-view mirror records the traffic justed in steps of 5 km/h (3 mph) within a » 73 Operation

range of between 0 km/h (mph) and 20 km/h Limited operation WARNING (12 mph) above the maximum speed permit- The traffic sign detection system has certain ted. The technology in the traffic sign detection limitations. The following cases may lead the system cannot change the limits imposed system to operate with limitations or not at by the laws of physics and only works with- Trailer mode all: in the system's limits. Do not let the extra In vehicles equipped with a towing bracket convenience afforded by the traffic sign ● device from the factory and a trailer that is In the case of poor visibility, e.g. in snow, detection system tempt you into taking any electrically connected to the vehicle, it is rain, fog or intense mist. risks when driving. The system is not a re- possible to activate or deactivate the display ● In cases of dazzling, e.g. caused by head- placement for driver awareness. of specific traffic signs for vehicles with trailer, on traffic or by the sun. ● Adapt your speed and driving style to suit such as speed limits or overtaking prohibi- ● When driving at high speeds. visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. Activation or deactivation is performed tions. ● If the camera is covered or dirty. in the infotainment system using the  > ● Poor visibility, darkness, snow, rain and ● SETTINGS > Driver assistance If the traffic signs are out of the camera's fog may lead to the system failing to dis- ››› page 82 buttons. field of vision. play traffic signs or not displaying them ● correctly. For trailer mode, the display of speed limits If the traffic signs are partially or totally applicable to the type of trailer or to the legal covered, e.g. by trees, snow, dirt or other vehi- ● If the camera's field of vision is dirty, cov- provisions can be adjusted. The speed is ad- cles. ered or damaged, system operation may justed in steps of 10 km/h (5 mph) within a ● In the case of traffic signs that do not fulfil be impaired. range of between 60 km/h (40 mph) and the regulations. 130 km/h (80 mph). If it is adjusted to a speed ● In the case of damaged or bent traffic WARNING greater than that which is permitted in the signs. The driving recommendations and traffic country in question for driving with a trailer, ● In the case of variable messages on over- indications shown on the traffic sign detec- the system automatically displays the usual head or gantry signs (LED-based variable tion system may differ from the actual cur- speed limits, e.g. in Germany 80 km/h traffic signs or other lighting units). rent traffic situation. (50 mph). ● If the maps on the navigation system are ● The system may not detect or correctly show all the traffic signs. If the speed warning for the trailer is deacti- not up-to-date. vated, the system displays the speed limits as ● Traffic signs and traffic regulations have ● In the case of adhesives affixed to vehicles if there were no trailer hitched. priority over the recommendations and dis- that depict traffic signs, e.g. speed limits on plays provided by the system. lorries.

74 Instruments and warning/control lamps

WARNING light up may result in damage to the vehi- Together with the gear-change indicator, the cle. rev counter offers you the possibility of using If messages are ignored, the vehicle may the engine of your vehicle at a suitable stall in traffic and cause accidents and se- speed. vere injuries. ● Never ignore the messages displayed. Time The beginning of the red zone of the rev counter indicates the maximum speed in any ● Stop the vehicle at the next opportunity gear after running-in and with the engine hot. and in a safe place. Setting the time on the infotainment system However, it is advisable to change up a gear or move the selector lever to D (or lift your ● Press the infotainment  button. Note foot off the accelerator) before the needle ● Press the SETTINGS > Date and time To avoid affecting the correct operation of reaches the red zone ››› . function button to adjust the time the system, take the following points into ››› page 82. We recommend that you avoid high revs and consideration: that you follow the recommendations on the ● Regularly clean the area of vision of the Adjusting the time in the SEAT Digital gear-change indicator. Consult the addition- camera and keep it in a clean state, without Cockpit al information in ››› page 261, Selecting the snow or ice. ● While in the Driving data menu, select optimal gear. ● Do not cover the field of vision of the the Range function (infotainment button  > camera. View > Driving data > Range). CAUTION ● Always replace damaged or worn blades ● Press the button  on the multifunction ● To prevent damage to the engine, the rev when required to avoid lines on the cam- steering wheel until the Service menu is dis- counter needle should only remain in the era's field of vision. played on the instrument panel display red zone for a short period of time. ● Check that the windscreen is not dam- ››› page 69. ● When the engine is cold, avoid high revs aged in the area of the camera's field of vi- and heavy acceleration and do not make ● Select the menu Time. sion. the engine work hard. ● The use of outdated maps on the naviga- ● Adjust the correct time by turning the right thumbwheel of the multifunction steering tion system may cause the system to show For the sake of the environment traffic signs incorrectly. wheel. Changing up a gear early will help you to ● In the waypoints mode of the navigation save fuel and minimise emissions and en- system, the traffic sign detection system is gine noise. only partly available. Revolution counter ● Failure to heed the control lamps and corresponding text messages when they The rev counter indicates the number of engine revolutions per minute. 75 Operation

Fuel gauge WARNING Engine coolant temperature indica- When driving with low fuel, the vehicle may tor stall in traffic and cause accidents and severe injuries. ● If the fuel tank level is too low, fuel could reach the engine irregularly, particularly when driving up or down slopes. ● The steering system and the driver assistance systems and brakes do not work when the engine is running irregularly or switches off due to lack of fuel or an irregular supply thereof. Fig. 62 Digital instrument panel: fuel gauge. ● Always refuel when there is only one quarter of fuel in tank to prevent the vehicle Fig. 63 Digital instrument panel: engine cool- Control lamps to stop due to lack of fuel. ant temperature indicator. It lights up, and in addition, the  A Cool zone. The engine has not reached lower diode lights up in red CAUTION operating temperature yet. Avoid high Fuel tank almost empty. The fuel reserve level has Never run the fuel tank completely dry. An speeds and stressing the engine if it has been reached ››› . Refuel as soon as you have the irregular fuel supply can cause misfiring not reached operating temperature. opportunity. and unburnt fuel could enter the exhaust B Normal zone. At high outside tempera- When the fuel level is very low, the lower diode flash- system. The catalytic converter or the par- tures and when making the engine work es red. ticulate filter may get damaged! hard, the diodes may continue lighting up The display only works when the ignition is and reach the upper zone. This is no switched on. Note cause for concern, provided the control lamp does not light up  The fuel range is displayed on the instrument The small arrow on the fuel gauge next to panel. the fuel pump symbol points out towards C Warning area. When the engine is work- the side of the vehicle with the fuel tank ing hard, especially at high outside tem- You can consult the tank capacity of your ve- flap. peratures, the diodes may light up in the hicle in the ››› page 389 section. warning area.

The coolant temperature gauge only works when the ignition is switched on.

76 Instruments and warning/control lamps

Control and warning lamp ● The front spoiler also ensures proper dis- and individual driving styles are considered. tribution of the cooling air when the vehicle The advance warning first appears 20 days  It lights up red is moving. If the spoiler is damaged this can before the date established for the corre- reduce the cooling effect, which could sponding service. The kilometres (miles) re-  Do not carry on driving! cause the engine to overheat. Seek spe- maining until the next service are always Engine coolant level too low, coolant temperature too high. cialist assistance. rounded up to the nearest 100 km (miles) and the time is given in complete days. The current service message cannot be viewed until  Flashes red Service intervals 500 km after the last service. Prior to this, on- Fault in the engine coolant system. ly lines are visible on the display. The service interval indication appears on the ● Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and instrument panel display and the Infotain- Inspection reminder let it cool down. ment system. If a service or an inspection has to be carried ● Check the engine coolant level out soon, a service reminder will be dis- There are different versions of instrument ››› page 355. played when the ignition is switched on. panels and infotainment systems, so the ver- ● If the warning lamp does not switch off even sions and instructions on the screens may The figure displayed are the kilometres that if the coolant level is correct, request assis- vary. can still be travelled or the time until the next tance from specialised personnel. service. SEAT distinguishes between services with en- CAUTION gine oil change (e.g. Oil change service) and services without engine oil change (e.g. In- Service due ● To ensure a long useful life for the engine, spection). When the time for a service or an inspec- avoid high revs, driving at high speed and tion comes, an audible warning will be emit- making the engine work hard for approxi- In vehicles with Services established by ted when the ignition is switched on and the mately the first 15 minutes when the engine time or mileage, the service intervals are al- fixed key symbol  may appear on the in- is cold. The phase until the engine is warm ready pre-defined. strument panel for a few seconds, along with also depends on the outside temperature. If In vehicles with LongLife Service, the inter- necessary, use the engine oil temperature* one of the following messages: vals are determined individually. Thanks to ››› page 69››› page 70 as a guide. technological progress, maintenance work ● Service now! ● Additional lights and other accessories in has been greatly reduced. Because of the ● Please have your vehicle inspec- front of the air inlet reduce the cooling ef- technology used by SEAT, with this service ted. fect of the coolant. At high outside temper- you only need to change the oil when the ve- atures and high engine loads, there is a risk ● Oil change service due! » hicle so requires. To calculate this variation of the engine overheating. (max. 2 years), the vehicle's conditions of use 77 Operation

● Oil change service and inspection Note Some menu options can only be read when due! the vehicle is at a standstill. ● The service message disappears after a few seconds, when the engine is started or Consult a service notification WARNING when the  button is pressed on the multi- With the ignition switched on, the engine off function steering wheel. Distracting the driver in any way can lead to an accident and cause injuries. and the vehicle at a standstill, the current ● In vehicles with the LongLife system in service notification can be read: which the battery has been disconnected ● Never use the menus on the instrument for a long period of time, it is not possible to panel display while the vehicle is in motion. Check the date of the current service on the calculate the date of the next service. infotainment system Therefore the service interval display may Note ● Press the infotainment button . not be correct. In this case, bear in mind the After loading or changing the 12-volt bat- ● Press the function button SETTINGS maximum service intervals permitted ››› page 373. tery, check the system settings. If the pow- ››› page 82. er supply is interrupted, the system settings ● If you reset the display manually, the next ● Select the Service menu option to display might be incorrect or deleted. service interval will be indicated as in vehi- information about the services. cles with fixed service intervals. For this reason we recommend that the service in- Resetting service interval display terval display be reset by a SEAT author- Operation using the multifunction If the service was not carried out by a SEAT ised Dealer. steering wheel dealership, the display can be reset as follows:

● The service interval display can only be re- Using the instrument panel set through the Service menu ››› page 69.

Do not restart the indicator between the Introduction service intervals, otherwise the information With the ignition switched on, it is possible to displayed will be incorrect. read the different functions of the display by If the oil change service is reset manually, the scrolling through the menus. service interval display changes to a fixed The multifunction display can only be con- service interval, also in vehicles with Flexible trolled from the buttons on the multi-function oil change service. Fig. 64 Right side of the multifunction steering steering wheel. wheel: buttons to the menus and information displays on the instrument panel.

78 Instruments and warning/control lamps

As long as a priority 1 ››› page 70 warning is Button for the driver assistance ● Select the driver assistance system and ac- active, it will not be possible to access any systems* tivate or deactivate it ››› page 78. A mark in- menu. Some warnings can be confirmed and dicates that driver assistance system is hidden with the button  of the multifunction switched on. steering wheel ››› Fig. 64. ● Next, confirm the selection by pressing the  button on the multi-function steering Select a menu or an informative display wheel. ● Switch the ignition on. The driver assistance systems can also be ● Customisation option: select a user. switched on and off in the infotainment sys- ● If a message or vehicle symbol is displayed, tem, in the menu Vehicle settings press the button  ››› Fig. 64; if necessary, ››› page 82. several times. ● To change menus, use buttons   or   ››› Fig. 64. Control lamps ● To open the menu or the information displayed, press the button  ››› Fig. 64 or wait Control and warning lamps a few seconds until the menu or the informative display opens automatically.

Changing menu settings Fig. 65 On the turn signal and main beam lever: button for driver assistance systems (de- ● In the menu displayed, turn the right thumb- pending on versions). wheel of the multifunction steering wheel ››› Fig. 64 until the desired option of the menu With the turn signal and main beam headlight Fig. 66 Related video is highlighted. The option appears framed. lever button, you can activate or deactivate the driver assistance systems displayed in the ● Press the button  ››› Fig. 64 to make the The control and warning lamps are indicators Assistance systems menu . required modifications. A mark indicates that of warnings ››› , faults or certain functions. the system or function is activated. Some control and warning lamps come on Activate or deactivate a driver assistance when the ignition is switched on, and switch Back to menu selection system off when the engine starts running, or while ● Press Fig. 65 1 or 2 briefly to open the driving. Press the button   or   ››› Fig. 64. ››› » Driving aids menu.

79 Operation

Depending on the model, additional text Fault in ESC or disconnection caused by The front passenger front airbag is activa-  messages may be viewed on the instrument  the system; OR ESC or ASR in operation  ted ››› page 25. panel display. These may be purely informa- ››› page 302. tive or they may be advising of the need for  Lane assist warning (Lane Assist) action ››› page 64, Instrument panel. ASR manually deactivated; OR ESC in ››› page 286.  Sport mode ››› page 302. Depending upon the equipment fitted in the Error in the lane assist warning system  vehicle, instead of a warning lamp, some-  Fault in the ABS ››› page 302. ››› page 286. times a symbol may be displayed on the in-  Rear fog light switched on ››› page 109. Fault in the lighting of the vehicle strument panel.  ››› page 109. Fault in the emission control system When certain control and warning lamps are  ››› page 347. Low engine oil level ››› page 353. lit, an audible warning is also heard.  Pre-heating of the diesel engine; OR fault  Fault in the gearbox ››› page 259. Red warning lamps  in the management of the diesel engine ››› page 347. Windscreen cleaning fluid too low Notification central lamp: additional infor-  ››› page 118.  mation on the instrument panel display Fault in the petrol engine management  ››› page 347.  Parking brake on ››› page 297. Other warning lamps  Particulate filter blocked ››› page 347.  Fault in the brake system ››› page 297.  Turn lights or emergency lights on  Fault in the steering system ››› page 262. ››› page 109.  Fault in the steering system ››› page 262. Trailer turn signals ››› page 109.  Tyre monitor system ››› page 369.  Driver or passenger has not fastened seat   Auto Hold activated ››› page 301. belt ››› page 16.  Fuel tank almost empty ››› page 76. Press the foot brake page 254.  Press the foot brake ››› page 278. Adblue level low, OR fault in the SCR sys-  ›››  tem page 345. AdBlue level too low, OR fault in the SCR ››› Cruise control (GRA) ››› page 268; OR  system page 345. speed limited ››› page 270; OR Adaptive ››› Fault in airbag system and seat belt ten-  cruise control (ACC) ››› page 278.  sioners ››› page 25. Yellow warning lamps Lane assist warning (Lane Assist) Front passenger front airbag is disa-  ››› page 286.    Notification central lamp: additional infor- bled ››› page 25. mation on the instrument panel display  Main beam on or flasher on ››› page 109.  Front brake pads worn ››› page 297. 80 Instruments and warning/control lamps

 Door(s), rear lid or bonnet open or not ● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi- properly closed ››› page 67. ble.  Engine cooling fluid ››› page 76. ● A faulty vehicle represents a risk of accident for the driver and for other road users.  Engine oil pressure ››› page 353. If necessary, switch on the hazard warning lamps and put out the warning triangle to  Fault in the battery ››› page 360. advise other drivers. Main beam assist (Light Assist) ● Before opening the bonnet, switch off the  ››› page 109. engine and allow it to cool. ● In any vehicle, the engine compartment is  Hill descent control (HDC) ››› page 261. a hazardous area and could cause severe  Service interval display ››› page 77. injuries ››› page 349.

Mobile telephone is connected via Blue-  tooth® ››› page 233.

Mobile telephone battery charge status  ››› page 233.  Risk of freezing ››› page 67.  Start-Stop system activated ››› page 250.

Start-Stop system unavailable . ››› page 250.

Low consumption driving status  ››› page 68.

WARNING If the warning lamps and messages are ignored, faults may occur in the vehicle, it may stall in traffic, or accidents and serious injuries may occur. ● Never ignore the warning lamps or text messages. 81 Operation

Easy Connect system General operating information WARNING The following section contains all of the rele- Any distraction may lead to an accident, Introduction vant information for changing the settings in with the risk of injury. Operating the Easy the Vehicle Settings menu. General infor- Connect system while driving could dis- The infotainment system brings together im- mation on the operation of the infotainment tract you from traffic. portant vehicle functions and systems into a system, as well as on the warning and safety single central control unit, e.g. menu settings, instructions that must be taken into account, radio equipment and the navigation system. is found in ››› page 165

Vehicle menu settings

Fig. 67 Easy Connect: Main menu. Fig. 68 Easy Connect: Vehicle Menu.

Open the Vehicle settings menu ● OR: Press the infotainment button  to go ● To select a function in the menu, press the ● Switch the ignition on. to the Vehicle ››› Fig. 68 menu. desired button. ● ● If the Infotainment System is off, switch it on. Press the SETTINGS function button to open the Vehicle settings menu. ● Press the Infotainment button  and then the Vehicle ››› Fig. 67 function button.

82 Instruments and warning/control lamps

Menu Submenu Possible setting Description

Activating or deactivating the traction control system (ASR) or selecting the ESC system – ›› page 302 Sport mode of the electronic stability control (ESC Sport) ›

Tyre monitor system Tyre pressure storing (Calibration) ››› page 369

Tyres Activation and deactivation of the speed warning, adjusting the speed warning Winter tyres ››› page 367 value

Dynamic Light Assist, Light Assist, motorway function, turning-on time, headlamp Light assistance range adjustment, automatic lights when raining, one-touch signalling, travel ››› page 109 mode. Vehicle lights Vehicle interior lighting Brightness of instrument panel and controls ››› page 117

Coming/Leaving home function Switch-on time of the “Coming home” and “Leaving home” functions ››› page 114

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Activation and deactivation: default distance level, driving profiles. ››› page 277

Front Assist (ambient traffic Activation and deactivation: Front Assist, advance warning, distance warning dis- ››› page 273 monitoring system) play

Lane Assist (lane departure Activation and deactivation of lane departure warning assistance, adaptive lane ››› page 286 warning assistance) guidance, activation and deactivation of steering wheel vibration Driver assistance Display on the instrument panel, activation and deactivation of the speed warn- Dynamic Road Sign Display ››› page 72 ing

Trailer recognition (display of traffic signs for vehicles with trailer), use to calcu- Trailer detection ››› page 74 late the route, maximum speed for trailer

Driver alert system Activation and deactivation ››› page 71 Automatic activation, front volume, front sound treble, rear volume, rear sound ››› page 315, ParkPilot Parking and ma- treble, adjust Infotainment volume ››› page 319 noeuvring Manoeuvre braking Switching on and off ››› page 318

Ambient lighting – Switching on and off, selecting brightness, colour, area or total ››› page 117 »

83 Operation

Menu Submenu Possible setting Description

Synchronous adjustment, lower the passenger side mirror while reversing (kerb Rear view mirrors › page 121 Mirrors and function), fold in after parking, exterior mirrors heating, dim when dark ›› windscreen wipers Activate and deactivate automatic wipers if raining, rear window wiping in re- Windscreen wipers ››› page 118 verse gear

Convenience opening, automatic closure in case of rain, automatic closure with Electric windows ››› page 105 central locking Opening and closing Door unlocking, audio confirmation “Easy Open”, “Easy Entry” access assis- Central locking ››› page 89 tance, automatic opening of the rear lid, interior monitoring

Current consumption, average consumption, convenience consumers, ECO Ad- vice, travelling time, distance travelled, average speed, digital speed display, Instrument panel Multifunction display ››› page 69 speed warning, oil temperature, coolant temperature, reset data “when setting off”, reset data for “total calculation”, traffic signal detection

Date and time – Time source, time, select time zone, time format, date, date format ››› page 75

Distance, speed, temperature, volume, fuel consumption, GNC consumption, Units – – electric consumption, pressure

Vehicle ID number, date of next SEAT service inspection, date of next oil change Service – ››› page 77 service

Restore all settings and data Restore all settings – Factory settings Restore settings/data sepa‐ Lights, driver assistance, parking and manoeuvring, background lighting, rear – rately view mirrors and windscreen wipers, opening and closing, instrument panel

When the function button check box is activa- Any changes made using the settings menus The actual number of menus available and ted , the function is active. are automatically saved on closing those the name of the various options will depend menus. on the vehicle’s electronics and equipment. Pressing the menu button  will always take you to the last menu used.

84 Instruments and warning/control lamps

Multifunction steering wheel*

Operation of the audio, telephone and navigation system with voice control

Fig. 69 Controls on the steering wheel.

The steering wheel includes a multifunction the audio, telephone and radio/navigation module from where it is possible to control functions without needing to distract the driver.

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone* Navigation*

A Turn announcement volume Turn volume up/down. Turn volume up/down. Turn volume up/down. Turn volume up/down. Turn up/down.

A Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute incoming call. Mute voice navigation. Press

Enable/disable voice controlb). B a) This function can be used from any mode, except in the case of an active call.

Short press: Switch to the – No active call: Radio/Me- No function for the other modes Search for the previous/next previous/next track. dia functionality (except C / D No function (navigation, assistants, vehicle stationc). Long press: Fast rewind/for- AUX) status, travel data). wardd). – Active call: no function

E / F a) Change menu on instrument panel.b) »

85 Operation

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone* Navigation*

Short press b): Change views Classic Info / Digital Maps / Semicircular dials G Long press b): access the “Personalised Profiles” configuration view.

If there is a map on the Digital – There is no active call: Re- Scorecard: Zoom in-out (with and cent calls list. without active route). H List of sources available List of sources available – Active call: go to the call If there is no map on the Digital No function Turn (audio/media). (audio/media). options list (call in standby, Panel: the map is transferred from hang up, mute microphone, the infotainment System display private number, etc.). to the Digital Panel (with and without active route).

H Auto/Manual Zoom Zoom if the No function No function No function No function Press map on the DigitScorecard.

a) According to the vehicle's equipment package. b) This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, vehicle status, travel data). c) This action can be performed when you are listening to the radio; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode. d) These actions can be performed when you are listening to media; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode.

86 Opening and closing

Opening and closing cle. The range of the vehicle key with remote control and new battery is several metres around the vehicle. Set of vehicle keys If it is not possible to open or close the vehicle using the remote control key, this should be Related video re-synchronised ››› page 89 or the battery changed ››› page 88. Different keys belonging to the vehicle may be used. Fig. 72 Vehicle key with alarm button. Control lamp on the vehicle key Fig. 70 Opening and Key to the ››› Fig. 71, ››› Fig. 72 When a button on the vehicle key is pressed, closing 1 Unlock the vehicle the control lamp flashes ››› Fig. 71 (arrow) once briefly, but if the button is held down for 2 Lock the vehicle a longer period the control lamp flashes sev- Vehicle key 3 Unlock only the rear lid. Press the button eral times, such as in convenience opening. until all the turn signals on the vehicle flash briefly. You have 2 minutes to open If the vehicle key control lamp does not light the rear lid. Once this time has passed, it up when the button is pressed, replace the will lock again. In addition, the lamp on key's battery ››› page 88. the key flashes. Spare key 4 Folding the key shaft in and out To obtain a spare key and other vehicle keys, 5 Alarm button*. Only press in the event of the vehicle ID number is required. an emergency! When the alarm button is pressed, the vehicle's sounds and the turn Each new key contains a microchip which signals light up for a short time. Press must be coded with the data from the vehicle again to disconnect. electronic immobiliser. A vehicle key will not Fig. 71 Assignment of buttons on the remote work if it does not contain a microchip or the control key. With the vehicle key the vehicle may be microchip has not been encoded. This is also locked or unlocked remotely ››› page 89. true for keys which are specially cut for the The vehicle key includes an emitter and bat- vehicle. » tery. The receiver is in the interior of the vehi-

87 Operation

The vehicle keys or new spare keys can be Note To change the battery obtained from a SEAT Official Service, a specialised workshop or an approved key service ● Only use the key button when you require the corresponding function. Pushing the qualified to create this kind of key. button unnecessarily could accidentally New keys or spare keys must be synchronised unlock the vehicle or trigger the alarm. It is before use ››› page 89. also possible even when you are outside the radius of action. WARNING ● Key operation can be greatly influenced ● Never leave children or disabled persons by overlapping radio signals close to the in the vehicle. In case of emergency, they vehicle working in the same range of fre- may not be able to leave the vehicle or quencies, for example, radio transmitters or manage on their own. mobile telephones. Fig. 73 Vehicle key: opening the battery com- ● An uncontrolled use of the key could start ● Obstacles between the remote control partment cover. the engine or activate any electric equip- and the vehicle, bad weather conditions ment (e.g. electric windows), causing risk and discharged batteries can considerably of accident. The doors can be locked using reduce the range of the remote control. the remote control key. This could become ● If the buttons of the vehicle key are an obstacle for assistance in an emergen- pressed or one of the central locking but- cy situation. tons ››› page 92 is pressed repeatedly in ● Never forget the keys inside the vehicle. short succession, the central locking brief- An unauthorised use of your vehicle could ly disconnects as protection against over- result in injury, damage or theft. Therefore loading. The vehicle is then unlocked. Lock always take the key with you when you it if necessary. leave the vehicle. ● Spare remote control keys are available ● Never remove the key from the ignition if at your Technical Service, where they must the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the be matched to the locking system. Fig. 74 Vehicle key: removing the battery. steering could suddenly block and it would ● Up to five remote control keys can be be impossible to steer the vehicle. used. SEAT recommends you ask a specialised workshop to replace the battery. CAUTION The battery is located to the rear of the vehicle key, under a cover. All of the vehicle keys contain electronic components. Protect them from damage, impacts and humidity. 88 Opening and closing

Changing the battery Synchronize the vehicle key The battery of an unlocked vehicle parked for ● Unfold the vehicle key blade ››› page 87. a long period (e.g. in a private garage) may If the  button is pressed frequently outside run down and fail to start the motor. ● Remove the cover from the back of the ve- of the vehicle range, it is possible that the vehicle key Fig. 73 in the direction of the ar- ››› hicle can no longer be locked or unlocked us- WARNING row ››› . ing the key. In this case, the key must be re- The incorrect use of the central locking ● Extract the battery from the compartment synchronised as described below: system may cause serious injuries. using a suitable thin object ››› Fig. 74. ● Unfold the vehicle key blade ››› page 87. ● The central locking system will lock all ● Place the new battery in the compartment doors. A vehicle locked from the inside can ● as shown ››› Fig. 74, pressing in the opposite If necessary, remove the cover from the prevent any non-authorised individual from direction to that shown by the arrow ››› . driver door lever ››› page 99. opening the doors and accessing the vehi- ● Fit the cover as shown ››› Fig. 73, pressing it ● Press the  button on the vehicle key. For cle. Nevertheless, in case of emergency or onto the vehicle key casing in the opposite di- this, it must remain with the vehicle. accident, locked doors will complicate access to the vehicle interior to help the pas- rection to that shown by the arrow until it ● Open the vehicle within one minute using sengers. clicks into place. the key blade. The key has been synchronised. ● Never leave children or disabled people CAUTION alone in the vehicle. The central locking ● If necessary, fit the cap. button can be used to lock all the doors ● If the battery is not changed correctly, from within. Therefore, passengers will be the vehicle key may be damaged. locked inside the vehicle. Individuals locked ● Use of unsuitable batteries may damage in the vehicle can be exposed to very high the vehicle key. For this reason, always re- Central locking or very low temperatures. place the dead battery with another of the ● Depending on the time of the year, tem- same voltage, size and specifications. Introduction peratures inside a locked and closed vehi- ● When fitting the battery, check that the cle can be extremely high or extremely low polarity is correct. Central locking functions correctly when all resulting in serious injuries and illness or the doors and the rear lid are correctly shut. If even death, particularly for young children. the driver door is open, the vehicle cannot be For the sake of the environment ● Never leave individuals locked in a closed locked with the key. and locked vehicle. In case of emergency, Please dispose of your used batteries cor- If the vehicle has the Keyless Access locking they may not be able to exit the vehicle by rectly and with respect for the environ- themselves or get help. ment. and ignition system, it may only be locked with the ignition off and the driver's door closed.

89 Operation

Description Unlocking one side of the vehicle only Accidental lock-out When you lock the vehicle with the key, the The central locking system prevents you from Central locking allows all doors, the rear lid doors and the rear lid are locked. When you being locked out of the vehicle in the follow- and the tank flap to be unlocked centrally: open the door, you can either unlock only the ing situations: driver door, or all the vehicle doors. To select ● From outside, using the vehicle key the required option, use Easy Connect* ● If the driver door is open, the vehicle cannot ››› page 91. ››› page 90. be locked with the central locking switch ● From outside with the Keyless Access ››› page 92. ››› page 92 system, Automatic locking (Auto Lock)* Lock the vehicle with the remote control key, ● From inside, by pushing the central locking The Auto Lock function locks the doors and when all the doors and the rear lid have been button page 92. ››› the rear lid when the vehicle exceeds a speed closed. This prevents the accidental locking Various functions are available to improve the of about 15 km/h (9 mph). of the vehicle. vehicle safety: The vehicle is unlocked again when the igni- Note tion key is removed. Alternatively, the vehicle ● Security system “Safe” page 95 ››› can also be unlocked via the central locking ● Never leave any valuable items in the ve- ● Self-locking system to prevent involuntary switch or by pulling one of the inside door hicle unattended. Even a locked vehicle is unlocking handles. not a safe. ● If the LED on the driver door sill lights up ● Selective unlocking system In the event of an accident in which the air- for about 30 seconds when the vehicle is ● Automatic speed dependent locking and bags inflate, the doors will be automatically locked, the central locking system or anti- unlocking system (Auto Lock) unlocked to facilitate access and assistance. theft alarm* is not working properly. You ● Emergency unlocking system should have the fault repaired at a SEAT Turn signals Official Service or specialised workshop. Self-locking system to prevent involuntary The turn signals will flash twice when the ve- ● The vehicle interior monitoring of the an- unlocking hicle is unlocked and once when the vehicle ti-theft alarm* system will only function as It is an anti-theft system and prevents the un- is locked. intended if the windows and the sunroof* are closed. intentional unlocking of the vehicle. If the ve- If it does not flash, this indicates that one of hicle is unlocked and none of the doors (in- the doors, the rear lid or the bonnet is not cluding the boot) are opened within 30 sec- closed correctly. onds, it re-locks automatically. Central locking settings

Central locking settings can be changed in the Easy Connect* system. 90 Opening and closing

Unlocking doors ● Lock: press the  ››› Fig. 75 button. The Safe* security system and the anti-theft ● Select: key  > SETTINGS > Opening ● Locking the vehicle without the “Safe” se- alarm* deactivate immediately when only and closing > Central locking > Un- curity system: push the  button again and the driver door is opened. locking the doors. hold for 2 seconds. In vehicles with Easy Connect*, you can pro- ● Unlock: press the  button. gramme the security central locking system You can choose to unlock all the doors or directly ››› page 90. only the driver door when you unlock the ● Unlocking the rear lid: hold down the  button for at least 1 second. vehicle. In all the options, the fuel tank flap is WARNING also unlocked. The vehicle will be locked again automatical- Observe the safety warnings ››› in Lock- With the Driver setting, when you press the ly if you do not open one of the doors or the ing system “Safe” on page 96.  button on the remote control key once, only rear lid within 30 seconds after unlocking the the driver door is unlocked. If that button is car. This function prevents the vehicle from Note pressed twice, the rest of the doors and the remaining unlocked if the unlocking button is rear lid will be unlocked. pressed by mistake. This does not apply if you ● Do not use the remote control key until press the  button for at least one second. the vehicle is visible. If the  button is pressed, all the vehicle doors are locked. At the same time, a confir- ● Other functions of the remote control key mation signal* is heard. Selective unlocking system ››› page 105, Convenience open/close function. The selective unlocking system allows you to only unlock the driver door and the fuel tank Unlock and lock from the outside flap. All other doors and the rear lid remain locked.

Unlocking the driver's door and tank flap: ● Press (once) the  button on the remote control key or turn the key once in the opening direction.

Unlocking all the doors, the rear lid and the tank flap simultaneously: ● Within 5 seconds, press (twice) the  button on the remote control key, or turn the key twice within 5 seconds in the opening direc- Fig. 75 Remote control key: buttons. tion.

91 Operation

Unlocking and locking from the in- WARNING Unlock and lock the vehicle with side ● The central locking switch also works Keyless Access* with the ignition switched off, except when the “safe” system is activated. ● The central locking switch does not operate if the vehicle is locked from the outside and the security system is switched on. ● Locked doors could delay assistance in an emergency. Do not leave anyone, especially children, in the vehicle.

Note

Fig. 76 Driver's door: central locking switch. Your vehicle will lock automatically when it Fig. 78 Keyless Access: proximity zones. reaches a speed of about 15 km/h (9 mph) ● Lock: press the  ››› Fig. 76 button. (Auto Lock) ››› page 90. You can unlock the vehicle again using the  button on the ● Unlock: press the  ››› Fig. 76 button. central locking switch. Please note the following when using the central locking switch to lock your vehicle: Related video Keyless Access ● It is not possible to open the doors or the rear lid from the outside (for safety reasons, e.g. when stopped at traffic lights). ● The LED in the central locking switch lights up when all the doors are closed and locked. Fig. 79 Door handle: sensor surfaces ● You can open the doors individually from the inside by pulling the inside door handle. ››› Fig. 79 Fig. 77 Convenience ● In the event of an accident in which the air- A Unlocking sensor surface on the inside of bags inflate, doors locked from the inside will the door handle. be automatically unlocked to facilitate ac- B Locking sensor surface on the outside of cess and assistance. the door handle.

92 Opening and closing

Depending on the equipment, the vehicle one of the sensor surfaces on the door han- The vehicle will lock again after a few sec- may have the Keyless Access system. dles is touched or the softtouch/handle on onds if you unlock the vehicle but fail to open the rear lid is operated. any door or boot hatch. Keyless Access is a key-free locking and ignition system to unlock and lock the vehicle The following features are then available Unlocking and opening the doors without actively using its key. To do this, all without having to use the vehicle key actively: (Keyless-Entry) that is required is to have a valid vehicle key in the detection area where you are attempting ● Keyless Entry: unlocking the vehicle using ● Grip one of the front door handles. When to access the vehicle ››› Fig. 78 and to touch the handles of the front doors or the soft- you do this, you touch the sensor surface one of the sensor surfaces on the door han- touch/handle on the rear lid. ››› Fig. 79 A (arrow) of the handle and the dles ››› Fig. 79 or operate the softtouch/han- ● Keyless Exit: locking the vehicle using the vehicle unlocks. dle on the rear lid ››› page 100 ››› . sensor of the driver or passenger door han- ● Open the door. dle. The vehicle can be unlocked and locked via On vehicles with selective opening or info- the front doors only. When doing so, the re- ● Easy Open: opening the rear lid moving one tainment system configuration, pulling the mote control key must be no further than ap- foot below the rear bumper ››› page 103. door handle twice will unlock all doors. prox. 1.5 m away from the door handle. ● Press & Drive: keyless starting of the engine with the starter button page 246. It does not matter where you carry the key, ››› In vehicles without the “Safe” security sys- e.g. in your jacket pocket. The central locking and locking systems op- tem: closing and locking the doors (Keyless-Exit) Once the doors have been locked, they can- erate in the same way as a normal locking not be opened again immediately. This will and unlocking system. Only the controls ● Switch the ignition off. enable you to check that the doors are prop- change. ● Close the driver's door. erly closed. Unlocking the vehicle is confirmed with a ● Touch (once) the locking sensor surface If you wish you may unlock only the corre- double flash of the indicator lights; locking by ››› Fig. 79 B (arrow) on one of the front door sponding door or the entire vehicle. The nec- a single flash. handles. The door that is used must be essary adjustments can be made in vehicles If the vehicle is locked and then all doors and closed. with a driver information system the rear lid are closed leaving the last key ››› page 82››› page 68. used inside the vehicle and none outside, the In vehicles with the “Safe” security sys- vehicle will not lock immediately. All the ve- tem: closing and locking the doors General information hicle's indicator lights will flash four times. (Keyless-Exit) If a valid key is in the proximity of the car, The vehicle will lock after a few seconds if ● Switch the ignition off. you do not open any door or the rear lid. ››› Fig. 78 the Keyless Access locking and ● Close the driver's door. » starting system gives the key entry as soon as

93 Operation

● Touch (once) the sensor surface ››› Fig. 79 the passenger doors are automatically disa- vehicle will not unlock. Deactivation is also B (arrow) on one of the front door handles. bled. possible if the vehicle is locked through the The vehicle locks with the “Safe” security sys- driver’s door lock. If one of the sensor surfaces on the door han- tem ››› page 95. The door that is used must dles is often activated in an unusual manner ● To check that the function has been deacti- be closed. with the vehicle locked (e.g. by the branches vated, wait at least 10 seconds, grip and pull ● Touch (twice) the sensor surface ››› Fig. 79 of a bush rubbing against it), all proximity on the door handle. The door should not B (arrow) of one of the front door handles to sensors are disabled for a certain period of open. lock the vehicle without activating the time. “Safelock” security system ››› page 95. The next time the door can only be unlocked Sensors will again be enabled: via the remote control or the lock cylinder. The next time the door is locked/unlocked, Unlocking and locking the boot hatch ● After a time. Keyless Access will be active again. When the vehicle is locked, the rear lid auto- ● OR: if the vehicle is unlocked with the but- matically unlocks on opening if there is a val- ton  on the key. Convenience functions id vehicle key in the proximity ››› Fig. 78. ● OR: if the boot is opened. To close all the electric windows and the sun- Open or close the rear lid normally. ● OR: if the vehicle is unlocked manually with roof using the comfort function, keep a fin- After closing, the hatch locks automatically. If the key. ger for a few seconds on the locking sensor the complete vehicle is unlocked, the rear lid surface ››› Fig. 79 B (arrow) of the door han- will not lock automatically after closing it. Keyless Access temporary disconnection dle until the windows and roof have closed. function* How the doors open when touching the sen- What happens when locking the vehicle You can deactivate the vehicle's Keyless sor surface on the door handle will depend with a second key Access unlocking for one locking and unlock- on the settings that have been activated in If there is a vehicle key inside the vehicle and ing cycle. the infotainment system, using the button  it is locked from the outside with a second ve- > SETTINGS > Opening and closing. ● Move the gear lever to position P (if the vehicle key, the key inside the vehicle is blocked hicle has automatic gearbox), since other- for engine ignition ››› page 246. In order to CAUTION wise the vehicle cannot be locked. enable engine ignition, press the  button on The sensor surfaces on the door handles the key inside the vehicle. ● Close the door. could engage if hit with a water jet or high ● Push the central locking button  on the re- pressure steam if there is a valid vehicle Automatically disabling sensors mote control and touch the locking sensor key in the proximity. If at least one of the electric windows is open and the sensor If the vehicle is not locked or unlocked for a surface of the driver door handle surface ››› Fig. 79 B (arrow) on one of the long period of time, the proximity sensors on ››› Fig. 79 B within the following 5 seconds. Do not grasp the door handle; otherwise the 94 Opening and closing

handles is activated continuously, all win- could happen if any other radio frequency the control panel screen stating that the dows will close. signal interferes with the key signal (e.g. “Safe” security system is activated. from a mobile device accessory) or if the key is covered by another object (e.g. an Lock the vehicle and activate the “Safe” Note aluminium case). security system. ● If the vehicle battery has little or no ● If the sensors are very dirty, e.g. have a ● Press the locking button  once on the ve- charge, or the vehicle key battery is almost layer of salt, the correct functioning of the hicle key. or entirely out of charge, you will probably sensors on the door handles may be affec- not be able to lock or unlock the vehicle ted. In this case, clean the vehicle. with the Keyless Access system. The vehi- Lock the vehicle without activating the cle can be unlocked or locked manually ● If the vehicle is equipped with an auto- “Safe” system. matic gearbox, it may only be locked in the ››› page 99. ● Press the locking  button on the vehicle gear stick is in position P. ● To control the proper locking of the vehi- key twice. ● To improve the safety of your vehicle, the cle, the release function is disabled for ap- ● On vehicles with the Keyless Access locking prox. 2 seconds. remote control of the system is equipped with a position sensor. If this remote control and ignition system: touch the sensor surface ● If the message Keyless access system does not detect movement for a certain on the outside part of the door handle twice. faulty is displayed on the screen of the length of time, the system will conclude dash panel, abnormalities may occur in the that the vehicle cannot be opened (e.g. on When the “Safe” security system is disa- operation of the Keyless Access system. a night table) so it will be disabled. bled, the following needs to be taken into Contact a specialised workshop. SEAT rec- account: ommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this. ● The vehicle can be opened and unlocked 1) ● Depending on the function set on the in- Locking system “Safe” from the inside using an inside door handle. fotainment system for the mirrors, the exte- ● The anti-theft alarm is activated. When the vehicle is locked, the “Safe” securi- rior mirrors will unfold and the surround ● The vehicle interior monitoring system and lighting will come on when unlocking the ty system puts the door handles out of opera- the anti-tow system are disabled. vehicle using the sensor surface on the tion and makes it difficult for unauthorized driver and passenger door handles people to enter. The doors cannot be opened “Safe” status ››› page 121. from inside ››› . The flashing frequency of the diode in the ● If there is no valid key inside the vehicle Depending on the vehicle, when switching the door sill immediately confirms the process. or the system fails to detect one, a warning ignition off, a warning may be displayed on will display on the dash panel screen. This Initially, the diode flashes in a fast sequence »

1) Available depending on market and version. 95 Operation

for a brief period, then it stops for approxi- quently closed, they will be automatically in- ● Movement inside the vehicle (in vehicles mately 30 seconds and, lastly continues cluded in the protection areas of the vehicle with interior monitoring ››› page 97). flashing slowly. and the turn signals will flash accordingly ● When the vehicle is towed (in vehicles with when the doors close. anti-tow system ››› page 97). WARNING ● The turn signal light will flash twice on ● When the vehicle is raised (in vehicles with Do not leave anyone (especially children) opening and deactivating the alarm. anti-tow system ››› page 97). in the vehicle if it is locked from the outside ● and the “Safe” security system* is activa- ● The turn signal light will flash once on clos- When the vehicle is transported on a ferry ted, as the doors and windows cannot then ing and activating the alarm. or by rail (vehicles with an anti-tow system or be opened from the inside. Locked doors vehicle interior monitoring ››› page 97). could delay assistance in an emergency. When does the system trigger an alarm? ● When a trailer connected to the anti-theft The anti-theft alarm siren will be triggered for alarm system is disconnected. about 30 seconds alongside a sound and How to turn OFF the alarm Anti-theft alarm system* optical (flashing) warning signals and will be repeated about ten times when the vehicle is ● Unlock the vehicle with the unlock button  locked and the following unauthorised ac- of the key. Description tions are attempted: ● OR: turn the ignition on with a valid key. The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficult to ● Opening a door that is mechanically un- If the driver’s door is unlocked mechanically break into the vehicle or steal it. The system locked using the vehicle key without switching using the key, the key must be inserted into will initiate acoustic and optical warning sig- on the ignition in the next 15 seconds (in cer- the ignition, and the ignition must be turned nals when your vehicle is tried to be forced. tain markets, such as the Netherlands, there is on within 15 seconds of opening the door. no 15 second waiting time and the alarm is The anti-theft alarm is automatically turned activated immediately on opening the door). Otherwise, the alarm will trigger for 30 sec. on when the vehicle is locked with the key. and the ignition will be blocked. The system is immediately activated and the ● A door is opened. turn signal light located on the driver door will ● Opening the bonnet. CAUTION flash along with the turn signals, indicating ● The rear lid is opened. that the alarm and the locking security sys- If the anti-theft security system is switched tem (double lock) have been turned on. ● When the ignition is switched on with a non- off, the vehicle interior monitoring and the authorised key. tow-away protection are automatically If any of the doors or the bonnet are open, ● Undue manipulation of the alarm. disconnected. they will not be included in the protection zones of the vehicle when the alarm is con- ● Disconnection of the vehicle battery. nected. If the door or the bonnet are subse- 96 Opening and closing

Note Interior monitoring and the anti- The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti- tow system* tow system are automatically switched on ● After 28 days, the indicator light will be again next time the vehicle is locked. switched off to prevent the battery from ex- hausting if the vehicle has been left parked It is a monitoring or control function incorpo- If you wish to switch off the vehicle interior for a long period of time. The alarm system rated in the anti-theft alarm* which detects monitoring and the anti-tow system, it must remains activated. unauthorised vehicle entry by means of ultra- be done each time that the vehicle is locked; ● If, after the audible warning goes off, an- sound. if not, they will be automatically switched on. other monitored area is accessed (e.g. the The vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti- rear lid is opened after a door has been sensor (tilt sensor) are automatically switch- tow system should be switched off if animals opened), the alarm is triggered again. ed on when the anti-theft alarm is switched are left inside the locked vehicle (otherwise, ● The anti-theft alarm is not activated on. In order to activate it, all the doors and their movements will trigger the alarm) or when the vehicle is locked from within using the rear lid must be closed. when, for example, the vehicle is transported the central locking button . If the “Safe” security system* ››› page 95 is or has to be towed with only one axle on the ● If the driver door is unlocked mechanical- switched off, the vehicle interior monitoring ground. ly with the key, only the driver door is un- and the tow-away protection are automati- locked, the rest of the doors remain locked. cally disconnected. Deactivation through the infotainment Only when the ignition has been turned on system will the other doors be available - but not unlocked - and the central locking button Activation ● Turn off the ignition and select: key  > will be activated. ● It is automatically switched on when the SETTINGS > Opening and closing> Cen- tral locking > Interior monitoring. ● If the vehicle battery is run down or flat anti-theft alarm is activated. then the anti-theft alarm will not operate ● When the vehicle is locked now, the vehicle correctly. Deactivation interior monitoring and the tow-away protection are switched off until the next time the ● Vehicle monitoring remains active even if ● Open the vehicle with the key, either me- door is opened. the battery is disconnected or not working chanically or by pressing the  button on the for any reason. remote control. The time period from when ● The alarm is triggered immediately if one the door is opened until the key is inserted in False alarms of the battery cables is disconnected while the contact should not exceed 15 seconds, Interior monitoring will only operate correctly the alarm system is active. otherwise the alarm will be triggered. if the vehicle is completely closed. Please ob- ● Press the  button on the remote control serve related legal requirements. » twice. The volumetric sensor and tilt sensors will be deactivated. The alarm system remains activated. 97 Operation

The following cases may cause a false once all the doors are closed (including the ● Open and close the doors and the rear lid alarm: rear lid). only when there is nobody in the way. ● Open windows (partially or fully). ● Panoramic/tilting sunroof open (partially or CAUTION completely). Doors When opening and closing in an emergen- ● Movement of objects inside the vehicle, cy, carefully disassemble components and then reassemble them carefully to avoid such as loose papers, items hanging from the Introduction rear vision mirror (air fresheners), etc. damage to the vehicle. The doors and rear lid can be locked man- Note ually and partially opened, for example if the ● If the vehicle is relocked and the alarm is key or the central locking is damaged. activated without the volumetric sensor function, relocking will activate the alarm WARNING with all its functions, except the volumetric Opening and closing doors carelessly can sensor. This function is reactivated when cause serious injury. the alarm is switched on again, unless it is deliberately switched off. ● If the vehicle is locked from outside, the doors and windows cannot be opened from ● If the alarm has been triggered by the the inside. volumetric sensor, this will be indicated by a flashing of the warning lamp on the driver ● Never leave children or disabled people door when the vehicle is opened. The flash alone in the car. They could be trapped in is different to the flash indicating the alarm the car in an emergency and will not be is activated. able to get themselves to safety. ● The vibration of a mobile phone left in- ● Depending on the time of the year, tem- side the vehicle may cause the vehicle in- peratures inside a locked and closed vehi- terior monitoring alarm to trigger, as both cle can be extremely high or extremely low sensors react to movements and shakes in- resulting in serious injuries and illness or side the vehicle. even death, particularly for young children. ● If on activating the alarm, any door or the rear lid is open, only the alarm will be acti- WARNING vated. The vehicle interior monitoring and Getting in the way of the doors and the rear the anti-tow system will only be activated lid is dangerous and can lead to serious injury. 98 Opening and closing

Emergency unlocking or locking of As a general rule, when the driver door is Emergency lock of doors without the driver’s door locked manually all other doors are locked. lock cylinders When it is unlocked manually, only the driver door opens. Please observe the instructions relating to the anti-theft alarm system ››› page 96.

● Unfold the vehicle key blade ››› page 87. ● Insert the key shaft into the lower opening in the cover on the driver door handle ››› Fig. 81 then remove the cover upwards. ● Insert the key blade into the lock cylinder to unlock or lock the vehicle. Fig. 80 Driver door handle: Concealed lock Fig. 82 Locking the door manually. cylinder. Special characteristics ● The anti-theft alarm will remain active If the central locking system should fail to when vehicles are unlocked. However, the work at any time, doors with no lock cylinder alarm will not be triggered ››› page 96. will have to be locked separately. ● After the driver door is opened, you have 15 The emergency lock is located on the front of seconds to switch on the ignition. Once this the front passenger's door and the rear time has elapsed, the alarm is triggered. doors. It can only be seen if the door is open. ● Switch the ignition on. The electronic immo- ● Insert the key in the inside slot and turn it to bilizer recognises a valid vehicle key and de- the right as far as it will go (if the door is on activates the anti-theft alarm system. the right side) or to the left (if the door is on the left side). Note The anti-theft alarm is not activated when Once the door has been closed it can no lon- Fig. 81 Driver door handle: lever the cover off the vehicle is locked manually using the ger be opened from the outside. Pull the inte- key shaft ››› page 89. rior door handle once to unlock and open the If the central locking system should fail to op- door. erate, the driver door can still be locked and unlocked by turning the key in the lock.

99 Operation

Childproof locks Deactivating the childproof lock ● Closing the rear lid without observing – Unlock the vehicle and open the door and ensuring it is clear could cause serious whose childproof lock you want to deacti- injury to you and to third parties. Make sure vate. that no one is in the path of the rear lid. ● Never drive with the rear lid open or half- – With the door open, rotate the groove in the closed, exhaust gases may penetrate into door using the ignition key, anti-clockwise the interior of the vehicle. Danger of poi- for the left hand side doors ››› Fig. 83 and soning! clockwise for the right hand side doors. ● Never leave the vehicle unattended or al- Once the childproof lock is activated, the low children to play inside or next to it, es- door can only be opened from the outside. pecially if the rear lid is open. Children could enter the luggage compartment, Fig. 83 Childproof lock on the left hand side close the rear lid and become trapped. A door. locked vehicle can reach extremely high Rear lid and low temperatures, depending on the The childproof lock prevents the rear doors time of year, thus causing serious injuries, illness or even death. from being opened from the inside. This sys- Introduction tem prevents minors from opening a door accidentally while the vehicle is running. WARNING CAUTION This function is independent of the vehicle Before opening or closing the rear lid, make Careless and unsuitable locking, opening electronic opening and locking systems. It sure that there is enough space to open or and closing of the rear lid can cause acci- close it, e.g. when pulling a trailer or in a only affects rear doors. It can only be activa- dents and serious injury. ted and deactivated manually, as described garage. ● The rear lid must not be opened when the below: reverse or rear fog lights are lit. This may damage the tail lights. Note Activating the childproof lock ● Do not close the rear lid by pushing it Before closing the rear lid, make sure that – Unlock the vehicle and open the door in down with your hand on the rear window. the key has not been left inside the luggage which you wish to activate the childproof The glass could smash. Risk of injury! compartment. lock. ● Ensure the rear lid is locked after closing – With the door open, rotate the groove in the it. If not, it may open unexpectedly while door using the ignition key, clockwise for driving. the left hand side doors ››› Fig. 83 and anti- clockwise for the right hand side doors. 100 Opening and closing

Opening and closing the rear lid If the doors are locked, the rear lid is also Opening the rear lid locked. ● Unlock the vehicle ››› page 89 and briefly press the handle of the rear lid. On vehicles with Keyless Access you can directly press Rear lid with electric opening and the handle of the rear lid. The rear lid is un- closing* locked if an authorised key is recognised in the proximity of the vehicle. ● OR: depending on the features, pull the  button on the driver door upwards ››› Fig. 86. The button also works when the ignition is switched off. ● OR: press and hold the  button of the ve- Fig. 84 Rear lid: handle hicle key for approx. 1 second. If the vehicle is The rear lid opening system operates electri- locked, only the rear lid is unlocked (the doors cally. It is activated by exerting slight pressure remain locked). on the handle ››› Fig. 84. ● OR: on vehicles with Keyless Access and sensor-controlled opening you can open the To lock or unlock the rear lid, press the  or Fig. 85 Rear lid: button to close the rear lid. rear lid by moving one foot in the area of the  buttons of the vehicle key. sensors located below the rear bumper (Easy A warning appears on the instrument panel Open ››› page 103). The rear lid will be auto- display if the rear lid is open or not properly matically opened. closed.* An audible warning is also given if it is opened while the vehicle is moving faster Closing the rear lid than 6 km/h (4 mph)*. ● Briefly press the  button on the rear lid ››› Fig. 85 ››› in Introduction on page 100. Opening and closing ● OR: depending on the features, pull the  ● To open: place slight pressure on the han- button on the driver door upwards ››› Fig. 86. dle. The rear lid opens automatically. ● OR: on vehicles with Keyless Access, press ● To close: hold one of the handles on the in- Fig. 86 On the driver’s door: button to open and hold the  vehicle key button until the ner trim and close it by moving it downwards, and close the rear lid. rear lid is closed, or move one foot into the or press the button on the rear lid* ››› Fig. 85. area of the sensors located below the rear bumper (Easy Open) ››› page 103. The key of » 101 Operation

the vehicle must not be further away than 1.5 Restrictions if the vehicle has a third row of ● Interrupt the opening process in the desired m from the boot or inside the vehicle. seats position. ● OR: manually move the rear lid in the direc- If the vehicle is fitted with a third row of seats, ● Press the  button ››› Fig. 85 on the rear tion of closing until it closes automatically. it will not be possible to close the tailgate with lid for at least 3 seconds. ● The rear lid goes down automatically to the the  button, on the driver’s door ››› Fig. 86, The opening angle is memorised. Memorisa- final position and also closes automatically or with the vehicle key. This happens regard- tion is indicated by blinking of the hazard ››› in Introduction on page 100. less of whether the seats in the third row are folded or not. warning lights and an audible warning. Interrupting opening or closing Particular features if towing a trailer Resetting and memorising the opening an- After beginning to open or close the rear lid, gle the action can be halted by pressing one of If the factory-fitted towing bracket is electri- For the rear lid to reopen completely, the the  buttons. cally connected to a trailer ››› page 332, the electric rear lid can only be opened or closed opening angle must be reset and memorised Continue opening or closing the rear lid by with the buttons on the rear lid itself. again. hand. To do this, some force will have to be ● used. Release the rear lid and open it to the Acoustic warnings memorised height. If you press one of the  buttons again, the Throughout the process of opening or closing ● Lift the rear lid by hand as far as it goes. To rear lid will move again in the original direc- the rear lid, acoustic warnings can be heard. do this, some force will have to be used. tion. Exception: when the rear lid is opened man- ● Press the  button ››› Fig. 85 on the rear ually using the handle or the Easy Open func- If the rear lid is met with resistance or an ob- lid for at least 3 seconds. stacle during the automatic opening or clos- tion with the movement of the foot or closed ● This resets and memorises the factory-set ing, opening or closing will be interrupted im- using the button on the rear lid itself opening angle. Memorisation is indicated by mediately. For the closing process, the rear ››› Fig. 85. blinking of the hazard warning lights and an lid opens again slightly. Modifying and memorising the opening audible warning. ● Check why it has not been possible to open angle or close the rear lid. Automatic protection against overheating If the space behind or above the vehicle is ● Try to open or close the rear lid again. less than the travel area of the rear lid, you If the system is operated repeatedly in a short ● If necessary, the rear lid can be opened or can change the opening angle of the rear lid. space of time, it automatically switches off to prevent overheating. closed by hand using reasonable force. To memorise a new opening angle, the rear lid must be open at least halfway. Once the system is cool again, the function can be reused. Until then, the rear lid can only

102 Opening and closing be opened and closed by hand using reason- Rear lid with sensor-controlled ● If the rear lid fails to open, repeat the pro- able force. opening and closing (Easy Open) cedure after a few seconds. If with the rear lid open the vehicle battery is To notify that the rear lid has been opened disconnected ››› page 358 or the corre- with the Easy Open function, the turn lights sponding fuse burns out ››› page 57, the sys- blink twice. tem will have to be reset. This requires closing the rear lid completely once. The rear lid can be closed with another foot movement similar to the opening one (provi- Emergency unlocking ded a valid vehicle key is in the proximity of the rear lid). ››› page 104 When closed, the rear lid automatically locks WARNING if the vehicle has been locked beforehand and there is no valid key inside. If a lot of snow builds up on the rear lid or it Fig. 87 Rear lid with sensor-controlled open- While the rear lid is in motion (either opening is heavily loaded, the rear lid may not open ing (Easy Open). or, after opening, it may lower by itself due or closing), it can be stopped with another to the extra weight and cause serious in- If there is a valid vehicle key in the proximity foot movement similar to the opening one jury. of the rear lid, it is possible to unlock and (provided a valid vehicle key is in the proximi- ● Do not open the rear lid when there is a open or close it moving one foot in the area of ty of the rear lid). lot of snow on it or when carrying a load the sensors located under the rear bumper. The Easy Open feature is not available or on- (e.g. on a rack). ly has limited availability in the following sit- ● Switch the ignition off. ● Before opening the rear lid, remove the uations (examples): snow or the load. ● Stand in front of the rear bumper, in the middle. ● If the rear bumper is very dirty. ● With a brisk movement, bring your foot and ● If the rear bumper is wet with salt water, e.g. lower leg as close as you can to the bumper. after having driven on gritted roads. The lower part of the leg needs to be close to ● If the electrical unlocking tow hitch is not the upper sensor area and your foot must be covered. close to the lower sensor area ››› Fig. 87 1 . ● If the vehicle has been equipped at a later ● Quickly remove your foot and lower leg time with a tow bracket. from the sensor areas ››› Fig. 87 2 . The rear lid will be automatically opened. In the event of heavy rain, the Easy Open feature may take a little longer to open the boot »

103 Operation

or may deactivate automatically, to avoid the ● Before attaching a bicycle rack or a trail- Window controls boot opening by accident, e.g. because of er, ››› page 332, always disable the Easy the running water. Open feature via the infotainment system. Electrically opening and closing The Easy Open function can be connected the windows and disconnected permanently in the infotainment system using the button  > SET- Emergency unlocking of the rear lid TINGS > Opening and closing ››› page 82.

WARNING If there is a valid key in the proximity of the rear lid, in some cases the Easy Open function may be accidentally activated and the rear lid will open, for example, when sweeping under the rear bumper, when directing a water jet or high pressure steam to the area or when carrying out maintenance work or repairs in that area. If acci- Fig. 88 Detail of the luggage compartment: dentally opened, the rear lid could injure emergency unlocking Fig. 89 Detail of the driver's door: window somebody situated in its area of operation controls. or cause material damage. The rear lid can be unlocked from inside in ● Therefore, always make sure that there is the event of an emergency (e.g. no battery). ● Opening the window: press the button . no unsupervised valid key in the area near ● Closing the window: pull the button . the rear lid. There is a groove in the luggage compartment allowing access to the emergency ● Before carrying out any maintenance or Buttons on the driver door opening mechanism. repair work on the vehicle, always disable 1 Window on the front left door the Easy Open feature via the infotainment system. Unlocking the rear lid from inside the lug- 2 Window on the front right door gage compartment ● Before washing the vehicle, always disa- 3 Window on the rear left door ● Insert the key blade into the slot and press ble the Easy Open feature via the infotain- 4 Window on the rear right door ment system. the lever in the direction of the arrow until the lock unlocks ››› Fig. 88. 5 Safety switch for deactivating the electric window buttons in the rear doors.

104 Opening and closing

The front and rear electric windows can be Convenience opening: For the automatic raising function: pull the operated by using the controls on the driver ● Press and hold the  button on the remote button for the corresponding window up- door. The other doors each have a switch for control key until all the windows and the sun- wards until it reaches the second position. their own window. roof* have reached the desired position. For the automatic lowering function: pull Always close the windows fully if you park the ● OR: First unlock the vehicle using the  but- the button for the corresponding window up- vehicle or leave it unattended ››› . ton on the remote control key and then keep wards until it reaches the second position. the key in the driver door lock until all the win- You can use the electric windows for approx. Stop automatic movement: push or pull on dows and the sunroof* have reached the re- 10 minutes after switching off the ignition if the button of the corresponding window. quired position. neither the driver door nor the front passenger door has been opened and the key has Convenience closing: Resetting one-touch opening and closing not been removed from the ignition. ● Press and hold button  on the remote The one-touch opening and closing function control key until all the windows and the sun- is not active after the vehicle battery has Safety switch * roof* are closed ››› . been disconnected or is flat and will have to The safety control Fig. 89 5 on the driver be reset. ››› ● OR: Keep the key in the driver door in the door can be used to disable the electric win- "lock" position until all the windows and the dow buttons on the rear doors. ● Pull the button of the corresponding win- sunroof* are closed. dow and hold it for one second in this posi- Safety switch not pressed: buttons on rear tion. doors are activated. During convenience closing, first the windows and then the sliding sunroof will be closed. ● Release the button and pull upwards and Safety switch pressed: buttons on rear doors hold again. The one-touch function is now Different settings can be changed using the are deactivated. ready for operation. Easy Connect system. Select: key  > SET- The safety control symbol  lights up in yel- TINGS > Opening and closing > Window The automatic one-touch electric windows low if the buttons on the rear doors are operations > Convenience opening. can be reinitialised individually or several at a switched off. time. One-touch opening and closing Convenience open/close function The one-touch automatic opening and clos- WARNING The electric windows can be opened or ing is used to open or close the windows Observe the safety warnings ››› in Intro- closed from outside using the vehicle key: completely. It will not be necessary to hold duction on page 98. the button of the corresponding electric win- ● Incorrect use of the electric windows can dow. result in injury. »

105 Operation

● Never close the rear lid without observing window could not be closed before at- WARNING and ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise tempting to close it again. Observe the safety warnings ››› in Elec- could cause serious injury to you and third trically opening and closing the windows parties. Make sure that no one is in the path on page 105. of a window. Window anti-trap function ● The roll-back function does not prevent ● If the ignition is switched on, the electric fingers or other parts of the body getting equipment could be activated with risk of The roll-back function reduces the risk of in- pinched against the window frame. Risk of injury, for example, in the electric windows. jury when the electric windows close. accident. ● The doors can be locked using the remote control key. This could become an ● If a window is obstructed when closing au- obstacle for assistance in an emergency tomatically, the window stops at this point situation. and lowers immediately ››› . Sunroof* ● Therefore always take the key with you ● Next, check why the window does not close when you leave the vehicle. before attempting it again. Introduction ● The electric windows will work until the ● If you try within the following 10 seconds ignition has been switched off and one of and the window closes again with difficulty or The sunroof consists of two glass parts. The the front doors has been opened. there is an obstruction, the automatic closing rear part is fixed and cannot be opened. It al- ● If necessary, use the safety switch to dis- will stop working for 10 seconds. so has a sun blind. able the rear electric windows. Make sure ● If the window is still obstructed, the window The sunroof only works when the ignition is that they have been disabled. will stop at this point. switched on. Once the ignition has been ● For safety reasons, you should only use ● If there is no obvious reason why the win- switched off, you can still open or close the the remote control open and close func- dow cannot be closed, try to close it again by sunroof for a few minutes provided the driver tions within about 2 metres of the vehicle. pulling the tab within ten seconds. The win- door and the front passenger door are not To avoid injuries, always keep an eye on the opened. windows when pressing the button to close dow closes with maximum force. The roll- back function is now deactivated. them. The windows stop moving as soon as WARNING the button is released. ● If more than 10 seconds pass, the window will open fully when you operate one of the If the sunroof is used negligently or without paying due attention, it can cause serious Note buttons. One-touch closing is reactivated. injury. If the window is not able to close because it ● Open or close the sunroof and the sun is stiff or because of an obstruction, the blind only when no one is in their path of window will automatically open again movement. ››› page 106. If this happens, check why the 106 Opening and closing

● Never leave any key inside the vehicle ● If the sunroof does not work correctly, the tion after briefly pressing the button. Activat- when exiting. anti-trap function will not work either. Con- ing the button again stops the automatic function. ● Never leave a child or any other person tact a specialised workshop. who may need help in the vehicle, especially if they have access to the vehicle Adjusting the tilt position of the sunroof key. If using they key unattended, they Opening and closing the sunroof ● Press the rear part of the button B to the could lock the vehicle, start the engine, first level. switch on the ignition and activate the sun- ● Automatic function: briefly press the rear roof. part of button B to the second level. ● After switching off, it is still possible to open or close the sunroof during a short Closing the sunroof from a tilted position space of time provided that neither the driver nor passenger door is opened. ● Press the front part of the button A to the first level. CAUTION ● Automatic function: briefly press the front part of the button A to the second level. ● To prevent damage, during winter temperatures remove any ice or snow that Stopping the automatic operation by ad- might be on the car roof before opening the Fig. 90 On the interior roof lining: sunroof but- sunroof or adjusting the tilt position. ton. justing the tilted position of the sunroof or by closing the sunroof ● Before leaving the vehicle or in case of rainfall, always close the sunroof. With the The sun blind automatically opens along with ● Press button A or B again. sunroof open or in a tilted position, water the sunroof if completely closed or if in front can enter the interior and can cause con- of the sunroof. The sun blind remains in the Opening the sunroof siderable damage to the electrical system. previous position and does not automatically ● Press button C backwards to the first level. As a result, other damage can occur in the close with the sunroof. The sun blind can only vehicle. be closed completely once the sunroof has ● Automatic function to the comfort position: been closed. briefly press button C backwards to the second level. Note The  button ››› Fig. 90 has two levels. The first level switches the sunroof to the tilted po- ● Leaves and other loose objects that ac- Closing the sunroof cumulate on the sunroof rails should be sition, opening or closing it fully or partially. ● Press button D forwards to the first level. regularly cleaned away either by hand or On the second level, the sunroof automati- with a vacuum. cally moves to the corresponding final posi- ● Automatic function: briefly press button D forwards to the second level. » 107 Operation

Stopping the automatic operation during the corresponding final position. Activating Convenience function to open or the opening or closing the button again stops the automatic func- close the sunroof* tion. ● Press button C or D again. Once the ignition has been switched off, you can still open or close the sun blind for a few Opening and closing the sunshade minutes provided the driver door and the blind front passenger door are not opened.

Opening the sun blind

● Press button 1 to the first level. ● Automatic function: briefly press button 1 to the second level.

Fig. 92 Door handle: sensor surface. Closing the sun blind

● Press button 2 to the first level. The sunroof can be opened and closed with the convenience function, just like the win- ● Automatic function: briefly press button 2 to the second level. dows. Fig. 91 On the interior roof lining: sunshade Using the door lock* blind buttons. Stopping the automatic operation during the opening or closing ● Hold the key in the door lock of the driver The electrical sun blind works when the igni- door in either the unlocking or locking posi- ● Press button 1 or 2 again. tion is switched on. tion to open or close the roof in the tilted position. Release the key to interrupt this func- When the sunroof is in its most tilted position, Note tion. the sun blind automatically goes into a venti- When the sunroof is open, the electric sun lation position. The sun blind remains in this blind can only be closed to the front edge Using the remote control position also with the sunroof closed. of the sunroof. ● Keep the locking or unlocking button press- Buttons ››› Fig. 91 1 and 2 have two levels. ed to open or close the roof. If you release the The first level opens or closes the sun blind button is the opening or closing will stop. fully or partially. By briefly pressing the button to the second level, the sun blind automatically moves to 108 Lights

Using the Keyless Access* system (only the  button ››› Fig. 90 to the second level in Lights closing) the direction of arrow ››› Fig. 90 D until the ● Press and hold the locking sensor surface sunroof closes completely. ››› Fig. 92 (arrow) on the door handle to close ● Sunshade blind: within approximately Vehicle lighting the sunroof. If you release the sensor surface, 5 seconds of having activated the anti-trap the closing movement stops. function, press button ››› Fig. 91 2 until the Related video sun blind closes completely. ● The sunroof or sun blind close without Anti-trap function of the panoramic the anti-trap function intervening! sunroof and sunshade ● If the sunroof or sun blind will still not close, visit a specialised workshop. The anti-trap function can reduce the risk of Fig. 93 Lights and visibil- injury when closing the sunroof and the sun WARNING ity blind ››› . If the sunroof or sun blind encoun- Closing the sunroof or sun blind without the ter resistance or an obstacle when closing, anti-trap function can cause serious inju- they reopen immediately. ries. Control lamps ● Check why the sunroof or sun blind do not ● Always be careful when closing the sun- close. roof and sun blind.  It lights up ● ● No person should ever remain in the way Try to close the sunroof or sun blind again. Driving light totally or partially faulty. of the sunroof or sun blind, especially when ● If the sunroof or sun blind cannot be closed closing without the anti-trap function. Fault in the cornering light system. due to an obstacle or some resistance, it ● The anti-trap function does not prevent stops at the corresponding position and then fingers or other parts of the body from be- opens. For automatic closing, a new closing  It lights up coming trapped against the roof frame and attempt might take place. injuries occurring. Rear fog light switched on ››› page 111. ● If the sunroof or sun blind is still unable to close, close it without the anti-trap function.  It lights up

Closing the sunroof or sun blind without Left or right turn signal. the anti-trap function The control lamp flashes twice as fast when a turn signal is faulty. ● Sunroof: within approximately 5 seconds of having activated the roll-back function, press Hazard warning lights on ››› page 115. »

109 Operation

 It lights up Headlight switch The driver is personally responsible for the correct use and adjustment of the lights in all Trailer turn signals situations.

 It lights up Automatic dipped beam headlight control * Main beam on or flasher on ››› page 112. The automatic dipped beam control is merely intended as an aid and is not able to recog- It lights up  nise all driving situations. The Light Assist system is on ››› page 113. When the light switch is in position , the vehicle lights and the instrument panel and Several warning and control lamps light up switch lighting switch on automatically in the for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- Fig. 94 Dash panel: lights control. following situations ››› : ed on, signalling that the function is being verified. They will switch off after a few sec- ● Turn the switch to the required position ● The photo sensor detects darkness, for ex- onds. ››› Fig. 94. ample, when driving through a tunnel. They switch off when adequate lighting is detec- WARNING Sym- Ignition switch- Ignition is ted. bol ed off switched on Observe the safety warnings ››› in Con- ● The rain sensor detects rain and activates trol and warning lamps on page 81. Fog lights, dipped the wipers. They switch off when the wipers Daylight running beam and side  lights switched on. have not been activated for a few minutes. lights off.

The “Coming Daytime running lights Automatic control home”, “Leaving of dipped beam The daytime running lights consist of individu- home” and Wel-  and daytime run- al lights, integrated in the front headlights. come lights may be ning light. switched on. When the daytime running lights are switched on, the rear side light also switches on ››› . Daylight running Side light on.  lights switched on. The daytime running lights turn on every time the ignition is switched on, if the switch is in  Dipped beam head- Dipped beam position  or , according to the level of ex- light off switched on. terior lighting.

110 Lights

When the light switch is in position , a light WARNING ● Always make sure that the headlights are sensor automatically switches dipped beam correctly adjusted. on and off (including the control and instru- If the road is not well lit and other road users cannot see the vehicle well enough ment lighting) or the daytime running lights or at all, accidents may occur. Note depending on the level of exterior lighting. ● The automatic dipped beam control ● The legal requirements regarding the use  Motorway light* ( ) only switches on the dipped beam of vehicle lights in each country must be when there are changes in light conditions observed. The function is connected and disconnected but not, for example, when it is foggy. via the corresponding Easy Connect system ● The dipped beam headlights will only menu. work with the ignition on. The side lights WARNING come on automatically when the ignition is turned off. ● Activation: when going above 110 km/h The side lights or daytime running lights (68 mph) for more than 30 seconds, the dip- are not bright enough to illuminate the road ped beam raises slightly to increase the driv- ahead and to ensure that other road users er's visibility distance. are able to see you. Fog lights ● Deactivation: when reducing the speed of ● Always use your dipped beam head the vehicle below 100 km/h (62 mph), the lights if it is raining or if visibility is poor. dipped beam immediately returns to its nor- ● Never drive with daytime lights if the road mal position. is not well lit due to weather or lighting conditions. Audible warnings to advise the driver that ● On vehicles with rear lights with bulbs, the lights have not been switched off when activating the daytime running light If the key is not in the ignition and the driver the rear lights are not switched on. A vehi- door is open, an audible warning signal is cle which does not have the rear lights on heard in the following cases: this will remind may not be visible to other drivers in the darkness, in the case of heavy rain or in you to turn the light off. conditions of poor visibility. Fig. 95 Dash panel: lights control. ● When the parking light is on ››› page 112.   ● When the light switch is in position  or . WARNING The warning lamps or also show, on the light switch or instrument panel, when the If the headlights are set too high and not front fog lights are on. » used correctly, there is a risk of dazzling or distracting other road users. This could result in a serious accident.

111 Operation

● Turning on the front fog lights* : pull the 2 Left turn light or left-hand parking light When the parking light is switched on, the light switch out to its first click position (ignition switched off). front side light and the tail light on the corre-    ››› Fig. 95 1 , from positions , or . 3 Main beam on: control lamp  lit up on sponding side of the vehicle turn on. ● Turning on the rear fog light : pull the the instrument panel.   Parking light on both sides light switch fully out 2 from position , or 4 Light flash: on with the lever pushed. Con- . trol lamp  lit up. ● Switch the ignition off. ● To switch off the fog lights, press the light ● Place the light switch in position . switch or turn it to position . Push the lever all the way down to turn off the corresponding function. ● Lock the vehicle from the outside. Note In doing so, only the side lights of both head- Convenience turn signals The rear fog light can dazzle drivers behind lights light up, and additionally the tail lights you. You should use the rear fog light only When the ignition is switched on, move the will do so partially. when visibility is very poor. lever as far as possible upwards or downwards and release the lever. The turn signal WARNING will flash three times. Improper or lack of use of the turn signals, Turn signal and main beam lever The convenience turn signal can be activated or forgetting to deactivate them can con- and deactivated in the Easy Connect system fuse other road users. This could result in a using the key  > SETTINGS > Lighting > serious accident. Light assistance > Convenience turn ● Always give warning when you are going signal ››› page 82. to change lane, overtake or when turning, activating the turn signal in good time. In vehicles that do not have the correspond- ● ing menu, this function can be deactivated in As soon as you have finished changing lane, overtaking or turning, switch the turn a specialised workshop. signal off.

Parking light  WARNING The parking lights will only work with the ignition off. If said light is on, an audible warning Incorrect use of the headlights may cause Fig. 96 Turn signal and main beam lever. will sound while the driver door is open. accidents and serious injury, as the main beam may distract or dazzle other drivers. More the lever to the required position: ● Switch the ignition off. 1 Right turn light or right-hand parking light ● Move the turn signal lever up or down. (ignition switched off). 112 Lights

Note system is activated as of a speed of about 60 the main beam. The main beam assist will km/h (37 mph) and is deactivated below then be deactivated. ● If the convenience turn signals are oper- about 30 km/h (18 mph) ››› . ating (three flashes) and the other conven- Malfunctions ience turn signals are switched on, the ac- When the system is activated and the cam- tive part stops flashing and only flashes era detects other vehicles that may be daz- The following conditions may prevent the once in the new part selected. zled, the main beam is automatically switch- main beam headlight control from turning off ● The turn signal only works when the igni- ed off. Otherwise, the main beam is automati- the headlights in time or from turning off alto- tion is switched on. The hazard warning cally switched on. gether: lights also work when the ignition is switch- The main beam assist generally detects illu- ● ed off. In poorly lit towns with highly reflective minated areas and deactivates the main signs. ● If a trailer turn signal malfunctions, the beam when passing through a town, for ex- ● Other insufficiently lit road users (such as control lamp will stop flashing (trailer turn ample. signals) and the vehicle turn signal will pedestrians or cyclists). flash at double speed. Switching the main beam assist on  ● On tight bends and steep slopes (bumps) ● The main beam headlights can only be and when oncoming vehicles are partially ● Turn on the ignition and turn the light switch switched on if the dipped beam headlights obscured. to the position . are already on. ● When the drivers of other oncoming vehi- ● ● In cold or damp weather conditions, the From the base position, press the turn signal cles (such as a truck) can see over a guard headlights, tail lights and turn signals may and main beam headlights lever forwards rail in the centre of the road. mist up inside temporarily. This is normal ››› Fig. 96 3 When the lamp  is displayed ● If the camera is damaged or the power and in no way effects the useful life of the on the instrument panel display, the main supply is cut off. vehicle lighting system. beam assist is switched on. ● ● The parking light does not activate auto- In fog, snow and heavy rain. matically if the left- or right-hand turn sig- Switching the main beam assist off  ● With dust and sand turbulence. nal is left on and the ignition is disconnec- ● Turn the light switch to a position other than ● With loose gravel in the field of vision of the ted.  ››› page 110. camera. ● OR: while the main beam is on, pull the turn ● When the field of vision of the camera is signal light and main beam headlights lever misted up, dirty or covered by stickers, snow, Main beam assist (Light Assist)* forwards ››› Fig. 96 4 . ice, etc. » ● OR: push the turn signal and main beam The main beam assist acts within the limits of headlight lever forwards to manually turn on the system and depending on environmental and traffic conditions. Once switched on, the 113 Operation

WARNING Note “Coming home” and “Leav- The convenience features of the main Main beam and headlight flasher can be ing home” function beam assist should not encourage the tak- turned on and off manually at any time with ing of risks. The system is not a replace- the turn signal and main beam lever ment for driver concentration. ››› page 112. ● You are always in control of the main beam and adapting it to the light, visibility and traffic conditions. Fog lights with cornering light func- ● It is possible that the main beam head- tion* Fig. 97 Related video light control does not recognise all driving situations and is limited under certain cir- The cornering light function is an additional The “Coming home” and “Leaving home” cumstances. function to the dipped beam headlights to function lights up the vehicle’s immediate ● When the field of vision of the camera is improve lighting of the side of the road when proximity when getting into and out of it in the dirty, covered or damaged, operation of taking a sharp turn at low speed. dark. When switched on, the front position the main beam control may be affected. and dipped beam lights, tail lights and li- This also applies when changes are made The cornering light function works when the cense plate light come on. to the vehicle lighting system, for example, dipped beam headlights are already on and The “Leaving Home” is controlled by a photo- if additional headlights are installed. it is activated when driving at speeds below approximately 40 km/h (25 mph). sensor. In the vehicle settings menu of the infotain- CAUTION ● If the steering wheel is turned or the turn ment system you can adjust the duration of signal is switched on, the front fog light grad- To avoid affecting the operation of the sys- the light switch-off delay, and activate and tem, take the following points into consid- ually turns on. After the turn, the cornering deactivate the function. eration: light function is gradually switched off.

● Clean the field of vision of the camera ● When engaging reverse gear, both front fog Activating the “Coming Home” function regularly and make sure it is free of snow lights turn on. and ice. For vehicles with light and rain sensors. ● Do not cover the field of vision of the ● Switch off the engine and remove the key camera. from the ignition with the light switch in posi- ● Check that the windscreen is not dam- tion  ››› page 110. aged in the area of the field of vision of the ● The automatic “Coming Home” function is camera. only active when the light sensor detects darkness.

114 Lights

For vehicles without light and rain sensors. The “Leaving Home” lighting switches off Hazard warning lights  ● Switch the ignition off. in the following cases: ● Activate the headlight flashers for approxi- ● Automatically, when the “Leaving Home” mately 1 second. delay period ends (default 30 sec). ● When the vehicle is locked using the remote When the driver door is opened, the “Coming control. Home” lighting comes on. The delay in switching off the headlights is counted from ● When the light switch is turned to position . when the last door or boot hatch is closed. ● With the ignition is switched on.

The “Coming Home” lighting turns off in Welcome light*1) the following cases: The welcome light is a light located on the ● Automatically, once the headlight turn off exterior mirrors, focused on the ground, which Fig. 98 Dash panel: hazard warning lights delay has elapsed. activates or deactivates if the light switch is in switch the  position and the “Coming Home” or ● Automatically, when a vehicle door or the The hazard warning lights are used to draw “Leaving Home” function is turned on or off. rear lid is still open 30 seconds after starting the attention of other road users to your vehi- the engine. cle in emergencies. Note ● When the rotary light switch is turned to po- If your vehicle breaks down: sition  ››› page 110. To activate the “Coming Home” and “Leav- ing Home” function, the rotary light switch ● With the ignition is switched on. 1. Park your vehicle at a safe distance from must be in position  and the light sensor moving traffic. must detect darkness. Activating the “Leaving Home” function 2. Press the button to switch on the hazard ● Unlock the vehicle using the remote control. warning lights ››› . ● The “Leaving Home” function is only activa- 3. Switch the ignition off.  ted when the light switch is in position 4. Apply the electronic parking brake. » and the light sensor detects darkness.

1) Valid for vehicles with a light and rain sensor and full-LED headlights. 115 Operation

5. For a manual gearbox, engage 1st gear; ● Due to the high temperatures that the Driving abroad for an automatic gearbox, move the gear catalytic converter can reach, never park lever to P. in an area where the catalytic converter The light beam of the dipped beam lights is asymmetric: the side of the road on which 6. Use the warning triangle to draw the at- could come into contact with highly inflammable materials, for example dry grass or you are driving is lit more intensely. tention of other road users to your vehicle. spilt petrol. This could start a fire. When a car that is manufactured in a country 7. Always take the vehicle key with you when that drives on the right travels to a country you leave the vehicle. Note that drives on the left (or vice versa), it is nor- All turn signals flash simultaneously when the ● The battery will run down if the hazard mally necessary to cover part of the head- hazard warning lights are switched on. The warning lights are left on for a long time, light bulbs with stickers or to change the ad- two turn signal turn signal lamps   and the even if the ignition is switched off. justment of the headlights to avoid dazzling turn signal lamp in the switch  will flash at ● The use of the hazard warning lights de- other drivers. the same time. The simultaneous hazard scribed here is subject to the relevant stat- In such cases, the regulations specify certain warning lights also work when the ignition is utory requirements. light values that must be complied with for switched off. designated points of the light distribution. This is known as “Tourist light”. Emergency braking warning Dynamic headlight range control The light distribution of the full-LED head- If the vehicle brakes suddenly and continu- lights allows the specific “tourist light” values ously at a speed of more than 80 km/h (50 The headlight range is automatically adjus- to be met without the need for stickers or mph), the brake light flashes several times per ted according to the vehicle load status when changes in the settings. second to warn the vehicles driving behind. If they are switched on. you continue braking, the hazard warning Note lights will come on automatically when the WARNING vehicle comes to a standstill. They switch off “Tourist light” is only allowed temporarily. If Heavy objects in the vehicle may mean you are planning a long stay in a country automatically when the vehicle starts to that the headlights dazzle and distract oth- move again. that drives on the other side, you should er drivers. This could result in a serious ac- take the vehicle to an Authorised Technical cident. WARNING Service to change the headlights. ● The risk of an accident increases if your vehicle breaks down. Always use the hazard warning lights and a warning triangle to draw the attention of other road users to your stationary vehicle. 116 Lights

Interior lights Interior and reading lights rear lid, the respective light will automatically switch on and off.

Lighting of the instrument panel, Footwell lighting* displays and switches The lights in the footwell area below the dash (driver and front passenger sides) will switch on when the doors are opened and will decrease in intensity while driving. This intensity setting can be changed through the infotainment system menu (key  > SETTINGS > lIGHTING > Interior lighting Fig. 99 Related video ››› page 82). Fig. 100 Detail of roof lining: front lighting of Depending on the model, the lighting of the the passenger compartment. Ambient light* instrument panel and switched can be adjus- The ambient light lights up the area of the ted in the Easy Connect system, using the Knob Function centre console and the footwell area and, button  > SETTINGS ››› page 82. Turning the rear interior lights on or depending on the version, the front door pan- With the ignition on and without light activa-  off. els as well. tion, the analogue instrument panel lighting The intensity of the ambient light can be ad- remains activated in daytime light conditions. The interior lights come on automati- justed using the menu Easy Connect menu The lighting is reduced as the exterior light di- cally when you unlock the vehicle, open a door or remove the key from (button)  > SETTINGS > Background minishes. In some cases, e.g. when driving  the ignition. lighting ››› page 82). through a tunnel without the  function ac- The light goes out a few seconds after tive, the instrument panel lighting may even closing all the doors, when locking the Note switch off. The objective of this function is to vehicle or connecting the ignition. provide the driver with a visual indication that ● Depending on the features fitted in the he or she should activate the dipped beam.  /  Turning the reading light on and off vehicle, LEDs can be used for the following interior lights: front vanity mirror light, rear If your vehicle is equipped with a digital in- Glove compartment and luggage com- vanity mirror light, footwell light, sun blind strument panel (Digital SEAT Cockpit), the and glove compartment light. following message will appear Turn on the partment lighting* ● The reading lights switch off when the ve- lights on the instrument panel. When opening and closing the glove com- hicle is locked using a key or after several partment on the front passenger side and the minutes if the key is removed from the »

117 Operation

ignition. This prevents the battery from dis- Visibility More the lever to the required position: charging. Short wipe. Brief press, short clean. Windscreen wiper and rear 4  Hold the lever down for more time to increase the wipe frequency. window wiper systems Windscreen washer. The windscreen washer function is activated by push- Window washer lever 5  ing the lever towards the steering wheel, and the wipers operate simultaneously.

Interval wipe for rear window. The wip- 6  er will wipe the window approximately every six seconds.

The rear window wash function is acti- 7  vated by pressing the lever, and the rear wiper starts simultaneously.

WARNING In cold conditions you should not use the Fig. 101 Operating the windscreen wiper and wash/wipe system unless you have rear wiper. warmed the windscreen with the heating and ventilation system. The windscreen More the lever to the required position: washer fluid could otherwise freeze on the windscreen and obscure your view of the 0 Windscreen wipers off.  road. Wiper intervals. Use control ››› Fig. 101 A to set the in- 1 CAUTION  terval (vehicles without rain sensor), or the sensitivity of the rain sensor. If the ignition is switched off with the windscreen wipers active, they complete their 2  Slow wipe. wipe before returning to the rest position. When switching the ignition back on, the 3  Continuous wipe. windscreen wiper will continue to operate at the same wiping level. Ice, snow and

118 Visibility other obstacles on the windscreen may Wiper functions matically change to a lower position damage the wiper and the windscreen wip- speed. The set speed will be resumed when er motor. Windscreen wipers performance in differ- the vehicle pulls away. ● If necessary, remove snow and ice from ent situations ● The windscreen will be wiped again ap- the windscreen wipers before starting your ● If the vehicle is stopped, the activated posi- proximately 5 seconds after the wind- journey. tion temporarily moves to the previous posi- screen washer has been activated, provi- ● Carefully lift the frozen windscreen wip- tion. ded the vehicle is moving (“drip” function). If you activate the wipers less than 3 sec- ers from the glass. SEAT recommends a de- ● The air conditioner comes on for approxi- icer spray for this operation. onds after the “drip” function, a new wash mately 30 seconds in air recirculation mode sequence will begin without performing the ●  Do not switch on the windscreen wipers if when the windscreen washer is activated, last wipe. For the “drip” function to work the windscreen is dry. Cleaning with the to prevent the smell of the windscreen wash- again, you have to turn the ignition off and windscreen wipers while dry can cause er fluid entering the inside the vehicle. then on again. damage. ● When wiping at intervals, the intervals vary ● In icy conditions, always check that the according to the speed. The higher the vehi- wiper blades are not frozen to the glass be- cle speed the shorter the intervals. fore using the wipers. In cold weather, it may help to leave the vehicle parked with Heated windscreen washer jets* the wipers in service position ››› page 49. The heating only thaws the frozen jets, it does not thaw the water in the washer hoses. Note When the ignition is switched on the heated ● The windscreen and window wipers only windscreen washer jets automatically adjust function when the ignition is switched on the heat depending on the ambient tempera- and the bonnet or rear lid, respectively, are ture. closed. ● The interval wipe speed varies according Note to the vehicle speed. The faster the vehicle ● The wiper will try to wipe away any ob- is moving, the more often the windscreen is stacles that are on the windscreen. The cleaned. wiper will stop moving if the obstacle ● The rear wiper is automatically switched blocks its path. Remove the obstacle and on when the windscreen wiper is on and the switch the wiper back on again. car is in reverse gear. ● If you stop the vehicle with the windscreen wiper in position 1 or 2, it will auto-

119 Operation

Rain sensor* 0 Rain sensor off. ● Windscreen crack: the impact of a stone 1 Rain sensor on; automatic wipe if neces- will trigger a single wipe cycle with the rain sary. sensor on. Next the rain sensor detects the reduction in the sensitive surface area and A Setting sensitivity level of rain sensor adapts accordingly. The behaviour of the – Set control to the right: high sensitivity. sensor will vary with the size of the damage – Set control to the left: low sensitivity. caused by the stone.

When the ignition is switched off and then WARNING back on, the rain sensor stays on and starts The rain sensor may not detect enough rain operating again when the windscreen wipers to switch on the wipers. are in position 1 and the vehicle is travelling at more than 16 km/h (10 mph). ● If necessary, switch on the wipers man- Fig. 102 Wiper lever: adjust the rain sensor A. ually when water on the windscreen ob- structs visibility. Modified behaviour of the rain sensor Possible causes of faults and mistaken read- Note ings on the sensitive surface ››› Fig. 103 of the rain sensor include: ● Clean the sensitive surface of the rain sensor regularly and check the blades for ● Damaged wipers: a film of water on the damage ››› Fig. 103 (arrow). damaged blades may lengthen the activa- ● To remove wax and coatings, we recom- tion time, reduce the washing intervals or re- mend a window cleaner containing alco- sult in a fast and continuous wipe. hol. ● Insects: insects on the sensor may trigger ● Do not put stickers on the windscreen in Fig. 103 Rain sensor sensitive surface the windscreen wiper. front of the rain sensor*. This may cause ● Salt on the road: in winter, salt spread on sensor disruption or faults. The rain sensor controls the frequency of the the roads may cause an excessively long windscreen wiper intervals, depending on the wipe when the windscreen is almost dry. amount of rain . The sensitivity of the rain ››› ● Dirt: dry dust, wax, coating on glass (Lotus sensor can be adjusted manually. Manual effect) or traces of detergent (car wash) may wipe page 118. ››› reduce the effectiveness of the rain sensor or Move the lever to the required position make it react more slowly, later or not at all. ››› Fig. 102: 120 Visibility

Mirrors faces. Clean it with a wet sponge as soon Adjusting the exterior mirrors as possible. Interior mirror anti-dazzle function Note Rear view mirror with automatic anti-daz- ● If the light incident in the interior rear vi- zle function sion mirror is obstructed (e.g. with the sun The anti-dazzle function is activated every blind*), the anti-dazzle rear vision mirror time the ignition is switched on. with automatic setting will not operate perfectly. When the anti-dazzle function is enabled, the ● When the interior lights are on or reverse interior rear vision mirror will darken auto- gear engaged, the mirrors do not darken matically according to the amount of light it with automatic adjustment for anti-dazzle receives. The anti-dazzle function is cancel- Fig. 104 Detail of the driver's door: control for position. led if reverse gear is engaged. the exterior mirror. ● If you have to stick any type of sticker on WARNING the windscreen, do not do so in front of the Turn the control to the corresponding posi- sensors. Doing so could prevent the anti- tion: In the event that an automatic anti-dazzle dazzle function from working well or even rear vision mirror breaks, an electrolyte flu- from working at all. L/R Turning the knob to the desired position, id may leak. This could cause irritation to adjust the mirrors on the driver side (L, the skin, eyes and respiratory organs. If you left) and the passenger side (R, right) to come into contact with this liquid, it must the direction desired. be rinsed with large quantities of water. If necessary, get medial help.  Depending on the equipment fitted on the vehicle, the mirrors may be heated according to the outside temperature. CAUTION  Folding in mirrors. In the event that an automatic anti-dazzle rear vision mirror breaks, an electrolyte flu- Synchronized regulation of the exterior id may leak. This liquid attacks plastic sur- mirrors Select in the Easy Connect system menu  > Settings > Mirrors and wipers > Mir- rors if the exterior mirrors have to be adjusted in a synchronised manner. »

121 Operation

1) 1) ● Turn the knob to position L . ● Select the R position on the control. behind you when changing lane, you could ● Adjust the left-hand exterior mirror. The ● Select reverse gear. misjudge the distance. Risk of accident! right exterior mirror will be adjusted at the ● Adjust the front passenger exterior mirror so same time (synchronised). that you can see, for example, the kerb area WARNING ● If necessary, correct the right-hand rear- well. Fold and unfold the exterior mirror, taking 1) view mirror: rotate the control to position R . ● Release the reverse gear. care to avoid injuries. ● The adjusted position for the rear view mir- ● Only fold or unfold the exterior mirror Tilt function for front passenger exterior ror is stored. when there is no-one in the way of the mir- mirror* ror. When parking backwards, and in order to be Fold the rearview mirrors when locking the ● When moving the mirror, take care not to able to see the kerb, the passenger side mir- vehicle* trap fingers between the mirror and the ror can be automatically tilted towards the mirror bracket. Using the Easy Connect system, button  > passenger to provide a better view of the SETTINGS > Mirrors and wipers > Mir- kerb. The control must be in the position R1) rors can be selected to fold the outside mir- CAUTION for this feature to be operational. rors when parking and to lock the vehicle ● If one of the mirror housings is knocked The mirror returns to its original position as ››› page 82. out of position (e.g. when parking), the mir- soon as you drive forward at over 15 km/h When the vehicle is locked with the remote rors must first be fully retracted with the (9 mph) or switch off the ignition. It also re- control, the exterior mirrors are retracted au- electric control. Do not readjust the mirror turns to its original position if the position of housing by hand, as this will interfere with tomatically. When the vehicle is opened with the control is adjusted. the mirror adjuster function. the remote control, the exterior mirrors are deployed automatically. ● Before washing the vehicle in an auto- Storing the rear view mirror settings for the matic car wash, please make sure to re- tilt function WARNING tract the exterior mirrors to prevent them ● Switch the ignition on. from being damaged. Electrically retracta- Convex or wide-angle* exterior mirrors ble exterior mirrors must not be folded in or ●  Using the Easy Connect system, button > give a larger field of vision. However, they out by hand. Always use the electrical SETTINGS > Mirrors and wipers > Mir- make objects look smaller and further power control. rors select Lower while reversing away than they really are. If you use these ››› page 82. mirrors to estimate the distance to vehicles

1) Regulation in right-hand drive vehicles is sym- metrical. 122 Seats and headrests

Note ● The sun visor can be pulled out of its Seats and headrests mounting and turned towards the door ● If the electrical adjustment should fail to ››› Fig. 105 1 . operate, both of the mirrors can be adjus- Adjusting seats ted by hand by lightly pressing the edge of ● Swing the sun visor towards the door, longi- the mirror glass. tudinally backwards. Related video ● The fold-in function on the exterior mir- There is a vanity mirror on the sun visor, with a rors will not activate at speeds over cover. When the cover is opened 2 a light 40 km/h (25 mph). comes on. The lamp goes out when the vanity mirror cover is closed or the sun visor is pushed Sun protection back up. Fig. 106 Vehicle interior Sun blind WARNING Folded sun blinds can reduce visibility. ● Always store sun blinds and visors in their Manual adjustment of the front housing when not in use. seats

Note The light above the sun visor automatically switches off after a few minutes in certain conditions. This prevents the battery from discharging.

Fig. 105 Sun visor

Options for adjusting driver and front passenger sun visors ● Lower the sun visor towards the windscreen. Fig. 107 Front seats: manual seat settings. »

123 Operation

1 Forwards/backwards: pull the lever and This might cause loss of control of the vehi- Seat up/down: Press the rear part of the move the seat. The seat must engage cle and thus accidents or injuries. More- button up/down. To adjust the angle of when the lever is released! over, the electrical components of the front the seat cushion, press the front of the 2 Raise/lower: pull the lever up or push seats might be damaged. button up/down. down (several times if necessary) from its ● Never attach or place seat upholstery or C Backrest further upright/further reclined: home position. covers on the electric controls. press the button forwards/backwards. 3 Tilting the backrest: turn the hand wheel. ● Never use upholstery or seat covers that have not been explicitly authorised for the WARNING 4 Lumbar support: move the lever until the seats of the vehicle. required position is achieved. ● If the electric front seats are used negligently or without paying due attention, it WARNING can cause serious injury. ● The front seats can also be electrically Incorrect seat adjustment may lead to ac- Electric driver's seat adjustment* adjusted when the ignition is switched off. cidents and severe injuries. Never leave a child or any other person ● Only adjust the seats when the vehicle is who may need help in the vehicle. stationary, as the seats could move unex- ● In the event of an emergency, electrical pectedly while the vehicle is in motion and adjustment can be stopped by pressing you could lose control of the vehicle. Fur- any control. thermore, an incorrect position is adopted when adjusting the seat. ● Adjust the height, position and inclination CAUTION of the front seats only when their move- To avoid damaging the electrical compo- ment area is empty. nents of the front seats, please refrain from ● Make sure there are no objects in that kneeling on the seat or applying sharp area. pressure at a single point to the seat cushion and backrest. ● Make sure that the movement and locking areas of the seats are clean. Fig. 108 Driver's seat: electric seat settings. Note WARNING ● It may not be possible to electrically ad- A Adjust the lumbar support: press the but- just the seat if the vehicle battery is very Incorrectly using upholstery and seat cov- ton according to the desired position. low. ers might cause an accidental activation of B Seat forwards/backwards: press the but- the electrical seat adjustment system and ton forwards/backwards. make it move unexpectedly while driving. 124 Seats and headrests

● If the engine is started while the seats are The rear seat is asymmetrical and each part CAUTION being electrically adjusted, the adjustment can be adjusted separately. ● When moving the rear seat horizontally, will stop. objects in the luggage compartment might Adjusting the rear seat cause damages. ● Pull the right of left lever, in the direction of ● When the seat is in its frontmost position, Adjusting the rear seat the arrow ››› Fig. 109, and move the part cor- objects can be stored between the seat responding to the seat to the front or the and the luggage compartment. Before back. moving the seat backwards, remove any ● Release the lever and lock the seat, moving objects in this area. it slightly to the front or the back.

Adjusting the rear seat backrest Headrest ● Press the right or left backrest of the seat with one hand and, at the same time, pull Introduction from the corresponding cord with the other ››› Fig. 110 1 . The possibilities for the adjustment and disas- ● Move the backrest with your hand to the sembly of the headrests are described below. Fig. 109 Under the bench of the rear seat: set- desired position; there will be some resist- Always make sure that the seats are correctly ting levers. ance 2 . adjusted ››› page 12. ● Release the cord and lock the backrest, All seats are equipped with a headrest. The moving it slightly to the front or the back. rear headrests have been designed exclusively for the corresponding seat of the sec- WARNING ond or third row. Therefore, never mount them Incorrect backrest adjustment may lead to on any other seat. accidents and severe injuries. ● Only adjust the rear seat when the vehi- Correct adjustment of headrest cle is stationary; otherwise, it could move Adjust the headrest so that its upper edge is unexpectedly while the vehicle is in motion. at the same level as the top of your head and Furthermore, an incorrect position is adop- under no circumstances below eye level. ted when adjusting the seat. Keep the back of your head always as close Fig. 110 Rear seat backrest adjustment. ● Adjust the rear seat only when its move- to the headrest as possible. » ment area is empty. 125 Operation

In vehicles with horizontally adjustable headr- CAUTION ests on the front seats, move the headrest as close as possible to the back of the head. When assembling and disassembling the headrests, do not let them meet the top lining of the vehicle, the back rest of the front Adjusting the headrest for short people seat or other parts of the vehicles. If not, Lower the headrest completely, even if your this could damage the vehicle. head is below its upper edge. In the lowest position, there may be a small distance between the headrest and the backrest. Adjusting the headrests

Adjusting the headrest for tall people Push the headrest up as far as it will go.

WARNING If travelling with the headrests removed or improperly adjusted, the risk of severe or fatal injuries in the event of accidents and sudden braking or manoeuvres increases. ● Always travel with the headrest correctly installed and adjusted. ● To decrease the risk of cervical injuries in Fig. 111 Front seat: headrest adjustment.  the event of an accident, adjust the head- Fig. 112 Adjusting the rear headrests: Sec- ond row of seats,  third row of seats. rest correctly based on your height, always making sure that its upper edge is at the Adjusting the height of the headrests same height as the top of the head, but never below eye level. Keep the back of ● Move the headrest up or down in the direc- your head always as close to the headrest tion of the corresponding arrow. Regarding as possible and centred. the rear headrest, to both raise and lower, ● Never adjust the headrest while the vehi- press the button ››› Fig. 111 1 ; for the rear cle is in motion. headrests it is only necessary to press the ● Under no circumstances should the rear button ››› Fig. 112 1 to lower them ››› in passengers travel while the headrests are Introduction on page 126. in the non-use position. 126 Seats and headrests

● The headrest must lock correctly in one po- Removing the headrests from the second sition. row of seats ● If necessary, adjust the backrest of the seat Adjusting the front headrests horizontally so the headrest can be removed. ● Move the headrest forward or back in the ● Push the headrest up as far as it will go direction of the corresponding arrow while ››› in Introduction on page 126. pressing the button ››› Fig. 111 1 . ● Remove the headrest completely while ● The headrest must lock correctly in one po- pressing button ››› Fig. 114 1 . sition.

Fig. 114 Removal of the rear headrests: sec- Installing the headrests of the second row ond row of seats. of seats Removing and fitting the headrests ● Unlock the rear seat backrest and fold it Removing the front headrests forward slightly ››› page 125. ● If this is the case, lower the headrest ››› in ● Place the headrest in the correct position Introduction on page 126. on the guides of the corresponding backrest ● To unlock it, look for the rabbet on the bot- and insert it. tom of the backrest and press in the direction ● Lower the headrest while pressing button of the arrow ››› Fig. 113 1 . 1 . ● Remove the headrest in the direction of the ● Raise the rear seat backrest and lock it. arrow 2 . WARNING Fitting the front headrests Remove the rear headrests only when it is Fig. 113 Front headrest: removal. ● Place the headrest in the correct position necessary to fit a child seat. After removing on the guides of the corresponding backrest a child seat, refit the headrest immediately. and insert it. ● Press the headrest downwards until the Note bars lock. The headrests of the third row of seats can- ● Adjust the headrest according to the in- not be removed. structions on the correct position of the seat.

127 Operation

Seat functions ● Press the memory button in which to store (10 mph) or when the gear selection lever is the settings within approx. 10 seconds. A changed to a position other than R warning sound will confirm they have been ››› page 121. Memory function* stored. To activate the memory function of the ve- Storing the passenger rear view mirror hicle key settings while driving in reverse Condition: a position must be memorised in ● Apply the electronic parking brake. the memory. ● Move the gearshift to the neutral position. ● Open the driver-side door. ● Switch the ignition on. ● Press and hold any memory button. ● Press the required memory button. ● Within three seconds of the move being ● Select reverse gear. completed, push the open button  on the Fig. 115 On the outer side of the driver's seat: vehicle key. An audible warning confirms the memory buttons. ● Adjust the front passenger exterior mirror so that you can see, for example, the kerb area settings have been activated. Memory buttons well. Adjusting the wing mirrors for driving and Individual settings for the corresponding seat ● The new position of the mirror will be stored assigning driver seat settings to a vehicle can be stored with the memory buttons. Addi- automatically and allocated to the vehicle key tionally, settings for the exterior mirrors can key that was used to unlock the vehicle. be saved with the memory buttons of the ● Activate the memory function of the vehicle driver seat. Activating settings key ● With the vehicle stopped and the ignition ● With the ignition switched on, adjust the ex- Save the settings of the driver seat and switched on, press and hold the correspond- terior mirrors and the seat. the exterior mirrors while driving forward ing memory button until the saved position is ● An audible warning confirms the saved po- ● Apply the electronic parking brake. reached. sition, both when turning off the ignition and ● Move the gearshift to the neutral position. ● OR: With the ignition switched off and the locking the vehicle. The settings are assigned driver's door open, briefly press the corre- to the vehicle key. ● Switch the ignition on. sponding button. ● Adjust the driver seat and the exterior mir- To deactivate the memory function of the ● The front passenger side exterior mirror au- rors. vehicle key tomatically changes from the position stored ● Press  for longer than 1 second for reversing as soon as the vehicle moves Condition: a position must be memorised in ››› Fig. 115. forward at a speed of at least 15 km/h the memory. 128 Seats and headrests

● Press and hold the  button ››› Fig. 115. Note ● Fold down the backrest of the seat and ● move the seat forward. Within the following 10 seconds, push the If the driver door is opened approx. 10 mi- open button  on the vehicle key. An audible nutes after the vehicle was unlocked or lat- ● Enter the vehicle or leave the vehicle care- warning confirms the settings have been de- er, the driver seat and the exterior mirrors fully ››› . activated. do not move automatically. Folding down the second row backrest Initialising the seat position memory ● Move the rear seat to its rearmost position. The position memory system must be restar- Access aid for the third row of seats ● Pull the lever ››› Fig. 116 and push the back- ted if, for example, the driver seat has been rest backwards until it is in a vertical position. changed. The entire seat folds down ››› . Restarting deletes all memories and assign- ● The rear seat must be correctly engaged ments for the seat with position memory. The ››› . memory buttons can then be reprogrammed and the vehicle keys re-assigned. WARNING

● Open the driver door and do not get into If the convenient entry function is used the vehicle. negligently or without due care, this may cause accidents and serious injury. ● Operating the seat settings from outside ● Never use the convenient entry function the vehicle. when the vehicle is in motion. ● Move the angle of the seat backrest com- Fig. 116 Second row of seats:: access aid controls. ● Avoid trapping or damaging the seat belt pletely forwards. when folding the rear seats back. ● Release the control to set the angle and The convenient entry function makes it easier ● When moving the backrests up and down, then press again until an audible warning is to access the third row of seats. keep your hands, fingers, feet and other heard. body parts out of the operating area of the Folding down the backrest and moving the hinges and the locking mechanism of the WARNING second row seat seats. Adjust the memory function only when the ● Remove any objects located in the footwell ● Mats or other objects can be caught in vehicle is stationary. of the second row of seats ››› . the hinges of the seat backrests or the seats themselves. This would cause the ● Pull the release lever Fig. 116 in the di- ››› backrests and benches not to lock correct- rection of the arrow. ly when moving the seats to the vertical position. »

129 Operation

● For the rear seat belts to offer the neces- CAUTION sary protection all the parts of the rear Any objects located in the footwell of the backrest must be properly engaged verti- second row of seats may be damaged on cally. If someone is seated in a seat whose folding the rear seat forwards. Before fold- backrest is not properly engaged they will ing down the seats, remove the objects. be thrown forwards, along with the backrest, during an accident or a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre. ● When a rear seat or its backrest is folded Adjusting or folding the backrest of down or not correctly engaged, do not let the front passenger seat anyone use that seat, not even a child. ● When going in and out of the vehicle, Fig. 118 Unlocking the folding backrest of the never lean on or grab the tilted seat of the front passenger seat second row. Adjusting the inclination of the front pas- WARNING senger seat backrest ● Move the lever in the direction of the arrow If all the seats on the second row are 1 equipped with child seats, in the event of ››› Fig. 117 , and adjust the backrest to the an accident the seats of the second row desired position. cannot be pushed forwards from the third. People travelling in the third row will not be Folding the backrest of the front passen- able to leave the vehicle or help them- Fig. 117 Front passenger seat: fold the back- ger seat forward rest of the seat forwards. selves in the event of an emergency. ● Remove any objects from the front passen- ● Whenever there are people in the third ger seat cushion ››› . row, do not install child seats on all the ● Move the passenger seat to its lowest posi- second row seats at the same time. tion. ● Move the front passenger seat back as far CAUTION as possible. Before lowering and raising the rear seat ● Lower the headrest properly. backrest, adjust the front seats so that neither the headrests nor the cushions of the ● Unlock the backrest of the front passenger rear backrest can hit them. seat in the direction of the arrow 1 .

130 Seats and headrests

● Fold the backrest of the front passenger ● While the passenger backrest is down, Folding down and raising the rear seat forwards in the direction of the arrow 2 the front airbag must always be disabled seat backrest until it is horizontal. and the PASSENGER AIR BAG   warning ● Once folded down, the backrest has to be lamp must be on. locked safely. ● When moving the passenger backrest up and down, keep your hands, fingers, feet When carrying objects on the folded down and other body parts out of the operating backrest of the passenger seat, the front air- area of the hinges and the locking mecha- bag of this seat must be disabled ››› page 27. nism of the seat. ● Mats or other objects can be caught in Lifting the backrest of the front passenger the hinges of the backrest of the front pas- seat senger seat. This would cause the backrest ● When lifting the passenger backrest, make not to be locked in an upright position when sure there are no objects or body parts within lifting it. the hinge movement area. ● Once the backrest is up, it must be cor- Fig. 119 Folding down and lifting the rear seat backrest ● Lift the backrest of the front passenger seat rectly engaged in an upright position. Oth- erwise, it could move unexpectedly and by first unlocking it again ››› Fig. 118. cause severe injuries. ● Lift the backrest of the seat in an upright position. WARNING ● Once it is raised again, the backrest must be correctly engaged. When folding down the passenger backrest, its anchor points and hinges are left uncovered and may cause severe injuries in WARNING the event of a sudden brake or accident. Serious injuries can be caused if the pas- ● When the passenger seat backrest is senger seat backrest is lowered or lifted lowered nobody else can travel in the cor- without due care and attention. responding seats (not even a child). ● Only fold and lift the backrest of the front ● When the passenger seat backrest is passenger seat when the vehicle is station- lowered, the only permitted seat is the rear Fig. 120 In the luggage compartment: levers ary. seat behind the driver seat. This also ap- for release, from the luggage compartment, of ● When folding down the passenger seat, plies to children travelling on a child seat. the left part 1 and right part 2 of the rear always make sure there are no people or seat backrest. » animals in the backrest area.

131 Operation

The rear seat backrest is split and each part ● Without letting go of the cord, lift the back- ● When the rear seat backrest is lowered or can be lowered forward separately to extend rest. is not properly engaged nobody else can the luggage compartment. ● Make sure that the seat belt is not trapped. travel in the corresponding seats (not even a child). ● Press the backrest firmly into the lock until it Fold the backrest of the rear seat for- engages ››› . wards . CAUTION ● The backrest must be properly engaged. ● Push the headrest down as far as it will go ● If necessary, adjust the backrest. Serious damage can be caused to the vehi- ››› page 125. cle and other objects if the rear seat back- ● Move the rear seat to its rearmost position. ● If necessary, adjust the headrest. rest is lowered or lifted without due care ● If required, lower the folding table. and attention. WARNING ● ● Pull the cord ››› Fig. 119 forward in the di- Before folding the rear seat backrest for- Serious injuries can be caused if the rear ward, always adjust the front seats so that rection of the arrow while holding the seat seat backrest is lowered or lifted without neither the headrests nor the cushions of backrest and move it forward slowly . ››› due care and attention. the rear backrest can hit them. ● Press the backrest down with your hand un- ● When folding down the rear seat, always ● Before folding the rear seat backrest, al- til it locks. make sure there are no people or animals in ways make sure there are no objects in the the backrest area. movement area of the backrest. Folding down the backrest from the boot ● Never lower or lift the rear seat backrest with the unlocking levers while driving. ● Push the headrest down as far as it will go ● Do no trap or damage the seat belt when ››› page 125. raising the rear seat backrest. ● Open the rear lid ››› page 100. ● When lowering or lifting the rear seat ● Pull the unlocking lever ››› Fig. 120 of the backrest, keep your hands, fingers, feet part of the backrest to fold down. and other body parts out of its path. ● The part of the backrest in question unlocks ● For the rear seat belts to offer the neces- and can be folded down. sary protection all the parts of the rear backrest must be properly engaged. This is ● If necessary, close the rear lid ››› page 100. particularly important in the case of the centre rear seat. If someone is seated in a Folding up the rear seat backrest seat whose backrest is not properly engag- ● Unlock the seat backrest with the cord. The ed they will be thrown forwards, along with the backrest, during an accident or a sud- backrest disengages from its position. den driving or braking manoeuvre. 132 Seats and headrests

Central armrests To move the armrest horizontally, move it for- ● When the centre armrest is down, nobody ward ››› Fig. 121 or backward as much as may travel in the centre rear seat, not even possible in the direction of the corresponding a child. An incorrect sitting position may arrow. cause severe injuries.

Rear centre armrest Depending on the features, there might be a folding armrest in the rear centre seat. To lower the armrest, pull the cord in the direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 122. To lift the armrest, press it down in the oppo- Fig. 121 Front centre armrest site direction to the arrow ››› Fig. 122 and lock it in the seat backrest.

WARNING The front centre armrest may obstruct the driver's arm movements, which could cause an accident and severe injuries. ● Keep the storage compartments of the centre armrest closed at all times while the vehicle is in motion. ● Never let anyone sit on the centre armrest while the vehicle is in motion, not even Fig. 122 Folding rear centre armrest. a child. This position is incorrect and may cause severe injuries. Front centre armrest To lift the central armrest, lift it upwards in the WARNING direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 121, setting by setting. To decrease the risk of injuries while driving, the rear centre armrest must always be To lower the armrest, first lift it to its highest raised. position. Then lower it down.

133 Operation

Transport and practical ● Adapt tyre pressure to the load. Take into ● Remove all hard, sharp or heavy objects account the pressure adhesive of the tyres from the fabrics and bags inside the cabin equipment ››› page 365. and store them safely. ● In vehicles equipped with tyre control sys- Storing objects tem, adjust to the new load status if necessa- WARNING ry ››› page 369. The transport of heavy object changes ve- Positioning the luggage and cargo WARNING hicle handling and increases braking distance. Heavy objects that are not properly It is possible to carry objects and luggage in Loose or unsecured objects can cause seri- placed or secured may cause loss of con- the vehicle, in a trailer ››› page 332 and on ous injury in case of sudden manoeuvring trol of the vehicle and thus severe injuries. or braking or in case of an accident. Partic- the roof ››› page 143. When doing so, please ● Never put too much load in the vehicle. ularly if the airbag hits them when deploy- consider all legal provisions. Both the carrying capacity as well as the ing and they are thrown across the inside of distribution of the load in the vehicle have the vehicle. Please observe the following effects on the driving behaviour and brak- Placing luggage inside the vehicle safely rules to minimise the risk of injury: ing ability. ● Distribute the load in the vehicle as evenly ● Place all objects inside the vehicle safe- ● When transporting heavy objects, the as possible. ly. driving behaviour of the vehicle varies due ● Always place equipment and heavy ob- ● Secure all objects, little and large. to the displacement of the centre of gravi- jects in the boot . ››› ● Place the objects in the cabin in such a ty. ● Position heavy items in the boot as far for- way that they can never reach the airbag ● Always distribute the load in the vehicle ward as possible. deployment areas while the vehicle is in as evenly and horizontally as possible. motion. ● Take into account the maximum authorised ● Always place heavy objects in the boot weight per axle, as well as the maximum au- ● Keep the storage compartments closed before the rear axle and as far away from it thorised weight of the vehicle ››› page 389. at all times while the vehicle is in motion. as possible. ● Secure the objects to the fastening rings of ● Place the objects in such a way that they ● Objects in the luggage compartment the boot using appropriate chains or belts never force any occupant of the vehicle to that are unsecured could move suddenly ››› page 139. sit in an incorrect position. and modify the handling of the vehicle. ● When transporting objects that take up a ● Also place small objects safely. ● Adapt your speed and driving style at all seat, never let anyone use that seat. times to suit visibility, weather, road and ● If required. raise the rear seat backrest and ● Never leave hard, sharp or heavy objects traffic conditions. lock it. loose in open storage compartment of the ● Accelerate with particular care and cau- vehicle, on the cover behind the rear seat tion. or on the dashboard. 134 Transport and practical equipment

● Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres. Luggage compartment chor point (arrows). Move the cover forward carefully. ● Brake earlier than usual.

Luggage compartment shelf Close the rear shelf WARNING ● Pull the cover backwards with the handle ● Never leave your vehicle unattended, es- 1 and secure it to the anchor point (arrows). pecially when the rear lid is open. Children could climb into the luggage compartment, Remove the rear shelf closing the door behind them; they will be trapped and run the risk of death. ● If required, open the rear shelf. ● Close and lock all the doors and the rear ● Press the support of the cover ››› Fig. 124 lid when you leave the vehicle. Before you 1 in the direction of the arrow and hold it in lock the vehicle, make sure that there are this position. no adults or children in the vehicle. ● Then lift the cover out.

Fig. 123 In the luggage compartment: lug- ● Remove the cover support ››› Fig. 124 1 . CAUTION gage compartment shelf closed. Depending on the equipment, once the lug- Electrical wires or, depending on the features, the antenna embedded into the rear gage compartment shelf has been removed, windows could be damaged, even irrepara- it can be stored under the boot's floor bly, if they are in contact with objects. ››› page 136.

Fit the rear shelf Note ● Place the left side of the rear shelf in the Straps for securing the load to the fasten- housing provided in the left side cover. ing rings are commercially available from accessory shops. ● Press the support of the cover ››› Fig. 124 1 in the direction of the arrow and hold it in this position. Fig. 124 In the luggage compartment: remove ● Place the cover in the housing provided in the rear shelf. the left side cover. Open the rear shelf ● Remove the cover support ››› Fig. 124 1 . ● Pull the cover backwards with the handle ● Check that the cover is correctly secured. » ››› Fig. 123 1 and remove it above the an- 135 Operation

WARNING Store the rear shelf cause serious or fatal injuries or damage to the vehicle. Animals, loose or unsecured or objects carried on the rear shelf can cause serious in- ● Never leave the rear shelf loose in the jury in case of sudden manoeuvring or luggage compartment. braking or in case of an accident. ● Do not leave hard, sharp or heavy ob- CAUTION jects or in bags on the rear shelf. If the rear shelf is stored incorrectly, it may ● Never transport animals on the rear shelf. cause damages to the electrical system or the cabin. WARNING ● When storing the rear shelf, always make sure it does not touch the 12-volt battery in If the rear shelf is fitted in front of a rear Fig. 125 Below the luggage compartment the boot. seat, it may cause severe injuries in the floor: store the rear shelf. event of sudden braking or in the event of an accident. Depending on the equipment, once the lug- ● If the seats of the third row are occupied, gage compartment shelf has been removed, never fit the rear shelf before that row. it can be stored under the boot floor. ● Lift the floor of the boot ››› page 138. WARNING ● Place the rear shelf in the corresponding If driving without the covers of the rear housing ››› Fig. 125. shelf installed, serious injury may happen ● Place the boot floor in its starting position. in case of sudden manoeuvring or braking or in case of an accident. If the 12-volt battery is fitted in the boot, do ● In vehicles with 7 seats, always place the not store the rear shelf under the boot covers on the housings of the rear shelf floor ››› . If you are going to use the third row when it is not fitted. of seats, keep the cover at home.

WARNING During a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre, or in the event of an accident, objects could be flung though the interior and

136 Transport and practical equipment

Placing the third row of seats in the Placing the third row of seats in loading Lifting the seats of the third row cargo floor position floor position ● Move the seats of the second row com- ● Disassemble the luggage compartment pletely forward ››› page 125. tray ››› page 135. ● Open the rear lid. ● Push the headrest down as far as it will go ● Pull the cord on the backrest of the seat ››› page 125. ››› Fig. 126 to lift the backrest. OR: lift the ● Release the seat belt from both locks to backrest with your hand from the cabin. prevent damages to the seat and the seat ● The red marking on the unlock lever belt. ››› Fig. 126 must not be seen. ● Fold down the folding tables on the front ● Make sure that the seat backrest is correct- seats. ly engaged by tugging from it and press- ● Move the seats of the second row coming ››› . pletely forward ››› page 125. ● If required, fit the rear shelf again. ● Open the rear lid ››› page 100. Fig. 126 Third row of seats: place in the cargo ● Close the tailgate. floor position. ● Remove any objects located in the footwell in front of and behind the seat ››› . WARNING ● Remove objects from the space below the Risk of suffering severe head injuries If peo- corresponding seat. ple taller than 1.60 m travel in the third row, ● Pull the unlocking lever ››› Fig. 126 to its they may receive severe head injuries in the event of an accident. rearmost position to unlock the seat backrest. ● Never travel with anyone taller than 1.60 ● Move the seat down with your hand until it m on the third row. is completely against the frame of the seat ››› . ● When closing the rear lid, always be mindful of the passengers of the rearmost ● When the seat is in loading floor position, seats. do not et anyone travel in it (not even a child) ››› . WARNING ● Close the tailgate. Fig. 127 Third row of seats: lift the seat. If the rear seats are folded down or lifted without paying attention or without control, The rear seats can be folded down separate- severe injuries might occur. » ly to extend the boot.

137 Operation

● Never lower or lift the rear seat backrests when seats are folded down or lifted. Be- while driving. fore folding down or lifting the seats, re- ● Do no trap or damage the seat belt when move the objects. raising the rear seat backrests. ● Any objects located in the footwell be- ● When moving the rear seat backrests up hind the third row of seats may be dam- and down, keep your hands, fingers, feet aged on folding or lifting the seats of this and other body parts out of the operating row. Before folding down or lifting the seats, area of the hinges and the locking mecha- remove the objects. nism of the seats. ● Mats or other objects can be caught in the hinges of the seat backrests or the Adjustable luggage compartment seats themselves. This would cause the floor (5-seater vehicles) backrests not to be locked correctly in an upright position. ● For the rear seat belts to offer the necessary protection, the rear backrests must be properly engaged vertically. If someone is Fig. 129 In the luggage compartment: adjust seated in a seat whose backrest is not the height of the variable luggage compart- properly engaged they will be thrown for- ment floor. wards, along with the backrest, during an accident or a sudden driving or braking Open boot floor manoeuvre. ● Grab the boot floor by the opening ● A red mark on unlock lever ››› Fig. 126 in- Fig. 128 and lift it in the direction of the ar- dicates that the seat backrest is not en- ››› row. Secure the belt to the rubber gasket gaged. If the back rest is locked correctly, Fig. 128 In the luggage compartment: lift the luggage compartment floor. the mark is not visible. (small arrow). ● When a rear seat or its backrest is folded Close boot floor down or not correctly engaged, do not let anyone use that seat (not even a child). ● Loosen the belt and secure it to the support under the boot floor. Move the floor down CAUTION carefully and let it go ››› . ● Objects placed in the footwell in front of and behind the rear seats can be damaged 138 Transport and practical equipment

Adjust the height of the variable boot floor Luggage compartment floor (7- ● The maximum weight that can be loaded Depending on the features, the height of the seater vehicles) on the luggage compartment variable floor boot floor can be adjusted. in the top position is 125 kg.

● If necessary, release the net bag ››› page 140 and, if necessary, remove the Fastening rings belts. ● Lift the boot floor and pull it backwards to release it from the side guides of the boot ››› Fig. 129 . ● Place the floor on the guides of the desired height and move it forwards ››› Fig. 129 .

CAUTION Fig. 130 In the luggage compartment: lift the luggage compartment floor. ● Do not tug the boot floor suddenly when opening or let it fall down when closing. Open boot floor Fig. 131 In the luggage compartment: fixed Otherwise, the lining and the floor of the and deployable fastening rings. boot could be damaged. ● Grab the boot floor by the cord ››› Fig. 130 ● The maximum weight that can be loaded and lift it in the direction of the arrow and re- There are fastening rings ››› Fig. 131 on the on the luggage compartment variable floor move it. front and rear of the boot to secure loose ob- in the top position is 125 kg. jects and luggage with fastening belts and Close boot floor cords. Note ● Place the boot floor on the support and carefully lower it ››› . WARNING ● Depending on the features, there are If unsuitable or damaged belts or retaining storage compartments for small objects CAUTION straps are used, they could break in the under the boot floor. event of braking or an accident. Objects ● Do not let the luggage compartment ● SEAT recommends the use of fastening could then be launched across the passen- floor fall when closing it. Always carefully straps to secure objects to retaining rings. ger compartment and cause serious or fa- guide it downward in a controlled manner. tal injuries. Otherwise, the lining and the floor of the boot could be damaged. ● Always use belts or straps that are suitable and in good condition. »

139 Operation

● Tighten the belts and straps in a cross Net bag* ● Store the net bag in the luggage compart- layout over the load placed on the boot ment. floor and secure them to the fastening rings safely. WARNING ● Never exceed the maximum tensile load To secure the elastic net bag on the fasten- of the fastening rings when securing ob- ing rings of the boot it must be stretched jects. out. Once hooked up it is taut. If the net bag ● Make sure that, particularly for flat ob- is hooked up or unhooked incorrectly the jects, the upper edge of the load is higher hooks could cause injuries. than the fastening rings. ● Always secure the bag hooks properly so ● Depending on the features, take into ac- that they do not suddenly release from the count the instruction panels on the boot on fastening rings when hooking or unhooking how to place the load. Fig. 132 In the luggage compartment: net bag them. hooked up at floor level. ● Never secure a child seat to the fastening ● On hooking or unhooking them, protect rings. your eyes and face in case the hooks are The luggage compartment prevents light released suddenly. luggage from moving. The net bag has a zip ● Always hook up the net bag hooks in the Note and can be used to store small objects. described order. If a hook is unfastened ● The maximum tensile load that the fas- suddenly, this may cause injuries. tening rings can support is approx. 3.5 kN. Hooking the net bag into the luggage ● Belts, straps and securing systems for the compartment floor appropriate load can be obtained from If necessary, the front eyes must be unfolded specialised dealerships. SEAT recom- first ››› page 139. mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this. ● Secure the net hooks to the fastening rings ››› Fig. 132 ››› . The bag zip should be facing upwards.

Removing the net bag The hooked up net bag is taut ››› .

● Release the net bag from the fastening rings.

140 Transport and practical equipment

Bag hooks Trapdoor for long loads Closing the tailboard for long items ● Lift the seat back and press it firmly into the lock until it engages correctly ››› .

WARNING Serious injuries can be caused if the tailboard for long items is lowered or lifted without due care and attention. ● Never lower or lift the tailboard while driving. ● Do no trap or damage the seat belt when raising the tailboard. Fig. 133 In the luggage compartment: bag hooks. ● When lowering or lifting the tailboard, Fig. 134 Backrest of the rear seat: opening the keep your hands, fingers, feet and other There may be hooks for hanging bags on trapdoor for long loads body parts out of its path. both sides of the luggage compartment ● When the tailboard is lowered or is not Depending on the features, on the rear seat, ››› Fig. 133. properly engaged nobody else can travel behind the central armrest, there is a tail- in the corresponding seats, particularly The retaining hooks have been designed to board for transporting long items in the interi- children. secure light shopping bags. or, such as skis.

WARNING Opening the tailboard for long items Never use the hooks to hang luggage or ● Press the unlocking button ››› Fig. 134 1 other objects. In case of sudden braking or and fold the tailboard forward ››› . an accident, the hooks could break. ● Open the rear lid. ● CAUTION Insert the long objects through the tailboard from the luggage compartment. Each hook is designed for a maximum load ● Secure the objects with the seat belt firmly. of 2.5 kg. ● Close the tailgate.

141 Operation

Net partition* Fold out the net partition Using the net partition Take out the partition net from the corre- Unfolding and folding the net parti- sponding bag and unroll it. tion Extend the cross rods ››› Fig. 135 1 and 2 of the net in the direction of the arrows until it “clicks”.

Folding in the net partition ● Press on the release button ››› Fig. 136 1 and bend the cross rod in the direction of the arrow with the button pressed. ● Press on the release button ››› Fig. 136 2 and bend the cross rod in the direction of the Fig. 137 Net partition fitted. arrow with the button pressed. ● Fig. 135 Deploying the net partition. Fold in the net partition and store it in its The purpose of the net partition is to prevent bag. the items in the boot from moving into the ● Store the net partition safely in the vehicle. cabin, e.g. in the event of sudden braking.

Fitting the net partition The partition net can be fitted behind the rear seat or, depending on the features, behind the front seats with the second row of seats lowered.

● If required, remove the rear shelf ››› page 135. Fig. 136 Folding in the net partition. ● Folding out the net partition ››› page 142. ● Secure the net partition in the left housing Before fitting the net partition in the vehicle it of the roof ››› Fig. 137 A . Make sure to move must be unfolded. the cross rod down beyond the upper position.

142 Transport and practical equipment

● Hook in the net partition on the rear right- WARNING Cases in which cross bars and the roof hand side roof housing by pressing on the rod carrier system should be disassembled. During a sudden driving or braking ma- ››› Fig. 137 A . noeuvre, or in the event of an accident, ob- ● When they are not used. ● Secure two hooks of the partition net to the jects could be flung though the interior and ● When the vehicle is washed in a car wash. fastening rings of the boot ››› Fig. 137 B and cause serious or fatal injuries. ● tighten the straps firmly. When the vehicle height exceeds the maxi- ● Check whether the cross rods are cor- mum height, for example, in some garages. rectly engaged. Removing the net partition ● Always secure objects, even when the WARNING ● If required, remove the rear shelf net partition is properly assembled. ● Always secure the load properly using ››› page 135. ● There should be nobody behind the net belts or retaining straps that are suitable ● Loosen the straps from the net partition. partition when the vehicle is moving. and in a good condition. ● Release the net hooks from the fastening ● Bulky, heavy, long or flat loads have a rings ››› Fig. 137 B . CAUTION negative effect on aerodynamics, the centre of gravity and driving performance. ● Unhook the net partition on the right-hand If the net partition is secured incorrectly or side roof support ››› Fig. 137 A by pressing to incorrect points, this may damage the ● Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres. on the rod. vehicle. ● Adapt your speed and driving style at all ● Unhook the net partition from the left-hand times to suit visibility, weather, road and side roof housing. traffic conditions. ● Fold in the net partition ››› page 142. Roof carrier* CAUTION ● If required, fit the rear shelf ››› page 135. Introduction ● Remove the cross bars and the roof carri- WARNING er system before entering a car wash. In order to ensure the proper functioning of The vehicle roof has been designed to opti- ● Vehicle height is increased by the instal- the luggage restraint systems (backrests mise aerodynamics. For this reason, cross lation of cross bars or a roof carrier system together with the net partition), place the bars or conventional roof carrier systems and the load secured on them. For this pur- second row of seats in their rearmost posi- cannot be secured to the roof water drains. pose, check that your vehicle's height does tion to avoid the possibility of the load on not surpass the headspace limit, for exam- As the roof water drains are integrated in the top moving forward. Risk to vehicle occu- ple, for underpasses or for entering garage pants. roof to reduce air resistance, only SEAT-ap- doors. » proved cross bars and roof carrier systems can be used.

143 Operation

● Cross bars, the roof carrier system and sons, special fixtures must be used to safely Note the load secured on them should not inter- transport luggage, bicycles, skis, surf boards Always read the assembly instructions that fere with the roof aerial or hamper the path or boats on the roof. Suitable accessories come with the crossbars and the roof carri- of the panoramic sun roof and the rear lid. can be acquired at SEAT dealerships. er system carefully and keep them in the ● On opening the rear lid make sure that it Always secure the crossbars and the roof vehicle. does not knock into the roof load. carrier system properly. Always take the assembly instructions that come with the cross- For the sake of the environment bars and the roof carrier system in question Loading the roof carrier system into account. When cross bars and a roof carrier system are installed, the increased air resistance The crossbars are assembled on the roof rail- The load can only be secured if the crossbars means that the vehicle uses more fuel. ings. The distance between crossbars and the roof carrier system are properly in- ››› Fig. 138 A should be between 75 and 90 stalled ››› . cm and the distance between the crossbars Securing the crossbars and the and the brackets of the roof railings B must Maximum authorised cargo on the roof be 15 cm. roof carrier system The maximum authorised cargo permitted to be transport on the roof is 75 kg. This figure WARNING comes from the combined weight of the roof Incorrect attachment and use of the cross- carrier, the cross bars and the load itself on bars and the roof carrier system may cause the roof ››› . the whole system to detach from the roof Always check the weight of the roof carrier and cause an accident and injuries. system, the cross bars and the weight of the ● Always take the manufacturer assembly load to be transported and weigh them if instructions into account. necessary. Never exceed the maximum au- ● Check threaded joints and attachments thorised roof load. travelling and if necessary tighten them after you have travelled a short distance. If you are using cross bars and a roof carrier When making long trips, check the threa- with a lower weight rating, you will not be ded joints whenever you stop for a rest. able to carry the maximum authorised roof load. In this case, do not exceed the maxi- Fig. 138 Attachment points for the roof railings ● Do not modify or repair the crossbars or for the roof carrier system. roof carrier system. mum weight limit for the roof carrier which is listed in the fitting instructions. The crossbars are the basis of a series of special roof carrier systems. For safety rea- 144 Transport and practical equipment

Distributing a load Storage compartment ● Make sure that nothing prevents you from Distribute loads uniformly and secure them using the pedals at any time. correctly ››› . Introduction ● Always secure the mat in the footwell. ● Never place other mats or other type of Check attachments Use the storage compartments only for small covers on the factory-fitted mat. Once the cross bars and roof carrier system or light items. ● Ensure that no objects can fall into the have been installed, check the bolted con- The Apple® iPod adapter, the USB port or driver's footwell while the vehicle is in mo- nections and attachments after a short jour- the multimedia jack (AUX-IN) are housed in tion. ney and subsequently with a certain frequen- the storage compartment of the front central ● When the vehicle is stationary, remove cy. armrest. the objects in the footwell.

WARNING WARNING WARNING ● Never exceed the maximum authorised Objects inside the vehicle that are not se- If you leave lighters inside the vehicle, they load on the roof and on the axles or the ve- cured could be thrown across the cabin in might be damaged or lit inadvertently. This hicle's maximum authorised weight. the event of sudden braking or manoeu- could lead to severe burns and damage to ● Never exceed the load capacity of the vring. This may cause severe injuries as the vehicle. cross bars and the roof carrier system, well as loss of control of the vehicle. ● Before moving a seat, make sure there even if the maximum authorised roof load ● Do not carry animals or sharp, hard or are no lighters in the moving part area of has not been reached. heavy items in open storage compartments the vehicle. ● Secure heavy items as far forward as of the vehicle, on the dashboard or on the ● Before closing a storage compartment, possible and distribute the vehicle load cover behind the rear seats, or inside make sure there are no lighters in the clos- uniformly. pieces of clothing or bags inside the vehicle. ing area. ● Never leave a lighter inside a storage WARNING ● Keep the storage compartments closed at all times while the vehicle is in motion. compartment or any other surface of the If the load is loose or not secured, it could vehicle as it could ignite due to the high fall from the roof carrier system or cause temperatures on such surfaces, particular- accidents and injuries. WARNING ly during the summer. ● Always use belts or retaining straps that Objects in the driver's footwell could diffi- are suitable and in a good condition. cult the use of the pedals. This may cause CAUTION loss of control of the vehicle and increases ● the risk of severe injuries. Do not store heat- or cold-sensitive objects, food or medicines in the cabin. Heat »

145 Operation

and cold could damage them or render Glove compartment 1 Air diffuser regulator them useless. 2 Support for memory cards ● Objects made from transparent materi- 3 CD player and card reader ››› page 206 als left inside the vehicle, such as glasses, 4 On-board documentation magnifying glasses or transparent suction pads stuck to the windows can concentrate sunlight and damage the vehicle. Opening and closing the glove compartment Opening: Pull the handle ››› Fig. 140 and storage compartment on the driv- open the glove compartment. er's side Closing: Press the glove compartment upwards. Fig. 140 On the front passenger side: glove compartment closed. Glove compartment cooling With the AC on, cool air can be directed towards the inside of the compartment. Turn the air vent to open and close it.

WARNING If the glove compartment is left open, the risk of causing severe injuries in the event of an accident, sudden braking or manoeu- Fig. 139 On the driver side: storage compart- vring increases. ment. ● Always keep the glove compartment Fig. 141 On the front passenger side: glove Opening: Pull the handle Fig. 139. closed while the vehicle is in motion. ››› compartment open. Closing: Press the cover upwards until it clicks CAUTION into place. Key to the Fig. 140: 1 Glove compartment For structural reasons, some vehicle ver- Note sions will have gaps behind the glove com- 2 Storage net partment (for instance, behind the com- There might be a support for memory cards partment for on-board documentation) into on the inside of the cover. Key to the Fig. 141: which small objects may fall. This could

146 Transport and practical equipment

lead to strange noises and damage to the ● Keep the storage compartments of the Folding table vehicle. You should therefore not keep very centre armrest closed at all times while the small objects in the glove compartment. vehicle is in motion.

Storage compartment in the front Storage compartment in the roof central armrest console (glasses case)

Fig. 144 Front left seat: folding table.

Fig. 142 In the front central armrest: storage Fig. 143 On the roof console: glasses case. compartment. Opening: Press and release the button Opening: Given the case, press the unlock ››› Fig. 143. button and raise the centre armrest in the di- Closing: Press the cover upwards until it clicks rection of the arrow ››› Fig. 142. into place. Fig. 145 Front left seat: folding table with Closing: Lower the armrest. drinks holder. Note WARNING Depending on the model version, at the rear For the surveillance of the cabin to work The centre armrest may obstruct the driv- correctly, the storage compartments must of the front seats, there may be “plane-style” er's arm movements, which could cause an be closed when locking the vehicle folding tables for passengers in the rear accident and severe injuries. ››› page 89. seats. »

147 Operation

Opening the folding table Object holder under front seats* Other object holders ● Pull the table up, in the direction of the arrow, until it catches ››› Fig. 144. There are hangers on the struts of the doors and the rear. Folding the table or adjusting its inclination WARNING The foldable table can be used at different Hanging clothes may decrease the driver's visibility, which may cause serious acci- inclinations. dents and injuries. ● Press the unlocking lever under the table ● Always hang clothes from hangers in ››› Fig. 145 1 and keep it that way. such a way that the driver's visibility is not ● Adjust: Adjust the inclination of the table by affected. pressing the lever. Fig. 146 Drawer under the front seat ● Only hang light pieces of clothing from the hangers of the vehicle. Never leave ● Fold: Push the table downwards while Opening: Press the tab on the drawer handle heavy, hard or sharp objects in the pockets pressing the lever. and take the drawer out. of these pieces of clothing. ● Drink holder Closing: Push the drawer under the seat until Do not use clothes hangers to hang up it engages. the clothing, as this could interfere with the A drink holder is built into the folding table 2 . function of the head-protection airbags. With the foldable table extended, remove the WARNING drink holder 2 following the direction of the If the drawer is left open, it could prevent CAUTION arrow. To store the drink holder, insert it into use of the pedals. This may cause serious Each hanger is designed for a maximum the table against the direction of the arrow. accidents and injuries. load of 2.5 kg. ● Always keep the drawer closed while the WARNING vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the drawer The table must always be closed while and any objects in it could fall into the driv- driving to decrease the risk of injuries. er's footwell and obstruct the pedals. Drink holder

CAUTION Introduction The drawer can contain 1.5 kg at most. The storage compartments of the driver and passenger doors contain a bottle holder.

148 Transport and practical equipment

The folding tables of the front seats contain damage the vehicle and its electrical sys- more bottle holders ››› page 147. tem.

WARNING Note Incorrect use of the bottle holders may cause injuries. The inside elements of the drink holders can be extracted for cleaning. ● Never put hot drinks in the drink holders. In the event of sudden braking or an accident while driving, hot beverages in the bottle holders might spill and cause burns. Drinks holder in the front part of the ● Ensure that no bottles or other objects centre console are dropped in the driver footwell while Fig. 148 In the front part of the centre console: driving, as they could get under the pedals drinks holder (variant 2). and obstruct their working. ● Never place glasses, food or other heavy Depending on the features, there are two objects drink holders. These heavy objects drink holders in the front part of the console may be thrown across the cabin in the ››› Fig. 147 or ››› Fig. 148. event of an accident and cause serious injuries. Open and close the drink holder (variant 1) Opening: Move the lid backwards. WARNING Closing: Move the lid forwards. Closed bottles may explode inside the vehicle due to cold or heat. Adjust the drink holder (variant 1) ● Never leave closed bottles in the vehicle Fig. 147 In the front part of the centre console: if the temperature inside is very high or very drinks holder (variant 1). To adapt the drink holder to the size of the low. container, press the corresponding button 1 . The fastening ring 2 opens. CAUTION When you are not using the drink holder any more, press the corresponding ring 2 in the Do not leave open cans in the drink holders opposite direction to the arrow until it locks. when the vehicle is in motion. If the drink is spilled (e.g. due to sudden braking) it may

149 Operation

Drinks holder in the rear central Power sockets ● Lift the power socket cover ››› Fig. 150 1 . armrest ● Insert the plug of the electrical appliance Vehicle power sockets into the power socket.

Maximum power consumption

Maximum power con- Power socket sumption

12 Volts 120 Watts

230 Volts 150 watts (300 watt peaks)

Electrical equipment can be connected to Fig. 150 1 12 volt socket. 2 USB socket on the 12 volt power socket. Fig. 149 In the rear central armrest: drinks the rear part of the centre console. holder. Make sure that the maximum power consumption displayed on each outlet is not ex- Use: Lower the centre armrest. ceeded. The power consumption of devices is When the drink holder is no longer in use, lift shown on the model plate. the armrest again. When connecting two or more electrical devices at the same time, make sure that their total consumption never exceeds 190 watts ››› .

USB power sockets Depending on the equipment and the coun- Fig. 151 On the left side of the luggage com- try, the vehicle may also have USB connec- partment: 230 volt power socket. tions exclusively for charging or as a power socket. You can find 12 volt sockets on the front centre console, in the rear part of the centre con- These USB ports are located in the rear part sole (between the front seats) and in the lug- of the centre console, between the front gage compartment. seats ››› Fig. 150 2 . These connectors can

150 Transport and practical equipment work at a maximum power of up to 10.5 W per Disconnection due to overheating there is a possibility that they may be in- port. When the temperature exceeds a certain val- jured. They are not intended for file playback. ue, the 230 volt socket inverter is automatically disconnected. The disconnection pre- CAUTION 230 volt power socket* vents overheating when the power consump- Always use the correct type of plugs to tion of the connected devices is excessive or With the engine running, the power socket avoid damaging the sockets. the ambient temperature is very high. The Fig. 151 activates automatically as soon as ››› 230-volt power supply can be used once a connector is plugged in. If there is enough again after a cooling time. First unplug the CAUTION power available, the socket can still be used connector of the connected device and then while the engine is off ● 230 volt power socket: ››› plug it back in again. This prevents the elec- – Do not leave devices or connectors Connect an electrical device: Open the cov- trical device from being switched on again if that are too heavy (e.g. a transformer) er and insert the plug into the power socket this is not wanted. hanging directly from the power sock- as far as possible to unlock the built-in child et. lock. The socket only supplies power once WARNING – Do not connect neon lamps. the child lock is unlocked. The electrical system is under high voltage! – Only connect devices to the socket if ● Do not spill liquids onto the socket. LED on the power socket the device and socket voltage match. ● Do not plug adapters or extension cords – The built-in overload disconnect func- Steady green The childproof lock is unlocked. into the 230 volt power socket. Otherwise, tion prevents any electrical devices light: The socket is ready to operate. the integrated child lock will be unlocked that require a high start-up current and the power socket will operate. The ignition is switched off, but from turning on. In this case, unplug the there is enough power available ● Do not insert conductive objects (a knit- electrical device's power supply and to continue supplying the socket ting needle, for example) into the 230 volt re-try the connection after about 10 with current for a maximum of 10 Flashing green power socket. seconds. minutes. If the connector is un- light: plugged before this time elapses, the socket is disconnected WARNING Note and cannot be used again until ● The use of electrical appliances with the the ignition is switched on again. The power socket works only when the ignition is on. Improper use may cause serious engine switched off will cause a battery There is an anomaly, e.g. dis- injury or even fire. Children should there- discharge. Flashing red connection due to a current light: fore not be left in the vehicle unattended if ● Should the connected appliance over- surge or overheating. the button is also left behind. Otherwise heat, immediately switch it off and disconnect it from the socket. »

151 Operation

● Before switching the ignition on or off, un- Air conditioning Dust and pollen filter plug the appliances from the USB ports to The dust and pollen filter with its activated protect them from any damage caused by charcoal cartridge serves as a barrier fluctuations in voltage. Heating, ventilation and against impurities in the air taken into the ve- ● Some appliances may not work properly cooling hicle interior. when connected to the 230 volt sockets The dust and pollen filter must be changed due to a lack of power (watts). Related video regularly so that air conditioner performance is not adversely affected. If the filter loses efficiency prematurely due to use in areas with very high levels of air pollution, the filter must be changed more frequently than stated in the Service Schedule.

Fig. 152 Air conditioning WARNING Reduced visibility through the windows increases the risk of serious accidents. Introduction ● Always ensure that all windows are free of ice and snow, and that they are not fog- Depending on the vehicle’s equipment, sever- ged, so as to maintain good visibility of ev- al systems may have been fitted: erything outside. ● Only drive when you have good visibility. ● The manual air conditioning and the Cli- matronic cool and dehumidify the air. They ● Always ensure that you use the air condi- operate most effectively with the windows tioning, heater or rear window heating to and the sunroof closed. maintain good visibility to the outside. ● Never leave the air recirculation on for a To switch a specific function on, press the ap- long period of time. If the cooling system is propriate button. Press the button again to switched off and air recirculation mode switch off the function. switched on, the windows can mist over very quickly, considerably limiting visibility. The LED on each control lights up to indicate that the respective function of a control has ● Switch air recirculation mode off when it been switched on. is not required.

152 Air conditioning

WARNING special tools. SEAT recommends visiting a the luggage compartment designed for this SEAT Official Service. purpose. Therefore, you should avoid ob- Stuffy or used air will increase fatigue and structing these slots with any kind of ob- reduce driver concentration possibly reject. sulting in a serious accident. Note ● Do not smoke while air recirculation ● Never leave the fresh air fan turned off or ● When the cooling system is turned off, air mode is on, as smoke drawn into the air use the air recirculation for long periods of coming from the outside will not be dried. conditioning system leaves residue on the time; the air in the vehicle interior will not To prevent fogging of the windows, SEAT evaporator, producing a permanent un- be refreshed. recommends leaving the cooling system pleasant odour. (compressor) turned on. To do this, press ● It is advisable to turn on the air condition- CAUTION the  button. The button lamp should light up. ing at least once a month, to lubricate the ● To replace the pollen filter, always visit a system gaskets and prevent leaks. If a de- ● The maximum heat output required to de- service centre. crease in the cooling capacity is detected, frost windows as quickly as possible is only ● Switch the climate control or air condi- a Technical Service should be consulted to available when the engine has reached its check the system. tioner off if you think it may be broken. This normal running temperature. will avoid additional damage. Have the cli- ● When the engine is under extreme strain, ● Keep the air intake slots in front of the mate control or air conditioning checked switch off the compressor for a moment. windscreen free of snow, ice and leaves to by a specialised workshop. ensure heating and cooling are not im- ● Repairs to the climate control or air con- paired, and to prevent the windows from ditioning require specialist knowledge and misting over. ● The air from the vents flows through the vehicle interior and is extracted by slots in

153 Operation

Climatronic* controls

Fig. 153 In the centre console: Climatronic controls.

Automatic mode  for the passenger side to set a different tem- Maximum cooling power  Automatic adjustment of temperature, fan, perature. The recirculation of air and the cooling sys- and air distribution. Automatic mode is disa- tem turn on automatically and air distribution bled when the ventilation is modified manual- Blower  adjusts automatically to the position . ly. The power of the fan is automatically adjusted. Defrost/demist function  Cooling mode  The fan is also adjusted manually by turning The air drawn in from outside the vehicle is di- Press the button to switch on or off the cool- the control. rected at the windscreen and air recirculation ing system. is automatically switched off. To defrost the Air distribution  /  /  windscreen more quickly, the air is dehumidi- Temperature 1 / 2 fied at temperatures over approximately The airflow adjusts automatically for comfort. +3°C (+38°F) and the fan runs at maximum The temperature of the right and left sides It can also be manually distributed to the de- output. can be adjusted separately using the adjust- sired zone by pressing the corresponding ers. The selected temperature is shown on button:  the display of the climate control panel. Residual heat  The airflow is directed towards the chest When the engine is still warm but the ignition Synchronisation: press button  so that  switched off, the residual heat of the engine settings on the driver's side apply to the pas- The airflow is directed towards the foot- can be used to keep the vehicle interior senger side. Use the temperature regulator well.  The airflow is directed at the windscreen.

154 Air conditioning warm. The function is disabled after 30 mi- It should be switched off as soon as the glass Seat heating   nutes or when the charge of the 12-volt bat- is demisted. By saving electrical power you ››› page 159 tery is low. can also save fuel. To avoid possible damage to the battery, an Switching off Infotainment system:  automatic temporary disconnection of this Turn the fan adjuster completely to the left. The climate control operation and settings function is possible, coming back on when menu will be displayed on the Easy Connect normal operating conditions are re-establish- OR: Press the OFF function button on the info- system screen. ed. tainment system ››› page 156.

Heated rear window  Air recirculation  This only works when the engine is running ››› page 158 and switches off automatically after a maximum of 10 minutes.

Manual air conditioning controls

Fig. 154 In the centre console: manual air conditioning controls.

Cooling mode  Temperature 1 Blower 

Press the button to switch on or off the cool- Turn the control to adjust the temperature. Turning the regulator 2 sets the fan power. ing system. At level 0 the fan and manual air conditioning are disconnected. Level 6 is the maximum. »

155 Operation

Air distribution  /  /  /  /  It should be switched off as soon as the glass Operating the Climatronic through is demisted. By saving electrical power you Turning regulator 3 distributes the air to the the Easy Connect system* desired zone: can also save fuel. To avoid possible damage to the battery, an  The airflow is directed towards the chest automatic temporary disconnection of this  The airflow is directed towards the chest function is possible, coming back on when and the footwell area. normal operating conditions are re-establish-  The airflow is directed towards the foot- ed. well. Air recirculation  The airflow is directed towards the wind-  screen and the footwell area. ››› page 158

Defrost/demist function  Seat heating   Fig. 155 Easy Connect screen: Climate control When control 3 is in position  the air flow is ››› page 159 menu. directed at the windscreen and air recirculation is disconnected automatically or not ac- Switching off In the Easy Connect system it is also possible tivated. Increase the fan power to clear the Press button  or manually set the fan to . to perform various adjustments to the Clima- windscreen of condensation as soon as pos- tronic. sible. To dehumidify the air, the cooling system will automatically switch on. Open the air conditioner menu ● Press the  button of the Climatronic Maximum cooling power  control panel. When the control is in position  air recirculation and the cooling system are connec- On the screen you can view and change the ted automatically and the air flow is automat- current settings, such as, for example, the ically adjusted to position . temperature set for the driver and passenger sides. Temperatures up to +22°C (+72°F) are Heated rear window  shown with blue arrows, and temperatures over +22°C (+72°F) with red arrows. This only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after a maxi- To switch a function on or off, or to select a mum of 10 minutes. submenu, you must press the corresponding function button.

156 Air conditioning

Function button: Function Rear controls Climate control usage instructions

OFF: Climatronic is switched off. The interior cooling system only works when the engine is running and fan is switched on. ON: Climatronic is switched on.

SYNC: Synchronise driver and front passenger tem- Economic use of the air conditioning peratures. When the air conditioning is switched on, the SETTINGS The air conditioning settings submenu is compressor consumes engine power and has opened. The following settings can also be adjusted: influence on fuel consumption. Automatic supplementary heater: to The air conditioner operates most effectively activate/deactivate the automatic activation of Fig. 156 In the rear part of the centre console: with the windows and the panoramic sliding the auxiliary heating for colder countries (only controls for the rear seats. sunroof closed. However, if the vehicle has for engines with auxiliary heating). With the op- heated up after standing in the sun for some tion deactivated, depending on the outside tem- Temperature perature the heating may need more time than time, the air inside can be cooled more quick- normal to reach a comfortable temperature. ● Press buttons 1 and 2 ››› Fig. 156 to ad- ly by opening the windows and the panoram- just the temperature. ic sliding sunroof briefly. Automatic air recirculation: to switch automatic air recirculation on and off ››› page 158. Setting the temperature on the infotain- Change the temperature unit (Climatron- ment system ic) Back : Close the submenu. ● Press the  button in the control panel. The temperature display can be changed from Celsius to Fahrenheit on the screen of *: The auxiliary heater submenu opens. ● Press the function button to set the temperature of the rear seats. the Infotainment system using the Infotain- ment button  > Settings > Units. : It enables activation and deactivation of the ● Press the function buttons to set the tem- PureAir and opens the submenu. perature. The cooling system cannot be activated The display shows the temperature selected. If the air conditioning system cannot be switched on, this may be caused by the fol- Note lowing: When function button  is active on the In- ● fotainment System, the rear controls do not The engine is not running. work. ● The fan is switched off. ● The air conditioner fuse has blown. » 157 Operation

● The outside temperature is lower than ap- vents. When the thumbwheel is in the  posi- Climatronic automatic air recirculation proximately +3°C (+38°F). tion, the corresponding air vent is closed. mode ● The air conditioner compressor has been ● Change the air direction using the ventila- With the automatic air recirculation mode ac- temporarily switched off because the engine tion grille lever. tivated, the entry of fresh air into the cabin in- coolant temperature is too high. terior is enabled. If the system detects a high There are other additional, non-adjustable air ● Another fault in the vehicle. Have the air concentration of hazardous substances in the vents in the dash panel, in the footwells and in conditioner checked by a specialised work- ambient air, air recirculation mode is switched the rear area of the passenger compartment. shop. on automatically. When the level of impurities drops to within a normal range, recirculation Note Special characteristics mode is switched off. Food, medicine and other heat or cold sen- The system is unable to detect unpleasant If the humidity and temperature outside the sitive objects should never be placed in smells. vehicle are high, condensation can drip off front of the air outlets as they may be dam- the evaporator in the cooling system and aged or made unsuitable for use by the air. ● Automatic air recirculation is activated and form a pool underneath the vehicle. This is deactivated in the climate control menu normal and does not indicate a leak! ››› page 156. Air recirculation  Note The air recirculation will not connect auto- After starting the engine, any residual hu- Air recirculation mode prevents the ambient matically in versions without humidity sensor midity in the air conditioner could mist over air from entering the interior. and in the following external conditions: the windscreen. Switch on the defrost function as soon as possible to clear the wind- When the outside temperature is very high, ● The outside temperature is lower than +3°C screen of condensation. selecting manual air recirculation mode for a (+38°F). short period refreshes the vehicle interior ● The cooling system is switched off and the more quickly. outside temperature is below +10°C (+50°F). Air vents For safety reasons, air recirculation mode is ● The cooling system is switched off, the out- switched off when the button  is pressed side temperature is below +15°C (+59°F) and To ensure proper heating, cooling and venti- or the air distributor turned to . the windscreen wipers are switched on. lation in the vehicle interior, the air vents must remain open. Switching the manual air recirculation WARNING mode on and off ● Turn the corresponding thumbwheel in the Observe the safety warnings ››› in Intro- required direction to open and close the air ● Press the button  to connect or discon- duction on page 153. nect manual air recirculation.

158 Air conditioning

● If the cooling system is switched off and Seat heating* If the ignition is switched on again in approx. air recirculation mode switched on, the the next 10 minutes, the driver seat heating is windows can mist over very quickly, con- automatically turned on to the level set the siderably limiting visibility. last time. ● Switch air recirculation mode off when it is not required. Cases in which the heat seating should not be switched on CAUTION Do not switch the seat heating on if any of the following conditions are met: Do not smoke when air recirculation is Fig. 157 In the centre console: front seat heat- switched on in vehicles with an air condi- ing switches. ● The seat is not occupied. tioner. The smoke taken in could lie on the ● The seat has a cover. cooling system vaporiser and on the activated charcoal cartridge of the dust and ● A child seat has been installed on the seat. pollen filter, leading to a permanently un- ● The seat cushion is wet or damp. pleasant smell. ● The outdoor or indoor temperature is greater than +25°C (77°F). Note Climatronic: air recirculation mode is acti- WARNING Fig. 158 In the rear part of the centre console: vated to prevent exhaust gas or unpleasant rear seats heating switch. People who cannot perceive pain or tem- odours from entering the vehicle interior perature because of medications, paralysis when it is in reverse and while the automat- With the engine on, the seat cushion and the or chronic diseases (e.g. diabetes) or have ic windscreen wiper is working. seat backrest can be heated electrically. a limited perception of these, may suffer burns to the back, buttocks or legs when Control seat heating using seat heating. ● Press buttons  or  on the control panel ● People with limited pain and temperature thresholds must never use seat heating. to turn on the seat heating as high as possible. ● If an abnormality in the device's temperature control is detected, have it checked ● Press buttons  or  repeatedly to adjust it by a specialist workshop. » to the required level. ● To turn off the seat heating, press button  or  repeatedly until no LEDs are lit.

159 Operation

WARNING If the fabric of the cushion is wet, this can adversely affect the operation of the seat heating, increasing the risk of burns. ● Make sure the seat cushion is dry prior to using the seat heater. ● Do not sit on the seat with clothing that is wet or damp. ● Do not leave clothing that is wet or damp on the seat. ● Do not spill liquid on the seat.

CAUTION ● To avoid damaging the heating elements of the seat heaters, please do not kneel on the seat or apply sharp pressure to a single point on the seat cushion or backrest. ● Liquids, sharps objects and insulating materials (e.g. covers or child seats) can damage the seat heating. ● In the event of smells, switch off the seat heating immediately and have it inspected by a specialised workshop.

For the sake of the environment The seat heating should remain on only when needed. Otherwise, it is an unnecessary fuel waste.

160 Air conditioning

●  Auxiliary heating (additional ● Never programme the auxiliary heater so Press button on the radio-operated re- that it switches itself on and is running in an mote control ››› page 162. heating)* enclosed space or an area with no ventila- ● Automatically scheduling a departure tion. time* ››› page 163. Introduction WARNING Disconnection The auxiliary heater runs on fuel from the vehicle's tank and can be used while you are The components of the auxiliary heater are The independent heating can be switched off driving and when the vehicle is stationary. extremely hot and could cause a fire. in the following ways: ● Always park your vehicle so that no part The auxiliary heater can be switched on using ● Press the fast heating button on the air con- of the exhaust system can come in contact ditioner's control panel . The control lamp the fast heating button of the air conditioning with easily flammable materials that might on the button turns off. controls, with the remote control or by previ- be below the vehicle, such as dried grass. ously programming a departure time in the ● Press button  on the radio-operated re- auxiliary heater menu of the infotainment sys- mote control ››› page 162. tem. CAUTION ● Automatically at the scheduled departure Never place food, medicines or other tem- In winter, with the auxiliary heater switched time or after the programmed operating time perature-sensitive objects close to the air on, you can defog the windscreen and leave has elapsed ››› page 163. vents. Food, medicines and other objects it free of ice and snow (if it is a thin layer) be- sensitive to heat or cold may be damaged ● Automatically when the control lamp  fore you start driving. or made unsuitable for use by the air com- (fuel level indicator) lights up ››› page 342. If the outside temperature is very high, the ve- ing from the vents. ● Automatically when the 12-volt battery hicle interior can be ventilated with the en- charge drops too low ››› page 358. gine off using the auxiliary heater. Switching the auxiliary heater on Things to note WARNING and off Once switched off, the auxiliary heater will The auxiliary heater exhaust fumes contain continue to operate for a short period of time carbon monoxide, an odourless and colour- Connection in order to burn the fuel remaining in the sys- less toxic gas. Carbon monoxide can cause The independent heating can be connected tem and also to expel the exhaust fumes. people to lose consciousness. It can also in the following ways: cause death. ● Never switch on the auxiliary heater or ● Press the fast heating button on the air con- leave it running in enclosed spaces or ditioning control panel  ››› page 154. The areas with no ventilation. control lamp of the button will light up.

161 Operation

Radio-operated remote control It lights up for approx. 2 seconds Changing the battery of the radio-operat- ● In green: The auxiliary heater has been ed remote control When pressing the buttons, if the control switched on with button . lamp of the remote 1 flashes for approx. 5 ● In red: The auxiliary heater has been orange or does not light up, the batteries switched off con with button . must be replaced.

Flashes slowly for approx. 2 seconds The battery is located beneath a cover on ● In green: No on signal has been received. the back of the remote control. The remote control is out of range. Move ● To open the cover, lift it slightly at the bot- closer to the vehicle. tom and slide it down. ● In red: No off signal has been received. The ● Remove the old battery. Fig. 159 Auxiliary heating: radio-operated re- remote control is out of range. Move closer to mote control. the vehicle. ● Insert the new battery. When doing so, take into account the polarity and use batteries of Fig. 159 Flashes quickly approx. 2 seconds the same type ››› .  Switch the auxiliary heater on ● In green: The independent heating is ● Replace the battery cover by inserting the blocked. Possible causes: the fuel tank is al- tabs at the top and pressing the bottom.  Switch the auxiliary heater off most empty, the 12-volt battery charge is 1 Control lamp very low or there is a fault. Range The receiver is inside the vehicle. The remote If the buttons of the remote control are press- It lights up for approx. 2 seconds control, when fitted with new batteries, has a ed unnecessarily, it could switch on the auxili- ● In orange (then in green or in red): The re- range of several hundred metres. Obstacles ary heater involuntarily, even when it is out of mote control battery is almost flat. However, between the remote control and the vehicle, range or when the control lamp is flashing. the on or off signal has been received. bad weather conditions and discharged bat- To switch on and off the independent heating, ● In orange (then flashes green or red): The teries can considerably reduce the range of the button must be pressed and held for ap- remote control battery is almost flat. No on or the remote control. proximately 1 second. off signal has been received. WARNING Control lamp on the remote control Flashes for around 5 seconds Swallowing a battery with a 20 mm diame- ● In orange: The remote control battery is flat. When the buttons are pressed, the control ter or any other button battery can cause lamp on the remote control 1 provides the No on or off signal has been received. serious and even fatal injuries within a very user with different information: short time.

162 Air conditioning

● Always keep the remote control, keyrings Programming the auxiliary heater* Function button: function with batteries, the spare batteries, button batteries and all other batteries over 20 Before programming it, check that the vehi- Departure time 1, Departure time mm out of reach of children. cle's date and time are set correctly ››› . 2, Departure time 3: Three different departure times (hh.mm) may be programmed. If ● If you suspect that someone may have The auxiliary heater is programmed in the the auxiliary heater should only be switched swallowed a battery, seek immediate med- Auxiliary heater menu of the infotainment on a certain day of the week, this can also be ical attention. system. selected. Duration: The duration determines the oper- CAUTION Open the Auxiliary heater menu. ating time of the auxiliary heater when switched on using the fast heating button  on the ● ●  The radio frequency remote control con- Press the button of the Climatronic air conditioning controls. The duration is also tains electronic components. Therefore, control panel. used to calculate the departure time for the avoid getting it wet and exposing it to ● Press the  function button. manual air conditioner. It can be set between knocks or direct sunlight. 10 and 60 minutes at 10-minute intervals. ● The use of inappropriate batteries may Function button: function damage the radio frequency remote con- The programmed departure time determines trol. For this reason, always replace the Switch off: The auxiliary heater is immediately the approximate time it should take to reach used battery with another of the same volt- switched off. the temperature set in the vehicle. The start of age, size and specifications. the heating operation is determined automat- Heat, Ventilate: Set to heat or ventilate the vehi- ically depending on the outside temperature. cle interior when the auxiliary heater is switched on. For the sake of the environment Press the function button  to select the desired mode. Checking the programming ● Please dispose of your used batteries correctly and with respect for the environ- Set: Opens the Auxiliary heater menu. When a departure time is activated and the ment. ignition is switched off the control lamp of the fast heating button  lights up for approxi- ● The remote control battery may contain mately 10 seconds. perchlorate. Observe the legal provisions regarding disposal. WARNING ● Care should be taken so as not to operate the remote control unintentionally so Never programme the auxiliary heater so as to prevent the auxiliary heater being that it switches itself on and is running in an switched on accidentally. enclosed space or an area with no ventilation. The auxiliary heater exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, an odourless and colourless toxic gas. Carbon monoxide » 163 Operation

can cause people to lose consciousness. It ● The control lamp  (fuel level indicator) can also cause death. lights up.

Note Usage instructions ● Noises will be heard while the auxiliary heater is running. The auxiliary heater exhaust system located ● When the air humidity is high and the in- below the vehicle must be kept clear of snow, side temperature low, condensation from mud and other objects. The exhaust fumes the heating and ventilating system may must be able to exit freely. The emissions evaporate when the auxiliary heater is generated by the auxiliary heater are re- switched on. In this case, steam may be removed via an exhaust pipe fitted underneath leased from underneath the vehicle. This the vehicle. does not mean that there is a vehicle malfunction. On heating the vehicle interior, depending on ● If the vehicle is tilted, e.g. if parked on a the outside temperature, the warm air is first slope, the operation of the auxiliary heater directed at the windscreen and then to the may be restricted if the fuel tank level is rest of the vehicle interior through the air low (just above the reserve level). vents. Directing the diffusers – towards the ● If the auxiliary heater is used a number of windows for example – can affect air distribu- times for a long period of time, the 12-volt tion. battery will lose its charge. To recharge the battery, the vehicle must be driven for a When the auxiliary heater is not switched number of kilometres from time to time. As on a guideline: the journey should last approx- ● The auxiliary heater requires about as imately as long as the heater was connec- much power as the dipped beam headlights. ted. If the 12-volt battery charge is too low, the ● At temperatures below +5 °C (+41 °F), the auxiliary heater switches off automatically auxiliary heater may switch itself on auto- and cannot be switched on. This avoids prob- matically when the engine is switched on. lems when starting the engine. The auxiliary heater is switched off again after a certain time. ● The heating must be activated every time you want to set off. Similarly, the departure time must reactivate each time.

164 Introduction

Infotainment System system can distract your attention from the WARNING traffic. Place the connecting cables of external ● Always drive carefully and responsibly. equipment so that they do not interfere Introduction ● Select volume settings that allow you to with the driver’s mobility. hear sounds from outside the vehicle at all Safety warnings times (e.g. emergency services sirens and WARNING horns). External devices that are loose or not prop- Safety warnings regarding the Info- erly secured could move around the pas- WARNING tainment system senger compartment during a sharp ma- The volume level may suddenly change noeuvre or accident. Only operate the infotainment system and its when you switch audio source or connect a ● Avoid placing external devices on the various functions when the traffic situation new audio source. doors, windscreen, steering wheel, dash really permits this. ● Lower the base volume before connect- panel, the backs of the seats, on top of or ing or switching audio sources. near the area marked “AIRBAG” or between WARNING these areas and the occupants. They could cause serious injury in an accident, espe- ● Before starting the trip, you should famili- WARNING cially when the airbags inflate. arise yourself with the different infotain- The driving recommendations and traffic ment system functions. indications shown on the navigation system WARNING ● High audio volume may represent a dan- may differ from the current traffic situation. ger to you and to others. Hearing may be The armrest* must always remain closed ● Traffic signs and traffic regulations have impaired if the volume is too high, even for during the journey as it could restrict the priority over the recommendations and dis- short periods of time. driver’s movements. plays provided by the navigation system. ● Changes to the Infotainment system settings should be made when the car is stop- WARNING ped, or by a passenger. WARNING Opening the CD or DVD player can lead to Connecting, inserting or removing a data injuries from invisible laser radiation. WARNING medium while driving can distract your attention from the traffic and cause an acci- ● Have CD or DVD repaired only by a spe- Current traffic requires maximum attention dent. cialist workshop. » from public road users. Distracting the driver in any way can lead to an accident and cause injuries. Operating the Infotainment

165 Infotainment System

CAUTION – Do not insert 8 cm single CDs or irregularly shaped CDs or DVDs. The Infotainment system can be damaged by the incorrect insertion of a data storage – Do not insert DVD-Plus discs, Dual device or the insertion of an incompatible Discs or Flip Discs, as these are thicker data storage device. than normal CDs. ● When inserting a data storage device, make sure it is correctly positioned. CAUTION ● Applying force may irreparably damage The vehicle loudspeakers may be dam- the memory card slot locking mechanism. aged if the volume is too high or the sound ● Only use compatible memory cards. is distorted. ● When inserting and removing CDs and DVDs, always hold them at right angles to Note the front of the CD/DVD drive without tilt- For the proper functioning of the Infotain- ing so as not to scratch them. ment system it is important that the date ● If a CD or DVD is inserted while another is and time set in the vehicle are correct. already in the unit or being ejected, the CD/DVD drive may be damaged. Always wait until the data medium is completely ejected.

CAUTION Foreign objects stuck to a CD or DVD, or if it is not round, the player may be damaged. ● Only clean, standard 12 cm CDs or DVDs should be used. – Do not affix stickers or other items to the data medium. Stickers may peel off and damage the drive. – Do not use printable data media. Prin- ted labels and coverings may peel off and damage the CD/DVD drive.

166 Introduction

Overview of the unit

Media System Plus / Navi System / Navi System Plus

Fig. 160 Overview of the controls

1 Radio Mode (change of band frequency 6 Voice control ››› page 177 12 Settings button (search and selection) ››› page 190 7 Full Link ››› page 180 ››› page 170 2 Touchscreen ››› page 171 8 Vehicle settings ››› page 82, ››› page 229 3 Navigation Mode ››› page 215 9 Main menu ››› page 170 4 Media mode (audio sources) 10 Volume. Off/on ››› page 170 ››› page 198 11 Proximity sensor ››› page 173 5 Phone Mode ››› page 233

167 Infotainment System

Main menus

Fig. 161 Menu summary.

168 Introduction

 Radio ››› page 190  Navigation ››› page 215  Telephone ››› page 233

RADIO main menu ››› page 190 New destination ››› page 217 Bluetooth® ››› page 234 RDS radio data services ››› page 191 Route options ››› page 218 ››› page 219 Tethering ››› page 235 Digital radio mode ››› page 192 My destinations ››› page 219 Function buttons ››› page 236 Memory buttons ››› page 193 Special destinations (POI) ››› page 221 Enter number ››› page 238 Save station logos ››› page 194 View ››› page 221 Agenda ››› page 239 Select, tune and save stations ››› page 194 Split screen ››› page 221 Short messages (SMS) ››› page 240 SCAN automatic playback ››› page 195 Map display ››› page 222 Call list ››› page 241 TP traffic information ››› page 195 Traffic bulletins and dynamic guide ››› page 223 Quick dial keys ››› page 241 Setup ››› page 196 Predictive navigation ››› page 224 Setup ››› page 242 Import vCards ››› page 224  Media ››› page 198 Navigation with images ››› page 224  Sound ››› page 176 Road signs ››› page 224 Data and file formats ››› page 198 Route guidance in Demo mode ››› page 225 Full Link ››› page 180 Playback order ››› page 201 ››› page 201 Setup ››› page 225  Change the media source ››› page 203 Offroad mode ››› page 227 Requirements ››› page 181 Change track ››› page 204 Activation of Full Link ››› page 182 Selecting an album by cover ››› page 204  Vehicle Tethering of portable devices ››› page 183 Selecting a track from a track list ››› page 205 MirrorLink® ››› page 184 Data bank view ››› page 206 Instrument panel ››› page 229 Apple CarPlay™ ››› page 184 Insert or remove a CD or DVD ››› page 206 Sport ››› page 230 Android Auto™ ››› page 185 Memory card ››› page 207 Offroad ››› page 230 Frequently Asked Questions ››› page 186 External data storage device connected to the USB Consumers ››› page 231 port ››› page 207 Driving data ››› page 231 SEAT Md. Climate ››› page 186 External audio source connected to the AUX-IN multi- Ecotrainer ››› page 231  media socket ››› page 208 Vehicle status ››› page 232 WLAN access point ››› page 187 External audio source with Bluetooth® ››› page 208 Images ››› page 213  Traffic ››› page 223 Setup ››› page 214  Images ››› page 213 Traffic information (TP) ››› page 195 Traffic bulletins and dynamic guide ››› page 223  Control ››› page 156

 Setup ››› page 174

169 Infotainment System

General instructions for use countries. For further information, contact Note the local authorities. Depending on the infotainment version, Introduction ● On vehicles with ParkPilot, the audio vol- there may be more icons on the second ume is automatically lowered when reverse page. In this case, to see the remaining gear is selected. The volume can be low- icons press the function button ››› Fig. 163 ered in the menu Sound > Volume. (arrow) or slide your finger horizontally across the screen.

Diagram of the menus Rotary push buttons and infotain- Fig. 162 Related video ment buttons If the setup is changed, this may change the display on the screen and the Infotainment Rotary/push buttons system may behave in a manner different to The left rotary push button  is the on/off that described in this manual. button if pressed and the volume knob if turned. Note The right rotary pushbutton is the search but- ● Just press a button or the screen to use ton if turned and the selection button if press- the infotainment system's functions. ed. ● The equipment’s software depends on Fig. 163 Main menu the market in question, so it is possible that Infotainment buttons not all of the function buttons or described The Infotainment system touchscreen can be functions are available. The equipment is The Infotainment buttons are used by press- used to select the different main menus. not faulty if a function button is missing. ing them or pressing and holding. ● Due to country-specific legislation, cer- Press the Infotainment button  to open the tain functions may not be available on the menus summary . screen when the vehicle is travelling above The display of the touchscreen's main menu Switching on and off a certain speed. can be switched between “grid” and “carou- When the system is turned on, it starts up with ● Using a mobile telephone inside the vehi- sel” and vice-versa using the menu Settings the volume at which it was turned off, as long cle may provoke noise in the speakers. > Screen ››› page 174. as it does not exceed the preset maximum ● Restrictions on the use of devices using start-up volume. Select Sound > Volume. Bluetooth® technology may apply in some

170 Introduction

The unit will switch off automatically when played on the instrument panel by a volume the key is removed from the ignition or when bar. the on/off button is pressed (depending on It is possible to preset certain volume settings the equipment fitted or the vehicle). If the In- and adjustments. Select  > Sound > Vol- fotainment system is switched on again, it will ume. switch off automatically after approximately 30 minutes (switch-off delay). Muting the Infotainment system sound Note ● Turn the volume control  anti-clockwise until it displays . ● The Infotainment system is a part of the vehicle. It cannot be used in any other vehi- ● OR: press the left wheel of the multifunction Fig. 165 Sound setup menu cle. steering wheel. ● If the battery has been disconnected, the Active areas of the touchscreen that call up a Playback is paused while in Media mode (ex- ignition must be activated before switching certain function are called “function buttons”. cept AUX). The screen displays . on the Infotainment system. These buttons are operated by pressing them on the screen or holding them down.

Operation of the function buttons The function buttons appear in this manual as Changing the basic volume a “function button” and a button symbol and the instructions on the screen inside a rectangle . Increasing or decreasing the volume or These activate functions or open submenus. muting the sound The currently selected menu is displayed in Raise the volume: turn the volume control  the title bar ››› Fig. 164 A of the submenus. clockwise or move the left thumbwheel on Inactive (grey) function buttons cannot be se- the multifunction steering wheel upward . lected. Lower the volume: turn the volume control  clockwise or move the left thumbwheel on Increase or decrease the size of the im- the multifunction steering wheel downward ages displayed on the screen . The size of the navigation map image and im- Changes in volume are indicated by a vol- age views can be enlarged or reduced. To do Fig. 164 View of some of the function buttons ume bar on the screen. The volume can be this, slide 2 fingers across the screen to sepa- on the screen. controlled using the steering wheel controls. rate them or bring them together. » In this case, the changes in volume are dis-

171 Infotainment System

Overview of screen and function buttons Display and function buttons: operation Mark list entries using the setup button and open them Display and function buttons: operation and effect ● Turn the adjustment knob to search and se- and effect OK Press to confirm an entry or a selection. lect from the list. The title bar shows the selected menu A Press to close a pop-up window or an in- ● Press the setup button to activate the and other function buttons. × put window. marked entry on the list. B Press it to open another menu. Press them to change the setup adjust-  /  ments one at a time. Search lists (scrolling the screen) The scroll bar is shown on the right. Scroll the bar by sliding your finger vertically on Move the scroll button across the screen The scroll bar is shown on the right and its C  it ››› page 172, Open list entries and by sliding your finger. size depends on the entries in the list search in lists. ››› Fig. 166 1 .

Movable cursor: Move the cursor by slid- ● On the bar: Press above or below the mark ing your finger across the screen. Open list entries and search in lists or slide your finger vertically over the mark OR: Press a point on the screen where until you reach the desired position. you want the sound to be directed.

D Fixed crosshair: Press on the arrows to move the sound around according to your Input window with on-screen key- preferences. pad OR: Press the central button to centre the stereo sound in the centre of the passenger compartment

Press it on some lists to move up a level,  one by one. Fig. 166 Entries on a setup menu list. BACK Button to return to the previous menu or  move up through the folder structure. The entries on a list can be activated by When pressed, a pop-up window opens pressing them on the screen or by using the  (options window) which displays other settings button. setup options. Fig. 167 Input window with on-screen keypad. Some functions are activated  or deac-  /  tivated  by pressing this box.

172 Introduction

The on-screen keypad is used for functions Function icon and text: operation and ef- toward it. In operation mode, the function but- such as entering an memory name, selecting fect tons are automatically highlighted to facili- a destination address or entering a search tate their use. term for searching long lists. 2 Press to show symbols on the keypad.

The input line with cursor is located in the top If there are fewer than 99, it shows the number of entries that can be selec- Motion sensors (gesture control)* bar of the screen. All inputs are displayed 3 here. ted. Pressing opens the list according to the entry. 3 Valid for: Navi System and Navi System Plus.

Input windows for “free text input” Scroll bar, the size of which depends Depending on the version, the infotainment 4 on the number of matching entries. system has motion sensors that can be used In the input masks for open text, you may en- to change certain functions, e.g. next station, ter letters, numbers and characters in any If the button is held down, special next memory bank, previous track, etc. combination. characters based on that letter are displayed. Press the desired charac- 5 ● Press the infotainment button  > Set- ter to enter it. Some special charac- Input windows for selecting a saved entry ters can be written out instead (e.g. tings > Screen > activate/deactivate (e.g. selection of a destination address) “AE” for “Ä”). proximity sensor. It is only possible to enter a sequence of let-  Space bar If the sensors are active, when you move your ters, numbers and characters that matches a hand close to the screen the silhouette of a stored entry. Deletes characters on the input line hand will be displayed in the lower right cor- from right to left. Matches are suggested on the input line  ner. ››› Fig. 167 4 . In the case of compound Press and hold to delete several char- With this function the system switches to the names, it is necessary to enter a space. acters. previous or next station, track, memory bank, BACK  Close the input window. etc., when you move your hand from left to Overview of the function buttons* right, or vice-versa, in front of the screen. An Function icon and text: operation and ef- audible warning also sounds. fect Proximity sensor

Letters and Press them to copy them into the input 3 Valid for: Navi System and Navi System Plus. digits line. The Infotainment system is equipped with an Press to change the keypad to anoth- integrated proximity sensor ››› Fig. 160 11 . er language. Keypad languages can 1 be selected from the menu System The screen switches from display mode to settings > Speech. automatic operation when your hand moves 173 Infotainment System

Additional information and display set or if the NEVER function button has not Function button: function options been pressed. Once one or more settings have been Function button: function applied, finalise the configuration in The displays appearing on the screen may the main menu of the wizzard. vary depending on the settings, and may Closes the Configuration Wizard, and FINISH If you have not set all the parameters, differ from those described here. the main menu or last mode in which the Initial Configuration Wizard will CLOSE you used the Infotainment system will start the next time you turn the Info- The status bar on the screen can display, for appear. tainment system on. example, the current time and outside temperature. Disables the possibility of changing a) Only valid for Navi System and Navi System Plus. the settings of the Infotainment sys- All displays can be viewed only after com- NEVER tem. To configure the system go to: pletely restarting the Infotainment system. System settings and select Con- figuration wizard. Menu and system settings

START Starts up the Configuration Wizard. The settings that can be selected varies de- Initial configuration wizard pending on the country and the equipment in If the system includes navigation, the A date and time are set automatically question, and on the vehicle's equipment. by the GPS. ● Press the Infotainment button  and then Search and save the radio stations press the SETTINGS function button. B with the best reception at that time in all available bands. Press the function button of the main menu or the functions for which you want to change Link your mobile phone to the Infotain- C ment system. the settings. All settings are automatically applied when the menus are closed. Add your home address using your a) D current position or by manually enter- Function button: function ing an address. Fig. 168 Initial configuration wizard Screen : To change the screen settings. Previous or next parameter to configure. It will help you to set up your Infotainment Menu : To select the main menu display mode When a parameter has been config- (Mosaic or Carousel). PREVIOUS system the first time you switch it on. ured, the only way to reconfigure it is

by clicking on it on the main menu, not Every time you switch on the Infotainment NEXT by using the Previous/Next buttons. system, the initial setup screen will appear When you configure a parameter,  ››› Fig. 168 if any parameters have not been will be displayed over it. 174 Introduction

Function button: function Function button: function Function button: function

Switch off screen (in 10 seconds) : If this function is Time format : To select the time display format (12 Remove safely : To eject the data medium (SD/USB active and the infotainment system is not used, or 24 hours). card) from the system. After correctly ejecting the the screen will automatically switch off after ap- data storage device from the system, the function prox. 10 seconds. Pressing the screen or pressing Date : To set the current date. button becomes inactive (grey colour). one of the infotainment buttons will turn the Date format : To select the date display format Factory settings : When the original factory settings screen on again. (DD.MM.YYYY, YY-MM-DD or MM-DD-YY). are restored, all inputs and settings that are made Brightness : To select the brightness level of the Language : To select the desired language for texts are deleted, depending on the selected settings. screen. and phrases in the voice control system. Bluetooth : To change the Bluetooth® ››› page 242 Day / Night : To select the type of display (Day, settings. Night or Automatic). Additional keypad languages : To select additional keyboard languages. WLAN a): To change the WLAN access point settings Touchscreen tone : The confirmation tone when a ››› page 211. function button is pressed is active. Units : To set the units of measurement of the vehicle's displays: distance, speed, temperature, volume, System information : Display of the system information Proximity sensor : The proximity sensors are active. consumption and pressure. (device number, hardware and software versions). Also see ››› page 173, Proximity sensor. Data transfer for SEAT apps Update : To update the navigation data, do Show clock in standby mode : In standby mode, the page 215 No remove the memory card while time is displayed on the infotainment system Data transfer for SEAT apps : This allows data to be ››› the navigation data are being installed. screen. exchanged between the vehicle and SEAT apps. They are not personal data. Copyright : Information about copyright. Date and time : Change the time and date settings. Operation via apps : Change the level of interaction Clock time source : To select the time source (GPS with apps. Configuration wizard : Opens the Infotainment system’s or manual). initial configuration wizard. Deactivate : This limits specific functions that GPS : The time and date can be selected using require a higher level of security. a) Only available for the model: Navi System Plus. the Time zone function button. In this case, the Confirm : Allows 100% of functions of the app, Time and Date function buttons for manual and certain specific actions on the Infotain- Note entry will not be active. ment system have to be confirmed. Allow : Allows all available functions to be exe- For the proper functioning of the Infotain- Manual : The time and date can be set manual- cuted from the app. ment system it is important that the date ly using the Time and Date function buttons. and time set in the vehicle are correct. Voice control : To change the voice control settings Time : To set the time manually. ››› page 177. Time zone : To adjust the desired time zone.

175 Infotainment System

Volume and sound settings Function button: function Adjust the playback volume of external audio sources Entertainment fading (nav. announcements) : Adjusts The settings that can be selected varies de- If you need to increase the playback volume pending on the country and the equipment in the playback volume when the navigator is speaking. for the external audio source, first lower the question, and on the vehicle's equipment. base volume on the infotainment system. Volume : To set the playback volume of audio ● Press the Infotainment button  and then sources connected via the AUX-IN multimedia If the sound from the connected audio source press the Sound function button. jack (Low, Medium or High). Also see is very low, increase the output volume on ››› page 176, Overview of screen and function ● Press the main menu function button for the the external audio source. If this is not buttons. settings that have to be changed. All settings enough, change the input volume to medium are applied instantly. Bluetooth audio : To set the playback volume of or high. the audio sources connected by Bluetooth® (Low, Medium or High). Also see ››› page 176, If the sound from the connected external au- Overview of screen and function buttons Overview of screen and function buttons. dio source is too loud or distorted, lower the output volume on the external audio source. Function button: function Equaliser : To adjust the sound properties. If this is not enough, change the input vol- Volume : To change the volume settings. Balance - Fader : To adjust the sound distribution. The ume to medium or low. cursor indicates the current sound distribution in the Warnings : To set the playback volume of warn- passenger compartment. To modify the sound distri- ings, such as traffic announcements. bution, briefly press on the desired position in the Navigation announcements : To set the playback passenger compartment view or use the arrow keys volume of audio driving recommendations. for a step-by-step modification. To centre sound distribution in the passenger compartment view, press Voice control : To set the playback volume of the central function button located between the ar- voice control. rows.

Maximum switch-on volume : To set the equipment's Sound focus : Optimizes the sound in the passenger maximum switch-on volume. compartment. Speed-dependent volume adjustment (GALA): To set Subwoofer *: Adjusts the volume of the subwoofer. the extent to which the volume is adjusted depending on the speed. The volume of the audio Touchscreen tone : The confirmation tone when a func- will increase automatically as the speed of the tion button is pressed is active. vehicle increases. Disabling voice navigation during calls : During a tele- Entertainment fading when parking : To adjust the phone conversation, audio driving recommendations desired reduction in audio volume when ParkPi- will not be given. lot is active.

176 Introduction

Voice control main screen will appear in the format selec- command can also be spoken followed by a ted in Voice control settings ››› page 179). function of the infotainment system, such as The spoken indications guide you through the “Help with navigation”. How it works following “dialogue”. ● Speak the desired command and follow the Interacting with the dialogue mode instructions in the “dialogue”. Often a func- Icons in upper left corner: tion can be activated by different spoken commands. If in doubt, try speaking a com-  The system waits for a user's command. mand or say Help.  The system has recognised a command ● When an action is taken (e.g., call a con- and will act shortly. tact), the voice control ends automatically The system transmits a spoken com- and you must activate it again if you want to  mand and confirms the command that continue with it. There are certain commands has been given. after which the voice control does not end, The system is in paused mode. (max. 3 Fig. 169 Voice control: main screen and it waits by saying Next command?.  minutes). ● To manually end voice control, press and Many of the radio, media, telephone and nav- hold the button  until the corresponding  /  Hide or show the voice control menu igation functions can be changed by voice confirmation signal sounds, or briefly press ››› Fig. 169. commands. the  button twice, or press the function but-  Operation during the dialogue The voice control of the infotainment system ton in the upper right corner of the screen. will only be available for the language selec- ● You can also end the voice control by While the infotainment system transmits a ted in System settings ››› page 174. speaking the following commands: Stop or spoken instruction, the symbol  will be dis- Cancel. played on the screen. ● Voice control settings ››› page 179. ● You can stop the speech by pressing the Voice control help Start and stop voice control upper left icon on the screen or button  and It is recommended to listen to the Help the voice recognition will resume for the user. ● To activate voice control, briefly press the first time you use the voice control. button on the multifunction steering wheel  IMPORTANT: The system will ONLY recog- or the infotainment system. ● Activate voice control . nize a command when the symbol  is ● When activating voice control, a dialogue ● Say the command Help to start it in the lan- displayed as “active” on the panel or on start tone will sound and the main voice con- guage indicated System Settings, and fol- the touchscreen. » trol screen will be displayed, ››› Fig. 169, (the low the instructions in the dialogue. The Help

177 Infotainment System

If you make a mistake when speaking a com- From here you can command the system Effect Voice command mand, or pronounce it incompletely and it based on the context that you want to oper- has no effect, you may repeat the command. ate, or give a voice command directly. PLAY SIMILAR TITLESa) Play similar titles The symbol  remains activated. When selecting each of the contexts (Naviga- a) Only available for the model: Navi System Plus ● Briefly press button  to repeat the com- tion, Telephone, Radio, Media, Voice control) mand. a menu will displayed listing the main com- Voice control (TELEPHONE) mands, and providing brief explanations of Effect Voice command Voice control instructions how to give each of them, as a help mode. Follow the instructions shown below for opti- Call Name Surname Voice control (RADIO) Home mal operation of the voice control. CALL CONTACTS Effect Voice command Call Name Surname Mo- ● Speak slowly and clearly if possible. The bile system will not recognise words that are un- LISTEN TO THE RADIO Listen to the radio clearly pronounced, or words and numbers Call 01234 Station STATION NAME 1 CALL NUMBERS that are missing syllables. SELECT STATION Call number ● Telephone numbers should be spoken digit Set station Show all calls by digit, or by blocks units, tens or hundreds. Frequency 87.9 CALL LIST ● Speak at a normal volume, without exag- SELECT FREQUENCY Missed calls Set frequency gerated pronunciation or long pauses. REDIAL Redial ● Avoid outside and nearby noise (for exam- Band FM CHANGE BAND CALL MAILBOX Call mailbox ple, conversations inside the vehicle). Close Change band all doors, windows and the sliding sunroof. SMS Read out text message ● Do not direct the air from the outlets to- Voice control (MEDIA) SERVICE Breakdown call wards the roof of the passenger compartment. Effect Voice command INFORMATION Information call

● If you are driving at high speed, talk a little Play Jukeboxa) louder. SOURCE SELECTION Listen to CD By activating voice control the system takes Select track / album / ar- you to the main screen ››› Fig. 169, which will MUSIC SELECTION tist / genre display the contexts in which the system operates and the main commands.

178 Introduction

Voice control (NAVIGATION)* Effect Voice command Function button: function

Effect Voice command Help Input tone in voice dialogue : the input tone to confirm HELP an order is activated. Enter address What can I say? ENTER THE ADDRESS End tone in voice dialogue : the end tone to confirm an Guide to City, Street, VOICE BUTTON  order is deactivated. numbera) a) Available depending on equipment Search for car parks Note SEARCH FOR SPEC. DESTINATIONa) Search for restaurants Voice control is not available when parking near destination

HOME ADDRESS Home address Voice control settings LAST DESTINATIONS Last destinations ●  NAVIGATION TO CON- Navigate to Name Sur- Press the infotainment button > Set- TACTS name tings > Voice control.

Start route guidance When closing a menu, the changes will be ROUTE GUIDANCE made automatically. Route information a) Only available for the model: Navi System Plus Function button: function

Example commands (infotainment system) : Display voice Voice control control examples on the infotainment system screen.

Effect Voice command Example commands (instrument cluster) a): Display voice control examples on the instrument panel. Pardon? Voice control session start tone : a signal will sound Back when activating voice control. Press to deactivate the signal. VOICE CONTROL Main menu Voice control session end tone : a signal will sound when Cancel voice control deactivating voice control. Press to deactivate the Pause voice control signal.

179 Infotainment System

Connectivity The Full Link system brings together technol- WARNING ogies that allow communication between the Infotainment System and mobile devices: The use of applications while driving can Data transfer distract your attention from the traffic. Dis- ● MirrorLink® tracting the driver in any way can lead to an accident and cause injuries. Introduction ● Android Auto™ ● Always drive carefully and responsibly. ● Apple CarPlay™ This communication can allow data to be read and/or written. Interfaces CAUTION From the menu SETTINGS > Data trans- To access the Full Link system, press the info- ● In areas where special regulations apply fer for SEAT apps, there is a checkbox to tainment button  or press the infotainment or the use of mobiles forbidden, it must be switched off at all times. The radiation pro- activate/deactivate the function and a drop- button  and then select the Full Link duced by the mobile when switched on down menu called Operation via apps context. may interfere with sensitive technical and which controls the level of interaction be- medical equipment, possibly resulting in tween the apps and the system. WARNING malfunction or damage to the equipment. Any applications that are not suitable or ● SEAT cannot be held liable for any dam- execute incorrectly may cause damage to age caused to the vehicle as a result of the Full Link* the vehicle, accidents and serious injuries. use of applications that are of poor quality ● SEAT recommends the use of the Apps or are defective, the inadequate programming of the applications, the insufficient Full Link technology description that SEAT provides for this vehicle. ● To make full use of SEAT Apps, you must coverage of the network, the loss of data activate the option Settings > Data during transmission or the improper use of transfer for SEAT apps. mobiles. ● The interaction level of the Apps on the system must be: Allow. Note ● Protect the mobile terminal with its appli- ● The use of Full Link technology could in- cations from improper use. crease the amount you pay for data. Fig. 170 Related video ● Never make modifications to the applica- ● SEAT recommends having a high battery The Full Link connection is made through a tions. charge on the device when connected to USB cable. ● Consult the instruction manual for the Full Link. mobile terminal. ● SEAT recommends that to use Full Link, the “Date and time” should be correctly

180 Connectivity

configured. Select Settings > Time and Requirements for Full Link websites to confirm whether your phone date. is compatible with the system. ● SEAT apps are designed to communicate Mirror Link with the vehicle and interact with it through – Check smartphone compatibility: the Full Link connection. www.mirrorlink.com/phones ● You can find further information on the – MirrorLink® 1.1 or higher technical requirements, compatible devices, suitable applications and availability – Some of the Apps certified by SEAT or at www.seat.com or at SEAT dealers. the CCC must be installed in the device. Android Auto Is Full Link blocked? – Check smartphone compatibility. An- droid Auto™: www.android.com/auto/ – Android 5.0 (Lollipop) or higher – Install Android Auto™ app Apple CarPlay – Check smartphone compatibility. Apple CarPlay™:www.apple.com/ios/carplay – iPhone 5 or higher and iOS 7.1 or higher – Turn on the SIRI personal assistant (see phone settings)

Fig. 171 Message on Infotainment system 3 USB cable connecting car to phone: screen. Use the approved USB cable supplied Fig. 172 Full Link Requirements with the phone. If your vehicle does not have Full Link, you can purchase it as an accessory at your 1 Full Link Activated: If you do not have SEAT dealer ››› Fig. 171. Full Link in your vehicle you can acquire it as an accessory at your Authorised Serv- ice. 2 Compatible Phones. Go to the Mirror- Link®, Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay™

181 Infotainment System

Activation of Full Link Data connection via Wi-Fi or SIM is not What should I do if it does not con- necessary to establish the connection be- nect? tween the smartphone and Full Link. Data connection via Wi-Fi or SIM is neces- Restart the mobile device. 1) sary to enable all of the app features . Check the USB cable. Check whether the Proceed as follows to use Full Link: USB cable is damaged. Check that neither connection (USB/micro USB) is damaged or ● Switch on the Infotainment system worn. ● Connect the smartphone to the vehicle's USB port using a USB cable ››› page 244. Check that the USB ports are correctly connected. Check that the USB port of the ● In the main menu for the Full Link settings, vehicle and the device are not damaged Fig. 173 Full Link Setup select Activate data transfer for and/or deteriorated. SEAT apps ››› Fig. 173. ● Clean the USB ports (device and vehicle). Finally, a message will appear stating that ● Try with another compatible mobile device. data transfer will commence when the device ● Have the USB port replaced at a SEAT au- is connected. Please note that data is trans- thorised service. ferred over connections between your vehicle and mobile device. Press OK. Once selec- ● Have the mobile device repaired or replace ted, the technology compatible with your de- it. vice can be used.

Note

Fig. 174 Full Link menu Depending on your smartphone, it may have to be unlocked for the connection to occur.

1) Using the data connection to transfer the smartphone apps to Full Link may involve additional charges. Please check the charges with your operator. 182 Connectivity

Tethering of portable devices that View of the device list For further information: support MirrorLink®, Android Auto™ iPhone™ devices only support Apple Car- MirrorLink®: and/or Apple CarPlay™ technolo- Play™. www.mirrorlink.com gies There are some Android devices that support Apple CarPlay™: MirrorLink® and Android Auto™. www.apple.com/ios/carplay Bear in mind that once the device is connec- Android Auto™: ted it will not be available as an audio source. www.android.com/auto

Full Link Settings Note ● In order to use Android Auto™ technology Function button: function it is necessary to download the Android Activate data transfer for SEAT apps : allows the ex- Auto™ application, located on Google change of information between the vehicle and ap- Play™. plications authorised by SEAT. ● Only compatible applications can be used, in accordance with the technology Fig. 175 Full Link menu Last Mode connected. When you enter Full Link for the first time, the If the telephone connection is terminated on- technologies available for pairing the porta- ly by unplugging the cable, the next time the ble device are displayed. device is connected, the session will start without the user having to take any action1). Once the device connects via USB, the system will offer you the technologies available Information for establishing a connection. Consult the mobile device manual. In the event of simultaneous connections between two devices with different operating Depends on each technology: systems, a choice will be presented for which one to make the connection with ››› Fig. 175. 1. Availability in a country 2. Third party applications

1) Unless the device requires the screen to be unlocked in order to establish the connection. 183 Infotainment System

® MirrorLink To avoid distracting the driver while driving, Function button: function only specially adapted applications can be used in Full Link technology descrip- Press to change to the mobile ››› 1 : 1 tion on page 180. device screen. SETTINGS To open the Full Link setup Requirements Press to return to the MirrorLink® ® ›››Fig. 177 1 In order to use MirrorLink , the following remain menu. quirements must be met: Press to display all the function ● The device must be compatible with Mirror- ››› Fig. 177 2 buttons in the lower or upper Link®. right-hand margin of the screen. ● Depending on the device that is used, a ››› Fig. 177  /  Allows buttons 1 and 2 to be Fig. 176 OR: Right adjust- Function buttons in the general view suitable application must be installed for the hidden or shown. of compatible applications. use of MirrorLink®. ment button

Initiating the connection MirrorLink® setup

● In order to initiate the connection with the Function button: function device, just connect it to the Infotainment system via the USB cable. Activate MirrorLink pop-up windows : Allows MirrorLink® pop-up windows in applications that support it. ● A pop-up screen will appear, which will request that you accept the device.

Function buttons and possible messages Apple CarPlay™* 3 Valid for compatible iPhone™ mobile tele- Function button: function Fig. 177 Other MirrorLink function buttons. phones. Also, iPhone™ mobile telephones only To return to the Full Link main support Apple CarPlay™ Full Link MirrorLink® is a protocol which enables com- menu. Apple CarPlay™ is a protocol which enables munication between a device and the Info- Press to close the open apps. communication between a device and the in- tainment system. Then press the apps to be fotainment system. This makes it possible to display and operate CLOSE APPS closed or the Close all function button to close all the open ap- This makes it possible to display and operate content and functions on the device from the plications. content and functions on the device from the screen of the infotainment system. screen of the infotainment system. 184 Connectivity

Requirements Android Auto™* mobile device for the confirmations needed to pair it with the Infotainment system. In order to use Apple CarPlay™, the following 3 Valid for compatible Android mobile phones. requirements must be met: ● If you are starting the session using Android Android Auto™ is a protocol which enables Auto™ technology, the device also automati- ● Make sure that you do not have Apple communication between a device and the in- cally connects to the Infotainment system via CarPlay™ restricted on your device, at: Set- fotainment system. Bluetooth® and it will not be possible to pair tings > General > Restrictions > another device via Bluetooth®. CarPlay > ON. This makes it possible to display and operate content and functions on the device from the Holding down the  button will start the ● The mobile device must be compatible with screen of the infotainment system. Apple CarPlay™. Android™ voice “engine”. Requirements To return to the basic contents of the Infotain- Initiating the connection ment system, press the  button. In order to use Android Auto™, the following In order to initiate the connection with the de- requirements must be met: vice, just connect it to the Infotainment sys- Note tem via the USB cable. ● The mobile device must be compatible with Some devices require a change in the USB Android Auto™. connection mode in order to use Android ● A pop-up screen will appear, which will re- ● Auto™. quest that you accept the device. The Android Auto™ application should already be downloaded and installed on the ● Make sure that your device is in “Media ● If you start the session using Apple mobile device. Transfer Protocol (MTP)” mode before it is CarPlay™ technology, it will not be possible connected to the Infotainment system. to pair another device via Bluetooth®. The fol- Initiating the connection lowing message will appear in the main Note Phone menu: In order to initiate the connection with the device, just use the USB cable to connect it to Android Auto™ requires the use of Google™ Please disconnect Apple CarPlay the infotainment system and follow the in- services, as well as certain basic applica- first to connect a different mo- structions on the device to be paired. tions of the Android system. bile phone. ● Make sure that you always have Google™ ● The first connection to Android Auto™ must services updated in order to use this tech- Holding down the  button will start the be done while the vehicle is stationary. Apple™ voice “engine”. nology. ● Once the first pop-up window about ac- To return to the basic contents of the Infotain- cepting data transfer between the car and ment system, press the SEAT icon. the device has been accepted, a message will appear requesting that you check your

185 Infotainment System

Frequently asked questions about Where can I find compatible Apps? Can MirrorLink® be installed in a previous SEAT Full Link model? Compatible apps are listed at the following links: www.mirrorlink.com/ No, it is not possible. What connection method is used? www.android.com/auto/ www.apple.com/ios/carplay/ Where can I find more information about Full USB Cable. Link? Where can I download the apps? Will the USB cable be supplied with the vehicle? If you have any questions, please see our Innova- On Google Play™ for Android Auto™/MirrorLink® and tion/Connectivity sections on our website: No. The USB cable supplied with the device should on Apple Store™ for Apple CarPlay™. www.seat.es or www.seat.com or e-mail seat-re- be used. [email protected] If Full Link stops working, where can I go to repair Is it possible to navigate? it?

Navigation is possible in each one of the Full Link If the problem is in the car, you should go to the deal- technologies if the technology is available in your er. If the problem is in the mobile device, you should SEAT Media Control* country and if you have the Navigation app. see your mobile telephone vendor.

What is the difference between using the Full Link Will WhatsApp be certified? Introduction system navigator (via a device) instead of another navigator? The WhatsApp situation depends on the technology.

Advantages: Daily updates. Is MirrorLink® available in my country? Issues: data consumption, reception problems. Yes, MirrorLink® is available in all countries and re- Can I send voice messages? gions where SEAT is located.

With certified applications, you can reply, not send. What are the differences between MirrorLink®, Fig. 178 Related video Android Auto™ and Apple CarPlay™? What applications will be visible while driving? The SEAT Media Control1) app can be used MirrorLink® is not compatible with Android Auto™ and to remotely operate some partial functions in Depending on the technology: Apple CarPlay™, as they are different technologies. Radio, Media and Navigation mode. Informa- – for MirrorLink®: Apps certified by SEAT and the They all coexist in Full Link, although Android Auto™ is CCC, designed for mobile devices with the Android™ oper- tion can be exchanged between a device – for Android Auto™: Apps selected by Google™, ating system, and Apple CarPlay™ for iPhone. and the Infotainment System. – for Apple CarPlay™: Apps selected by Apple™.

1) Availability depends on the country. 186 Connectivity

The functions are operated by means of a Data transmission and control WLAN access point* Tablet or partially by a mobile phone. functions

Operating requirements: Introduction ● A tablet or mobile phone. The Infotainment System can be used to ● The app must be available on the corre- share a WLAN connection with up to 8 devi- sponding device. ces ››› page 188, Configuration for sharing a connection over WLAN. ● There must be a WLAN connection between the Infotainment System and the device. Se- The Infotainment System can also use the lect Menu > Media > Settings > WLAN > WLAN hotspot of an external device to pro- Share connection over WLAN > Config- vide Internet to the devices connected to the uration. hotspot (WLAN client) ››› page 188, Config- ure Internet access. Make sure that data transfer for apps is acti- Fig. 179 SEAT Media Control Main menu vated: Note With SEAT Media Control you can operate ● From the SETTINGS menu > Data trans- the Infotainment System from other places in ● Data transmission may incur charges. fer for SEAT apps, there is a checkbox to the vehicle in Radio and Media modes and, Due to the high volume of data exchanged, activate/deactivate the function and a drop- depending on the country and the equip- SEAT recommends the use of a flat rate tar- down menu called Operation via apps ment, you can exchange the following infor- iff for data transmission. Mobile phone op- which controls the level of interaction be- mation between a device and the Infotain- erators can provide the relevant information. tween the apps and the system . Select Menu ment System: > Settings > Data transfer from mo- ● The exchange of data packages may bile devices. ● Navigation destinations. generate additional costs, depending on ● Traffic information. your mobile phone rate, particularly if you You can obtain information about technical are abroad (for example, roaming rates). requirements on the SEAT website or at SEAT ● Social media contents. dealerships. ● Audio transmission. Telephone functions do not form part of this ● Vehicle data. app. ● Location-specific information, for example, POIs.

187 Infotainment System

Configuration for sharing a con- key must have a minimum of 8 characters ● OR: Press and hold the WLAN button on the nection over WLAN and a maximum of 63. WLAN router until the WLAN light on the router ● SSID: WLAN Network name (maximum of starts flashing. Establishing the connection with the wire- 32 characters). ● Press the WPS button on the WLAN device. less network (WLAN) ● Do not send network name (SSID): The wireless (WLAN) connection is establish- ● Press the Infotainment button  and then Activate the checkbox to deactivate the visi- ed. bility of the wireless (WLAN) network. press the Settings menu. Repeat this process to connect other devices. ● Activate the wireless network. To do so, The wireless (WLAN) connection is establish- press the WLAN function button. ed. To complete the connection, it may be ● Activate the wireless network (WLAN) on the necessary to enter other data into the device. Configure Internet access device that is to be connected. If necessary, Repeat this process to connect other devices. refer to the manufacturer’s instruction man- The Infotainment System can use the WLAN ual. hotspot of an external device to establish an ● Activate the mobile device assignment on internet connection. Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS)1) the Infotainment System. To do so, press the Enable WLAN connection button and acti- Establishing the connection with the wire- Wi-Fi Protected Setup can be used to create vate the checkbox. less network (WLAN) a ciphered local wireless network quickly and ● ● Enter and confirm the network key dis- simply. Activate and check the wireless hotspot on played on the device. the external device. If necessary, refer to the ● Establish the connection with the wireless manufacturer’s instruction manual. The following settings can also be made on network (WLAN) ››› page 211. ● Press the Infotainment  button and then the menu Share connection: ● Press the WPS button on the WLAN router press the Settings menu; OR access Media ● Security level: WPA2 encryption auto- until the warning light on the router starts or SEAT Md. Ctrl. and press the SETTINGS matically generates a network key. flashing. If the WLAN router does not support menu. WPS the network must be configured man- ● ● Network key: Network key automatically Press on the menu WLAN > Enable WLAN ually. generated. Press the function button to man- connection and check the verification box. ually change the network key. The network ● Press the Find function button and select the device you want from the list.

1) This function depends on the equipment and the country in question. 188 Connectivity

● If necessary, enter the network key of the device in the Infotainment System and confirm with OK.

Manual settings: ● To manually enter the network settings of an external (WLAN) device.

The wireless (WLAN) connection is established. To complete the connection, it may be necessary to enter other data into the device.

Note Due to the large number of devices on the market, it is not possible to guarantee fault- free operation of all functions.

189 Infotainment System

Operating modes Function button: function Stops the station search (visible only if Scan Radio it is running ››› page 196).

Related video Indications and possible icons Display: Meaning

Frequency or name of the station or radio text. The name of the radio sta- A Fig. 182 Radio mode: station list (FM). tion and the radio text will only be displayed if RDS is active.  Press the infotainment button to open the The RDS radio data service is deacti- Fig. 180 Radio mode RDS off Radio main menu ››› Fig. 181. vated.

RADIO main menu function buttons Traffic information can be retrieved: RADIO main menu TP select Radio > Settings > Function button: function Traffic programme (TP). No stations with traffic news are avail- Memory keys (1 to 18 memories, 3  1 able. banks (screens) ››› page 193) The radio station is stored on a memo- BAND Select the band.  ry button. STATION List of radio station that can be tuned. LIST Note

MANUAL Selecting the frequency manually. ● The AM and DAB bands will be available according to countries and/or equipment. Selecting the information shown on the VIEW In this case, the BAND function button will screen. Only available in DAB mode. not be displayed. Fig. 181 RADIO main menu. Settings menu for the current frequen- ● Being underground, in tunnels, in areas SETTINGS cy band. with tall buildings or mountains can interfere with the radio reception. Previous or next station that is stored or  /  on the station list. See Settings ››› page 196. 190 Operating modes

● Foil or metal-coated stickers attached to Depending on the country and the equip- heard (a point will flash to the right and left of the windows may affect reception on vehi- ment in question, RDS can be deactivated in the station name). cles with a window aerial. the FM Settings menu ››› page 196. Radio text ● Radio stations are responsible for the In general, no radio data services are avail- content of the information they transmit. able without RDS. Some stations that have RDS transmit additional information in text, the so-called radio Station name and automatic station track- text. Radio data services RDS (FM band) ing The radio text is displayed in the upper half of If the RDS function is available, the names of the screen above the memory buttons the stations can be displayed on the RADIO ››› Fig. 181 A . main menu and on the Station list . The radio text display can be deactivated in FM stations temporarily transmit other con- the Settings ››› page 196. tent on different regional frequencies under the same name (for example, Station 3). Order of the station list In general, automatic station tracking takes The stations available at any given time are charge of switching to the frequency with the displayed on the station list screen (STA- best reception of the station that is tuned at TIONS function button). This list can be sorted any given time, while driving. However, this by broadcast group, genre or alphabetically Fig. 183 Standard representation: FM station may cause a regional broadcast to be inter- ››› Fig. 183. listing menu rupted. Note Automatic frequency switching and automat- The RDS (Radio Data System) or radio data ic station tracking can be deactivated in FM The RDS functionality will be limited in service offers additional FM information such Settings ››› page 196. some countries for infrastructure reasons, as the display of the station name, automatic and traffic announcements (TP), automatic station tracking (AF), texts broadcast by radio station tracking (AF) and station type (PTY) Set a station name (Radio text), traffic announcements (TP) and may not be available.1) the type of station (PTY). In certain cases the station name is excessively long. This text can be locked / unlocked by pressing on the name of the station for about 3 seconds until an audible warning is

1) Depends on the market and unit in question. 191 Infotainment System

Digital radio mode (DAB, DAB + and In Europe, digital radio is transmitted over tion. Or, select the additional station from the DMB audio)* band III frequencies (from 174 MHz to 240 station list. MHz). On the DAB main menu, the name of the ad- The frequencies are called “channels” and ditional tuned station is displayed next to the have an abbreviation (eg 12 A). abbreviated name of the main DAB station. In a channel, several available DAB stations Additional stations can not be saved. are grouped together in an “ensemble”. Automatic station tracking Starting the Digital radio mode DAB radio is not currently available every- ● In the RADIO main menu, press the BAND where. DAB radio mode displays the areas function button and select DAB . without DAB coverage .

The last DAB station that was selected will be If the DAB station that is being listened to can Fig. 184 Display of memory buttons in DAB played, if it can still be tuned in that location. no longer be tuned (e.g. there is no DAB cov- mode. erage), the infotainment system tries to find The selected DAB station is shown in the top and tune the same station in the different bar of the screen. The selected station en- available frequency bands. If the station can semble is shown below ››› Fig. 184. not be found again, the radio sound is muted. Automatic station tracking can be activated Additional DAB stations (Secondary Serv- in the DAB Settings in the following modes ice Components) ››› page 197: Some DAB stations temporarily or perma- ● DAB - DAB station tracking: The radio tries nently offer additional stations (for example, to tune to the same station on an alternative for the transmission of sporting events). DAB frequency. To allow station tracking, DAB stations containing additional stations both DAB stations need to broadcast the Fig. 185 Station information display in DAB are identified on the station list by the symbol same station identification, or to signal the mode. . other corresponding DAB station through DAB. The DAB radio tuner supports the DAB, DAB + Select additional stations ● DAB - FM Automatic switching: The radio and DMB audio transmission standards. Press the name of the main station on the tries to tune to the same station in the FM fre- DAB main menu to select an additional sta- quency band. To allow station tracking, the DAB station and the FM station need to

192 Operating modes broadcast the same station identification, or These images are displayed as a slideshow Memory buttons to signal the other corresponding FM station on the Stations or Slideshow screens of the through DAB. When the corresponding FM Screen menu ››› page 193. station has been found, “FM” is displayed be- The slideshow can be displayed in full screen hind the name of the station. If the corre- by pressing on the current image. sponding DAB station becomes available again, it returns to DAB mode after a while Screen Menu and the “FM” identification is concealed. The function buttons refer to the menu that is ● Switch to a similar station: This allows displayed when the View button is pressed service providers to indicate alternative sta- Fig. 184. tions with similar content. In this way, if the ra- ››› dio loses coverage of a DAB station and does Function button: function not find an alternative FM or DAB frequency, it Fig. 186 RADIO main menu. is possible to tune to a station with similar Preset list : Viewing the preset buttons ››› Fig. 184. content. In the Radio main menu, you can store sta- Station List : Simultaneous display of radio text and tions from all available frequency wave- slideshows instead of memory keys Fig. 185. Radio text ››› lengths on the numbered function buttons. These function buttons are called “memory Some stations transmit additional text infor- Radio text : The radio text is displayed instead of the buttons”. mation, the so-called radio text. memory buttons. Slideshow : Slideshows are shown in full screen mode. Radio text is displayed in the upper half of the Storing the station on the memory buttons screen above the memory buttons ››› Fig. 184 See: Preset stations ››› page 195. or on the Station Information or Radio text Note screens of the Display menu ››› page 193. Not all DAB stations broadcast radio text Change the memory bank (screens) The radio text display can be deactivated in and slideshows. ● Move your finger over the screen from left the DAB Settings ››› page 197. to right or vice-versa.

Slideshow ● OR: Press one of the function buttons ››› Fig. 186 A » Some stations transmit additional visual information in the form of images.

193 Infotainment System

Selecting the station from the memory ● Press the function button Settings and then Selecting stations buttons Station logos . Press the Stations Fig. 181 func- ● Press the memory button corresponding to ● Press the stored station button that you ››› tion button to open the station list. the desired station. want to use to store a station logo. Browse the list and tune to the sta- ● Select the source in which the logo has Selecting sta- The stored stations can only be played by tion you want by pressing it. been memorized (for example, SD Card 1 ). It is tions from the pressing the corresponding memory button recommended that the logos should be put in station list Press the BACK  ››› Fig. 182 provided it can be received at your current the root directory of the memory unit. function button to close the list. If it location. is not used, the list will close auto- ● Select the station logo. matically after a while. Storing the station logo on the memory ● Repeat the process to assign other logos; buttons press the infotainment key  to return to the Manually tuning a station frequency Saved stations can be assigned logos Radio main menu. Display the Press the Manual function button ››› page 194. ● If you want to change the logo of a memory frequency ››› Fig. 181. button where a button has already been band saved, it must first be deleted from the button Turn the adjustment knob. Save station logos in question. Changing the frequency step OR: Press the + or – keys on the by step Save automatically (only in FM and DAB Note dial displayed on the screen. mode) Not all stations are in the database, so it is Press and hold one of the arrow When a station is saved, the station logo is not always possible to assign logos auto- buttons on the left of the multifunction steering wheel. Releasing the automatically assigned. matically. Quickly track button switches to the next radio If there are 2 or more logos in the database, the frequency station that can be tuned. there is the option to choose the appropriate band Select, tune and save stations OR: Keep your finger on the scroll one. button in the frequency band and move your finger to move the but- Saving manually Selecting stations ton. Station logos can be imported from a com- Press the function button  or  Select the sta- Fig. 181. patible data medium (for example, memory tion using the ››› This switches between stations card or memories with a USB port). arrow keys available for tuning ››› page 196.

194 Operating modes

Manually tuning a station frequency Presetting stations DIO main menu and on the station list with the symbol TP ››› Fig. 181 and ››› Fig. 182. Briefly press the settings button. The Settings menu can be used Delete preset to delete all of the saved stations Some stations without their own traffic infor- Selecting a station using the mem- mation support the TP function by broad- Hide the fre- stations together, or separately ory button also ends the manual ››› page 196. casting traffic announcement from other sta- quency band selection of frequencies. If no oper- tions (EON). ations are performed, the frequency band is hidden after a while. Automatic playback (SCAN) Activating and deactivating the TP function Presetting stations When automatic playback is active, all tune- ● In the Settings (FM, AM, DAB) menu, Press and hold the desired preset able stations in the selected frequency band activate  or deactivate  the button ››› Fig. 181 until an audible Saving the sta- are played for approximately 5 seconds Traffic programme (TP) function button by signal is heard. tion that is be- each. pressing it ››› page 196. ing listened to. The tuned station is stored on a preset button. Start and end automatic playback Active TP function and station selection Press the Stations ››› Fig. 181 func- Start automatic Press the Settings function button Traffic announcements are played in Audio tion button to open the station list. playback and then select Scan . mode. The stations that are already stor-  If a station without the TP function in FM mode ed on a memory key are marked on Press the function button to the station list with the symbol  stop automatic playback on the is selected, the radio tries to find stations with Fig. 182. station that is being played. this function in the background. If none are ››› End automatic found, it will be displayed half way up the left Select the desired station by playback Automatic playback also ends Saving a sta- pressing and holding it down on when a station is selected man- hand side of the screen . tion from the the screen. A screen opens for sav- ually using the memory buttons, stations list ing the station on the memory but- or when the screen is changed. In AM mode or in Media mode, a traffic sta- tons. tion is automatically tuned in the background as long as there is one available. Depending Press the memory key where the on the situation this operation may take some station will be saved. Traffic information (TP) time. » A sound is heard and the station is saved on the memory button. Re- It is only possible for traffic information to be peat the process to continue sav- tracked with the TP function if the station in ing other station on the list. question can be tuned. Stations with the traffic information function are shown on the RA-

195 Infotainment System

Incoming traffic announcement OR: Press the BAND function button and se- Function button: function In Audio mode, traffic announcements are lect the FM frequency band. Autostore station logos a): The stations saved on the played automatically when they are Press the SETTINGS function button to open memory buttons are automatically assigned ra- received. the FM settings menu. dio station logos if they are available in the info- While the traffic announcement is playing, a tainment system. Also see ››› page 194. Function button: function pop-up window is displayed and the radio Station logo region a): This allows the vehicle's region (country) to be selected. This optimizes the switches, if necessary, to the traffic informa- Sound : Sound settings ››› page 176. tion station. automatic assignment of station logos. The op- Scan : Automatic playback (SCAN function). When tion also allows the system to select the region Media mode is interrupted and the volume is automatic playback is active, each of the tuneable automatically.

set as adjusted ››› page 176. stations in the selected frequency band are played a) for approximately 5 seconds each ››› page 195. Automatic frequency control (AF) : Automatic sta- The volume of the traffic announcement can tion tracking is active. When there is no check in  be changed with the volume control . The Seek mode : To set the settings for the arrow buttons  check box , the function button RDS regional and . The setting applies to all frequency bands will be inactive (grey). modified volume remains as set for subse- (FM, AM and DAB). quent warnings. Radio data system (RDS) a): The Radio Data System Preset list : The arrow keys are used to switch be- (RDS) is deactivated ››› page 191. If there is no ● Press the Cancel function button to end the tween all of the saved stations in the selected check in check box , the traffic information current travel warning. The TP function re- frequency band. station (TP), radio text, station name and program type functions will not be available. mains active. Station List : The arrow keys are used to switch a) ● OR: Press the Deactivate function button to between all of the tuneable stations in the selec- RDS regional : Set the RDS automatic station end the current traffic announcement and ted frequency band. tracking ››› page 191. deactivate the TP function permanently. The Traffic programme (TP) : The TP function (tracking of Fixed : Only alternative frequencies of the function can be reactivated in the Settings traffic information stations) is active ››› page 195. set station with an identical region program menu. are set. Delete presets : To erase all or some of the preset stations. Automatic : It always changes to the frequency of the set station that has the best signal Station logos : To assign or delete manually the sta- Settings (FM, AM, DAB) at the time, even if a regional broadcast that tion logos saved in the memory keys ››› page 194. is in progress is interrupted. Radio text : The radio text is active page 191, Radio FM settings ››› a) This depends on the country and unit in question. text. Select the FM frequency band by pressing a) the infotainment key . Advanced settings : Radio data services (RDS) set- AM settings tings. Select the AM frequency band by pressing the infotainment key . 196 Operating modes

OR: Press the BAND function button and se- OR: Press the BAND function button and se- Function button: function lect the AM frequency band. lect the DAB frequency band. Autostore station logos a): Station logos are as- Press the SETTINGS function button to open Press the SETTINGS function button to open signed automatically when the radio stations are the AM settings menu. the DAB settings menu. stored on the memory buttons ››› page 194.

DAB traffic announcements : DAB traffic announce- Function button: function Function button: function ments are played in the same way as TP traffic announcements in any equipment mode. Sound : Sound settings ››› page 176. Sound : Sound settings ››› page 176. Other DAB announcements : DAB announcements Scan : Automatic playback (SCAN function). When Scan : Automatic playback (SCAN function). When automatic playback is active, each of the tuneable automatic playback is active, each of the tuneable (news, sports information, weather, warnings, stations in the selected frequency band are played stations in the selected frequency band are played etc.) are played while the DAB Radio mode is ac- for approximately 5 seconds each ››› page 195. for approximately 5 seconds each ››› page 195. tive. DAB - DAB station tracking : Automatic station track- Seek mode : To set the settings for the arrow buttons  Seek mode : To set the settings for the arrow buttons  and . The setting applies to all frequency bands and . The setting applies to all frequency bands ing within the DAB frequency range is active. (FM, AM and DAB). (FM, AM and DAB). Automatic DAB - FM switching : Switching to the FM frequency band is permitted for automatic sta- Preset list : The arrow keys are used to switch be- Preset list : The arrow keys are used to switch between all of the saved stations in the selected tween all of the saved stations in the selected tion tracking. frequency band. frequency band. Switch to a similar station : This allows service providers to indicate alternative stations with similar Station List : The arrow keys are used to switch Station List : The arrow keys are used to switch b) between all of the tuneable stations in the selec- between all of the tuneable stations in the selec- content. ted frequency band. ted frequency band. a) This depends on the country and unit in question. Traffic programme (TP) : The TP function (tracking of Traffic programme (TP) : The TP function (tracking of b) Only available for the model: Navi System Plus traffic information stations) is active ››› page 195. traffic information stations) is active ››› page 195.

Delete presets : To erase all or some of the preset sta- Delete presets : To erase all or some of the preset stations. tions.

Station logos : To assign logos to stations stored on Station logos : To assign logos to stations stored on memory buttons ››› page 194. memory buttons ››› page 194.

Radio text : The radio text is active ››› page 191, Radio DAB settings text.

Select the DAB frequency band by pressing Advanced settings : DAB services settings. the infotainment button .

197 Infotainment System

Media These audio files can be played through the from Microsoft or an authorised Microsoft corresponding players or the infotainment branch is prohibited. system's audio inputs. Introduction ● The infotainment system only plays com- Only supported files are displayed and patible undamaged audio files; other files played. Other files are ignored. are ignored. ● Check the list of compatible devices on Copyright the SEAT website. Consider the legislation on the intellectual property of audio and video files. Fig. 187 Related video Note Audio or image sources containing files in dif- ● MPEG-4 HE-AAC audio coding technolo- ferent media are known as “media sources”. gy and patents are licensed by Fraunhofer IIS. ● This product is protected by certain Mi- crosoft Corporation copyright and property rights. The use or commercialization of technology of this type outside the configuration of this product, without a licence

Requirements for data media and files

The factory-fitted CD and DVD players are Only standard 12 cm CD/DVDs and 32 mm x Any playable file formats on the list will here- class 1 according to DIN IEC 76 (CO) 6 / VDE 24 mm x 2.1 mm or 1.4 mm memory cards can inafter be known as “audio files”. A CD con- 0837. be inserted in the infotainment system. taining these types of audio files is called an “audio data CD”.

198 Operating modes

Valid for the model: Navi System Plus Playback requirements Data media Audio files Video files

 Optical discs: v Maximum resolution 720 x 576 pixel and 25-30fps – Audio CD (up to 80 min). (frames per second). – Digital Audio Specification. – Standard video DVD and compatible audio DVD. – MPEG-1 and MPEG-2 formats – MP2 (.mp2) and MP3 (.mp3) files with transfer – CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW with audio data up to a max. of 700 (.mpg, .mpeg, .m2ts, .avi and .mkv) with a maximum rates from 32 to 320 kbit/s or variable transfer MB (megabyte) with the ISO 9660 Level 1 and 2, Joliet or UDF resolution of 352x288 pixels. rate. 1.02, 1.5, 2.01 file system. – ISO MPEG-4 format (.mp4, .m4v, .avi, .mov, .3gp – WAV files (.wav). – DVD +/- R / RW up to a maximum of 4.7 GB and double layer and .mkv). – WMA files (.wma) up to 10 mono / stereo without DVD up to max. 8.5 GB in the Joliet file system (single session – MPEG-4 ASP DivX format 4, 5 and 6 (.avi, .divx copy protection and transfer rates of up to only); UDF. and .mkv). 384kbit/s.  Memory cards: – Xvid MPEG-4 format (.avi and .mkv). – AAC files (.m4a, .m4b and .aac) without copy – SD and MMC in the file system must be FAT12, FAT16, FAT32 or – MPEG-4 H.264 format: protection. VFAT (max 2 GB). (.mp4, .m4v, .mov, .3gp, .avi, .m2ts, .mkv, .flv, .f4v – OGG-Vorbis 1 (.ogg) files with transfer rates of – SDHC (max 32 GB) and SDXC (max 2 TB) with the exFAT and and .webm). up to 256kbit/s. NTFS file systems. – Windows Media Video 9 format – FLAC files (.flac).  USB data media: (.wmv, .asf, .mp4, .m4v, .mov, .3gp and .avi). – Matroska container files (.mka). – Devices with USB 2.0 and 3.0 specifications. – MJPEG format (.avi, .mov, .mp4 and .m4v). – FAT16, FAT32, exFAT and NTFS file system. – Theora format (.ogv). – Different generations of iPods™a), iPads™a) and iPhones™a). – MTP players with the trademarks “PlaysForSure” or “Ready- – Playlists in the M3U, PLS, ASX and WPL formats. ForVista”.. – Playlists must not exceed 20 kB or more than 1000 entries.  Jukebox (internal SSD memory). – File names and routes that do not exceed 256 characters. – On DVD, a maximum of 1000 files per medium and directory. – On memory cards, a maximum of 4000 files and a maximum of 1000 files per directory. – On the Jukebox (SSD), a maximum of 3000 files.

 Playback of audio files through the AUX-IN jack. – The external audio source must meet a series of playback conditions ››› page 208.  Playing audio files via Bluetooth®b). – The external media player must be compatible with the A2DP Bluetooth® profile ››› page 208.  Playing audio files over WLAN. – The external audio source must meet a series of playback conditions ››› page 211 a) iPod™, iPad™ and iPhone™ are protected trademarks of Apple Inc. b) Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. »

199 Infotainment System

Valid for the model: Media System Plus/Navi System Data media Requirements for playing audio files

– Digital Audio Specification.  Optical discs: – MP2 (.mp2) and MP3 (.mp3) files with transfer rates from 32 to 320 kbit/s or varia- – Audio CD (up to 80 min). ble transfer rate. – CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW with audio data up to a max. of 700 MB (megabyte) with – WAV files (.wav). the ISO 9660 Level 1 and 2, Joliet or UDF 1.02, 1.5, 2.01 file system. – WMA files (.wma) up to 10 mono / stereo without copy protection and transfer rates  Memory cards: of up to 384kbit/s. – SD and MMC in the file system must be FAT12, FAT16, FAT32 or VFAT (max 2 GB). – AAC files (.m4a, .m4b and .aac) without copy protection. – SDHC (max 32 GB) and SDXC (max 2 TB) with the exFAT and NTFS file systems. – OGG-Vorbis 1 (.ogg) files with transfer rates of up to 256kbit/s. – FLAC files (.flac).  USB data media: – Devices with USB 2.0 and 3.0 specifications. – Playlists in the M3U, PLS, ASX and WPL formats. – FAT16, FAT32, exFAT and NTFS file system. – Playlists must not exceed 20 kB or more than 1000 entries. – Different generations of iPods™a), iPads™a) and iPhones™a). – File names and routes that do not exceed 256 characters. – MTP players with the trademarks “PlaysForSure” or “ReadyForVista”.. – On memory cards, a maximum of 4000 files and a maximum of 1000 files per directory.

 Playback of audio files through the AUX-IN jack. – The external audio source must meet a series of playback conditions ››› page 208.

®  Playing audio files via Bluetooth®b). – The external media player must be compatible with the A2DP Bluetooth profile ››› page 208.

 Play audio files through WLAN. – The external audio source must meet a series of playback conditions ››› page 211

a) iPod™, iPad™ and iPhone™ are protected trademarks of Apple Inc. b) Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth® SIG, Inc.

Read and bear in mind the instruction manual Quality differences between data media pro- unreadable. On the Internet, for example, can for the external data storage device. duced by different manufacturers can cause be found information about the best way to playback interference. record audio files or data media (compres- Limitations and indications sion rate, ID3 tag, etc.). Consider copyright legislation! Dirt, high temperatures and mechanical The reading speed can vary considerably The configuration of data media or of the damage can cause data media to fail. Con- depending on the size, the usage status equipment or programs used for recording sider the indications provided by the manu- may cause some tracks or data media to be facturer of the data media. 200 Operating modes

(copying and deleting processes), the struc- Playback order of files and folders The illustration shows an example of a con- ture of the folders and the type of files of the ventional audio data CD, containing tracks data media used. , folders  and subfolders ››› Fig. 188. Playlists only establish a certain playback In this case the tracks will be played as fol- order. The files are not saved in them. Play- lows1): lists cannot be played if the files on the data media are not saved to the path to which the 1. Tracks 1 and 2 in the root directory playlist refers. (Root) of the CD 2. Tracks 3 and 4 in the first F1 folder of A cover can only be displayed when the the CD root directory name starts with “Cover”, “Folder” or “Al- bum”. 3. Track 5 in the first subfolder F1.1 of folder F1. Note 4. Track 6 in the first subfolder F1.1.1 of ● Do not use memory card adaptors, USB subfolder F1.1 extension cords or USB hubs! 5. Track 7 in the second subfolder F1.2 of ● SEAT assumes no liability for any deterio- folder F1 ration or loss of files on data storage devi- 6. Track 8 and 9 in the second folder F2 ces. Fig. 188 Example of the structure of an audio data CD. Note ● The playback sequence can be modified The audio files  stored on data media are by selecting the different playback modes often arranged by file folders  and playlists ››› page 202.  to establish a certain playback order. ● Playlists do not play automatically, they Depending on their name on the data media, have to be selected directly from the track tracks, folders and playlists are ordered nu- selection menu ››› page 205. merically and alphabetically.

1) The Mix/repeat including subfolders function must be active in the Media settings menu ››› page 214. 201 Infotainment System

MEDIA main menu MEDIA main menu function buttons Function button: function

Function button: function Playback is resumed. The  func-  tion button changes to  . The media source that is being played. Press to select another me- Play similar tracks. dia source. Creates a virtual playlist that in- a) cludes tracks with a similar rhythm JUKEBOX a): Internal hard drive  to the one being played if available (SSD) ››› page 209. using Gracenote®. CD/DVD a): Internal CD and DVD Opens the menu Media Set- drive page 206. SETTINGS ››› tings. SD CARD 1 , SD CARD 2 *: SD memo- Repeats all the tracks that are on Fig. 189 MEDIA main menu. ry card ››› page 207. the same memory level as the track SOURCE being played at that moment. If in USB 1 , USB 2 *: External data stor-  Using the Media main menu, different media age device connected to the USB the Media Settings menu the REPEAT Mix/Repeat including subfolders option sources can be selected and played. port  page 207. ››› is enabled, it also includes the sub- ● Press the infotainment button  to open AUX : External audio source con- folders. the Media ››› Fig. 189main menu. nected to the AUX-IN multimedia socket ››› page 208.  Repeat the current track. It will continue playing the last media source REPEAT ® selected from the same point. BT AUDIO : Bluetooth audio ››› page 208. Random playback of tracks that are The media source being played is indicated at the same memory level as the on the dropdown list when pressing the WLAN *: External audio source con- current track. If in the Media Set- nected by WLAN ››› page 211 tings menu the SOURCE function button ››› Fig. 189. MIX  Mix/Repeat including subfolders option Depending on the level, track list, If there is no available media source, the Me- SELECTION is enabled, it also includes the subfolders or source. dia main menu is displayed. folders.

Changes track in Media mode or a) Only available for the Navi System Plus model.  /  fast forward/rewind.

Playback stops. The  function  button changes to  .

202 Operating modes

Indications and symbols of the MEDIA Display: Meaning Switching the Media source main menu

b) DAB not available. Display: Meaning 

a) ® Information about the artist name, al- Gracenote is a database available on the Infotain- bum name and song title. ment system hard drive that contains information on the tracks of different artists and albums. In order for A Audio CD: track information if availa- the user to benefit from the functions offered by ble via Gracenote®a). If no data is Gracenote®, the tracks must contain the artist and/or available, it only displays Track and album data (only available for the model: Navi Sys- the corresponding order number. tem Plus. b) Depends on the market and unit in question. Album cover. The system prioritizes the display as follows: Note Fig. 190 MEDIA mode: switching media 1st Cover embedded in the file(s). ● When the media source is inserted, play- source. 2nd Image in the file folder. ing will not start automatically; it is neces- 3rd Image provided by the Grace- B ● Lower the base volume on the Infotainment ® a) sary for the user to select the source. Nor note database system. 4th Icon of the connected device. will the media source change when it is ejected. ● From the Media main menu, press the If playing a video file, by pressing the ● In order to see the different covers inside SOURCE function button Fig. 190 and se- icon (cover) it can be played on full ››› screen. of the same album/folder, make sure that lect the desired media source. the tracks contain different information ● OR: from the Media main menu, press the The playing time so far and time re- about the Artist or Album in its metadata. If C  Infotainment button repeatedly to cycle maining in minutes and seconds. not, you will see the same cover for all of through the available media sources. tracks contained in the same album/folder. The RDS radio data service is deacti- RDS offb) vated. The RDS can be activated in In the pop-up window, the Media sources not the FM settings menu. selected are shown as deactivated (in grey). The TP function is active and can be When a Media source that has already been TPb) tuned in. played is selected again, playback is resumed from the point at which it was stop- There is no traffic news station availa- b)  ble. ped. »

203 Infotainment System

Note Control through the MEDIA main menu Selecting an album by cover The Media source can be changed in the Action Function Track list view: select Media > View. At the start of the current track. If the track has Briefly press the func- been played for less than Changing track in the MEDIA main tion button  once. 3 seconds, it returns to the start of the previous menu track.

Press the function but- If the track has been ton  twice in a row. played for more than 3 seconds, it returns to the start of the previous track. If the first track is being Fig. 192 Selection by cover. played, pressing the button goes back to the last Clicking on the current cover ››› Fig. 191 1 track on the data media will display all of the album covers available that is being played. in the active Media source ››› Fig. 192. Briefly press the func- To the next track. It It is possible to browse through all the albums tion button  once. changes the last track to the first track on the data by sliding the covers right or left, by using the Fig. 191 MEDIA main menu. media that is being bottom horizontal scroll bar, or by using the played. settings button. The tracks of the Media source that is being listened to can be changed successively us- Press and hold function Rewind. The cover selection view closes after approx- ing the arrow buttons. button  . imately 5 seconds of inactivity and the Media main menu is displayed again. The arrow buttons cannot be used to exit a Press and hold function Fast forward. playlist or start the playback of a playlist. button  . Both actions have to be performed manually Change to the previ- from the track selection menu ››› page 205. ous/next track, with the Slide your finger hori- same playback times as zontally over the screen. changing tracks with the keys  or  .

204 Operating modes

Selecting a track from a track list ● Search the track list and press the track Function button: function you want. Press the function button to open the top C If there is track information available, the folder of the Media source. track (on audio CDs) or the file name (MP3) is displayed instead of Track + num.  Start playback of the first track. Repeat all tracks. Overview of the function buttons in the track list Repeats all the tracks that are on the same memory level as the track being Function button: function  played at that moment. If in the Media Settings menu the Open the Sources menu. Select anoth- Mix/Repeat including subfolders option is A er Media source by pressing. enabled, it also includes the subfolders Fig. 193 Media Mode: list of folders of a Media ››› page 214. source. Indicates the media source being ex- plored. If pressed, it goes to the root of Random play. the device shown on the icon. Includes all the tracks that are on the JUKEBOX a): Internal hard disk of the info- same memory level as the track being tainment system (SSD) ››› page 209.  played at that moment. If in the Media Settings menu the CD/DVD a): Internal CD and DVD drive Mix/Repeat including subfolders option is ››› page 206. enabled, it also includes the subfolders ››› page 214. SD CARD 1 , SD CARD 2 *: SD memory card ››› page 207. CLOSE B To close the tracks list. USB 1 , USB 2 *: External data storage de- × vice connected to the USB port  a) Only available for the model: Navi System Plus. Fig. 194 Media Mode: list of tracks of a Media ››› page 207. source. BT AUDIO : External Media Player con- Note nected via Bluetooth® page 208. Open a list of tracks ››› Tracks, folders and playlists can also be ● Press the SELECT function button on the AUX : Audio source connected to the selected by turning the setting button, and MEDIA main menu ››› Fig. 191 to open the AUX-IN socket ››› page 208. they can be played or opened by pressing track list. The track that is playing is highligh- it. WLAN *: External audio source connected ››› Fig. 194. ted by WLAN ››› page 211. 205 Infotainment System

Data bank view Insert or remove a CD or DVD ● The CD or DVD in the drive will be ejected and must be removed within approximately 3 The DVD drive is only available for model: Navi 10 seconds. System Plus If the CD is not removed within 10 seconds, it is automatically retracted for security reasons without activating the CD mode.

Unreadable or defective CD or DVD If the data on an inserted CD or DVD cannot be read or a defective CD or DVD is inserted, the corresponding warning appears on Fig. 195 Media Mode: data bank view screen. Depending on the equipment, unreadable On the track list, click the Show database view Fig. 196 Slots for data storage devices in the CDs or DVDs are automatically ejected 3 option. The content of the current Media glove compartment. times and reinserted to start another three source will be listed by Playlists , Artists , read attempts before this indication is dis- Albums , Genres , Tracks and Videos The driver should refrain from operating the played. ››› Fig. 193. unit while the vehicle is in motion. Insert or change the data storage device before mov- When selecting one of the folders Artists , Note ing off! Albums or Titles , a search button is displayed ● Uneven road surfaces and strong vibra- in the upper right corner (magnifying glass) The CD and DVD drives can play audio CDs tions can cause playback to jump. that allows searching within the selected cat- and DVDs and audio data CDs and DVDs. ● When the temperature inside the equip- egory ››› page 172, Input window with on- ment is too high, loading and playback of screen keypad. Insert a CD or DVD CDs and DVDs is disabled. To return to the folder view, press the ● Insert a CD or DVD into the slot ● If after inserting a number of different or Show folder view option on the SELECTION ››› Fig. 196 3 with the printed side facing up- DVDs and receiving the CD or DVD drive menu. wards, until the equipment inserts it automati- error, every time, contact a specialised cally. workshop.

Ejecting a CD or DVD

● Press button  1 .

206 Operating modes

Inserting or ejecting a memory External data storage device con- iPod™, iPad™ and iPhone™ card nected to the USB port  Depending on the country and equipment, iPods™, iPads™ or iPhones™ can be connec- Depending on the features and the country, Depending on the features and the country, ted via the device's own USB cable to the ve- the vehicle may have one or two slots for SD the vehicle may have one or two USB con- hicle’s USB port  and used as audio sour- cards. nections ››› page 244. ces. Where this manual refers to external data After connecting an iPod™, iPad™ or iPhone™, Inserting a memory card storage devices, this means USB mass stor- the list views specific to the iPod™ are dis- Insert the compatible memory card, with the age devices containing supported audio files, played at the top selection level ( Play- cut corner first and the contacts facing down, such as MP3 players, iPods™ and USB sticks. lists,  Artists,  Albums,  Tracks, into slot ››› Fig. 196 2 , until it clicks into  Podcasts, etc.). Only supported audio files are displayed and place. played. Other files are ignored. Possible error messages after connecting Removing a memory card Further operation of the external data medi- external data media um (changing track, selecting tracks and The inserted memory cards must be pre- playback modes) is described in the appro- Cause and actions to pared for removal. Error message priate chapters of this manual ››› page 198. take ● From the main Media menu, press the It is not possible to play the SETTINGS button to open the Media Set- Instructions and restrictions external data media or es- tings menu or press the infotainment button Compatibility with Apple™ devices and other tablish communication with the adapter cable that is  and then press Settings, to open the media players depends on the unit. used. System settings menu. Source is not The USB port  supplies the usual USB volt- supported. ● Press the Remove safely function button. A Check that the external data age of 5 volts for a USB connection. dropdown menu appears with the following media is connected and op- options: SD1 Card, SD2 Card*, USB1 and External hard disks larger than 32 GB must be erates correctly. If possible, update the exter- USB2*. Pressing the corresponding function reformatted for the FAT32 file system in some nal data media software. button disables it. circumstances. You will find the necessary ● Press the inserted memory card. The mem- software and information on the Internet. Communication interrupted. ory card “jumps” to the eject position. Take into account all other instructions and Device not re- Check that the external data sponding. ● Remove the memory card. limitations regarding requirements for media media is connected and op- sources. erates correctly. »

207 Infotainment System

Cause and actions to ● If a connected source is not recognized, Information on operating an external au- Error message take disconnect and reconnect it. If the data dio source connected to the AUX-IN multi- cannot be played, the corresponding indi- media socket Due to the large number of different data storage de- cation will be displayed. vices and various iPod™, iPad™ and iPhone™ genera- Operation Effect tions available, it is not possible to guarantee fault- free operation of all functions described here. Selection of another au- The external audio External audio source connected to dio source from the Info- source continues to run in tainment system. the background. Disconnecting the AUX-IN multimedia socket  Stopping playback on The infotainment system Data media be prepared for disconnection. Depending on the equipment and country the external audio remains in the AUX menu. source. ● From the main Media menu, press the SET- there may be an AUX-IN multimedia socket TINGS button to open the Media Settings ››› page 244. Remove the connector The infotainment system menu or press the infotainment button  and from the AUX-IN multi- remains in the AUX menu. The connected external audio source cannot media jack. then press Settings, to open the System be operated with the infotainment system's settings menu. controls. Note ● Press the Remove safely function button. A dropdown menu appears with the following Connecting an external audio source to ● Please read and observe the manufac- options: SD1 Card, SD2 Card*, USB1 and the AUX-IN multimedia socket turer's instruction manual for the external USB2*. Pressing the corresponding function audio source. ● Connect the external audio source to the button disables it. ● Interference noise may be heard if the ex- AUX-IN multimedia socket. ● Now the data storage device can be dis- ternal audio source is powered from the 12- ● Start playback on the external audio connected. volt power socket of the vehicle. source. Note ● In the MEDIA main menu, press the SOURCE function button and select AUX . ● Do not connect an external media player Connect an external audio source ® at the same time to play music via Blue- The playback volume of the connected ex- via Bluetooth ® tooth and via the USB port  with the In- ternal audio source should be adjusted to the ® fotainment system, as this could cause volume of the other audio sources In the Bluetooth Audio mode, audio files that playback limitations. ››› page 176. are playing on a device connected by Blue- ● If the external player is an Apple™ device, tooth can be listened to on the infotainment it cannot be simultaneously connected by system. USB and by Bluetooth®.

208 Operating modes

Conditions Controlling playback Jukebox (SSD) ® ® ● The Bluetooth audio source must support The extent to which the Bluetooth audio sys- 3 Only available for the model: Navi System Plus the A2DP Bluetooth® profile. tem can be operated through the infotain- ● In the Bluetooth® Settings menu the ment system depends on the connected ® Bluetooth Audio (A2DP/AVRCP) function must be Bluetooth device. on. Select Telephone > Settings > Bluetooth Note ● Due to the large number of possible Blue- Starting Bluetooth® audio transfer tooth® audio sources, it is not possible to guarantee fault-free operation of all de- ● Activate Bluetooth® visibility on the external scribed functions. Bluetooth® audio source. ● Always switch off the warning and serv- ● In the MEDIA main menu, press the SOURCE ice tones on a connected Bluetooth® audio function button and select BT audio . source, e.g. key tones on a mobile tele- Fig. 197 Manage Jukebox ● Press Search for new device in order to con- phone, to prevent possible interference nect an external Bluetooth® audio source for noise and malfunctions. The “jukebox” is located on the hard drive of 1) the first time ››› page 234. ● To play music, do not link the external the Infotainment system (SSD ). ● OR: Select a Bluetooth® external audio media player simultaneously to Bluetooth® Compressed audio files (MP3 and WMA) and source from the list. and the USB interface of the infotainment some video files (Podcasts, AVIs, etc.) can be system, as this can cause limitations during ● imported from different data storage devices Please refer to the instructions on the playback. screen of the Infotainment system and on the to the jukebox and this used to play them. ● The system response time may vary, de- Bluetooth® audio source regarding the rest of pending on the connected external play- The files will only be copied when the engine the procedure. back device. is running. Copying copy-protected CDs and DVDs is prohibited You may need to manually start playback on ● If the external player is an Apple™ device, the Bluetooth® source. it cannot be simultaneously connected by USB and by Bluetooth®. Importing files When the Bluetooth® device is disconnected, ● In Media mode, press the SETTINGS func- the infotainment system remains in Blue- tion button and then select Manage Jukebox . tooth® audio mode. ● Press the  IMPORT function button. »

1) Solid-State-Drive (SSD). 209 Infotainment System

● Select the desired source from the Select Functions and progress display during the ● Press the DELETE  function button. The source menu. copying operation files and folders will be deleted according to the selection made. The data storage device is prepared. This op- While copying, an animation is displayed ● When the files have been deleted, a mes- eration may take a few seconds. along with the progress percentage on the import screen. sage will appear. ● Activate the checkboxes to the right of the Audio data CD: It is not possible to copy and ● Press the BACK  function button to close files or folders to be imported. play files at the same time. the menu. ● If Select all is activated, all files and folders on the data storage device will be imported. ● Press the Cancel function button to end the Opening stored audio and video files import of the whole track that is currently be- ● Press the  IMPORT function button. ● Change to Jukebox (SSD) content. ing imported. Depending on the selection, all files and fold- ● To obtain information on the status of the When storing the tracks, they are stored un- ers will be imported with the indicated name import, press the Information function button. der different categories and lists according to to the Jukebox. the information available. ● Press the BACK  function button to close If no track information is available, the audio the import screen with the progress informa- The tracks saved can be checked and files will be placed in the following folders: tion. opened from these lists according to different ● When the file import ends, a message will categories. Audio data CD appear. ■ Album Jukebox ■ Unknown albums Deleting files ● Playlist ■ 1) ● Artist Título.mp3 ● In Media mode, press the SETTINGS func- ■ Artists tion button and then select Manage Jukebox . ● Album ■ Unknown artists ● Press the DELETE  function button. ● Music genre ■ Unknown albums ● Activate the checkboxes to the right of the ● Title ■ Título.mp31) files or folders to be deleted. ● Video ● If Select all is activated, all the files and ● Non-playable files (an unsupported file has folders on the data storage device will be de- been imported). leted.

1) The name and extension of the file are examples. 210 Operating modes

Note ● Having the Enable WLAN connection op- tem can be guaranteed, its operation de- tion active, which can be found in the wireless pends on the application itself. ● If the Infotainment system cancels a connection configuration. copying operation, check the storage space on the internal hard drive and check ● Pairing the mobile device to the Infotain- the data storage device. ment system using a password generated by WLAN settings the system. Pairing must be done from the ● Due to copyright laws, before any change in ownership of the Infotainment device to be connected. To access the WLAN settings the ignition must system, all files stored on the jukebox must be switched on. be deleted. Starting the WLAN audio transfer ● Select the Media main menu by pressing ● There are several possible reasons why ● Start the UPnP app or the app for the play- the infotainment key . files may be shown as inactive (grey): files back of the WLAN audio source. that cannot be imported (e.g. images), files ● Press the SETTINGS function button to open ● In the MEDIA main menu, press the SOURCE that are already stored in the Jukebox or the Media settings menu. function button and select WLAN . files that take up more space than availa- ● Press the WLAN function button, then the ● Please refer to the instructions on the ble in the internal memory. Share connection over WLAN button will screen of the Infotainment system and on the appear along with information about the use WLAN audio source regarding the rest of the of WLAN. procedure. Connect an external audio source ● Press the function button Share connec- via WLAN* Controlling playback tion over WLAN, then you can Enable WLAN connection and access the WLAN The extent to which the WLAN audio can be WLAN allows wireless connection between an network Configuration. external audio source and the Infotainment controlled via the Infotainment system de- ● Press the Configuration function button system. pends on the connected WLAN device and the app that is used. to configure the WLAN network. To use this connection, the device being connected must have an app compatible with Note Function button: function the UPnP (Universal Plug and Play) communi- ● The Infotainment system does not pro- Enable WLAN connection : To turn on/off the WLAN net- cation protocol. vide an internet connection, it only estab- work. lishes a wireless connection between the Security level: WPA2 encryption automatically Conditions mobile device and said system. generates an 8 character network key. » ● Having a compatible (UPnP) app installed ● Via the WLAN, only the connection be- on the device. tween the device and the Infotainment sys-

211 Infotainment System

Function button: function Controlling a DVD menu ● Briefly touch the screen to activate the Network key : Network key automatically gener- function buttons in the DVD mode main menu ated. Press the function button to manually change the network key. The network key must ››› Fig. 198. have a minimum of 8 characters and a maximum of 63. Function button: function

SSID : Name of the WLAN network of the infotain- SOURCE Display and selection of the source. ment system. To display the control menu and re- Do not send network name (SSID) : Activate the DVD MENU turn to the main DVD screen checkbox to deactivate the visibility of the WLAN Fig. 199 DVD mode control menu. ››› Fig. 199. network. Regional code of video DVD A Chapter display. To save the changes made to the configura- Quite often, the playback of DVD video is Displays play time duration and re- tion of the mobile access point, press the B SAVE button. limited to certain regions (for example, to the maining play time. US and Canada) by so-called region “co-  : Move the control menu window. des”. These DVDs can only be played on units that are coded for the same region.  : Minimise the control menu win- Video DVD mode dow. The unit's DVD drive is configured to read the 3 Only available for the model: Navi System Plus C regional code for the region in which the vehi-  : Maximise the control menu win- cle was originally sold. dow.  : Close the control menu. Starting the DVD mode Use the arrow buttons to browse the ● Insert a compatible DVD in the DVD drive. D DVD menu. Confirm the selection by pressing OK . The reading of DVD data may take a few seconds. E Press to open the DVD main menu.

The DVD's “intro” (short initial sequence) is To move to the next or previous played. Next, the different DVD menus are  /  chapter. displayed. Playback stops. The  function but- Fig. 198 DVD main menu.  ton changes to  .

212 Operating modes

Function button: function Function button: function Images

Playback is resumed. The  func- Format : To select the screen format. If Automatic is  tion button changes to  . selected, the optimal format for the screen is set automatically. This menu contains the Video (DVD) SETTINGS settings. Audio channel : To select the language of the voice instructions.

Note Subtitles : To select the subtitle language. ● The visual appearance of the DVD film Enter/change PIN for parental settings : Parental settings menus and the menu options which it offers password. are the responsibility of the DVD manufacturer. Child protection : To select the level of protection you want to associate with DVD playback. Fig. 200 Images main menu. ● The difference in behaviour of some films when using the same mode is the responsi- The options within the Video Settings (DVD) Using the Images menu, image files can be bility of the DVD manufacturer. menu may vary depending on the DVD or the viewed (e.g. photos) individually or as a slide- ● You may not be able to play video DVDs chapter that is playing. show. which you have burned yourself. The available audio channel languages and ● The Infotainment system screen only dis- The image files must be stored on a compati- plays the image when the vehicle is stop- subtitles depend on the DVD that is inserted. ble data storage device. ped. Whilst in motion, the screen discon- All or part of the content of a video DVD can ● Press the Infotainment  button and then nects (the image), but the audio remains be protected by a password (PIN) if the DVD select the Images context. active. allows parental settings. In addition, you can ● Press the SOURCE function button to select choose the restriction level based on age, the source where the pictures in question are with 1 being the least restrictive (all audien- located. Video settings (DVD) ces) and 8 the most restrictive (adults). 3 Only available for the model: Navi System Plus Function button: function

While in the DVD mode press the SETTINGS SOURCE Selection of the source. function button and then select the Video set- SELECTION Opens a list of image files. » tings (DVD) option.

213 Infotainment System

Function button: function Requirements for viewing images Media settings

The image viewed was obtained via Image files Maximum resolu- ● Select the MEDIA main menu by pressing GPS localisation and upon pressing tion the infotainment key .  this function button, the navigator menu opens to start a route to this BMP 4MP ● Press the SETTINGS function button to open destination. the Media settings menu. JPEG 4MP (Progressive Mode) Rotate the image view 90° left or JPG 64MP right, or by swiping your fingers Function button: function  /  across the screen in a circular direc- GIF 4MP Sound : Sound settings ››› page 176. tion. PNG 4MP Manage Jukebox a): To import files to the jukebox or to Reset the view of the image.  delete existing files ››› page 209.

To stop the playback of a slideshow. Mix/repeat including subfolders : Subfolders are inclu-  The  function button changes to Image settings ded in the selected playback mode ››› page 198.  . Bluetooth® : Bluetooth® settings ››› page 242 To continue the playback of a slide- Open the Image settings menu show. The  function button a)  ● Press the SETTINGS function button in the WLAN : WLAN settings ››› page 211. changes to  . main Images menu. Video settings : Settings for playing DVD videos or Change image PREVIOUS or NEXT, files.  /  or by sliding your finger horizontally Function button: function across the screen. Remove safely : To prepare external data media for ex- Image view : To adjust the image view format. traction or disconnection. See also ››› page 207, In- SETTINGS Open the Image settings menu. serting or ejecting a memory card and Automatic: Images scale to the size of the ››› page 207, External data storage device con- screen (the image may not be displayed com- nected to the USB port . Enlarging or reducing the view pletely). ● Slide 2 fingers across the screen, moving Traffic programme (TP) : The TP function (tracking of Complete: The images are displayed fully on traffic information stations) is active ››› page 195. them further apart or closer together. the screen. ● OR: turn the settings button. a) Only available for the model: Navi System Plus. Display time : To adjust the display time of images during a slideshow.

Repeat slideshow : The active slideshow is repeated infinitely.

214 Operating modes

Navigation1) Depending on the country, some functions of Navigation area and update of navigation the infotainment system will not be available data on the screen when travelling higher than a Introduction Road layouts change continuously. There- certain speed. It is not a malfunction, but is fore, if the navigation data are not updated, due to compliance with legislation. then errors or inaccuracies may occur. CAUTION SEAT recommends updating navigation data on a regular basis. The navigation announcements may be in- accurate (e.g. due to out-of-date data).

Fig. 201 Related video Updating and using navigation data from an SD card General information Instructions for navigation 3 Only available for the model: Navi System A GPS (Global Positioning System) satellite When the Infotainment system is unable to re- system locates the current position of the ve- ceive any data from GPS satellites (tunnels, The SD card is factory fitted in slot 2 for SD hicle. The vehicle’s sensors measure the dis- garages), navigation can still continue using cards. tance travelled. The measurements are com- the vehicle sensors. Navigation data that is currently valid for this pared with the stored detailed map resour- unit in order to allow all functions to be used ces, according to road indications stored in Possible limitations in navigation in full. them. Traffic reports, if any, will also be taken into account in the route calculation (dynam- In areas that are not or are only partially digi- Updating navigation data ic route guidance ››› page 223). Using all the tised (e.g. insufficient definition of one-way data available, the Infotainment system cal- streets and road categories), the Infotain- The current navigation data can be downloa- culates the optimum route to the destination. ment system will still attempt to provide route ded in the internet at www.seat.com and stor- guidance. ed in a SD card compatible with the unit. The destination is defined by entering an address or a point of interest, e.g. a petrol sta- In the case of missing or incomplete naviga- Suitable SD Cards can be acquired at SEAT tion or hotel. tion data, it may not be possible to determine dealerships. the exact position of the vehicle. This may Navigation announcements and graphic rep- mean that navigation is not as precise as usu- The procedure is described on the internet at resentations will guide you to your destina- al. www.seat.com. » tion.

1) Valid for: Navi System and Navi System Plus. 215 Infotainment System

Using navigation data Updating and installing navigation ● Insert the memory card containing the nav- ● Insert the memory card ››› page 207. data igation data ››› page 207. ● Press the infotainment key  > Settings ● Wait for the testing icon to disappear. 3 Only available for the model: Navi System Plus > System information. If the inserted memory card contains naviga- The Infotainment system is equipped with an ● Press UPDATE to import the stored navigation data, the following message appears: internal navigation data memory. The re- tion data. “The source contains a valid naviga- quired navigation data are already installed ● Follow the instructions displayed on the tion database”. Navigation can be started. on the system. screen. Note The Infotainment system always requires the navigation data that is currently valid for this Once installed, the memory card can be re- ● The inserted memory card must be pre- unit in order to allow all functions to be used moved. The memory card must be prepared pared before it is ejected ››› page 207. in full. Using an old version may lead to errors for removal ››› page 207. ● Navigation is not possible without the SD during navigation. card. CAUTION ● Do not remove the memory card while Updating navigation data Do not remove the memory card while the navigation data is being installed. The the navigation data is in use. This could To update navigation data visit our website: memory card may be irreparably dam- damage the memory card! www.seat.com. aged! ● The navigation memory card cannot be used as a memory for other files. The navigation data must be installed after downloading. Navigation is not possible from ● SEAT recommends using only the original Note the memory card. SEAT cards. The use of other memory cards ● The navigation memory card may not be could limit its operation. used as memory storage for other files. The Installing navigation data Infotainment system will not recognise the The installation process takes about 2 hours. files saved on it. If the Infotainment system is switched off, the ● SEAT recommends a CLASS 101) memory installation process is paused and will auto- card for the use of navigation data. The use matically resume when switched back on. of other memory cards could limit its operation. ● Switch the ignition on.

1) The speed class of an SD card. 216 Operating modes

Navigation main menu Navigation main menu function buttons New destination (entering the des- and indicators tination) Function button: function

A The split screen is displayed ››› page 221.

Messages and function buttons on the map B display ››› page 222.

NEW DEST : To enter a new destination ››› page 217.

ROUTE : During route guidance ››› page 219.

MY DESTS. : To activate or manage stored destina- Fig. 202 Navigation main menu tions ››› page 219.

POI : Search for points of interest (car parks, fuel sta- Fig. 203 Search screen. Navigation functions can only be used if the tions and restaurants) within a particular search area navigation data for the area where the vehi- ››› page 221. ● In the Navigation main menu, press the cle is driving is available in the infotainment New destination function button. system. VIEW : To modify or activate or deactivate the split screen and show POI ››› Fig. 202 A ››› page 221. ● Press the OPTIONS function button and se- The Navigation main menu allows you to select the desired destination entry type SETTINGS : Open the Navigation Settings lect a new destination, call up a previously menu. (Search, Address, POI or On the map). used or stored destination and search for ● Using voice control*, if you say Town, street points of interest. and number, without pauses, and then the instruction “Start Route Guidance” a route to Opening the main Navigation menu the given destination will start. ● Press the Infotainment button  to open the last menu that was open in navigation. Search ● If the Navigation main menu is not dis- Search for addresses and Points of Interest played, press the infotainment button  using the keypad to enter them ››› Fig. 203. again until the main navigation menu is dis- For cities, post codes and points of interest, played. the full details must be entered. You can also » ● OR: Press the  function button to return menu by menu to the Navigation menu.

217 Infotainment System

search for points of interest by names or cat- Function button: function – Orange route: Shortest route to the egories. When necessary, enter the name of destination, even if it results in longer the city to refine the search. Route options : Setting route options, see Naviga- travelling time. tion Settings > Route options. ● Select the desired route by pressing it. ››› Fig. 203 Start : Starts guided navigation to the selected point of interest. Press to open the cursor buttons (, ), The route criteria settings in the Route op- A which allow you to move within the text. tions menu are modified accordingly. If a route is not selected, the route guidance Steering After starting route guidance starts automatically after approx. one minute When narrowing down the destination ad- according to the setting selected in Route dress, please note that every entry restricts options. the available range of subsequent selections. Once the route has been calculated, the sys- To enter an address press the function but- tem gives the first navigation announcement. tons in the following order: Up to 3 navigation announcements are given before a turn. ● Country, City (or postcode), Centre (starts the route to the centre of the indicated ● Press the adjustment knob to listen to the city), Street, Number, Junction, LAST DES- last audible navigation instruction. TINATIONS, START (starts route guidance to The indicated distances depend to a great the selected destination). Fig. 204 Route calculation. extent on the type of road and the traffic speed. On motorways, for example, naviga- On the map When starting route guidance, the route is tion announcements are received much earli- ● Select the destination on the map or enter calculated based on the data that have been er than in urban traffic. it using GPS coordinates and confirm with selected in the Route options menu. The corresponding navigation announce- OK . Three alternative routes are proposed ments are also given on roads with several ››› Fig. 204. These 3 routes correspond to the lanes that split, and on roundabouts, for ex- Function button: function selectable route options: Economical, Fast ample: “Leave the roundabout at the second Store : Store the point of interest in the destination and Short. exit.” memory ››› page 219. – Blue route: Economic route. A navigation announcement informs you Edit : Edit the destination or enter another one. when you have reached your “destination”. – Red route: Fastest route.

218 Operating modes

A navigation announcement informing you Function button: function The stored destinations can be selected from that you have reached the “destination area” the My destinations menu. is given if the exact destination cannot be STOP GUIDANCE : Aborts current route guidance. reached. ● Press the My destinations function button in ENTER DESTINATION : To enter a new destination or a the main Navigation menu. During dynamic route guidance, you re- new stopover ››› page 217. ● Select the desired function button. ceive information about reported traffic con- CONGESTION AHEAD : To exclude a section of the STORE POSITION , ROUTES , DESTINATIONS , gestion on the route. An additional navigation route. To cancel the exclusion, press the Route func- LAST DESTINATIONS OR HOME ADDRESS . announcement is given if the route is recalcu- tion button and then CANCEL CONGESTION . lated. CHANGE ROUTE a): The map of the calculated route Store position During a navigation announcement, you can appears and by holding a finger on the route and ● By pressing the STORE POSITION function change its volume using the button . dragging the finger across said map, the route is changed to the road(s) that you want and the new button, the current position is stored as a For other announcement settings, select route is then recalculated. Flagged destination in the Destination Navigation > Settings > Navigation memory. ROUTE DETAILS : View route information. announcements. To save the stored position permanently as a a) Only available for the model: Navi System Plus Note flagged destination, change the name of the position in the destination memory. Oth- ● If you miss a turning during route guid- erwise, the saved position is overwritten when ance and are currently unable to turn back, My destinations (destination mem- another flagged destination is saved. keep on driving until the navigation system ory) offers a new route. ● Mark the Flagged destination in the ● The quality of the announcements and destination memory. recommendations depends on the naviga- ● Press the Store function button. tion data available and any reported traffic problems. The name can be changed in the following input window. Press the  function button to store the destination. Route Routes In the Navigation main menu, press the Route In the Route mode, you can define various function button. destinations (final destination and stopovers). » The Route function button is only displayed Fig. 205 List of saved routes. with route guidance activated. 219 Infotainment System

The starting point of a route is always the Function button or message: function or Available function buttons vehicle’s current position. The destination is meaning the end point of a route. Stopover destina- Moving a stopover or a destination to  another position on the list. Press and tions are driven to before the destination. Calculated distance to destination. ... drag to move the destination. ● In the Navigation main menu, press the ... Estimated travelling time. a) Only displayed with route guidance activated and My Destinations function button.  when a destination has been added to the tour. ● Press the ROUTES function button. ... Distance to the next stopover. b) Only displayed with route guidance activated. If you have not stored any routes or want to Last destinations create a new route, press the New route func- Press on the destination to display the tion button and then follow the instructions as function buttons List of last destinations. for a new destination, before pressing Store .  Delete destination. My destinations Pressing on a stored route brings up the following function buttons: Starting route guidance direct to the se- ● Press the Options function button and se-  lected destination. The stages are omit- lect the desired function button. ted. Function button: function Opening the detailed view of the desti- Function button: function Delete : To delete a stored route.  nation in question. Destination memory : View of destinations stored man- Edit : To edit and store a route. ually and from imported vCards ››› page 224, Im- Available function buttons porting vCards (electronic business cards). Start : To start route guidance. New desti- Add a new destination. Favourites : List of destinations stored as favourites. nation Function buttons and indications in the New Contacts : List of phone book contacts that have a route or Edit menu Destina- Adding a new destination from My stored address (postal address). tions destinations. Function button or message: function or meaning Storing To store the created route in the route Home address memory. Only one address or position can be stored  Stopover. Start Start route guidance. as the home address at any one time. Destination.  Calculate To update the calculated distance and Pressing will start guidance to the stored estimated arrival time.a) home address. ... Estimated time of arrival. Stop To stop active route guidance.b)

220 Operating modes

If a home address has not yet been stored, play on the map. Up to 10 categories can be Function button: function an address can be assigned. selected. Map display in three dimensions (bird's Assigning the home address for the first time: Selecting a point of interest on the map eye view).  The places of interest and well-known Position : Press to store the vehicle's current position Function button: function as the home address. buildings are also shown in detail and in colour. Address : Press to enter the home address manually. There are several points of interest in the area. 1 Press this symbol to open a list of points of in- a) To display the destination on the map. Editing the home address: terest. 

The home address can be edited in the Naviga- The only point of interest in this zone. Press the a) To display the route on the map. tion settings > Manage memory menu. 2 symbol to open the detailed view of the point of interest. Auto / To switch between day and night for- Day / Night mat.

Special destinations (POI) Quick POI search SPLIT Show the split screen ››› page 221. In the Navigation main menu, press the POIs SCREEN function button and the three main catego- POI Show special destinations. ries will appear. Alternatively, enter the name of the point of interest to be searched using a) Only displayed with route guidance activated. the new destination keypad, or press Search nearby on the map ››› table on page 222. Split screen

View

Fig. 206 Points of interest on the map. In the Navigation main menu, press the View function button. The points of interest saved in the memory are divided into different categories. Each Function button: function category of special destinations has a symbol assigned to it. Map display in two dimensions (con-  ventional). In the Map settings menu, you can indicate the special destinations that you want to dis- Fig. 207 Split screen displayed. » 221 Infotainment System

The split screen ››› Fig. 207 A shows the in- Function button: function Function buttons and messages on the formation detailed below: map display. POI : name of the point of interest (when only one To activate function buttons  and , press ● Pressing the name displays a menu with the appears on the map).  following options: function button . Group of POIs : more points of interest (when you press on the map on various POIs grouped to- Function button: function Function button: function gether).  Current altitude indicator. Audio : Current audio source. FAVOURITE : name of the favourite. To centre the vehicle position on the map. Compass : Displays a compass with the current di- HOME ADDRESS : Home address.  rection and position of the vehicle (street name). To centre the destination on the map. On- Start route guidance : starts guidance directly. Manoeuvre : Displays a list of the next manoeuvres,  ly displayed if either Display destination POIs or TMCs on the route and pressing them brings Add stopover : only when you have an active route. on map or Display route on the map is se- up additional information lected ››› page 221. Search nearby : enters in the search menu, but only FREQUENT ROUTES a): Information on the user's most for the area around the point selected on the map. To change the orientation of the map frequent routes.  (north-facing or direction of travel). Only Demo mode start (only when demo mode is active) available in 2D mode. Position : current vehicle position in coordinates and GPS status (satellite reception). Map scale. To change the scale, turn the  adjustment knob or move two fingers to- a) Only shown when route guidance is not active or Map display gether or apart on the screen. when predictive route guidance is active. Selecting automatic scaling. If the func- Press the  function button to close the split  tion is active, the symbol is displayed in screen. blue.

At any moment during navigation, pressing Briefly increases the scale of the map inside the map will make a pop-up menu ap-  (zoom) The selected scale is displayed pear with the following functions: again after a few seconds. Mute or repeat the last announcement, Function button: function  change the announcement volume.

Clicking on the map : Shows the details of the selected Road signs: Depending on the vehicle's equip- point, street name or coordinates ment, the road signs stored in the navigation data are displayed. Select Navigation > Settings > Only when you press on an icon on the map: Fig. 208 Messages and function buttons on the map display. Map > Show road signs.

222 Operating modes

Traffic bulletins and dynamic desti- Dynamic route guidance Symbol: Meaning nation guidance (TRAFFIC) In order for dynamic route guidance to function, Dynamic route must be activated in the  : Accident route options.  : Slippery road surface (ice or snow) If a traffic report is received that affects the route being travelled, an alternative route will  : Slippery road surface be searched for if the system calculates that time can be saved.  : Danger If, on the other hand, the alternative route does not save time, the route will continue  : Road works with the traffic jam. In both cases, an announcement will be made.  : Strong wind Fig. 209 Traffic reports Shortly before reaching the announced traffic jam, it is indicated again.  : Road closed to traffic The Infotainment system constantly receives traffic reports (TMC/TMCpro) in the back- Avoiding a traffic jam by following the instruc- During route guidance, traffic incidents that ground, if a traffic information station is tions of a traffic bulletin does not always save do not affect the calculated route calculated tuned. time, for example, if alternative routes are are displayed in grey. congested. The effectiveness of dynamic The length of a traffic jam on the calculated Traffic bulletins are displayed on the map navigation depends on the traffic bulletins route is shown by a red line. with symbols ››› page 223, Traffic reports on that are received. map (selection) and they are required dy- Incidents that affect the calculated route and The rest of the route that has to be travelled namic destination guidance ››› page 223, that have led to the recalculation of the route can be manually excluded to force its recal- Dynamic route guidance. are shown in orange. culation ››› page 219. List of available traffic reports The position of a symbol indicates the start of Traffic reports on map (selection) the traffic jam if it is precisely specified in the ●  Press the Infotainment button and then traffic bulletin. select the Traffic context. Symbol: Meaning

 : Slow traffic

 : Traffic jam

223 Infotainment System

Predictive navigation Importing vCards (electronic busi- Navigation with images ness cards)

Importing vCards to the destination memory ● Insert the data storage device with the stored vCards or connect it to the Infotainment system ››› page 198. ● In the Navigation main menu, press the SETTINGS function button. ● In the Navigation settings menu, press Fig. 210 Predictive navigation the Import destinations function button. Fig. 211 Images main menu. ● Select the data carrier with the vCards When you activate Predictive navigation, the saved in the list. Selecting an image and starting route system detects and stores in the background guidance ● Press Import all vCards from this folder . routes that are frequently followed, without ● Press the Infotainment  button and then ● Confirm the import notice with the OK them being active destination routes. select the Images context. function button. This function has no navigation announce- ● Press the SOURCE ››› Fig. 211 function but- ments unless the user requires them, getting Saved vCards will now be in the destinations ton and select the data storage device where them by pressing the settings button. memory ››› page 219. the images are stored. ● If the image displayed was taken using GPS ● On the main screen of the Navigation menu, Note in the pop-up window, press the localisation, the  function button will appear. FREQUENT ROUTES button. To display fre- Only one address per vCard can be impor- Press to start guidance to a destination. quently followed routes press the ted. In the event any vCards have multiple addresses, only the main address will be Show on map button ››› Fig. 210. imported. Road signs indication

The road sign indication must be active in the Navigation settings menu ››› page 225. If there are road signs stored in the navigation data for the route you are driving on, the

224 Operating modes system can display them on the map (e.g. a The development and operation of virtual Function button: function speed limit). route guidance is compatible with the development and operation of real route guidance. Suggest 3 alternative routes : After starting route Take into account the age of the navigation guidance, 3 alternative routes are proposed data and the limitations of the navigation sys- Virtual route guidance is repeated after ››› page 218. tem ››› page 215! reaching the fictitious destination and re- Route : Route type selection. starts from the starting point, if it is not interrupted beforehand. Economical : Route calculation, taking economic aspects into account. Recognition of road signs When the starting point of the Demo mode is manually set Navigation settings menu, Fast : The fastest route to the destination. Some vehicles have a road sign recognition the virtual route guidance starts from that po- Short : The shortest route to the destination, camera. If the vehicle has road sign recogni- sition. even if it results in longer travelling time. tion and it is active, road signs detected by the system will be displayed on the map, A manually entered starting point is overwrit- Most frequent routes : Information on the user's most along with additional information. ten with the current location of the vehicle, if frequent routes. the vehicle starts moving. Dynamic route : Dynamic route guidance activates Read and take into account the information when a TMC is received ››› page 223. and indications of the road signs recognition Note system ››› page 72. Avoid motorways and highways : Motorways will be Deactivate the Demo mode after use, oth- excluded from the route calculation wherever erwise you will always have to select possible. whether to start a virtual route or normal Avoid ferries and motorail trains : Ferries and motorail Route guidance in Demo mode route before starting route guidance. trains will not be taken into account for the route calculation, wherever possible. If demo mode is activated in the Navigation settings menu, an additional pop-up win- Avoid toll roads : Toll roads will be excluded from dow opens when you start route guidance. Navigation settings the route calculation, whenever possible. Avoid tunnels : Tunnels will be excluded from the ● ● In the Navigation main menu, press the Pressing the Demo mode function button route calculation, whenever possible. starts a “virtual route guidance” to the desti- SETTINGS function button. nation you have entered. Avoid routes requiring toll stickers : Mandatory toll Function button: function stickers (stickers certifying that the toll has been ● If you press the Normal function button, a paid) will be excluded from the route calculation “real route guidance” starts. Route options : To make the route calculation adjust- whenever possible. » ments.

225 Infotainment System

Function button: function Function button: function Function button: function

Show available toll stickers a): To mark the available Sort contacts : To select the sequential order of Fuel warning : The fuel warning is active. toll stickers on the list agenda entries recorded with postal addresses, If the fuel level reaches the reserve, an appropri- ( Avoid routes requiring toll stickers must be active). see also ››› page 219. Routes requiring toll stickers will be taken into ac- ate warning is generated that enables the service count in the route calculation if it is marked that Define home address : To assign or edit a home ad- station search. the toll sticker is available. dress, see also ››› page 220. Version information : Information about stored naviga- Include trailer : Calculate the route and arrival Import destinations (SD/USB) : To import digital busi- tion data. time, depending on whether a trailer is being tow- ness cards (vCards) into the destination memory Advanced settings : For making advanced changes to ed. ››› page 224. the navigation settings. Delete user data : To delete stored destinations (e.g. Map : To adjust the map display settings. Last destinations or the Destination Time display : Indication  during route guidance. memory). Show road signs : The road signs stored in the navi- Time of arrival : The estimated time of arrival at gation data for the road you are driving on are dis- the destination is displayed. played during route guidance ››› page 224. Navigation announcements : To change the navigation announcements settings. Running time : The envisaged travelling time to Lane guidance : During route guidance, an addi- the destination is displayed. tional indication is displayed to recommend a Volume : To adjust the volume of audible driving lane when driving, and when turning on roads with recommendations. Status line : View  during route guidance. several lanes. Only if the data bank contains infor- Entertainment fading (nav. announcements) : Set the mation about the area that is being driven Destination : The calculated distance to the volume of the active audio source during naviga- destination is shown. through. tion announcements. Next stopover : The calculated distance to the Show favourites : The destinations saved as favour- No navigation announcements during calls : During a next stopover is shown. ites on the map are displayed (). telephone conversation, audio driving recommen- Note: National border crossed : Indication of the Show POIs dations will not be given. speed limits of the country in question when Select categories for POIs : To select the POI cate- Note: My POIs : Audible warning when approaching crossing a border. gories shown on the map ››› page 221. a special destination. Demo mode : When the Demo mode is active and Show brand logos for POIs : Displays logos of the Speed limits : Shows the speed limits, depending on route guidance is started, a virtual guide to the en- selected special destinations categories (e.g. the road, of the country that is being driven through. tered destination may be started ››› page 225. displays logos of service stations). Fuel options : To change fuel related settings. Define demo mode starting point : If the Demo Manage memory : To make adjustments to the stored mode is active and the vehicle is stopped, a fic- destinations. Select preferred petrol station : The brand of the se- titious starting point can be set for the virtual lected service station is given priority in special route guidance. destination search results.

226 Operating modes

Function button: function Offroad Navigation Menu Recording an Offroad tour

Waypoints mode b): To start Offroad navigation. a) This functionality will depend on the country. b) Only available on model: Navi System Plus.

Navigation in Offroad mode*1)

Introduction Fig. 212 Offroad Navigation Menu start Fig. 213 Recording an Offroad tour

Offroad* navigation is a function for offroad Press the SETTINGS function button in the An Offroad tour is formed by a series of stor- driving that provides directions in “non-digi- main Navigation menu. ed waypoints. tised areas” at low speeds. ● In the menu, press the Waypoint mode Non-digitised areas are areas about which Starting recording function button. the system does not have information for the ● In the Offroad Navigation menu, in the pop- ● The Offroad Navigation menu opens streets or terrain. It does not detect streets, up window press the RECORD pop-up button. buildings or natural limits such as mountains ››› Fig. 212. ● In the pop-up window, the user is able to or rivers, although they may be shown on the plot the tour with a given destination or start map. Function buttons in the Offroad Navigation menu plotting the route without giving a final desti- Offroad* navigation is not suitable for driving nation. on conventional roads as it does not detect Function button: function ● Starts plotting the route. one-way streets, motorway entries or similar. RECORD : Initiates the plotting of an Offroad tour. The offroad markers can be recorded by in- MEMORY : Opens a list allowing the selection of a dicating a manual waypoint. stored Offroad tour. ● In the Offroad Navigation menu, press the EXIT : Ends Offroad navigation. ADD WAYPOINT function button. The tour »

1) Only available for the model: Navi System Plus 227 Infotainment System

waypoints defined manually are shown on  Delete the tour. Setup the map by a marker.  Load tour Function button: function

Ending recording Function button: function Invert : Reverses the direction of the stored Offroad ● Press the STOP RECORDING function button tour. IMPORT : allows the import of an Offroad route in in the main Offroad Navigation menu. “.GPX” format. Next point : Starts the Offroad tour from the nearest point.

Loading an Offroad tour Start : Starts the complete Offroad tour. Managing stored Offroad tours When the Offroad tour is selected, press Play When route guidance starts, the system  and the selected tour will be loaded onto switches to the map view. the Navigation system. Stopping route guidance ● Press the OPTIONS button on the screen Creating an Offroad tour and then press Stop .

End waypoint navigation ● Press the Exit function button in the Off- road Navigation menu Fig. 214 Offroad Navigation menu, stored tours WARNING Terrain features are disregarded during ● Press the MEMORY function button in the route guidance Drive slowly and following Offroad Navigation menu. the instructions in order to perform the ma- ● A list of stored Offroad tours opens, if there noeuvre as far as possible! are any. Fig. 215 Offroad route guidance mode ● The general direction of travel is indicated straight ahead by direction arrows in When a tour is selected, the following icons Start route guidance the Infotainment System pop-up window will appear Fig. 214: ››› ● Loads the stored Offroad tour. ››› Fig. 215 A .  Export the tour to an SD card. ● Starting off in a stored route is not detected  Edit the name of the tour. by the system automatically.

228 Operating modes

Note ● ECOTRAINER ››› page 231 Views 1, 2, 3 ● If an Offroad tour is being recorded, this is VEHICLE STATUS ››› page 232 Customise the information that appears in automatically stored if Offroad navigation the digital cockpit. The user chooses which to is discontinued. display, and in what order, by moving a finger Instrument panel vertically over the dials. Depending on the version, the Views can be memorised by existing the menu or keeping Vehicle Menu the View button pressed. Introduction to using the Vehicle menu

Pressing button  of the infotainment system accesses its main menu with the following options:

● VIEW Fig. 216 Instrument panel ● RADIO or MEDIA (to control playback in radio or media mode) Press the Instrument panel button to choose from the various display options and custom- ● HDC (shown if the descent assistant* is ac- ise the information that appears in the SEAT tive ››› page 261) Digital Cockpit ››› page 65. ● PREVIOUS-NEXT (to change screen) ● SETTINGS ››› page 82 Automatic View

With the function button VIEW you can ac- Pre-set information depending on the Driving cess the following information: mode.

● INSTRUMENT PANEL ››› page 229 Classic View ● SPORT* ››› page 230 The needles are displayed at full length. ● OFFROAD* ››› page 230 ● CONSUMERS ››› page 231 ● DRIVING DATA ››› page 231 229 Infotainment System

Sport* 1. Instantaneous power expressed in kW Offroad* 2. G forces 3. Turbo pressure, expressed in bar (“bar”), kilopascals (“kPa”) or in pounds per square inch (“psi”). Press the Settings button to change the units of pressure ››› page 174 4. Coolant temperature 5. Oil temperature

Only 3 of these items of information can be displayed at the same time, but the user Fig. 217 SPORT menu Fig. 219 Offroad CAR Menu. chooses which to display, and in what order, by moving the finger vertically over the dials. ● Press the infotainment button . Press the NEXT button to bring up the Lap ● Press the VIEW function button and select timer menu that is described below OFFROAD. ››› Fig. 218: If the corresponding equipment is available, 1 Analogue lap timer the information that appears is the following: 2 New timing is started by pressing on the surface of the digital lap timer +. 1. Compass. 2. Turning angle of steered wheels. 3 Stop lap timer/Lap time. 3. Coolant temperature. 4 The analogue lap timer's time is stopped Fig. 218 SPORT Menu Lap timer for 5 seconds. After 5 seconds, the ana- 4. Lubricating oil temperature logue lap timer shows the real time again. ● Press the infotainment button . Only 2 of these items of information can be 5 Statistics/delete last lap time. ● Press the VIEW function button and select displayed at the same time, but the user SPORT. chooses which to display, and in what order, by moving the finger vertically over the dials. If the corresponding equipment is available, the following information appears in the Sport option ››› Fig. 217:

230 Operating modes

Consumers The on-board computer has 3 memories. Ecotrainer They can be used to display: distance, time, average speed, average consumption and range.

1. Since start Indication and storage of distance travelled and consumption values between the ignition being turned on and it being turned off.

2. Since refuelling Display and storage of the values for the jour- Fig. 220 Convenience consumers. Fig. 222 CAR Ecotrainer menu. ney and the consumption. By refuelling, the memory will be erased automatically. Access information about the vehicle’s main convenience consumers. It is shown via a 3. Long-term consumption indicator bar in l/h (gal/h). The memory records the values for a specific number of partial trips, up to a total of 19 Driving data hours and 59 minutes or 99 hours and 59 minutes, or 1999.9 km (mi) or 9999 km (mi), depending on the model of instrument panel. When one of these values is reached (depending on the version of the instrument panel), the memory is automatically deleted and Fig. 223 Driving style symbols. starts counting again from 0. Open the ECOTRAINER Menu ● While the vehicle is stopped, press the Info- tainment button . ● Press the VIEW function button and select ECOTRAINER. » Fig. 221 Driving data.

231 Infotainment System

Provides information about your driving style. Indication ››› Fig. 222: Meaning Vehicle status The information on driving style is only evalu- ated and displayed when moving forward. To the left of the columns are different symbols 1 that provide information about the current driving style table on page 232. ∅ ECO points: indication on driving style ››› Indicates driving style efficiency since start The white column is an indication of where the efficiency graph starts (from left to right). on a scale of 0 to 100. The higher the value 2 It shows the position of the evaluation that is displayed, the more efficient the driving style. currently being performed. Press on the display for more information. Statistics are shown for the last 30 minutes of Bars to illustrate acceleration. driving from the start. If 30 minutes have not The position of the car represents acceleration. 3 If the speed is constant, the car remains in the elapsed, the values of the last trip are shown central zone. If it accelerates or brakes, the car in grey. moves backwards or forwards respectively. Fig. 224 Standard representation: vehicle status. ∅ l/100 km: Average fuel consumption Columns representing driving style efficiency. Horizontally, the columns represent retrospec- Shows the average fuel consumption. The tive driving efficiency, and move from left to value is calculated using the kilometres trav- right approximately every 5 seconds. The high- elled since start as a reference. Press on the 4 er the columns, the more efficient the driving display for more information. Statistics are style. The colour of the sky represents the average of shown for the last 30 minutes of driving from the last 3 minutes. The colour changes from the start. If 30 minutes have not elapsed, the grey (less efficient) to blue (more efficient). values of the last trip are shown in grey. Symbols ››› Fig. 223: Meaning Eco tips: Tips on how to save fuel Thinking ahead. Sudden changes in accelera- Press the ECO tips button to get advice on A tion lower the efficiency of the driving style. Fig. 225 Standard representation: vehicle sta- how to save fuel. These tips can only be con- tus. sulted while the vehicle is stopped. B Gear recommendation. Press the Vehicle status button to access infor- Current speed has a negative impact on fuel C Efficient driving style assessment consumption. mation on the Vehicle status messages and Start-Stop system. The representation uses different elements to D Ecological driving style. show driving style efficiency.

232 Operating modes

The Vehicle status messages are dis- Telephone functions can only be used if there WARNING played ››› Fig. 224, in addition to being is a mobile phone connected by Bluetooth to specified on the corresponding button. the infotainment system ››› page 235. General, mandatory, legal and country- specific instructions and laws for the use of According to the parties affected by these To do this, the phone must have the Blue- mobile phones inside the vehicle must al- messages, they will be shown in different col- tooth® function activated. ways be considered. ours (depending on their importance) on the The instructions shown on the screen for the vehicle's screen. telephone menus will depend on the mobile WARNING To access the Tyre Pressure Loss Indi- telephone used. Speaking by telephone and using the mo- cator, press the FORWARD or BACK keys. Only use compatible Bluetooth® devices. For bile telephone management system whilst driving can distract you from the road and From this same menu, use the  SET button further information on compatible Bluetooth® to store the tyre pressures. products, ask your nearest SEAT dealer or cause an accident. check on the internet. ● In areas of little coverage your call may Note be cut off and you may not be able to make Use the instruction manual of the mobile tele- even emergency calls. The values shown on the figures ››› Fig. 220, phone and of any accessories. ››› Fig. 221, ››› Fig. 224 and ››› Fig. 225 are in- dicative and may vary depending on the If you detect any operating issues between WARNING your mobile telephone and the Infotainment equipment. Mobile telephones may interfere with and system, restart your mobile by switching it off alter the correct operation of pacemakers and on again. if they are carried directly over them. Telephone Some functions and setup can only be per- ● Maintain a minimum distance of at least formed when the vehicle is stopped and are 20 centimetres between the aerials of the not available on all mobile telephones. mobile telephone and the pacemaker. General information You may experience poor reception or may ● Do not carry your switched-on mobile be cut off in areas where the signal is weak. telephone in your breast pocket directly over the pacemaker. Most electronic devices are shielded against ● If you suspect interference, switch off the HF (high-frequency) signals. In any case, the mobile telephone immediately. electronic equipment may not be protected from the HF signals of the telephone management system. This may cause interfer- CAUTION Fig. 226 Related video ence. High speeds, poor weather or road conditions and the quality of reception can all »

233 Infotainment System

® affect the audio quality of a telephone con- ● all other places where the vehicle engine this purpose, and there must be no Bluetooth versation in the vehicle. must be switched off. connection with other devices. Bluetooth® connections are free. WARNING Note Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue- Switch off the mobile phone in areas with a ● ® Restrictions on the use of devices using risk of explosion! The mobile telephone can tooth SIG, Inc. ® Bluetooth technology may apply in some automatically connect to the mobile tele- ® countries. For further information, contact phone network again if it loses the Blue- Bluetooth profiles the local authorities. ® tooth connection to the telephone man- When a mobile phone is connected to the tel- ● If you wish to connect a device via Blue- agement system. ephone management system, a data ex- ® tooth , consult the safety warnings in its in- change takes place via one of the Bluetooth® struction manual. Only use compatible CAUTION profiles. Bluetooth® devices. ● Using a mobile telephone inside the vehi- In areas where special regulations apply or ● Hands-free telephone profile (HFP): the cle may provoke noise in the speakers. the use of mobile telephones is prohibited, HFP can be used to manage calls through the both the telephone and the telephone ● infotainment system. Some networks may not recognise all of management system must always be the language characters or offer all of the switched off. Interference may be caused ● Audio profile (A2DP): This profile allows services. with sensitive technical and medical equip- audio to be transmitted with stereo quality. It ment, possibly resulting in a malfunction or may require connecting other profiles for damage to the equipment. managing and controlling playback. Places with special regulations ● Phone book access profile (PBAP): Allows phone book contents to be downloaded from In the majority of cases, these places are Bluetooth® the mobile telephone. signposted, but not always clearly. They in- ● Message profile (MAP): It allows short clude, for example: ® Bluetooth technology allows a mobile tele- messages (SMS) to be downloaded and phone to be connected to your vehicle's tele- ● the vicinity of chemical pipelines and tanks synchronised. phone management system. Prior pairing be- ● The lower decks of boats and ferries. tween the two is required for this purpose. Note ● In the proximity of vehicles that run on liquid Some Bluetooth® mobile telephones connect The mobile telephone's button and warning gas (such as propane or butane). automatically when turning on the ignition if a tones should be off. Where necessary, dis- ● places where the air is laden with chemi- connection has been previously established. connect the headset from the mobile tele- cals or particles such as flour, dust or metal Its Bluetooth® function must be activated for phone you wish to connect to the system. powder. 234 Operating modes

Pairing and connecting a mobile OR: OR: telephone to the Infotainment sys- ● Press the infotainment button  > Set- ● Compare the PIN code shown on the dis- tem tings > Select mobile phone > Search play of the Infotainment system with the one results. shown on the mobile phone. If they match, In order to manage a mobile telephone via confirm on both devices. OR: the Infotainment system, it is necessary to ●  Now, the infotainment system and the mobile pair both devices once. Press the infotainment button > Set- tings > Bluetooth > Find devices> phone will be connected to each other. For your safety, pairing should be done when Search results. When the pairing has been finalized correct- the vehicle is stationary. In some countries it is ly, the Telephone main menu will appear. The not possible to perform the pairing with the OR: phone book, call list and SMS messages stor- vehicle running. ● Make the connection from the settings ed in the mobile phone will be loaded once menu of the mobile phone itself. the requests have been accepted in the mo- Conditions bile phone. After downloading, the data will The name of your Infotainment system will be ● The ignition must be switched on. be available on the Infotainment system. displayed on the main Telephone screen and ® ● The Bluetooth function of the mobile you can edit this name via the Bluetooth Pairing and connection of mobile telephone and the Infotainment system must be settings menu. active and visible. phones The search process can take up to 1 minute. ● The keypad lock on the mobile telephone You can pair up to 20 mobile telephones to must be deactivated. As soon as the search is completed, the the Infotainment system, but the number of si- names of the Bluetooth® devices found are multaneous connections varies: Follow instructions in the manual for the mo- displayed on-screen. bile telephone. ● Media System Plus / Navi System: two mo- ● Select the Bluetooth® device you want to bile phones simultaneously connected to the During the pairing process, it is necessary to connect. Additional data may need to be en- hands-free profile, and one of them as Blue- enter data via the mobile telephone's keypad. tered. tooth® audio. ● Use your mobile telephone to enter and ● Navi System Plus: two mobile phones simul- Pairing a mobile telephone confirm your PIN code, as indicated in the dis- taneously connected to the hands-free pro- ● Press the infotainment button  > Find play of the infotainment system. file and one of them or a third one connected telephone > Search results. ® ● If more Bluetooth® profile pairing requests to the Bluetooth audio. are received on the mobile telephone, make When the Infotainment system is switched on, sure to reply to them. it connects to the last connected mobile telephone. If it is not possible to connect to this » 235 Infotainment System

mobile telephone, the system will try to con- Note If the mobile phonebook has been modified nect to the next mobile telephone on the list while connected, a manual update of the of paired devices. Check that there are no requests pending phonebook data can be started from the acceptance in your mobile phone. If there User profile settings menu. The maximum range of the connection is ap- are, this could block some of the functions prox. 10 metres. The connection will be inter- in the Telephone menu. Telephone management can store a maxi- rupted if this distance is exceeded. The con- mum of 4 profiles for mobile phones. If you nection is automatically re-established as wish to pair another mobile phone, the oldest soon as the device is once again within Blue- Telephone main menu user profile will be replaced. tooth® range. Telephone management system function If the maximum number of paired devices is buttons reached and you want to pair another one, the system will automatically replace the ● Press the infotainment button  to access least recent one with it. If it is to replace an- the Telephone main menu. other one, the user must delete that one first. Do do this: Function button: function

● Press the SETTINGS function button in the Name of connected mobile tele- telephone context. 1 phone. Press the icon to the left to connect another mobile phone. ● Press the function button Bluetooth set- Speed-dial buttons, connected tel- tings > Paired devices. Fig. 227 Phone main menu. 2 ephone contacts favourites. ● In the list of linked devices, press the function button  after the mobile phone to be Assign a user profile To change to another telephone connected to the hands-free profile. deleted, and then press Delete to confirm The phonebook, the call lists and the speed 3 the process. Only visible when there are two tele- dial buttons are assigned to a user profile and phones connected as hands-free. remain stored on the telephone management WARNING Open the numeric keypad system. This information will be available ev- DIAL NO. ››› page 238. Do not perform the pairing and connection ery time the mobile telephone is connected. process while driving. This may cause an To open the phonebook of the con- After the first connection, it will take a few mi- CONTACTS accident! nutes for the data from the linked mobile nected telephone. phone to be available in the system. The next Text mes- To open the SMS menu. time that the mobile telephone is connected sage the phonebook is updated automatically.

236 Operating modes

Function button: function Display: Meaning ››› Fig. 228 To open call lists of the connected CALLS The active call is put on hold. While on hold mobile telephone ››› page 241. the listener will not hear the conversation. To  reactivate it, press the call accept button . To open the Phone settings SETTINGS menu. To reject it, press the reject button .  Press to add a participant to the active call.

Instructions and symbols of the  Connected mobile telephone charge status. phone management system Strength of the signal received by the mo- Fig. 229 Conference call.  bile telephone.

Display: Meaning ››› Fig. 228 Multiple calls

Name of the mobile operator of the connec- The telephony management system allows A ted device. the user to interact with up to three calls on the screen. Stored telephone number or name. If the name stored in the phonebook has an as- Only one of the calls can be active. signed photo, it can be displayed: select B Telephone > Settings > User Conference call profile > Show pictures for contacts*. The user can merge several calls into a single Fig. 228 Active call. one by making a conference call by pressing  To accept a call. button . There must be a minimum of two To end a call. calls for this to work. Once the conference  call has started, the user can add up to 5 par- OR: To reject an incoming call. ticipants. To mute or to reactivate the ring tone during Once the conference call is established, the  an incoming call. user can consult the list of participants by  To mute the microphone during an active pressing on the conference call image call and to reactivate it. ››› Fig. 229 C . Depending on the mobile device, the call from a conference call participant can be »

237 Infotainment System

hung up or excluded from the conference call Enter telephone number ● The Roadside Assistance and Information but kept on a separate call. ● Enter a phone number with the keypad. services might not work properly, for exam- Press the  function button to make a call. ple, if the vehicle and the operator of the WARNING connected mobile telephone are in differ- Remember that the driver should not oper- Select a contact from the list ent countries. If you are not able to use ate the mobile phone while driving. these services contact an authorised SEAT ● Enter the first few letters of the contact. The workshop. available entries appear in the phonebook. Note ● Select the desired contact to make the call. Multi-call and conference call functionali- ties are subject to the services associated Enter the country code with the user's SIM card. ● Press the function button 0 for approx. 2 seconds to add the +.

Enter telephone number menu  Assistance call ● Press the function button to obtain help in the event of breakdown.

 Information call ● Press the function button to obtain information on the SEAT brand and the additional contracted services.

 Call mailbox ● Press the function button to make the call. Fig. 230 Enter telephone number menu. ● OR: Press the  function button for about 2 seconds to make a call. ● Press the DIAL NUMBER function button from the Telephone main menu. Note ● Breakdown service and information calls can incur an additional cost on your telephone bill. 238 Operating modes

Phonebook Menu (contacts) data that has to be transferred, the process ● Enter the name of the contact you are look- may take several minutes. It may be necessa- ing for in the window ››› Fig. 232. While the ry to confirm the data transmission on the characters are being entered, a contact is mobile phone. displayed in the input field. The phonebook can also be viewed during a ● The number of matching results is dis- telephone conversation. played to the right of the input field. Press the function button to go to the list. If the name saved in the phonebook has an ● assigned photo, it can be displayed on the list Search the list and press on the desired next to the name. To do this, the option contact to make the call. Show pictures for contacts in the Phone settings context must be enabled and your mo- Opening the detailed view of a contact bile phone must support this functionality ● Press the function button  Fig. 231 lo- Fig. 231 Contacts Menu. ››› (check the compatibility list) ››› page 242, cated next to the entry on the contacts list. Phone settings. All the telephone numbers are displayed in In the Telephone main menu, press the the detailed view, and where applicable, the Contacts function button to access the con- address recorded for the contact in question. tacts list. Read contact name Select a contact from the list ● Press the function button  on the detailed ● Search the list and press on the desired list if you want the voice control system to contact to make the call. read the name of the contact . ● OR: If the contact has several numbers, first press on the contact and then press on the Call a contact Fig. 232 Search window. desired number for making the call. ● Press the desired telephone number on the Once the first pairing is made, it may take detailed list to make the call. 1) Search for a contact in the search window some time until the phonebook data of the ● Press the  icon to edit the number before paired mobile are available in the infotain- ● Press the Search function button ››› Fig. 231 calling. » ment system. Depending on the volume of to open the search window.

1) Depending on the device, only contacts in the phone's memory are loaded. 239 Infotainment System

Send SMS to a contact Short messages (SMS) menu Function button: function ● Press the function button  on the detailed New text To write and send an SMS (includes list. message the possibility of accessing preset text templates). Start route guidance to a contact's ad- dress1) Inbox To open the received SMS folder. If the contact’s address data has been saved, Outbox To open the outbox folder. SMS route guidance can be started to the con- messages that have not been sent tact's address. are stored here. Sent To open the sent SMS folder. ● Press address data in the detailed view to start route guidance. Drafts To select a message that has been Fig. 233 Short messages (SMS) menu. stored but not sent. Note Send contact To send the details of a contact If the mobile phone connected to the HFP If you edit a number before calling, it will details from the contact list. profile also supports the SMS profile, a new not be saved in the phonebook but only function button will appear in the upper left used for the call. corner of your Telephone menu, which will al- Possible submenu function buttons low you to receive, view and send SMS mes- Function button: function sages through the infotainment system. For the voice control system to READ OUT Whether or not the aforementioned functions read the text of the SMS. work correctly will depend on the compatibility of the connected mobile phone. Options Open the Options menu.

Reply with To select a text template from a

SMS menu function buttons template list. ● Press the SMS function button from the Tel- Delete current The SMS is deleted from the

ephone main menu. text message Inbox folder.

Telephone The sender's telephone number number is displayed.

1) Valid for Navi System and Navi System Plus. 240 Operating modes

Function button: function ● Press the FILTER function button. Quick dial keys ● Select the desired call list: All calls , FORWARD To forward an SMS. Missed calls , Calls or Received calls . REPLY To reply to an incoming SMS. If a telephone number is stored in the phone To enter a telephone number or book, the saved name is displayed on the call to select a recipient from the list instead of the number. contact list. Enter number If a photo is assigned to the name stored in Press the Recipients function the phonebook, it can be displayed on the button to select multiple recipi- call list next to the name ››› page 242. ents.

To select multiple recipients Possible displays in the Calls menu Recipients from the contact list. Fig. 235 Quick access to the phone book. Display: Meaning Delete To delete an SMS. The speed dial keys ››› Fig. 235 1 can be Missed calls : Missed and unanswered calls.  assigned a telephone number from the  Calls : Dialled numbers. phone book. Calls Menu (call lists) If a photo is assigned to the name stored in  Received calls : Received calls. the phone book, it can be displayed on the speed dial key ››› page 242. Note All speed dial keys have to be manually edi- The availability of the call lists will depend ted and will be assigned to a user profile. Up on the mobile phone used. to 12 contacts can be added to the speed dial keys.

Assign the speed dial keys ● In the main Telephone menu, press a free speed dial key. Fig. 234 Call lists menu. ● Select the desired contact from the list. If the selected contact has several phone num- ● Press the Calls function button from the bers, select the number you want. » Telephone main menu.

241 Infotainment System

Edit assigned speed dial keys Phone settings Function button: function ● Press and hold an occupied speed dial key Bluetooth® : Press to deactivate Bluetooth®. All active in the Telephone main menu until the Con- In the Telephone main menu, press the connections are disconnected. tacts menu opens. SETTINGS function button. ® ● Select the desired contact from the list. If Visibility : Activating and deactivating Bluetooth visi- Function button: function bility. the selected contact has several phone num- ® bers, select the number you want. Private mode : Private mode can only be activated Visible : Bluetooth visibility is active. during an active call. When private mode is disabled ● To close the Contacts menu without apply- Hidden : Bluetooth® visibility is deactivated. (by default), the call’s audio is managed through the Bluetooth® visibility must be active for external ing the changes, press the BACK function vehicle. When private mode is activated, call audio is pairing of a Bluetooth® device with the infotain- button. managed through the mobile phone. ment system. When a Bluetooth® audio device Select mobile phone : From the list, select the mobile is active and playing, visibility is automatically Delete assigned speed dial keys phone to be connected to the hands-free profile with set to Hidden. ● The phone numbers stored in the speed di- the infotainment system. Forename : Display or change the Bluetooth® name of OR: Press Find telephone to connect a new mobile al buttons can be deleted in the menu User the infotainment system. This will be the name shown phone. profile settings > Manage favourites to other Bluetooth® devices. ››› page 242. Bluetooth® : Opens the menu Bluetooth® settings ››› page 242. Paired devices : Viewing paired devices. To disconnect and connect Bluetooth® devices and Bluetooth® pro- Make a call with a speed dial button User profile : Open the User profile settings files. ● Briefly press an assigned speed dial key in menu ››› page 242. Find devices : Search for visible Bluetooth® devices the Telephone main menu to call the tele- that are within range of the infotainment system. The phone number stored in it. Note maximum range is approx. 10 meters. Some telephones require a restart to down- Note Bluetooth® Audio (A2DP/AVRCP) : If an external audio load the last added contacts again. source is to be connected to the infotainment system The contacts stored in the speed dial keys via Bluetooth®, this function must be active are NOT updated automatically. If a con- ››› page 208. tact stored on a speed dial key is modified Bluetooth® settings on the mobile phone, the speed dial key must be assigned again. In the main Telephone menu, press the User profile settings SETTINGS function button and then press the Bluetooth® function button. In the main Telephone menu, press the SETTINGS function button and then press the User profile function button. 242 Operating modes

Function button: function

Manage favourites : Edit the speed dial keys.

Occupied speed dial key: Press to delete the stored number.

Free speed dial key: Press to save a phone book number on the speed dial key.

Mailbox number : To enter or change the voice mailbox number.

Sort by : To set the order of appearance of the phone book entries (Forname and Surname or vice versa).

Import contacts : Press to import the phone book of the connected telephone or to update the imported phone book.

Reminder: remember your mobile phone : If a Bluetooth® connection is active with a mobile phone, the message “Do not forget your mobile phone” appears when the ignition is switched off.

Show pictures for contacts a): If the contacts in the phone book have been saved with a photo, it can be displayed on the speed dial keys, call lists and phone book. a) Depending on the mobile phone.

Note Some telephones require a restart to download the last added contacts again.

243 Infotainment System

Multimedia Depending on the special characteristics and the country, the vehicle may have a USB/AUX-IN port. USB/AUX-IN input The USB/AUX-IN port can be found in the storage compartment area of the centre console ››› Fig. 236. Depending on the equipment and the country, the vehicle may also have USB connections exclusively for charging or as a power socket. Fig. 239 In the centre console: pad for the mo- These USB ports are located at the rear of bile phone connection. the console, between the front seats ››› Fig. 237. The Connectivity Box includes different functions that will help to use your mobile device. Fig. 236 Centre console: USB/AUX-IN input. They are the “Wireless Charger” and the Connectivity Box* / Wireless “Mobile Signal Amplifier”. Charger* The Wireless Charger only features the “Wireless Charger” function.

“Wireless Charger” The “Wireless Charger” allows mobile devices with Qi1) technology to be charged without a cable. Fig. 238 Related video To charge your mobile phone wirelessly: Fig. 237 Rear part of the centre console: USB ● connectors. Place your mobile device in the middle of the pad with the screen facing up ››› Fig. 239 ››› .

1) Qi technology allows you to charge your mobile phone wirelessly. 244 Operating modes

Make sure there are no objects between the you pick it up, and take care when removing pad and the mobile phone. it. The mobile phone will start charging auto- ● There must be no metallic or other ob- matically. For further information about jects between the mobile phone and the whether your mobile device uses Qi technol- housing, to prevent the functionality of the ogy, check your phone's user manual or visit Connectivity Box from being affected. the SEAT website. Note “Mobile Signal Amplifier” ● Your mobile device must support the Qi The “Mobile Signal Amplifier” allows you to inductive charging interface standard for reduce the radiation in your vehicle and enjoy proper operation. better reception. ● The charging time and the temperature For safety reasons, it is recommended that vary in accordance with the device used. you pair the system and the mobile using ● The maximum charging capacity is 5 W. ® Bluetooth and place it on the Connectivity ● Qi technology does not allow you to Box pad, for the best reception without hav- charge more than one mobile device simul- ing to handle the mobile phone. taneously. To establish a connection with the vehicle's ● No improvement in reception can be external aerial: guaranteed if there is more than one mobile phone on the pad. ● Place your mobile device in the middle of ● You are advised to keep the engine run- the pad with the screen facing up ››› Fig. 239 ning to guarantee proper wireless charg- ››› . ing.

Make sure there are no objects between the ● When a telephone with Qi technology is pad and the mobile phone. connected by USB, it will be charged by the means specified by the manufacturer. Your mobile phone will automatically be ready to make use of the external aerial.

WARNING ● The mobile phone may heat up due to the wireless charging. Think about this before

245 Driving

Opening the driver's door when exiting the After automatically turning off the ignition, if Driving vehicle activates the electronic lock on the the dipped beam  is on, the side light re- steering column if the ignition is disabled. mains on for approx. 30 minutes (if there is Start and driving enough charge in the battery). If the driver Switching the ignition on/off manually locks the vehicle or manually turns off the light, the side light goes out. Starting and stopping the If you only want to switch on the ignition (without starting the engine), briefly press the engine start button once without pressing the brake Engine restart feature pedal or the clutch pedal ››› . If no key is detected inside the vehicle after the engine stops, you will only have 5 sec- Ignition and start button The start button text START ENGINE STOP flash- onds to restart it. A warning will display on the es like a heartbeat when the system is ready dash panel screen. for the ignition to be turned on or off. After this interval, it will not be possible to Automatic ignition disconnection start the engine without a valid key inside the vehicle. If the driver leaves the vehicle, taking the key with them but leaving the ignition on, the igni- WARNING tion does not switch off automatically. The ignition is switched off by pressing the lock but- When switching on the ignition, do not ton on the remote control  or by pressing press the brake or clutch pedal, otherwise the sensor surface on the door lever the engine could start immediately. ››› Fig. 79. Fig. 240 In the lower part of the centre console: start button. WARNING Automatic deactivation of the ignition on If vehicle keys are used negligently or with- vehicles with the Start-Stop system The engine can be started with a start button out due care, this may cause accidents and (Press & Drive). To do so, there must be a valid The ignition is switched off automatically serious injury. key inside the vehicle in the area of the front when the vehicle is stopped and the auto- ● Never leave any key inside the vehicle or rear seats, or on the centre console. matic engine shutdown is active, if: when you leave it. Otherwise, a child or unauthorised person could lock the vehicle, In vehicles with the Keyless Access ● The driver's seat belt is not fastened, start the engine or connect the ignition and ››› page 89 system, the engine can also be ● the driver does not step on any pedal, operate any of the electrical equipment. started with the key in the luggage compartment. ● the driver door is opened.

246 Start and driving

Note Starting the engine Starting a diesel engine after having run out of fuel ● Before leaving the vehicle, always dis- ● Press and hold the brake pedal until the en- connect the ignition and, if appropriate, gine starts. If the fuel tank has been completely run dry, it take into account the instructions on the ● Press the starter button ››› Fig. 240; do not may take longer than normal (up to one mi- screen of the dash panel. press the accelerator. There needs to be a nute) to start a diesel engine after refuelling. ● If the vehicle is stationary for a long time valid key inside the vehicle for the engine to This is because the fuel system must elimi- with the engine off and the ignition on, the start. After starting the engine, the lighting of nate air first. vehicle battery might be discharged and it the START ENGINE STOP button changes to might not be possible to start the engine. steady lighting, indicating that the engine has WARNING ● In vehicles with diesel engines, wait until started. Do not keep the engine running in confined the warning light  ››› page 247 goes off ● Once the engine starts, release the start-up spaces, as there is a danger of poisoning. before starting the engine. button. ● The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an odourless and colourless poison- ● If during the STOP phase you press the ● If the engine does not start, stop and wait ous gas that can cause loss of conscious- START ENGINE STOP button, the ignition is for around 1 minute to try again. If necessary, switched off and the button flashes. ness and death. perform an emergency start ››› page 249. ● If the indication is displayed on the instrument panel display “Start-Stop system Diesel engines can take a few seconds longer WARNING deactivated: Start the engine manually”, than usual to start on cold days. During pre- Do not get out of the vehicle with the en- the START ENGINE STOP button will blink. heating, the warning lamp  remains lit. To gine running, especially if a gear is engag- avoid unnecessary discharging of the bat- ed. The vehicle could then suddenly move tery, do not use any other major electrical or something strange could happen that Starting the engine equipment while the glow plugs are pre- would cause damage, fire or serious injury. heating. Before starting the engine The preheating time depends on the coolant WARNING ● Vehicles with manual gearboxes: put the and exterior temperatures. With the engine at Never use cold start sprays, they could ex- operating temperature, or at outside temper- gear lever in neutral, press the clutch pedal plode or cause the engine to run at high atures above +8°C, the warning lamp  will and keep it it in this position until the engine revs. Doing this risks injury. starts. light up for about one second. This means that the engine starts immediately. ● Vehicles with automatic transmission: put CAUTION the lever in position P or N. ● The starter motor or the engine may be damaged if you try to start the engine while »

247 Driving

driving or if you restart it immediately after ● With manual transmission, press the clutch ● If the ignition is switched off, the steering switching it off. all the way down. If the vehicle is automatic, column could be locked, making it impossi- set the selector lever to the P position. ● When the engine is cold, you should ble to control the vehicle. avoid high engine speeds, driving at full ● Apply the electronic parking brake. ● Never remove the key from the ignition if throttle and over-loading the engine. Risk ● Briefly press the start-up button ››› Fig. 240. the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the of engine damage. steering could suddenly lock, making it impossible to steer the vehicle: risk of acci- Emergency disconnection dent! For the sake of the environment If the engine does not switch off after briefly Do not warm-up the engine by running the pressing the starter button, an emergency WARNING engine with the vehicle stationary. Start off disconnect will be required: immediately, driving gently. This helps the Always take the key with you when you engine reach operating temperature faster ● Press the starter button twice within 3 sec- leave the vehicle. This is particularly impor- and reduces emissions. onds or press it once for more than 1 sec- tant if there are children in the vehicle, as ond ››› in Ignition and start button on they might otherwise be able to start the page 246. engine or use power-operated equipment Note (e.g. the electric windows), which could ● Electrical components with a high power WARNING cause injuries. consumption are switched off temporarily when the engine starts. Never switch off the engine while the vehicle is moving. This could cause loss of con- CAUTION ● When starting with a cold engine, noise trol of the vehicle, accidents and serious in- ● If the vehicle is stopped and the Start- levels may briefly increase. This is quite jury. normal, and no cause for concern. Stop system* switches off the engine, the ● The airbags and belt tensioners do not ignition remains switched on. Make sure ● When the outside temperature is below work when the ignition is switched off. that the ignition is switched off before leav- +5 °C (+41 °F), if the engine is diesel, some ● The brake servo does not work with the ing the vehicle, otherwise the battery could smoke may appear under the vehicle when discharge. the fuel-operated auxiliary heater is on. engine off. Therefore, you need to press the break pedal harder to brake the vehicle. ● If the engine has been driven at high ● Power steering does not work when the speed for a prolonged period of time, it engine is not running. You need more may overheat when turned off. To avoid en- Turning off the engine strength to steer when the engine is switch- gine damage, allow the engine to run for ed off. approximately two minutes in neutral be- ● Bring the vehicle to a full stop ››› . fore switching it off.

248 Start and driving

Note Note Instructions for the driver on the in- After the engine is switched off the radiator A perfect operation of the vehicle is ensur- strument panel display fan may run on for up to 10 minutes, even if ed if genuine SEAT keys are used. the ignition is switched off. It is also possi- Press the clutch ble that the fan turns itself on once more if This message appears on vehicles with a the coolant temperature increases due to manual gearbox if the driver tries to start the the heat accumulated in the engine com- Emergency starting function engine without having the clutch pedal partment or due to its prolonged exposure pressed. The engine will only start if you press to solar radiation. the clutch pedal.

Press the brake Electronic immobilizer This message appears on vehicles with an automatic gearbox if the driver tries to start The electronic immobiliser prevents unau- the engine without having the brake pedal thorised persons from driving the vehicle. pressed.

Inside the key there is a chip that deactivates Select N or P the electronic immobiliser automatically This message appears if you try to start or when the key is inserted into the ignition. Fig. 241 On the right of the steering column: stop the engine when the selector lever of the emergency start. The electronic immobiliser will be activated automatic gearbox is not in position P or N. again automatically as soon as you pull the If no valid key is detected inside the vehicle, The engine can only be started and stopped key out of the ignition lock. For vehicles with an emergency start-up will be required. The in those positions. the “Keyless Access” system, the key has to relevant message will appear in the dash be outside the vehicle. Engage position P; the vehicle can panel display. This may happen when, for ex- move; doors can only close in po- If the following message is shown on the in- ample, the vehicle key battery is very low: sition P. strument panel display: SAFE, the vehicle For safety reasons, this driver message ap- cannot be started. ● Immediately after pushing the starter button, keep the key next to the right trim of the pears and an audible warning sounds if the The engine can only be started using a genu- steering column ››› Fig. 241, as close as pos- selector lever of the automatic gearbox is not ine SEAT key with its correct code. sible to the Kessy logo. in position P after you switch off the ignition. Move the selector lever to the P position, oth- ● The ignition connects and the engine starts erwise the vehicle could move. » automatically.

249 Driving

Gear change: selector lever in the off, the start button goes off after a few sec- Start-Stop system* drive position! onds. This driver message is displayed when the With the engine running, the start button light Control lamps selector lever is not in the position P when the stays on, indicating that the engine is running. driver door is opened. Additionally, a buzzing The time elapsed between the moment the  It lights up sound is emitted. Put the selector lever in po- user starts the engine with the start button sition P, otherwise the vehicle could roll away. button and the lighting changes from flashing The Start-Stop system is available, the automatic en- to fixed will depend on specific engine size gine shutdown is active. Ignition is switched on characteristics. When the start button is used This driver message is displayed and a buz- to stop the engine, the button starts flashing . It lights up zer is sounded when the driver door is again. opened with the ignition switched on. The Start-Stop system is not available or has been In vehicles with the Start-Stop system, the disconnected. “My Beat” function also offers additional information: “My Beat” function Instructions for the driver on the instrument panel display ● When the engine stops during the Stop phase, the light of the start button button Start-Stop system deactivated. stays on, as the Start-Stop system remains Start the engine manually active even though the engine is off. This indication for the driver shows that the ● When the engine cannot be started again Start-Stop system cannot start the engine with the Start-Stop system, ››› page 250, and again. needs to be started manually, the start but- Fig. 242 Related video Start-Stop system: Fault! Function ton flashes to indicate this situation. not available For vehicles with a convenience key there is the “My Beat” function. This feature provides There is a fault in the Start-Stop system. Take an additional indication of the vehicle ignition the vehicle to a workshop to have the fault re- system. paired. When entering the vehicle, the start button ››› Fig. 240 flashes to draw attention to it. Description and operation When the ignition is on/off, the engine start button flashes. With the ignition is switched The Start-Stop system helps you to save fuel

and reduce CO2 emissions. 250 Start and driving

In Start-Stop mode, the engine will automati- be stopped before stopping completely (ap- ● The temperature selected on the climate cally switch off when the vehicle stops or is proximately 7 or 2 km/h depending on the ve- control has not been reached. stopping. The ignition remains switched on. hicle's gearbox). ● The interior temperature is very high/low. The engine automatically switches back on ● When you take your foot off the brake ped- ● Defrost function button activated when required. al the engine will start up again. The warning ››› page 152. In this scenario, the light of the    lamp will switch off. In vehicles with the Auto ● The parking aid* is switched on. button stays lit. Hold* system, when the system is active, the engine will not start if you remove your foot ● The battery is very low. When the ignition is switched on, the Start- from the brake pedal. The car starts when ● The steering wheel is overly turned or is be- Stop function is automatically activated. you press the accelerator pedal. ing turned. In the Easy Connect system you can find ● If there is a danger of misting. more information about the Start-Stop sys- Basic requirements for the Start-Stop ● tem: press the button  > View > Vehicle mode After engaging reverse gear. ● status. ● The driver door must be closed. In case of a very steep gradient. ● The driver's seat belt must be fastened. . is shown on the instrument panel display, Vehicles with a manual gearbox ● The bonnet must be closed. as well as on the driver information system* ● When the vehicle or when it is stopped, put . it into neutral and release the clutch pedal. ● The engine has reached operating temperature. The engine will switch off. The warning lamp The engine starts by itself  will light up. The engine can be stopped ● The reverse gear must not be engaged. When stopped, the normal system mode may before stopping completely (approximately 7 ● The vehicle must not be on a very steep km/h). be interrupted in the following situations. The slope. engine restarts by itself without involvement ● When the clutch pedal is pressed the en- from the driver. gine will start up again. The warning lamp will The engine does not turn off for various switch off. reasons ● The interior temperature differs from the temperature selected on the climate control. Before stopping the vehicle, the system veri- Vehicles with an automatic gearbox fies whether certain conditions are met. The ● Defrost function button activated ● Brake until it is stopped, and keep your foot engine does not switch off, in the following ››› page 152. on the brake pedal or activate the Auto Hold* situations for example: ● The brake has been pressed several times system so that the vehicle remains braked. consecutively. The engine will switch off. The warning lamp ● The engine has not yet reached the re- ● The battery is too low.  will appear in the display. The engine can quired temperature for the Start-Stop mode. ● High power consumption. » 251 Driving

Additional information related to the auto- ● To avoid injury, make sure that the Start- Manually connecting and discon- matic gearbox Stop system is switched off when working necting the Start-Stop system The engine stops when the selector lever is in in the engine compartment ››› page 252. the positions P, D, N and S in addition to when in Tiptronic mode. With the selector lever in P, CAUTION the engine will also remain switched off when The Start-Stop system must always be you take your foot off the brake pedal. In or- switched off when driving through flooded der to start the engine up again the accelera- areas ››› page 268. tor must be pressed, or another gear engaged or the brake released. Note If the selector lever is placed in R while stopped, the engine will start up again. ● In vehicles with an automatic gearbox, you can control whether the engine should Change from D to P to prevent the engine switch off or not by reducing or increasing Fig. 243 Centre console: Start-stop system from accidentally starting when passing the brake force applied. While the vehicle button. through R. remains stopped, the engine will not stop if the brake pedal is slightly pressed, in traffic If you do not wish to use the system, you can Additional information about vehicles with jams with frequent stopping and starting switch it off manually. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) for example. As soon as strong pressure is applied to the brake pedal, the engine will ● To manually switch on/off the Start-Stop In vehicles with ACC function, the engine will stop. system, press the  button ››› Fig. 243. start up again in certain operating conditions ● When stopped, the brake pedal must be if the radar sensor detects that the vehicle  kept pressed to ensure that the vehicle The button symbol remains lit up yellow ahead drives off again. does not move. when the system is switched off. ● WARNING If the engine “stalls” with a manual gear- Note box, it can be directly started up again by ● Never switch the engine off until the vehi- immediately pressing the clutch pedal. The system switches on every time the en- cle is stationary. The operation of the brake gine is turned off voluntarily. ● With an automatic gearbox, if the lever is and steering will not be fully guaranteed. placed in position D, N or S after engaging More force will be needed to turn the steer- reverse gear, 10 km/h (6 mph) in a forwards ing wheel or to brake. You could suffer an direction must be reached for the system to accident and even serious injuries. be in a status to stop the engine.

252 Start and driving

Manual gearbox ● Press the clutch pedal and keep your foot CAUTION right down. When travelling at high speeds or at high Changing gears ● With the gearbox lever in neutral, push it engine speeds, selecting a gear that is too downwards, move it to the left as far as it will low can cause considerable damage to the go and then forwards to select reverse clutch and the gearbox. This can also oc- ››› Fig. 244 R . cur if the clutch pedal is pressed and held ● Release the clutch. and it does not engage.

Changing down gears CAUTION While driving, changing down a gear must al- To prevent damage and avoid premature ways be done gradually, i.e. to the gear di- wear, please observe the following: rectly below and when the engine speed is ● Do not rest your hand on the gear lever not too high ››› . Changing down while by- while driving. The pressure applied by your passing one or various gears at high speeds hand is transmitted to the gearbox selector or at high engine speeds can damage the forks. clutch and the gearbox, even if the clutch Fig. 244 Gear shift pattern of a 6-speed man- ● Do not leave your foot on the clutch ped- pedal remains depressed . ual gearbox ››› al; although the pressure may seem insig- nificant, it can cause the premature wear of The position of the gears is indicated on the WARNING the clutch plate. Use the foot rest when you gearbox lever ››› Fig. 244. When the engine is running, the vehicle will do not need to change gear. start to move as soon as a gear is engaged ● Always ensure that the vehicle is com- ● Press the clutch pedal and keep your foot and the clutch released. This also happens pletely stopped before engaging the re- right down. if the electronic parking brake is switched verse gear. ● Move the gearbox lever to the required po- on. ● Always press the clutch to the floor when sition. ● Never engage reverse gear when the ve- changing gears. ● Release the clutch. hicle is moving. ● Never hold the vehicle “on the clutch” on hills with the engine on. Selecting reverse gear WARNING Engage reverse gear only when the vehicle is If the gear is changed down inappropriate- stopped. ly by selecting a gear that is too low, you may lose control of the vehicle, causing an accident and serious injuries.

253 Driving

Automatic gearbox/DSG au- Selector lever positions To move the lever to position R, the lock button must be pressed and held while pressing tomatic gearbox* the brake pedal at the same time. The reverse lights come on when the lever is in the R posi- Introduction tion with the ignition on.

Your vehicle is equipped with an electronical-  – Neutral ly controlled manual gearbox. Torque be- With the lever in this position, the gear is in tween the engine and the gearbox is trans- neutral. mitted via two independent clutches. They replace the torque converter found on con- Press the brake pedal to move the lever from ventional automatic gearboxes and allow for N to D/S when the vehicle is stationary or at speeds below 3 km/h (2 mph) ››› . smooth, uninterrupted acceleration of the ve- Fig. 245 Selector lever lock. hicle.  – Permanent forward drive position The Tiptronic system allows the driver to The selector lever position is shown when the change gears manually ››› page 256, corresponding sign lights up. With the selec- The lever in the D/S position enables the Changing gear in Tiptronic mode*. tor lever in the manual gearbox positions M, D gears to be operated in normal mode (D) or and S, the engaged gear is also shown on the sport mode (S). To select Sport mode S, display. move the lever backwards. Pushing the lever again will select normal mode D. The selec- Control lamps  – Parking lock ted driving mode is shown on the instrument panel display.  It lights up green When the lever is put in this position, the drive wheels are locked. The lever must only be put In normal mode (D), the gearbox selects the The brake is not pressed. in P when the vehicle is stationary ››› . best gear ratio. This depends on the engine To select a gear range, press the brake pedal. load, the road speed and the dynamic gear To put the lever in P or take it out of P , the control programme (DCP). locking button must be pressed and held and  Flashes green the brake pedal pressed simultaneously. Sport mode (S) should be selected for a The selector lever locking button is not engaged. sporty driving style. This setting makes use of The vehicle is prevented from moving forwards. En-  – Reverse gear the engine's maximum power output. When gage the selector lever lock. Reverse gear must be engaged only when accelerating the gear shifts will be noticea- the vehicle is stationary and the engine is ble. idling ››› .

254 Start and driving

Under certain circumstances (e.g. on moun- position P. While the key is not in the ignition, ble to move the lever. If this should happen tain roads) it can be advantageous to switch the selector lever is locked in position P. the manual release can be used tiptronic mode ››› page 256, to adapt the ››› page 260. gears to suit the road conditions. WARNING ● Take care not to press the accelerator Note Selector lever lock pedal when the vehicle is stopped. The ve- ● If the lever lock does not engage, there is In P or N, the lever lock prevents a gear range hicle could start moving immediately (in a fault. The transmission is interrupted to from being engaged, and prevents the vehi- some cases even if the parking brake is engaged) resulting in the risk of an accident. prevent the vehicle from accidentally mov- cle from moving off accidentally. ing. Follow the procedure below in order for ● Never move the lever to R or P when driv- To release the gear lever lock, press and hold the lever lock to engage again: ing. Failure to follow this instruction could the brake pedal with the ignition on. At the result in an accident or failure. – With a 6-speed gearbox: press the same time, press the lever lock in the direc- brake pedal and release it again. ● tion of the arrow ››› Fig. 245. With lever in any position (except P), the foot brake must be pushed down whenever – With a 7-speed gearbox: press the As a reminder to the driver, when the lever is the engine is running. This is because an brake pedal. Move the lever to posi- in positions P or N the following indication will automatic gearbox still transmits power tion P or N and subsequently engage a gear. be shown on the screen: even at idling speed. ● Despite a gear being engaged, the vehi- When stationary, apply footbrake ● While you are selecting a gear and the vehicle is stopped with the engine running, cle does not move forwards or back. Pro- while selecting a gear. do not accelerate. Failure to follow this in- ceed to the next mode: The lever is not locked if it is moved quickly struction could result in an accident. – When the vehicle does not move in the through position N (e.g. when shifting from R ● As a driver you should never leave your required direction, the system may not to D). This makes it possible, for instance, to vehicle if the engine is running and a gear is have the gear range correctly engag- “rock the vehicle backwards and forwards” if engaged. Switch on the electronic parking ed. Press the brake pedal and engage it is stuck in snow or mud. The lever lock en- brake and select the parking lock (P). the gear range again. gages automatically if the brake pedal is not – If the vehicle still does not move in the pressed and the lever is in position N for more required direction, there is a system Note than about one second at a speed of less malfunction. Seek specialist assistance than 5 km/h (3 mph). ● If the lever is moved accidentally to N and have the system checked. when driving, release the accelerator and Safety interlock for ignition key let the engine speed drop to idling before selecting gear range D or S again. Once the ignition has been turned off, the key ● Should the power supply to the lever be may be removed only if the gear selector is in interrupted in position P, it will not be possi- 255 Driving

Changing gear in Tiptronic mode* system is not changing gear automatically If the paddles are not operated for some time due to a traffic situation. and the lever is not in the Tiptronic selection position, it will automatically exit from Tip- Using Tiptronic with the selector lever tronic mode. It is possible to change to Tiptronic mode, CAUTION both when the vehicle is stopped and while driving. ● When accelerating, if a higher gear is not selected, it will automatically change ● Starting from the D/S position, move the shortly before reaching the maximum per- lever to the right. The instrument panel will mitted RPM. show whether the lever is in manual or Tip- ● Also, if a lower gear is selected, the sys- tronic mode (e.g. M4). tem will not change until it detects that the Fig. 246 Lever in the Tiptronic position ● Push the lever forwards + or backwards – engine will not reach its maximum RPM. to move up or down a gear ››› Fig. 246. ● To exit Tiptronic mode, move the lever to the left. Driving with an automatic gearbox

Using Tiptronic with the steering wheel The gearbox changes gear ratios automati- paddles* cally as the vehicle moves. The gearshift paddles can be used when the The engine can only start with the selector selector lever is in the D/S or M (Tiptronic) lever in position P or N. At low temperatures, positions. below -10 °C (+14 °F), the engine can only start with the selector lever in position P. ● Press the gearshift paddle + to select a Fig. 247 Steering wheel: automatic transmis- higher gear ››› Fig. 247. sion levers Driving down hills ● Press the gearshift paddle – to select a Under certain circumstances it may be ad- lower gear. Tiptronic gives the driver the option to vantageous to use the Tiptronic mode to se- change gears manually. ● To exit the Tiptronic mode, pull the right- lect the gear manually according to driving hand lever towards the steering wheel for ap- When you change to the Tiptronic pro- conditions ››› . proximately 1 second or move the lever to the gramme, the vehicle remains in the currently left. selected gear. This is possible as long as the

256 Start and driving

Stop/Park ● Once you have engaged a gear, gently periods, as the brakes can overheat. This On level ground, just use the lever to engage press the accelerator and pull on the elec- reduces the braking power, increases the position P. On slopes you should first apply tronic parking brake button. braking distance or even causes a brake the parking brake and then set the lever to P. system fault. This makes it easier to remove the lever from Back-up programme ● If you have to stop on a hill, keep the vehi- position P when starting. If all the positions of the lever are shown over cle’s brakes applied with the brake pedal or a light background on the instrument panel parking brake. If the driver door is opened and the lever is display, there is a system fault and the auto- not in position P, the vehicle could move. The matic gearbox will operate in with the backup following warning is displayed on the instru- WARNING programme. It is still possible to drive the ve- ment panel:  Gear change: selector Please note that if the road surface is slip- hicle, however, at low speeds and within a se- lever in the drive position!. Addi- pery or wet, the kick-down feature could lected range of gears. Driving in reverse tionally, a buzzer will sound. cause the driving wheels to spin, which gear may not be possible. could result in skidding. Stopping on a downhill Kick-down Always apply the brake pedal firmly to pre- CAUTION The kick-down system provides maximum ac- vent the vehicle from moving; if necessary, celeration when the gear selector lever is in ● If you stop the vehicle on a gradient, do apply the electronic parking brake ››› . the positions D, S or in the Tiptronic position. not attempt to stop it from rolling by de- Do not accelerate while a range of gears is pressing the accelerator when a gear has When the accelerator pedal is pressed right engaged to prevent the car from rolling been selected. This could cause overheat- down, the automatic gearbox will shift down ing and damage the automatic gearbox. downhill ››› . to a lower gear, depending on road speed ● If you allow the vehicle to roll with the and engine speed. This takes advantage of Starting off uphill with the Auto Hold func- lever in position N and the engine off, the the maximum acceleration of the vehicle tion automatic gearbox will be damaged by ››› . lack of lubrication. ● Once you have engaged a gear, take your ● In certain driving situations or traffic con- foot off the brake pedal and gently press the The upshift to the next higher gear is delayed until the engine reaches maximum rpm. ditions, the gears could overheat and be accelerator. damaged! If the warning lamp  lights up, WARNING stop the vehicle as soon as you can and Starting off uphill without the Auto Hold wait for the gearbox to cool ››› page 259. » function Observe the safety warnings ››› in Selec- tor lever positions on page 255. ● Pull on the electronic parking brake button. ● Never allow the brake to rub and do not use the brake pedal too often or for long 257 Driving

● If the gearbox operates with the backup control deactivated (temporary) appears ● Make sure that the ESC remains switched programme, take the vehicle to a special- on the instrument panel to indicate the deac- on. Please note that when the ASR and ESC ised workshop and have the fault repaired tivation status. are deactivated, the wheels may start to without delay. spin, causing the vehicle to lose grip. Risk ● With the engine running, switch off traction of accident! control (ASR) ››› page 3041). ● After moving off, the ESC “sport” mode ● Press the brake pedal with your left foot Launch-control program should be deactivated by briefly pressing and hold it down for at least one second. the   button. 3 Value for vehicles: diesel with power of more ● Turn the selector lever to position S or Tip- than 125 kW, and petrol of more than 140 kW. tronic, or else select the sport driving mode Note The Launch-control programme enables from the SEAT Drive Profile* ››› page 263. ● After using the Launch control pro- maximum acceleration from a standstill. ● With your right foot, press the accelerator gramme, the temperature in the gearbox down to the full throttle or kick-down position. Condition: the engine must have reached op- may have increased considerably. In this The engine speed will stabilise at about erating temperature and the steering wheel case, the programme could be disabled for 3,200 rpm (petrol engine) or about must not be turned. several minutes. The programme can be 2,000 rpm (diesel engine). used again after the cooling phase. The engine speed for Launch-control is differ- ● Take your left foot off the brake pedal. The ● Accelerating with the launch control pro- ent on petrol and diesel engines. vehicle starts with maximum acceleration. gramme places a heavy load on all parts of To use the Launch-control you must discon- the vehicle. This can result in increased nect the anti-slip regulation (ASR) through the WARNING wear and tear. Easy Connect system menu ››› page 82. The ● Always adapt your driving style to the warning lamp  will stay switched on or will traffic conditions. flash slowly depending on whether or not the ● Only use the Launch control programme Downhill assistant* vehicle has a driver information system*. when road and traffic conditions permit, Downhill speed control is activated when the On vehicles with the driver information sys- and make sure your manner of driving and lever is in the D/S position and the brake is tem, the ESC lamp lights up permanently and accelerating the vehicle does not incon- applied. An appropriate lower gear is engag- the corresponding text message Stability venience or endanger other road users. ed.

1) Vehicles without a driver information system: the warning lamp flashes slowly. Vehicles with a driver information system: the warning lamp remains on. 258 Start and driving

The assistant attempts to maintain the speed Activation of the inertia mode smoothness with which the foot is removed at which the vehicle was travelling when the Condition: lever in position D, slopes of less from the accelerator. brake was applied, within logical limits. It may than 12% and speeds between 20 and 130 be necessary to correct the speed by press- km / h (12 and 80 mph). WARNING ing the brake. ● If the inertia mode has been switched on, ● Gently take your foot off the accelerator. The assistant can only change down as far take into account, when approaching an obstacle, that the vehicle will not deceler- as 3rd gear. It is possible that on very steep The indication will be shown on the instru- ate in the usual manner: risk of accident! slopes you have to switch to tiptronic mode ment cluster , the engaged gear and cur- and change down to 2nd or 1st gear to take rent consumption will disappear and the ● When using inertia mode while travelling down hills, the vehicle can increase speed: advantage of engine braking and take the word Inertia will appear. load off the brake system. risk of accident! The gears will automatically disengage and ● Downhill speed control is deactivated as If other users drive your vehicle, warn the vehicle will roll freely, without the effect of them about inertia mode. soon as the road levels out again or you press the engine brake. While the vehicle rolls, the the accelerator pedal. engine runs at idling speed. Note On vehicles with cruise control system* ››› page 268, downhill speed control is acti- Stopping inertia mode ● The driver message Inertia is only displayed with the current consumption. In in- vated when you set a cruising speed. ● Press the brake or the accelerator pedal. ertia mode the gear will no longer be dis- WARNING To take advantage of the engine's inertia played (for example “D” or “E” will appear mode, simply remove your foot from the ac- instead of “D7” or “E7”). The downhill speed control cannot defy the ● The inertia mode will be automatically laws of physics. Therefore, speed cannot celerator. disconnected on gradients steeper than be maintained constant in all situations. Al- Applying both the inertia mode (= prolonged 15%. ways be prepared to use the brakes! section with less energy) and inertia disconnection (= shorter section without the need for fuel) facilitates improved fuel consumption Indications on the instrument panel Inertia mode and emission balance. display If the vehicle has SEAT Drive Profile The inertia mode allows you to travel certain ››› page 263, the inertia mode can be activa- distances without using the accelerator, Clutch ted in Normal, Eco and Individual modes. In which saves fuel. Plan ahead and use the in- Eco mode, it is activated whenever the oper-  Clutch overheating! Please stop! ertia mode to “let” the vehicle “roll”. ating conditions are met, regardless of the The clutch has overheated and could be damaged. Stop and wait for the gearbox to » 259 Driving

cool with the engine at idling speed and the  Gearbox: too hot. Adapt your move the vehicle, there is an emergency re- selector lever in position P. When the warning driving accordingly lease device under the centre console, on the lamp and the driver message switch off, have right side. Releasing the selector lever re- Continue driving at moderate speeds. When the fault corrected by a specialised work- quires a certain degree of practical skill. the warning lamp switches off, you can con- shop without delay. If they do not turn off, do tinue driving in a normal manner. not continue driving. Seek specialist assis- Removing the cover from the selector lev- tance.  Gearbox: press the brake and ener gage a gear again. ● Apply the electronic parking brake  ››› . Faults in the gearbox If the warning was caused by the tempera- ● Carefully pull the corners of the selector  Gearbox: Fault! Stop the vehicle ture of the gearbox, this driver message will lever boot and twist it upwards over the lever and place the lever in the posi- be displayed when the gearbox has cooled handle. tion P. again. There is a fault in the gearbox. Stop the vehi- Releasing the selector lever cle in a safe place and do not continue driv- ● Using the flat part of a screwdriver, press ing. Seek specialist assistance. Manual release of the selector lev- the yellow tab sideways and keep it pressed er  Gearbox: System fault! You may down ››› Fig. 248. continue driving. ● Press the lock button on the selector lever and move it to position N. Have the fault corrected by a specialised workshop without delay. ● After completing the emergency release, reattach the selector lever boot to the gear-  Gearbox: System fault! You can box console. continue driving with restrictions. Reverse gear disabled WARNING Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop Do not move the lever from position P if the and have the fault repaired. parking brake is not firmly engaged. If you  Gearbox: System fault! You can still think the car could move, press the continue driving in D until Fig. 248 Gear selector lever: manual release brake pedal. Danger! The vehicle could move in an unforeseen way and cause an switching off the engine from the parking position. accident or serious injury. Park the vehicle in a safe place. Seek special- In the event of a power failure when starting ist assistance. (e.g. discharged battery), the lever will remain locked in position P. To move it to position N to

260 Start and driving

Gear-change recommenda- WARNING  It lights up grey tion The gear change recommendation is an Hill Descent Control is not active. The system is auxiliary function and in no case should be switched on, but is not adjusting. a substitute for careful driving. Selecting the optimal gear ● Responsibility for selecting the correct Some control and warning lamps will light up briefly when the ignition is switched on to Depending on the equipment on the instru- gear, depending on the circumstances, rests solely with the driver. check certain functions. They will switch off ment panel screen, a recommendation is after a few seconds. shown with the gear that should be engaged to optimise consumption. For the sake of the environment WARNING On vehicles with automatic transmission, the Selecting the correct gear can help to save Observe the safety warnings ››› in Con- lever must be in Tiptronic mode page 256. fuel. ››› trol and warning lamps on page 81. No recommendation will appear if the optimal gear is engaged. The current gear will be Note displayed. The recommended gear indication turns off Description and operation when the clutch pedal is pressed or when Display Meaning the lever is removed from the tiptronic posi- Hill Descent Control limits the speed on steep tion. descents by automatically braking all four  Optimum gear. wheels, both when moving forward and in re-    Changing to a higher gear is rec- verse. As the anti-lock brake system remains ommended. Hill Descent Control (HDC) active, it prevents the wheels from locking. In vehicles with manual transmission, the Hill    Changing to a lower gear is recommended. Descent Control adapts the theoretical Control lamps speed without slowing the engine below its 3 Valid for vehicles: 4Drive all-wheel drive idling speed. Information regarding the “cleanliness” of the particulate filter After starting the descent of a slope below  It lights up white 30 km/h (18 mph), speed is limited to a mini- When the exhaust system detects that the mum of 2 km/h (1 mph) and a maximum of particulate filter is close to saturation, this Hill Descent Control is active. 30 km/h (18 mph). When appropriate, the system’s self-cleaning function recommends driver may increase or decrease the speed the optimal gear for that function within the limit by pressing the accelerator or ››› page 348. the brake. At this point the function is »

261 Driving

interrupted and, if necessary, it is then reacti- ● Hill Descent Control is only an auxiliary sportier, more direct and noticeably more dy- vated. system that in some situations may not suf- namic driving sensation. Even so, it is imperative that the surface guar- ficiently brake the vehicle when going Steering assist antees sufficient adhesion. For this reason, down a slope. the Hill Descent Control will not fulfil its func- ● The speed of the vehicle may increase This help assists the driver in critical situation when, for example, descending a slope despite the intervention of Hill Descent tions. It recommends turning the steering with a frozen or slippery surface. Control. wheel to perform a corrective manoeuvre (counter-steering), turning slightly to avoid Hill Descent Control is available when the skidding ››› . dash panel display shows the message . Hill Descent Control automatically intervenes Steering WARNING if the following conditions are met: Steering assist helps the driver in critical Information relating to different ve- situations. The driver is the person who has ● The vehicle engine is running. hicle processes. to control the vehicle's steering at all times. ● The Offroad driving profile has been selected ››› page 263. Driving at a speed below Electro-mechanical power steering adapts 30 km/h (18 mph) (the message  is shown electronically to the speed of the car, torque Control lamp on the instrument panel). and steering angle. ● The slope of the descent is at least 10% If the power steering should fail at any time or  It lights up red when driving forward and 9% when driving in the engine is switched off (for instance when reverse. being towed), the car can still be steered. Faulty steering. ● The brake and the accelerator are not However, much more effort than normal will Do not continue driving, stop the vehicle as soon as pressed. be required to turn the steering wheel. possible and in a safe manner. Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop and have the fault repaired as soon as possible. Hill Descent Control is deactivated on press- Progressive steering ing the brake and the accelerator or if the slope is below 5%. The function may be dis- Depending on the vehicle’s features, it may or connected manually in the Easy Connect may not incorporate a progressive steering system by pressing the  > HDC button. system. In city traffic you do not need to turn so much WARNING on parking, manoeuvring or in very tight turns. Always be ready to brake. Otherwise, an On the road or on the motorway, progressive accident could occur and cause injury. steering transmits, for example, in bends, a 262 Start and driving

 It lights up yellow stall in traffic, causing serious damage or Engine accidents and injuries. Depending on the profile selected, the engine Limited steering operation. responds more quickly or smoothly to the ac- Drive carefully to a specialised workshop to have the ● Stop the vehicle at the next opportunity steering checked. and in a safe place. celerator being pressed. When Eco mode is If the warning light does not come on again after re- selected, the Start-stop function is activated. starting the engine and driving a short distance, it is not necessary to check the steering. In vehicles with automatic transmission, the SEAT Driving modes (SEAT gear change timing is changed to put the OR: The 12-volt battery was disconnected and re- changes at higher or lower revolutions. Eco connected. Drive Profile)* mode activates the Inertia function, thereby Drive a short distance at 15-20 km / h (9-12 mph). reducing consumption. The rest of the driving Introduction modes will activate the inertia use function  It flashes yellow when the selector lever is not in the S position, depending on how the accelerator ped- The steering column is jammed. The SEAT Drive Profile enables the driver to When stopped, turn the steering wheel in both direc- choose between the Eco, Normal, Sport and al is released ››› page 259. When the vehicle tions. Individual profiles and modes, which modi- is turned on again, the function is activated fy the behaviour of various vehicle functions, by default to reduce consumption. OR: The steering column does not unlock or lock. Remove the key from the ignition switch and recon- providing different driving experiences. With a manual gearbox, the Eco mode nect it. Consider the messages shown on the instru- In addition, the 4Drive version features the changes the gear changes recommenda- ment panel display. Offroad and Snow profiles. tions to facilitate more efficient driving. Do not continue driving if the steering column remains locked after switching on the ignition. Seek The Individual profile can be configured Dynamic chassis control (DCC) specialist assistance. according to personal preferences. The other profiles have a fixed configuration. DCC continuously adapts the shock absorb- The control lamp should light up for a few ers to the condition of the road and current seconds when the ignition is switched on. It driving conditions, according to the pre-set should go out once the engine is started. programme. Description WARNING In the event of a fault in the DCC, the follow- Depending on the equipment fitted in the ve- ing message is displayed on the instrument Never ignore the warning lamps or messag- hicle, SEAT Drive Profile can operate on the screen Fault: shock absorber regula- es. following functions: tion » ● If the warning lamps and the corresponding messages are ignored, the vehicle may

263 Driving

Steering Setting the driving profile In the Individual profile it is possible to con- The power steering varies its driving modes figure the characteristics of the vehicle using and adapts to the profile selected, thus offer- the Profile setup function button. ing the best behaviour for each situation. An icon on the touchscreen provides information about the active profile if it is different Air conditioning than Normal. The selector identifies the pro- In vehicles with Climatronic, this can operate file chosen by means of a yellow LED light. in eco mode, especially restricting fuel con- Driving pro- sumption. Characteristics file

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Places the vehicle in a low state of consumption, facilitating a The ACC’s acceleration and braking mode Fig. 249 Centre console: Driving Experience  varies according to the driving profile fuel-saving driving style that is button. respectful to the environment. ››› page 277. You can select the Eco, Normal, Sport, Indi- Offers a balanced driving experi- 1) 1)  Electronic Stability Control (ESC) vidual, Offroad and Snow . Normal ence, suitable for everyday use. In the Offroad and Snow driving profiles, the The desired mode can be selected as follows: Provides a complete dynamic electronic stability Control (ESC)  performance in the vehicle, ena- page 302 adjusts to adapt to the terrain. ● Turn the Driving Experience button until the ››› Sport bling the user a more sporty driv- required profile lights up on the Easy Connect ing style. In addition, hill descent control (HDC) is acti- system display as well as on the Driving Ex- vated in the Offroad profile ››› page 261. perience button ››› Fig. 249. It allows you to personalise the  configuration. The functions that ● OR: select the required profile on the touch- PreCrash system Individual can be adjusted depend on the screen of the Easy Connect system, in the equipment fitted in the vehicle. The PreCrash system adapts according to menu that opens up on turning the Driving the selected configuration. The Sport and Experience button. It adjusts the vehicle's parame-  ters in order to maintain optimal Offroad driving profiles have specific set- Offroada) off-road driving. tings to adapt them to driving and terrain The features of each profile can be seen by characteristics ››› page 22. pressing the Profile information function button.

1) Only for 4Drive models. 264 Start and driving

Driving pro- until reaching the maximum speed and high Characteristics Driving tips file engine speeds.

It adjusts the vehicle's behaviour Running in Running in new tyres and brake pads  for driving on slippery road sur- ● Replacement of wheel rims and new tyres Snowa) faces, optimising grip and ma- Please observe the instructions for running-in noeuvrability. new components. ››› page 364. ● Information about brakes page 298. a) Only for 4Drive models. ››› Running-in the engine WARNING A new engine must be driven through a run-in For the sake of the environment period during its first 1500 kilometres (1000 When operating SEAT Drive Profile, pay at- If the engine is run in gently, the life of the tention to all traffic: doing otherwise could miles). During its first few hours of running, the engine will be increased and the engine oil cause an accident. internal friction in the engine is greater than consumption reduced. later on when all the moving parts have bedded down. Note How the vehicle is driven for the first 1500 km Four-wheel drive (4Drive) ● When the engine is switched off it will (1000 miles) influences the future engine per- store the driving profile that was selected 3 Valid for vehicles: 4Drive all-wheel drive formance. Throughout the life of the vehicle, it when the ignition was turned off. When re- should be driven at a moderate speed (espe- On four-wheel drive models, the engine pow- starting, the engine and gearbox start up in their normal mode. For engine and gear to cially when the engine is cold) this will reduce er is distributed to all four wheels revert to the desired mode, select the cor- engine wear and increase its useful life. Never responding drive profile again rotating the drive at extremely low engine speeds. Always General notes engage a lower gear when the engine works thumbwheel (Driving Experience Button) or On four-wheel drive vehicles, the engine “irregularly”. For the first 1000 km or on the Easy Connect display. power is distributed to all four wheels. The 600 miles, please note: ● When the vehicle is restarted after using distribution of power is controlled automati- the Offroad or Snow settings, the system is ● Do not use full throttle. cally according to your driving style and the always activated in the Normal profile. road conditions. Also see ››› page 302. ● Do not force the engine above two thirds of ● Your speed and driving style must always its maximum speed. The four-wheel drive is specially designed to be adjusted to visibility, weather, and traf- complement the superior engine power. This fic conditions. ● Do not tow a trailer. combination gives the vehicle exceptional ● The Eco profile is not recommended when Between 1000 and 1500 kilometres (600 handling and performance capabilities, both towing a vehicle. to 1000 miles), gradually increase power on normal roads and in more difficult conditions, such as snow and ice. Even so (or » 265 Driving

® perhaps especially for this reason), it is im- tions. Do not let the extra safety features Active cylinder management (ACT )* portant to observe certain safety points ››› . tempt you into taking any risks when driv- Depending on vehicle equipment, the active ing. Risk of accident! cylinder management (ACT®) may deacti- Winter tyres ● The braking capability of your vehicle is vate some of the engine cylinders if the driv- Thanks to four-wheel drive, your vehicle will limited by the tyres' grip. It is therefore no ing situation does not require too much pow- have plenty of traction in winter conditions, different from a car without four-wheel er. The number of active cylinders can be even with the standard tyres. Nevertheless, drive. So do not be tempted to drive too fast seen on the instrument panel display. we still recommend that winter tyres or all- on firm or slippery roads just because the ››› page 67. season tyres be fitted on all four wheels to vehicle still has good acceleration in these give even better braking response. conditions. Risk of accident! Foresight when driving ● On wet roads bear in mind that the front If you think ahead when driving, you will need wheels may start to “aquaplane” and lose Snow chains to brake less and thus accelerate less. Take contact with the road if the car is driven too advantage of the inertia of the vehicle when- On roads where snow chains are mandatory, fast. If this should happen, there will be no this also applies to cars with four-wheel drive sudden increase in engine speed to warn ever possible, with a gear engaged. This ››› page 368. the driver, as occurs with a front-wheel takes advantage of the engine braking effect, drive car. For this reason you should always reducing wear on the brakes and tyres. Emis- Changing tyres choose a driving speed suitable for the sions and fuel consumption will drop to zero. On vehicles with four-wheel drive, all four road conditions. Risk of accident! Changing gear to save energy tyres must have the same rolling circumference. Also avoid using tyres with varying An effective way of saving is to change in ad- tread depths ››› page 364. Economical and environmentally vance to a higher gear. friendly driving Manual transmission: shift up from first to Off-roader? second gear as soon as possible. Choosing If your SEAT vehicle is not an off-roader: it Fuel consumption, environmental pollution the right gear enables fuel savings. Select the does not have enough ground clearance to and wear to the engine, brakes and tyres all highest possible gear appropriate for the be used as such. It is therefore best to avoid depend largely on driving style. Consumption driving situation (the engine should continue rough tracks and uneven terrain as much as can be reduced between 10-15% with an effi- functioning with cyclical regularity). possible. cient driving type. The following section gives you some tips on lessening the impact on the Automatic transmission: accelerate gradually and without reaching the “kick-down” WARNING environment and reducing your operating costs at the same time. position. ● Even with four-wheel drive, you should always adjust your speed to suit the condi-

266 Start and driving

Avoid driving at high speed engine can consume up to 10% more fuel move it when not needed. At speeds of Avoid travelling at your vehicle’s top speed, than necessary. 100-120 km/h (62-75 mph), this will save 12% whenever possible. Fuel consumption, emis- of fuel. sion of harmful gases and noise pollution Avoid short journeys multiply as speed is increased. Driving at The engine and catalytic converter need to Save electrical energy moderate speeds will help to save fuel. reach their optimal operating temperature The engine drives the alternator, thereby in order to minimise fuel consumption and generating electricity. This implies that any Reduce idling time emissions. increase in power consumption also increases fuel consumption! For this reason, switch In vehicles with the Start-Stop system idling is A cold engine consumes a disproportionate off any unneeded electrical devices. Devices automatically reduced. In vehicles without amount of fuel. The engine reaches its work- that use a lot of electricity includes the blow- the Start-Stop system it is worth switching off ing temperature after about four kilometres er at a high setting, the rear window heating the engine, for example, at level crossings (2.5 miles), when fuel consumption will return or the seat heating* ››› page 229. and at traffic lights that remain red for long to a normal level. periods of time. When an engine has reached Note operating temperature, and depending on Check tyre pressure the cylinder capacity, keeping it switched off ● If you have the Start-Stop system, it is Always make sure the tyres are inflated to the for a minimum of about 5 seconds already recommended that it should not be discon- correct pressures page 365 to save fuel. If saves more than the amount of fuel necessa- ››› nected. the pressure is below half bar, fuel consump- ry for restarting. ● It is recommended that you close the tion may increase by 5%. Due to the greater windows when driving at more than The engine takes a long time to warm up rolling resistance, under-inflation also increa- 60 km/h (37 mph). when it is idling. Mechanical wear and pollu- ses tyre wear and impairs handling. tant emissions are also especially high during ● Do not drive with your foot resting on the Do not use winter tyres all year round as this initial warm-up phase. It is therefore best clutch pedal, as the pressure can make the they increase fuel consumption by up to 10%. to drive off immediately after starting the en- plate slip. This causes wear and can dam- gine. Avoid running the engine at high speed. age the clutch plate. Avoid carrying unnecessary loads ● Do not ride the clutch on a hill, use the Regular maintenance Given that every kilo of extra weight will in- brake. The fuel consumption will be lower crease the fuel consumption, it is advisable and you will prevent the clutch plate from Regular servicing helps in saving fuel even make sure that no unnecessary loads are be- being damaged. before the engine is started. A well-serviced ing transported. ● Use the engine brake on downhills by engine gives you the benefit of improved fuel changing to the gear that is best suited for efficiency as well as maximum reliability and Since the luggage rack increases the aero- the gradient. Fuel consumption will be an enhanced resale value. A badly serviced dynamic drag of the vehicle, you should re- “zero” and the brakes will not suffer.

267 Driving

Driving on flooded roads ● Avoid driving through salt water (corro- Driver assistance systems sion) ››› page 376. To prevent damage to the vehicle driving on flooded roads, take the following into ac- Cruise control system count: Trips abroad (CCS)* ● The water should never come above the lower edge of the bodywork. ● With petrol vehicles, it should be ensured Related video that lead-free petrol is available throughout ● Drive at pedestrian speed. the journey ››› page 343, Fuel types. Seek information about service station networks WARNING selling unleaded fuel. After driving through flooded zones, brak- ● In some countries, it is possible that your ing effectiveness can decrease if the brake vehicle is not sold and some spare parts may discs or pads are damp ››› page 298. not be available or the technical services Fig. 250 Dash panel may only be able to make limited repairs. CAUTION SEAT importers and distributors will provide ● Driving through flooded areas may dam- information about the technical preparation age vehicle components such as the en- Control lamp gine, transmission or electrical system. that your vehicle requires and also about necessary maintenance and repair possibili- ● Whenever driving through water, the  It lights up green ties. Start-Stop system* must be switched off The Cruise Control System (GRA) is switched on and ››› page 250. CAUTION active. SEAT does not accept liability for any dam- Note OR: The Adaptive Cruise Control system (CCS) is age to the vehicle due to the use of a lower switched on and active. ● Check the depth of the water before en- quality fuel, an inadequate service or the tering the flooded zone. non-availability of genuine spare parts. OR: the speed limiter is switched on and active.

● Do not stop in the water, drive in reverse, The control lamps light up when the ignition is or stop the engine. switched on and should turn off after approxi- ● Vehicles travelling in the opposite direc- mately 2 seconds. This is the time taken for tion cause waves that could exceed your the function check. vehicle's critical height.

268 Driver assistance systems

WARNING A CCS temporarily switched off. The set ● If the brake pedal is pressed. speed is displayed in small or darkened ● If the airbag is triggered. Observe the safety warnings ››› in Con- figures. trol and warning lamps on page 81. ● If the lever is taken out of the D/S position. B System error. Contact a specialised workshop. WARNING C CCS switched on. The speed memory is Introduction Use of GRA could cause accidents and se- empty. vere injuries if it is not possible to drive at a D The CCS is switched on. The set speed is constant speed maintaining the safety dis- displayed in large figures. tance. ● Do not use GRA in heavy traffic, if the dis- Changing gear in CCS mode tance from the vehicle in front is insufficient, on steep roads, with several bends or The CCS decelerates as soon as the clutch in slippery circumstances or on flooded pedal is pressed, intervening again automati- roads. cally after a gear is engaged. ● Never use the CCS when driving off-road Travelling down hills with the CCS or on unpaved roads. ● Adapt your speed and the distance to the If the CCS cannot maintain a constant vehi- vehicles ahead in line with visibility, weath- cle speed downhill, brake and change down er, the condition of the road and the traffic a gear if necessary. The GRA is temporarily situation. disabled by pressing the brake. ● Fig. 251 Instrument panel display: GRA status To avoid unexpected operation of the cruise control system, turn it off every time indications. Automatic off you finish using it. The cruise control system (CCS) is able to The GRA disconnects automatically or is ● It is dangerous to use a set speed which is maintain the set speed from 20 km/h (15 temporarily interrupted: too high for other conditions. mph). ● If the system detects a fault that could af- ● If driving down a steep gradient, the GRA The CSS only reduces vehicle speed by fect the working order of the CCS. cannot maintain a constant speed. The ceasing to accelerate, not by actively braking speed can increase. In this case, brake and ● If you press and maintain the accelerator change down a gear. the vehicle ››› . pedal for a certain time, driving faster than the stored speed. Status display ● If the dynamic driving control systems inter- GRA status ››› Fig. 251 vene, ASR, ESC, etc. 269 Driving

Operating the cruise control Reinstating the cruise control Speed limiter ● Press button ››› Fig. 252 2 in area .

Cruise control is activated at the stored Control lamp speed.  It lights up grey

Adjusting the speed The speed limiter is switched on without program- While the GRA is set, the stored speed can be ming the speed adjusted with button ››› Fig. 252 2 :  It lights up green ● To increase in increments of 1 km/h (1 mph) briefly press button ››› Fig. 252 2 in the area The speed limiter is switched on and active. Fig. 252 On the turn signal lever: controls for . operating the GRA. ● To increase the speed without interruption,  Flashes green keep button ››› Fig. 252 2 pressed down in Connecting  The speed set by the speed limiter has been excee- the area . ded. ● Move the control ››› Fig. 252 1 to . ● To reduce in increments of 1 km/h (1 mph) briefly press button ››› Fig. 252 2 in the area If no speed has been programmed, the sys-  It lights up . tem will not control it. The adaptive cruise control (ACC) or the speed limit- ● To reduce the speed without interruption, er is active. Activating the cruise control keep button ››› Fig. 252 2 pressed down in the area . The control lamps light up when the ignition is ● Press button ››› Fig. 252 2 in area . switched on and should turn off after approxi- The vehicle adapts the current speed by ac- The current speed is stored and the cruise mately 2 seconds. This is the time taken for celerating or stopping accelerating. The vehi- control is activated. the function check. cle does not brake actively.

Temporarily interrupting WARNING Switching off ● Move the control ››› Fig. 252 1 to  or Observe the safety warnings ››› in Con- ● Move control ››› Fig. 252 1 to . step on the brake. trol and warning lamps on page 81. The system is disconnected and the memo- The cruise control system is switched off tem- rised speed is deleted. porarily. The speed is stored.

270 Driver assistance systems

Introduction Switching between the speed limiter and value, the limiter switches on again. The con- GRA or ACC (while the speed limiter is trol lamp  lights up and remains lit. connected) To change between the driving assistance Automatic off systems, press button  ››› Fig. 254 2 , then The speed limiter is automatically switched select with the right thumbwheel on the multi- off: function steering wheel in the instrument panel menu and press the thumbwheel to ● If the system detects a fault that could neg- confirm your selection. atively affect the working order of the limiter. ● If the airbag is triggered. It switches between the speed limiter and cruise control (GRA) or the adaptive cruise WARNING control (ACC). Fig. 253 On the instrument panel display: indi- After use, switch off the speed limiter to cations of the speed limited status. Going down slopes with the speed limiter prevent the speed being regulated without it being required. The speed limiter helps avoid exceeding a If the programmed speed is exceeded while programmed speed, from 30 km/h (19 mph) driving downhill, after a short time the control ● The speed limiter does not relieve the approx. and faster. ››› warning lamp  ››› page 270 flashes and driver of their responsibility to drive at the appropriate speed. Do not drive at high an audible warning may sound. Brake and Depending on the equipment, the speed limi- speed if not necessary. change down a gear. ted can be operated using the lever of the ● Using the speed limiter in adverse weath- turn signals ››› page 272 or by the third lever Temporarily deactivate by pressing the er conditions is dangerous and can cause ››› page 273. serious accidents. Use the speed limiter accelerator down only when the condition of the road surface Display messages on the speed limiter If the accelerator is pressed right down (kick- and the weather and traffic conditions al- down) and the set speed is exceeded be- Status ››› Fig. 253: low it. cause driver wishes to do so, the limiter is ● When driving on a steep gradient, the A The speed limiter is active. The last speed temporarily disabled. speed limiter cannot limit the vehicle’s set is displayed in large figures. To confirm it being switched off an acoustic speed. This can increase. In this case, brake B The speed limiter is not active. The last signal sound once. While cruise control is off, and change down a gear. » speed set is displayed in small or dark- the control lamp flashes . ened figures. When the accelerator is no longer pressed C The speed limiter is switched off. The total mileage is displayed. down and the speed is reduced below the set

271 Driving

CAUTION Operating the speed limiter with ● Briefly press area  to increase speed in small increments of 1 km/h (1 mph). For automatic switching off due to system the turn signal lever failures, for security reasons, the limiter is ● Press and hold the area  to continu- only completely switched off when the ously increase speed in increments of 10 driver stops pressing the accelerator or km/h (5 mph). consciously switches it off. ● Briefly press area  to decrease speed in small increments of 1 km/h (1 mph). Note ● Press and hold area  to continuously ● Different versions of the instrument panel decrease speed in increments of 10 km/h (5 are available and therefore the versions mph). and instructions on the display may vary. The speed is limited to the set value. ● If the cruise control (GRA), the adaptive cruise control (ACC) or the speed limiter Fig. 254 On the turn signal lever: buttons to Switching off the speed limiter are connected when the ignition is switch- operate the speed limiter. ed off, the assistants will switch it when the ● Move control ››› Fig. 254 1 to position . ignition is switched on, but only the speed Connecting limiter will maintain the last programmed The system switches off. speed. ● Move control ››› Fig. 254 1 to position  and press button 2 . Switching off temporarily

The last programmed speed is stored. It does If you want to temporarily deactivate the not take effect yet. speed limiter, e.g. for overtaking, move the control ››› Fig. 254 1 to position  or press button 2 . Activating the speed limiter After overtaking, the speed limiter can be ac- ● While driving, press button ››› Fig. 254 3 in the area . tivated with the previously programmed speed by pressing button ››› Fig. 254 3 in The current speed is stored as the maximum the area . speed.

Setting the programmed speed You can set the speed using button ››› Fig. 254 3 : 272 Driver assistance systems

Operating the speed limiter with ● Move the lever to the pressure point  Emergency brake assistance the third lever to increase speed in small increments of 1 km/h (1 mph). system (Front Assist)* ● Move the lever upwards  to increase in increments of 10 km/h (5 mph). Introduction ● Press the button  ››› Fig. 255 1 to reduce speed in small increments of 1 km/h (1 mph). ● Move the lever downwards  to reduce in increments of 10 km/h (5 mph).

To change the programmed speed without Fig. 256 Related video interruption, keep the lever pressed in the di- Fig. 255 On the left of the steering column: rection  + or  - . The speed is buttons to operate the speed limiter. limited to the set value.

Connecting Switching off the speed limiter ● Move the lever towards the steering wheel ● Move the lever to position . to position . The system switches off. The last programmed speed is stored. It does not take effect yet. Switching off temporarily If you want to temporarily deactivate the Activating the speed limiter speed limiter, e.g. for overtaking, move the Fig. 257 On the instrument panel display: ad- ● While driving, press button  ››› Fig. 255 lever to the pressure point  or press but- vance warning indications. 1 . ton ››› Fig. 255 2 . The objective of the system is to prevent The current speed is stored as the maximum After overtaking, the speed limiter can be ac- head-on collisions against objects that may speed. tivated with the previously programmed be in the vehicle’s path or minimise the con- speed by moving the lever to the pressure sequences of such impacts. Setting the programmed speed point . Depending on several factors and how criti- The programmed speed can be set: cal the situation is, the system operates in a staggered manner. First it warns the driver, » 273 Driving

and if the driver’s reaction does not occur or tion on the instrument panel display WARNING is insufficient, it activates independent emer- ››› Fig. 257. gency braking. Observe the safety warnings ››› in Con- The warning moment varies depending on trol and warning lamps on page 81. The function is intended to prevent collisions the traffic situation and driver behaviour. At with parked vehicles or vehicles in the same the same time, the vehicle will prepare for a WARNING lane travelling in the same direction, or with possible emergency braking ››› . pedestrians crossing the vehicle’s path or cir- Front Assist cannot change the laws of culating on the same lane and in the same di- Critical warning physics or replace the driver in terms of rection. It may not activate in other hazard keeping control of the vehicle and reacting If the driver fails to react to the advance situations . to a possible emergency situation. ››› warning, the system may actively intervene Front Assist is active between 4 km/h (2.5 in the brakes and generate a brief jolt to warn WARNING mph) and 250 km/h (156 mph). Depending the driver of the imminent danger of a colli- on a range of conditions, some of the func- sion. Following a Front Assist emergency warn- tions described below are omitted to optimize ing, pay immediate attention to the situa- the behaviour of the system. Automatic braking tion and try to avoid the collision as applicable. Front Assist is a driving assistance function If the driver also fails to react to the critical ● If the Front Assist does not work as de- that can never replace the driver’s atten- warning, the system may initiate independ- scribed in this chapter (e.g. it repeatedly tion. ent emergency braking by progressively in- intervenes unnecessarily), switch it off. creasing the braking in accordance with how Have the system checked by a specialised critical the situation is. Safety distance warning workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a If the system detects that you are driving too SEAT dealership. Driver emergency brake assistance sys- close to the vehicle in front, it will warn the ● Always adapt your speed and distance tem driver with this indication on the instrument away from the vehicle in front of you at all panel display . The system may detect that the driver is not times to suit visibility, weather, road and braking hard enough to avoid the collision. In traffic conditions. The timing of the warning varies depending this case, it will increase the braking intensity. on driver behaviour and the traffic situation. ● The Front Assist alone cannot avoid acci- The system cannot prevent a collision, al- dents and serious injuries. Advance warning though it can significantly minimise the con- ● In complex driving situations, Front Assist sequences by reducing the speed and the may issue warnings and intervene in brak- If the system detects a possible collision with force of the impact. ing unnecessarily. the vehicle in front, it alerts the driver by ● If the operation of the Front Assist is im- means of an audible warning and an indica- paired by dirt or because the radar sensor 274 Driver assistance systems has lost its settings, the system may issue Radar sensors The area in front of and around the radar unnecessary warnings and intervene inop- sensor should not be covered with adhesives, portunely in the braking. additional or similar headlights, as this may negatively affect Front Assist operation. ● The Front Assist does not react to animals or vehicles crossing your path or ap- If the front of the vehicle is not properly re- proaching head-on down the same lane. paired or structural modifications are made ● The Front Assist does not react to pedes- to it, Front Assist operation may be affected. trians walking head-on in the same lane. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership ● The driver must always be ready to take for this purpose. over the control of the vehicle. CAUTION Note If you have the feeling that the radar sensor Fig. 258 On the front bumper: radar sensors. is damaged or has lost its settings, discon- ● When Front Assist is connected, the indi- nect the Front Assist. This will avoid possi- cations of other functions on the screen A radar sensor is fitted on the front bumper ble dangerous situations caused by the in- may be hidden. ››› Fig. 258 1 . adequate operation of the system. If this ● When the Front Assist causes a braking, The radar sensor's visibility may be impaired occurs have it adjusted. the brake pedal is “harder”. by dirt, or by environmental influences such ● The sensor may not be adjusted correct- ● Automatic interventions by the Front As- as rain or mist. In this case, the Front Assist ly if it receives an impact. This may com- sist on the brakes may be interrupted by does not work. The instrument panel displays promise the system's efficacy or discon- pressing the clutch, accelerator or moving the following message: Front Assist: No nect it. the wheel. sensor vision! Clean the radar sensor ● Repairs to the radar sensor require spe- ● The Front Assist may brake the vehicle ››› . cialist knowledge and special tools. SEAT until it stops completely. However, the recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for When the radar sensor begins to operate brake system does not halt the vehicle per- this purpose. manently. Use the foot brake! properly again, the Front Assist will be available again. The message will disappear from ● A registration plate or plate holder on the ● If the Front Assist does not work as de- the screen. front that is larger than the space for the scribed in this chapter (e.g. in intervenes registration plate, or a registration plate several times unnecessarily), switch it off. Front Assist operation may be affected by a that is curved or warped can cause the ra- strong radar reverse reflection. This may oc- dar to malfunction. cur, for example, in a closed car park or due ● Clean away the snow with a brush and to the presence of metallic objects (e.g. the ice preferably with a solvent-free de- guard rails or sheets used in road works). icer spray.

275 Driving

Operation of the emergency brake ● OR: using the Easy Connect system with Switching distance warning on and off  assistance system (Front Assist) the button > SETTINGS > Driver as- The distance warning can be activated or sistance ››› page 82. deactivated in the Easy Connect system us-  When the Front Assist is deactivated, the indi- ing button > SETTINGS > Driver as- cation  ››› Fig. 259 will be shown on the in- sistance ››› page 82. strument panel. The system will store the setting for the next time the ignition is switched on. Activating or deactivating the pre-warning SEAT recommends keeping the distance (advance warning) warning active. The advance warning can be activated or deactivated in the Easy Connect system us-  ing button > SETTINGS > Driver as- Deactivating Front Assist tempora- sistance ››› page 82. Fig. 259 On the instrument panel display: rily in the following situations Front Assist deactivated indication. The system will store the setting for the next time the ignition is switched on. In the following situations the Front Assist The Front Assist is active whenever the igni- should be deactivated due to the system's tion is switched on. SEAT recommends keeping advance warning active. limitations: When the Front Assist is switched off, so too ● When the vehicle is to be towed. are the advance warning and the distance Depending on the vehicle’s infotainment sys- warning functions. tem the advance warning function may be ● If the vehicle is on a test bed. adapted in the following modes: SEAT recommends leaving the Front Assist ● When the radar sensor is damaged. activated. Exceptions ››› page 276, Deacti- ● Advance ● If the radar sensor receives a violent im- vating Front Assist temporarily in the fol- ● Medium pact. lowing situations. ● Delayed ● If it intervenes several times unnecessarily. ● If the radar sensor is temporarily covered Switching the Front Assist on and off ● Deactivated by an accessory. With the ignition switched on, the Front Assist SEAT recommends driving with the function in ● When the vehicle is going to be loaded onto can be deactivated or activated as follows: “Medium” mode. transportation. ● Select the corresponding menu option using the button for the driver assistance systems ››› page 79. 276 Driver assistance systems

System limitations ● Pressing the accelerator all the way down. ACC - Adaptive Cruise Con- ● If the ASR has been disconnected or the ESC activated in Sport mode ››› page 304. trol* ● If the ESC is controlling. Introduction ● If several brake lights of the vehicle or electrically connected trailer are damaged. ● If there are metal objects, e.g. guard rails or sheets used in road works. ● If the vehicle is reversing. ● In case of snow or heavy rain. ● Fig. 261 Related video Fig. 260 On the instrument panel display: ini- In case of narrow vehicles, such as motor- tial system self-calibration indication. bikes. ● Misaligned vehicles. Front Assist has certain limitations inherent to ● Vehicles crossing the other's path. the system. Thus, in certain circumstances, some of the reactions may be inappropriate ● Vehicles approaching in the opposite direc- from the driver's standpoint. So pay attention tion. in order to intervene if necessary. ● Loads and accessories of other vehicles that protrude over the sides, backwards or The following conditions may cause the over the top. Front Assist not to react or to do so too late: Fig. 262 Detection area. ● In the first few instants of driving after switching on the ignition, due to the system’s The ACC is an extension of the vehicle’s initial auto-calibration. During this period, a cruise control function (GRA) ››› . status icon ››› Fig. 260is displayed. It allows the driver to set a cruise speed be- ● If the Front Assist is switched off or dam- tween 30 km/h (20 mph) and 210 km/h (130 aged. mph), and select the desired distance from ● If the radar sensor is dirty or covered. the previous in front. » ● On taking tight bends or complex paths.

277 Driving

The ACC adapts the cruising speed of the the laws of physics. If used negligently or ● If the instrument panel screen displays a vehicle, keeping a safe distance away from involuntarily, it may cause serious acci- driver intervention prompt, adjust the dis- the vehicle in front, if there is one, depending dents and injuries. The system is not a re- tance. on speed. placement for driver awareness. ● The driver should be ready to accelerate When driving behind another vehicle, the ● Adapt your speed and safe distance to or brake at all times. ACC reduces speed until it is the same as the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic condi- that of the vehicle ahead and maintains the Note set distance between the vehicles. If the vehi- tions. ● cle ahead accelerates, the ACC also accel- ● Do not use ACC in poor visibility, or on If the ACC does not work as described in this chapter, do not use it until it has been erates the vehicle, going no higher than the roads that are steep, with lots of curves or checked by a specialised workshop. SEAT programmed target speed. slippery. recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for ● If the vehicle is equipped with automatic Never use ACC when driving off-road or this purpose. on unpaved roads. The ACC has been de- gearbox, the ACC can brake the vehicle until ● signed for use on paved roads only. Maximum speed with the ACC activated it stops completely if a vehicle in front of it is limited to 210 km/h (130 mph). ● ACC does not react when approaching a stops. ● fixed obstacle, such as the end of a traffic When the ACC is switched on, strange The distance programmed should be in- jam, a damaged vehicle or a vehicle stop- noises may be heard during braking, creased when the road surface is wet. ped at the traffic lights. caused by the braking system. ● The ACC only reacts to people if a pe- Driver intervention prompt destrian monitoring system is available. ACC is subject to certain limitations inherent The system does not react to animals or Symbols on the instrument panel to the system. In other words, in certain cir- vehicles crossing your path or approaching display and control lamps cumstances the driver will have to adjust the head-on down the same lane. speed and the distance from other vehicles. ● If the ACC does not reduce speed suffi- The speed reduction by the ACC ciently, brake the vehicle immediately. In this case, the instrument panel screen will  to maintain the distance from the warn you to intervene by applying the brake ● If you are driving with a spare wheel fit- vehicle in front is not sufficient. ted, the ACC system could automatically and a warning tone will be heard switch off. Switch off the system when Brake! apply the foot brake! Driver intervention ››› page 278. starting off. prompt. WARNING ● If the vehicle continues to move involuntarily after a driver intervention prompt, The ACC’s technology cannot overcome brake the vehicle. the system's inherent limitations or change

278 Driver assistance systems

 ACC is not currently available. WARNING 3 Vehicle ahead detected. ACC is active and is regulating your speed. Observe the safety warnings ››› in Con- While the vehicle is stationary, switch off the engine 4 Distance level 2 set by the driver. and start it again. Perform a visual check of the radar trol and warning lamps on page 81. sensor ››› Fig. 264. If it is still unavailable, refer to a 5 ACC is active and is regulating your dis- specialised workshop to have the system inspected. tance based on speed. Status display  Green symbol Note When the ACC is connected, the indica- The ACC is active. A vehicle in front has been detected. The ACC ad- tions on the instrument panel screen may justs speed and distance from the vehicle in front. be concealed by warnings from other functions, such as an incoming call.  Grey symbol ACC is inactive (Standby). Radar sensors A vehicle in front has been detected. The speed and distance from the vehicle in front are not adjusted.

 Green symbol

The ACC is active. No vehicle has been detected in front.

 Grey symbol

ACC is inactive (Standby). No vehicle has been detected in front. Fig. 263 On the instrument panel display:  ACC inactive (Standby).  ACC active. Some control and warning lamps will light up Fig. 264 On the front bumper: radar sensors. briefly when the ignition is switched on to Indications on the display ››› Fig. 263: A radar sensor is fitted on the front bumper check certain functions. They will switch off 1 Vehicle ahead detected. ACC is not ac- ››› Fig. 264 1 . after a few seconds. tive and is not regulating your speed. The radar sensor's visibility may be impaired 2 Distance from the vehicle ahead. ACC is by dirt, or by environmental influences such not active and is not regulating your disas rain or mist. In this case the adaptive cruise » tance. 279 Driving

control (ACC) does not work. The instrument promise the system's efficacy or discon- panel displays the following message: ACC: nect it. No sensor vision! Clean the radar sensor ● Repairs to the radar sensor require spe- . ››› cialist knowledge and special tools. SEAT When the radar sensor begins to operate recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for properly, the ACC will become available. The this purpose. message on the screen will switch off and the ● A registration plate or plate holder on the ACC may be reactivated. front that is larger than the space for the registration plate, or a registration plate ACC operation may be affected by a strong that is curved or warped can cause the ra- radar reverse reflection. This may occur, for dar to malfunction. Fig. 266 On the left of the steering column: example, in a closed car park or due to the ● operating the ACC with the third lever. presence of metallic objects (e.g. guard rails Clean away the snow with a brush and the ice preferably with a solvent-free de- or sheets used in road works). icer spray. When the ACC is connected, the green con- The area in front of and around the radar trol lamp  will light up on the instrument sensor should not be covered with adhesives, panel, and the programmed speed and ACC status will be displayed ››› Fig. 263. additional or similar headlights, as this may ACC operation negatively affect ACC operation. What ACC settings are possible? If the front of the vehicle is not properly repaired or structural modifications are made ● Connecting and activating the ACC to it, ACC operation may be affected. In this ››› page 281. scenario, SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT ● Setting your speed ››› page 281. dealership. ● Setting your distance ››› page 281. ● CAUTION Disconnecting and deactivating the ACC ››› page 281. If you have the sensation that the radar ● Adjusting the default distance level at the sensor is damaged or has lost its settings, start of your journey page 281. disconnect the ACC. This way you can ››› avoid possible damage. If this occurs have Fig. 265 On the left of the steering column: ● Adjusting the driving profile ››› page 281. it adjusted. operating the ACC with the third lever. ● Conditions in which the ACC does not re- ● The sensor may not be adjusted correct- act ››› page 282. ly if it receives an impact. This may com-

280 Driver assistance systems

Connecting and activating the ACC ● If you wish to increase speed by intervals of Adjusting the default distance level at the To connect and activate the ACC, the posi- 1 km/h (0.6 mph), move the lever to position start of your journey  tion of the gearbox lever, the vehicle speed ››› Fig. 265 2 , or to decrease it press In wet road conditions, you should always set  and the position of the third level of the ACC button ››› Fig. 266 B . a larger distance with regard to the vehicle in must all be taken into account. The set speed can be changed when the ve- front than when driving in dry conditions ››› . ● With manual transmission, the gear lever hicle is stopped or during driving. must be in any gear except first. With auto- In the Easy Connect system, you can pre-se- matic transmission, the gear lever must be in Setting your distance level lect the distance level when connecting the position D or S. Speed must be higher than ● To increase or reduce the distance, press ACC to: Very short, Short, Medium, Long and Very long using button  > SETTINGS > 30 km/h (18 mph) approx. button A to the right or left ››› Fig. 266. Driver assistance ››› page 82. ● To activate the ACC, move the third lever to The instrument panel display modifies the se- position  ››› Fig. 265 1 . At this time, the lected distance ››› Fig. 263 4 . There are 5 Changing the driving profile ACC is not active and there is no program- distance levels to choose from. SEAT recom- med speed. In vehicles with SEAT Drive Profile, the driving mends level 3. The set distance can be profile selected can have an influence on the ● Next, press button  ››› Fig. 266 B or changed when the vehicle is stopped or while ACC’s acceleration and braking behaviour move the lever to position  driving . ››› ››› page 263. ››› Fig. 265 2 . At this moment the ACC is activated and the current speed and distance Disconnecting and deactivating the ACC In vehicles without SEAT Drive Profile, the be- are programmed. The picture in the box will haviour of the ACC can also be affected if ● To disconnect the ACC move the lever to change to Active mode ››› Fig. 263 . any of the following drive profiles are selec- position  (fixed) Fig. 265 0 . An ACC de- ››› ted in the Easy Connect system: While ACC is active, the vehicle travels at a activated message appears and the func- set speed and distance from the vehicle tion is totally deactivated. ● Normal ahead. Both speed and distance can be If you do not wish to disconnect the ACC, just ● Sport changed at any time. to switch it temporarily to inactive mode ● Eco (Standby), move the third lever to position Setting speed ● Convenience  3 or press the brake pedal. ● To set the speed, move the third lever up + In this case you must access the ACC set- It will also switch to inactive mode (Standby) or down – to the desired speed tings using button  > SETTINGS > Driver if the vehicle is stopped and the driver door is ››› Fig. 263 6 . The speed adjustment is assistance > ACC ››› page 82. » made at 10 km/h (6 mph) intervals. opened.

281 Driving

The following conditions may lead the guaranteed. The ACC cannot be switched  ACC: available as of the 2nd gear ACC not to react: on. ● The ACC is operational as of the 2nd gear ● If the accelerator is pressed. (manual gearbox).  ACC: only available in D, S or M ● If there is no gear engaged. ● Select the D/S or M position on the selector  ACC: engine speed ● If the ESC is controlling. lever. ● This indication is displayed if, when the ● If the driver is not wearing his/her seat belt. ACC accelerates or brakes, the driver does  ACC: parking brake applied ● If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec- not shift up or down a gear in time, which ● The ACC is deactivated if the parking brake trically connected trailer are damaged. means exceeding or not reaching the permit- is applied. The ACC is available once again ted RPM. The ACC switches itself off. A buzzer ● If the vehicle is reversing. after the parking brake is released. warning is heard. ● Driving faster than 210 km/h (130 mph).  ACC: currently not available. In-  ACC: clutch applied Driver messages tervention of stability control ● Vehicles with manual transmission: pressing ● The indication is displayed when the elec-  ACC not available the clutch pedal for longer exits cruise con- tronic stability control (ESC) intervenes. In this trol. ● The system cannot continue to guarantee case, the ACC is automatically switched off. safe vehicle detection and is deactivated. Door open  The sensor has lost its setting or is damaged. ACC: Take action! ● Vehicles with automatic transmission: the Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop ● The indication is displayed if, when the ve- ACC cannot be activated with the vehicle and have the fault repaired. hicle starts up on a hill with a slight slope, the stationary and the door open. vehicle rolls back even although the ACC is  ACC and Front Assist: currently activated. Apply the brake to stop the vehicle WARNING not available. No sensor vision from moving/colliding with another vehicle. ● This message is displayed if the radar sen- There is a danger of rear collision when the distance to the vehicle in front is reduced sor's visibility is impaired by leaves, snow,  ACC: speed limit and the speed difference between both ve- dense fog or dirt. Clean the sensor ● The indication is displayed in vehicles with hicles is so great that a speed reduction by Fig. 264. ››› manual gearboxes if the current speed is too the ACC is not sufficient. In this case, brake low for the ACC mode. The speed limiter immediately!  ACC: currently not available. switches off if the speed falls below 20 km/h ● The ACC may not be able to detect all Gradient too steep (12 mph). situations properly. ● The maximum road slope has been exceeded, hence safe ACC operation cannot be ● Stepping on the accelerator may cause the ACC not to intervene in braking. Driver

282 Driver assistance systems braking will have priority over intervention Function to prevent overtaking on Deactivating the ACC temporarily by the speed control or adaptive cruise the right in certain situations control. ● Always be ready to use the brakes! In the following situations the ACC should be ● Observe country-specific provisions gov- deactivated due to the system's limitations erning obligatory minimum distances be- ››› : tween vehicles. ● When overtaking, on closed curves or ● It is dangerous to activate control and re- mountain roads, roundabouts, slip roads or sume the programmed speed if the road, roadwork sections, preventing the system traffic or weather conditions do not permit from accelerating to reach the programmed this. Risk of accident! speed. ● When going through a tunnel, as operation Note Fig. 267 On the instrument panel display: could be affected. ● The programmed speed is erased once ACC active, vehicle detected in an outer lane. ● When other vehicles are going slower in the the ignition or the ACC are switched off. left lane. In this case, slower vehicles will be ● When the traction control system (ASR) is The ACC has a function to prevent overtaking overtaken on the right. deactivated during acceleration or else the on the right. ● In case of heavy rain, snow or fog, the vehi- ESC is activated in Sport* Mode If another vehicle is driving more slowly to the cle in front may not be detected. (››› page 82), the ACC switches off auto- left of the vehicle, it is shown on the display matically. ››› Fig. 267. WARNING ● In vehicles with the Start-Stop system, the engine switches off during the ACC The system brakes the vehicle to avoid over- If the ACC does not switch off in the situa- stopping phase and restarts for moving off. taking on the right, and will avoid overtaking tions described, serious accidents and inju- based on speed. The driver can interrupt the ries may occur. intervention of the ACC by pressing the ac- ● Always switch off the ACC in critical sit- celerator. At low speeds the function is inac- uations. tive, for greater comfort in a traffic jam or in city traffic. Note If you do not switch off the ACC in the aforementioned situations, you may com- mit a legal offence.

283 Driving

Special driving recommendations Overtaking When the turn signal lights up before the vehicle starts to overtake, the ACC accelerates the vehicle automatically and thus reduces the distance from the vehicle in front. When the vehicle moves to the overtaking lane, if the ACC does not detect another vehicle in front, it accelerates until it reaches the programmed speed. System acceleration can be interrupted at any time by pressing the brake or moving the third lever to position  ››› Fig. 265 3 .

Driving through a bend   Fig. 269 Vehicle changing lanes. One When entering or leaving some curves, the vehicle turning and another stationary. radar sensor may cease to sense the vehicle Fig. 268  Vehicle on a bend.  Motorcyclist driving in front of it, or react to a vehicle in the ahead, out of range of the radar sensor. The ACC has certain limitations inherent to adjacent lane Fig. 268 . The vehicle may the system. Certain reactions, under certain ››› brake unnecessarily or stop reacting to the circumstances, may be unexpected or come vehicle in front. In this case, the driver has to late from the driver's point of view. So pay at- intervene by accelerating or interrupting tention in order to intervene if necessary. braking by applying the brake or pushing the The following situations require maximum at- third lever to position  ››› Fig. 265 3 . tention: Driving in tunnels Starting driving after a stopping phase When driving through tunnels the radar sen- (only with automatic transmission) sor may be limited. Switch off the ACC in tun- After a stopping phase, the ACC may begin nels. driving when the vehicle in front moves off ››› .

284 Driver assistance systems

Narrow or misaligned vehicles Vehicles driving in the opposite direction Overheated brakes The radar sensor can only detect narrow ve- and vehicles crossing your path If the brakes overheat, for example on long hicles or vehicles that circulate out of align- The ACC does not react to vehicles ap- and steep descents, the ACC may be deacti- ment when they enter its range proaching from the opposite direction or ve- vated temporarily. A message will be dis- ››› Fig. 268 . In these cases, you should hicles crossing your path. played stating this. In this case, adaptive brake as necessary. cruise control cannot be activated. Metal objects Cruise control may be reactivated once the Vehicles with special loads and accesso- Metal objects, e.g. guard rails or sheets used brake temperature has dropped. The mes- ries in road works, can confuse the radar sensor sage will disappear. If the message ACC not Special loads and accessories of other vehi- and cause the ACC to react wrongly. available remains on for quite a long time it cles that jut out over the sides, backwards or means that there is a fault. Contact a speci- over the top may be out of the ACC's range. Factors that may affect how the radar alised workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT recommends disconnecting it. sensor operates SEAT dealership. If laser sensor operation is impaired, due to Other vehicles changing lanes heavy rain snow or mud, the ACC is deactiva- WARNING Vehicles changing lanes a short distance ted temporarily. A message will be displayed If you do not pay attention to the Press away from your own can only be detected stating this. If necessary, clean the radar sen- the brake message, the vehicle may move when they are within range of the sensors. As sor ››› Fig. 264. and crash into the vehicle ahead. Before a consequence, the ACC will take longer to driving off again, check that the road is When the radar sensor begins to operate react ››› Fig. 269 . Brake yourself as neces- clear. The radar sensor may not detect ob- properly, the ACC will become available. The sary. stacles on the road. This could cause an message will turn off and the ACC may be accident and serious injuries. If necessary, reactivated. apply the brake. Stationary vehicles ACC operation may be affected by a strong The ACC does not detect stationary objects radar reverse reflection, for example in a while driving, such as traffic tails or damaged closed car park. SEAT recommends discon- vehicles. necting it. If a vehicle detected by the ACC turns or moves over and there is a stationary vehicle Trailer mode in front of it, the ACC will not react to it When driving with trailer the ACC controls ››› Fig. 269 . Brake yourself as necessary. less dynamically.

285 Driving

Lane Assist* Control lamp Indications on the instrument panel display Introduction  It lights up yellow Lane Assist system active but not available. The system cannot accurately recognize the lane. See page 287, The lane assist system is active but it is not available (the control lamp is lit up yellow).

 It lights up green

Lane Assist system active and available.

  It lights up yellow

Fig. 270 On the windscreen: field of vision of Error in the lane departure warning system. Take the the Lane Assist system. vehicle to a specialised workshop to repair the fault.

Using the camera located in the windscreen, Some control and warning lamps will light up the Lane Assist system detects the possible briefly when the ignition is switched on to lines dividing the lanes. When the vehicle in- check certain functions. They will switch off voluntarily approaches a dividing line it has after a few seconds. detected, the system notifies the driver with a corrective steering movement. The purpose is WARNING not only to warn the driver, but also to keep Fig. 271 On the instrument panel display: Indi- the vehicle inside the lane. This movement Observe the safety warnings ››› in Con- cation on the Lane Assist system display (ex- can be over-regulated at any time. trol and warning lamps on page 81. ample 1). No warning is produced with the turn signals activated, given that the Lane Assist system understands that a lane change is required. As soon as the ignition is switched on, the lane departure function is automatically activated.

286 Driver assistance systems

– Fig. 272 : The system is operational, tem using the button  > SETTINGS the highlighted line 1 indicates that ››› page 82. there was a risk of involuntarily crossing ● Or: By pressing and holding the Driving As- the lane line and that the steering is be- sist button on the turn signal lever* ing adjusted to correct the angle. ››› page 79. – Fig. 272 : The two highlighted lines 1 and 2 light up simultaneously when Automatic deactivation: the Lane Assist sys- both lane lines are recognised and the tem can be automatically deactivated if Lane Assist function is activated. there is a system malfunction. The control lamp disappears.

Operating mode Hands-Off Function In the absence of steering wheel activity the Switching the Lane Assist system on or off system alerts the driver with acoustic signals and a text message on the dash panel asking ● Select the corresponding menu option us- to actively take over the steering. ing the button for the driver assistance systems ››› page 79. If the driver does not react to this, the system ● OR: by using the Easy Connect system with also alerts the driver with a little shaking mo- button  > SETTINGS > Driver assis- tion through the brakes and, if the vehicle has it, activates the Emergency Assist function Fig. 272 On the instrument panel display: Indi- tance ››› page 82. page 290. cation on the Lane Assist system display (ex- ››› ample 2). Lane Assist with lane centring guide In vehicles without Emergency Assist, the The Lane Centring Guide function is inten- adaptive lane guidance function will be disa- Status display ded to keep the vehicle in the centre of the bled after the corresponding warnings to the – Fig. 271 : The system is active, but not lane. driver. available, either because the minimum If the driver has a tendency to veer slightly off speed has not been reached or because The lane assist system is active but it is not centre in the lane, the system adapts to driver the lane lines are not recognised. available (the control lamp is lit up yellow) preferences. – Fig. 271 : The system is active and ● When driving at speeds below 65 km/h (38 available, both lane lines are recognised. ● The Lane Centring Guide function is ac- mph). The steering angle is not being correc- tivated/deactivated in the Easy Connect sys- ● When the Lane Assist system does not de- ted at this moment. tect the dividing lines of the road. For » 287 Driving

example, in the event warnings indicating be activated/deactivated in the Easy Con- ● Always keep your hands on the steering road works, and snow, dirt, moisture or reflec- nect system with the button  > SETTINGS wheel so it can be turned at any time. tions. > Driver assistance > Lane Assist ● The Lane Assist system does not detect page 82. ● When the radius of a curve is too small. ››› all road markings. The road surfaces, road ● When no road markings can be seen. ● torque is applied to correct the steering structures or objects in poor condition can and return the vehicle to its lane. be incorrectly detected as road markings ● When the distance to the next marking to under certain circumstances by the Lane too great. Switching off the Lane Assist system in the Assist system. In such situations, switch the ● When the system does not detect any clear following situations Lane Assist system off immediately. and active steering movement during a long Due to the limits of the Lane Assist system, ● Please observe the indications on the in- period of time. switch it off in the following situations: strument panel and act as is necessary. ● Temporarily, in the event of very dynamic ● Always pay attention to the vehicle's sur- driving styles. ● When more attention is required of the driv- roundings. ● If a turn signal is activated. er ● When the area of vision of the camera ● ● With the stability control system (ESC) in When driving in a sporty style becomes dirty, covered or is damaged, the Lane Assist system function can be affec- Sport mode or switched off. ● In unfavourable weather conditions ted. ● On roads in poor condition BSD Plus (Lane Assist with Blind Spot As- ● In areas of road works sist)* CAUTION The BSD Plus function is achieved by activat- WARNING In order to avoid influencing the operation ing the Lane Assist and BSD functions of the system, the following points must be The intelligent technology in the Lane As- page 291. In this case, the Lane Assist taken into account: ››› sist system cannot change the limits im- ● Regularly clean the area of vision of the function expands its functions in the following posed by the laws of physics and by the camera and keep it in a clean state, without way: very nature of the system. Careless or un- snow or ice ››› Fig. 270. If the driver tries to change lane and there is a controlled use of the Lane Assist system ● Do not cover the area of vision of the vehicle in the blind spot: may cause accidents and injury. The system is not a replacement for driver aware- camera. ● The  lamp flashes in the corresponding ness. ● Check that the area of vision of the wind- rear-view mirror even though the turn signal ● Always adapt your speed and the dis- screen camera is not damaged. has not been activated. tance to the vehicles ahead in line with visi- ● The steering wheel vibrates to warn the bility, weather conditions, the condition of driver of the risk of collision. This function can the road and the traffic situation.

288 Driver assistance systems

Note vehicle ahead and help stay within the lane Traffic Jam Assist is not active (the Lane ››› . Assist control light turns yellow) ● The lane departure warning system has been exclusively developed for driving on To do this, the system automatically controls ● If any of the conditions mentioned on paved roads only. the accelerator, brakes and steering, and page 289, Technical requirements for using Traffic Jam Assist are no longer met. ● If the Lane Assist system does not work as slows the vehicle, stopping it fully if neces- described in this chapter, do not use it and sary, when faced with a vehicle in front that ● If any of the conditions required for opera- contact a specialised workshop. has stopped. It automatically moves off again tion of the Lane Assist are not met when the vehicle ahead moves. ● If there is a fault in the system, have it ››› page 286. checked by a specialised workshop. Traffic Jam Assist is designed only for use on ● If any of the conditions necessary for the motorways and wide roads. Therefore, never adaptive cruise control (ACC) to work are no use it in city traffic. longer fulfilled ››› page 277.

Traffic Jam Assist Technical requirements for using Traffic Situations where traffic jam assist has to Jam Assist be disconnected Description and operation ● Lane assist must be activated: button  > Due to the limitations of the system, Traffic SETTINGS > Driver assistance > Lane Jam Assist must always be switched off in the Traffic Jam Assist helps the driver keep the assist system ››› page 82. following situations: car within its lane and to move in convoy in ● Adaptive lane guidance must be activated: case of traffic congestion or slow traffic. ● When more attention is required by the Infotainment button  > SETTINGS > Driv- driver. Traffic Jam Assist is an additional function of er assistance > Lane Assist function Lane Assist ››› page 286 and combines Lane button, or: pressing and holding button Driv- ● When driving in a very sporty style. Assist functions with Adaptive Cruise Control ing assistance ››› page 79. ● In adverse weather conditions, e.g. in case (ACC) ››› page 277. Therefore, it is essential ● Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) must be of snow or heavy rain. that you read these two chapters carefully connected and active page 280. ● When driving on roads in poor condition. and note the limitations of the systems and ››› the information about them. ● The speed must be below 60 km/h ● In sections with roadworks. (38 mph). ● In city journeys. Operation of Traffic Jam Assist At speeds of below 60 km/h (40 mph), Traffic WARNING Jam Assist can maintain a (temporary) dis- The smart technology incorporated into tance preset by the driver with respect to the Traffic Jam Assist cannot defy the laws of physics; it only works within the limits of the »

289 Driving

system. Accidents and severe injury may ● Keep your hands on the wheel at all times Operation of Emergency Assist occur if Traffic Jam Assist is used negli- to be ready to intervene in the steering at Emergency Assist detects when the driver gently or involuntarily. The system is not a any time. The driver is always responsible ceases to perform any activity and repeated- replacement for driver awareness. for keeping the vehicle in its own lane. ly requests that he/she regain active control ● Adapt your speed and safe distance to ● Always be prepared to take charge of of the vehicle, through the use of optical and the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit driving (accelerating or braking) yourself. acoustic warnings and by applying the the visibility, weather, road and traffic con- brakes. ditions. Note If the driver continues to do nothing, the sys- ● Do not use Traffic Jam Assist in city jour- ● tem automatically takes over the accelerator, neys. If Traffic Jam Assist does not work as described in this chapter, stop using it and brakes and steering in order to brake the ve- ● Do not use Traffic Jam Assist if there is contact a specialised workshop. hicle and keep it in its lane ››› . When the poor visibility, for example, in case of snow, ● If the system is faulty, take it to a special- emergency assistant is actively regulating, ice, rain or loose gravel, or on steep or slip- the hazard lights turn on ››› page 115. pery sections or flooded roads. ised workshop and have it checked. If the remaining braking distance is sufficient, ● Do not use Traffic Jam Assist offroad or on roads where the surface is not firm. Traf- if necessary the system slows down the vehi- fic Jam Assist has been designed for use on Emergency Assist cle until it stops completely and automati- paved roads only. cally switches on the electronic parking brake ››› page 299. ● Traffic Jam Assist does not react to peo- Description and operation ple or animals or vehicles crossing your path or that approach you head-on down Connecting and disconnecting Emergen- Emergency Assist detects whether there is in- the same lane. cy Assist activity by the driver and can automatically The Emergency Assist is switched on auto- ● If Traffic Jam Assist does not reduce keep the car within the lane and stop it alto- matically when the Lane Assist is switched on speed sufficiently, brake the vehicle imme- gether if necessary. This way the system can diately by applying the pedal. page 286. actively help avoid an accident. ››› ● If the vehicle continues to move when you wish it to stop after a driver intervention Emergency Assist is an additional function of Technical requirements for using the Emer- prompt, brake the vehicle by applying the Lane Assist ››› page 286 and combines Lane gency Assist Assist functions with Adaptive Cruise Control pedal. ● The adaptive cruise control (ACC) must be (ACC) ››› page 277. Therefore, it is essential ● If driver intervention is requested on the switched on ››› page 277. dash panel display, immediately resume that you read these two chapters carefully ● The Lane Assist must be switched on control of the vehicle. and note the limitations of the systems and the information about them. ››› page 286.

290 Driver assistance systems

● The selector lever must be in the D/S posi- ● Keep your hands on the wheel at all times by pressing the accelerator or brake or by tion or in the Tiptronic selector gate. to be ready to intervene in the steering at moving the wheel. ● The system must have detected a lane any time. ● Hazard warning lights that come on auto- separation line on both sides of the vehicle ● The Emergency Assist alone cannot al- matically can be switched off by pressing ››› Fig. 272. ways avoid accidents or serious injuries. the accelerator or the break, moving the ● If the operation of the Emergency Assist steering wheel or pressing the hazard The following conditions may cause the is impaired, for example if the radar sensor warning light switch. Emergency Assist not to react or to switch of the adaptive cruise control (ACC) or the ● If this occurs, the Emergency Assist may off automatically: Lane Assist camera are covered or have decelerate the vehicle until it comes to a ● If the driver accelerates, brakes or moves lost their settings, the system may inter- complete stop. the steering wheel. vene inopportunely in braking or in steer- ● When the Emergency Assist is activated, ing. it is only available again after the ignition ● If any of the conditions mentioned in ● The Emergency Assist does not react to has been switched off and back on again. page 290, Technical requirements for ››› people or animal or vehicles crossing your using the Emergency Assist are not fulfilled. path or which approach you head-on in the ● If any of the conditions required for opera- same lane. tion of the Lane Assist are not met Using the blind spot detector ››› page 286. WARNING (BSD) with parking assistant ● If any of the conditions necessary for the If the Emergency Assist Intervenes inoppor- adaptive cruise control (ACC) to work are no (RCTA)* tunely, serious accidents and injuries may longer fulfilled ››› page 277. occur. Introduction WARNING ● If the Emergency Assist does not operate properly, switch off the Lane Assist The blind spot detector (BSD) helps to detect The smart technology incorporated into ››› page 286. Doing so will also switch off the traffic situation behind the vehicle. the Emergency Assist cannot overcome the the Emergency Assist. limits imposed by the laws of physics; it on- ● Have the system checked by a special- The integrated parking assistant (RCTA) helps ly works within the limits of the system. The ised workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a the driver when backing out of a parallel driver is responsible for driving the vehicle. SEAT dealership for this. parking spot and in manoeuvring. ● Adapt your speed and safe distance to the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit The blind spot detector has been developed the visibility, weather, road and traffic con- Note for driving on paved roads. » ditions. ● Automatic interventions by the Emergen- cy Assist on the brakes may be interrupted

291 Driving

WARNING ● Always pay attention to the vehicle's sur- Control lamps roundings. The smart technology incorporated into Control lamp in external rear view mirrors: the blind spot detector (BSD) with parking ● Never use the blind spot detector or the assistance (RCTA) included cannot over- parking assistant if the radar sensors are  It lights up come the limits imposed by the laws of dirty. physics; it only works within the limits of the ● The external rear view mirror control It lights up once briefly: the blind spot detector is ac- system. Accidents and severe injury may lamps may have limited functionality due tivated and ready to operate. occur if the blind spot detection system or to solar radiation. It lights up: blind spot detector has detected a vehi- the rear cross traffic alert are used negli- cle in the blind spot. gently or involuntarily. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness. CAUTION  Flashes ● Adapt your speed and safe distance to ● The radar sensors on the rear bumper the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit may be damaged or shifted in the event of The blind spot detector has detected a vehicle in the visibility, weather, road and traffic condi- a collision, for example, when entering or blind spot and the turn signal has been turned on in tions. exiting a parking space. This may result in the direction of the detected vehicle ››› . the system disconnecting itself, or at least ● Keep your hands on the wheel at all times possibly having its functionality diminished. For vehicles that are also equipped with Lane Assist to be ready to intervene in the steering at ››› page 286, a warning to switch lanes will also ap- any time. ● In order to ensure that the radar sensors pear even though the turn signal has not been en- work properly, keep the rear bumper free of gaged (blind spot detector “Plus”). ● Pay attention to the control lamps that snow and ice and do not cover it. may come on in the external rear view mir- The control lamps light up when the ignition is rors and on the instrument panel, and fol- ● The rear bumper should only be painted low any instructions they may give. with paint authorised by SEAT. The blind switched on and should turn off after approxi- spot detector's functions may be limited or mately 2 seconds. This is the time taken for ● The blind spot assistant could react to work incorrectly if other paints are used. the function check. any special constructions that might be present on the sides of the vehicle: e.g. high If there are no indications from the control or irregular dividers. This may cause erro- Note lamp in the external rear view mirror, this neous warnings. If the blind spot detector with parking as- means that the blind spot detector has not ● Never use the blind spot detector with sistant does not work as described in this detected any other vehicles in the area ››› . rear cross traffic alert on unpaved roads. chapter, stop using it and contact a speci- If the dipped beam is on, then the control The blind spot detector with rear cross traf- alised workshop. lamps in the external rear view mirrors will be fic alert has been designed for use on dimmed (night mode). paved roads.

292 Driver assistance systems

WARNING Blind spot detector (BSD) If the warning lamps and the corresponding messages are ignored when they light up, the vehicle may stall in traffic and cause accidents and severe injuries. ● Never ignore the warning lamps or messages. ● Carry out the necessary operations.

CAUTION Fig. 274 Rear view of the vehicle: radar sensor Failure to heed the control lamps and cor- zones. responding text messages when they light up may result in damage to the vehicle. The blind spot detector uses radar sensors to monitor the areas behind the vehicle ››› Fig. 274. The system does this by measur- ing the vehicle's distance from other vehicles and its speed differential. The blind spot detector will not work at speeds of less than approx. 15 km/h (9 mph). The system uses optical signals in the external rear view mirrors to notify the driver. Fig. 273 In the exterior mirrors: blind spot detector indication. Indication on the exterior mirror The control lamp (expanded view) provides an indication in the corresponding external mirror ››› Fig. 273 regarding the traffic situation behind the vehicle, if it is deemed to be critical. The control lamp of the left-hand external mirror indicates the traffic situation to the left of the vehicle, and the control lamp of the right-hand external mirror indicates the traffic situation to the right of the vehicle. »

293 Driving

In the case of retrofitted tinted windows or the outside ››› Fig. 274. The sensors monitor there are any), and can also detect station- windows with tinted film, the indications of the both the blind spot and traffic behind the ve- ary objects such as dividers, and thus give an external mirrors may not be seen clearly or hicle ››› Fig. 275, ››› Fig. 276. The range to the incorrect indication. correctly. sides of the vehicle is a bit larger than the width of a lane. Keep the external mirrors clean and free of snow and ice, and do not cover them with ad- The lane width is not detected individually, hesives or other similar materials. but is rather pre-configured in the system. Thus if you are driving in wide lanes or in be- Radar sensors tween two lanes, the indications may be incorrect. Furthermore, the system can detect The radar sensors are located on the left and vehicles driving in the lane next to you (if right of the bumper and are not visible from

294 Driver assistance systems

Driving situations

Fig. 275 Schematic representation:  Passing situation with traffic behind the vehicle.  Indi- cation from the blind spot detector in the left- hand external mirror.

Fig. 276 Schematic representation:  Situa- tion of passing and then moving into the right- hand lane.  Indication from the blind spot detector in the right-hand external mirror.

In the following situations, an indication will erably higher speed, no indication will be dis- Physical limitations inherent to the system be displayed in the external mirror ››› Fig. 275 played. In some situations the blind spot detector  (arrow) or ››› Fig. 276  (arrow): The faster the vehicle approaches, the soon- may not interpret the traffic situation correct- ● When being overtaken by another vehicle er an indication will be displayed in the exter- ly. E.g. in the following situations:  ››› Fig. 275 . nal mirror, because the blind spot detector ● on tight bends; ● takes into account the speed differential with When passing another vehicle ››› Fig. 276 ● in the case of lanes with different widths;  with a speed differential of approx. 10 km/h other vehicles. Thus even though the distance ● (6 mph). If the vehicle is passing at a consid- from the other vehicle is identical, the indica- at the top of slopes; tion will appear sooner in some cases and ● in adverse weather conditions; » later in others. 295 Driving

● in the case of special constructions to the If the system detects that someone else on You can interrupt the automatic braking by side of the vehicle, e.g., high or irregular divid- the road is approaching the rear of the vehi- stepping hard on the accelerator pedal or ers. cle ››› Fig. 277, an acoustic alarm is heard. the brake pedal in order to regain control of the vehicle. In addition to the acoustic alarm, the driver is also informed by means of a visual signal on WARNING Rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) infotainment system display. This signal is displayed in the form of a red strip at the back of The smart technology incorporated into the image of the vehicle on the infotainment the rear cross traffic alert cannot over- system screen. This strip displays the side of come the limits imposed by the laws of the vehicle towards which traffic is approach- physics; it only works within the limits of the ing.1) system. The parking assistant function should not tempt you into taking any risks. The system is not a replacement for driver Automatic braking to reduce damages awareness. If the rear cross traffic alert detects that ● The system should never be used in limi- someone else on the road is approaching the ted visibility conditions or complicated rear of the vehicle and the driver does not traffic, e.g., in high-traffic areas or when step on the brake, the system will engage the crossing multiple lanes. brakes automatically. ● Be sure to always be aware of the vehi- Fig. 277 Schematic representation of the rear The parking system helps the driver by auto- cle's surroundings, since the system often cross traffic alert assistant: zone monitored matically engaging the brakes to reduce any fails to detect things such as bicycles or around the vehicle while leaving a parking damage. The automatic intervention on the pedestrians. space. brakes takes place when driving in reverse at ● The rear cross traffic alert itself will not approx. 1-12 km/h (1-7 mph. After detecting brake the vehicle to a complete stop. The parking assistant uses the radar sensors that the vehicle is stationary, the system on the rear bumper ››› Fig. 274 to monitor the keeps it that way for around 2 seconds. traffic crossing behind the vehicle as it backs out of a parallel parking space or as it is be- After automatically braking to reduce dam- ing manoeuvred, for example in very low visi- age, the system will not be able to automati- bility conditions. cally brake again for approximately 10 seconds.

1) It is only displayed if the vehicle is equipped with a parking system. 296 Braking and parking

Using the blind spot detector (BSD) Automatic deactivation of the blind spot Braking and parking with parking assistant (RCTA) detector (BSD) The radar sensors of the blind spot detector Activating and deactivating the blind spot with rear cross traffic alert will be automati- Braking system detector (BSD) with parking assistant cally deactivated when, among other rea- (RCTA) sons, one of the sensors is detected to be Control lamps The blind spot detector with parking assistant permanently covered. This may be the case can be switched on and off by accessing the if, for example, there is a layer of snow or ice  It lights up red Assistance systems menu on the dash in front of one of the sensors. Brake fluid level too low ››› page 357 or fault in the panel display using the steering wheel con- The relevant text message will appear in the brake system. trols. If the vehicle is equipped with a multi- dash panel display.  Do not carry on driving! function camera, it can also be accessed by means of the driver assistance systems key Trailer mode  It lights up red located on the main beam headlight lever. The Blind spot detector and the rear cross Electronic parking brake ››› page 299. Open the Assistants menu. traffic alert will be automatically deactivated The warning lamp turns off when the handbrake is re- and it will be impossible to activate them if leased. ●  Blind spot the tow hitch is electrically connected to a ●  Exit Assist trailer or other similar object.  It lights up green As soon as the driver starts to drive with a If the verification box on the control panel is Auto Hold function activated ››› page 301. checked , the functionality will be automat- trailer connected electrically to the vehicle, a ically activated at ignition. message will appear on the instrument panel display indicating that the blind spot detector  It lights up yellow When the blind spot detector is ready to op- and the rear cross traffic alert are deactiva- erate, the indications in the external mirrors Front brake pads worn. ted. Once the trailer has been unhitched from Contact a specialised workshop immediately. will turn on briefly as confirmation. the vehicle, if you want to use the blind spot When the vehicle is restarted, the last adjust- detector and the rear cross traffic alert, you WARNING ment in the system will remain active. will have to reactivate them in the corre- ●  sponding menu. If the brake warning lamp does not go If the blind spot detector was automatically out or if it lights up when driving, the brake deactivated, it will only be possible to restart If the towing hitch is not factory equipped, fluid level in the reservoir is too lo so there the system after turning the vehicle off and then the blind spot detector and the rear is a risk of an accident ››› page 357, Brake restarting it. cross traffic alert will have to be deactivated fluid. Stop the vehicle and do not drive on. manually when driving with a trailer. Obtain technical assistance. » 297 Driving

● If the brake warning lamp lights up  to- Depending on the speed, the braking force If the brakes are not used frequently, or if rust gether with the ABS lamp  this could be and the environmental conditions (e.g. tem- has formed on the disks, it is advisable to due to an ABS fault. When this function perature, air humidity, etc.) noises may be clean off the pads and disks by braking firmly fails, the rear wheels can lock up. Under produced when braking. a few times at a moderately high speed ››› . certain circumstances, the rear of the vehicle may skid, with the danger of losing con- Wet roads or road salt Fault in the brake system trol. Stop and seek technical assistance. In certain situations (for example, on driving If the brake pedal travel should ever increase ● If the  lamp lights up, alone or accom- through flooded areas, in severe downpours suddenly, this may mean that one of the two panied by a warning message on the in- or after washing the vehicle) the braking ac- brake circuits has failed. Drive immediately to strument panel display, please go immedi- tion could be delayed if the discs and pads the nearest specialised workshop and have ately to a specialised workshop to check are damp, or frozen in winter. In this case the the fault repaired. Drive there slowly and re- the brake pads and to replace them if they brakes should be “dried” by pressing the member that you will have to apply more are worn. brake pedal several times. pressure on the brake pedal and allow for longer stopping distances. At high speed and with the windscreen wipers activated, the brake pads will briefly touch Information about the brakes Low brake fluid level the brake discs. This takes place, although Malfunctions can occur in the brake system if New brake pads unnoticeable to the driver, at regular intervals to improve the response time of the brakes the brake fluid level is too low. The brake fluid For the first 200 to 300 km (100 to 200 when they are wet. level is monitored electronically. miles), new brake pads have not yet reached The effectiveness of the brakes can also be their maximum braking capacity, and need to Brake servo be “run in” first. However, you can compen- temporarily reduced if the vehicle is driven for sate for the slightly reduced braking effect by some distance without using the brakes when The brake servo increases the pressure you applying more pressure on the brake pedal. there is a lot of salt on the road in winter. The apply to the brake pedal. It works only when Avoid overloading the brakes while running layer of salt that accumulates on the discs the engine is running. them in. and pads can be removed by gently applying the brakes a few times. WARNING Wear Any anomaly in the brake system can in- Corrosion crease the braking distance, with the re- The rate of wear on the brake pads depends sulting risk of an accident. a great deal on how you drive and the condi- There may be a tendency for corrosion to tions in which the vehicle is operated. This is a form on the discs and dirt to build up on the ● New brake pads and discs must be run in particular problem in urban traffic and short brake pads if the vehicle is used infrequently and do not have the correct friction during stretches, or with very sporty driving. or the brakes are not used very often. the first 200 km (124 miles). This reduced

298 Braking and parking braking capacity may be offset by pressing CAUTION Electronic parking brake on the brake pedal a little harder. ● Never let the brakes “drag” by leaving ● If you are driving on roads which have your foot on the pedal when it is not neces- been salted, braking effectiveness may be sary to brake. This overheats the brakes, re- decreased. sulting in longer stopping distances and ● Brakes can overheat if used excessively greater wear. on slopes. Before driving down a long steep ● Before driving down a long, steep gradi- slope, it is advisable to reduce speed and ent, it is advisable to reduce speed and se- change down into a lower gear or range. lect a lower gear. This makes use of engine Therefore, using the engine brake relieves braking and relieves the brakes. If you still the brakes. have to use the brakes, it is better to brake ● Gentle continuous braking causes the firmly at intervals than to apply the brakes brakes to overheat and the braking dis- continuously. Fig. 278 In the lower part of the centre con- tance will increase. Apply and then release sole: electronic parking brake button the brakes alternately. Note The electronic parking brake replaces the ● Apply the brakes heavily to clean the ● If the brake servo is out of action, for ex- handbrake. brake system only in a suitable traffic situa- ample when the car is being towed, you will tion. Do not put other road users in danger: have to press the brake pedal considerably there is risk of causing an accident. Applying the electronic parking brake harder than normal to make up for the lack ● Ensure the vehicle does not move while in of servo assistance. The electronic parking brake can be activa- neutral, when the engine is stopped. The ted whenever the vehicle is at a standstill, ● If you wish to equip the vehicle with ac- braking distance is increased considerably even when the ignition is switched off. Acti- cessories such as a front spoiler or wheel when the brake servo is not active. covers, it is important that the flow of air to vate it whenever you leave or park the vehi- ● If the brake is subjected to high stresses, the front wheels is not obstructed, other- cle. vapour bubbles may form in the brake sys- wise the brakes can overheat. ●  tem's pipes. This reduces the efficiency of Pull and hold the ››› Fig. 278 button. the brakes. ● The parking brake is activated when the ● Non-standard or damaged front spoilers control light of button ››› Fig. 278 (arrow) is could restrict the airflow to the brakes and on and the red  control lamp on the instru- cause them to overheat. Before purchasing ment panel is always on. accessories please read the relevant in- ● Release the button. » structions.

299 Driving

Disconnecting the electronic parking The parking brake can be prevented from be- ● To stop the braking process, release the  brake ing automatically released by continuously button or press the accelerator.  ● Switch the ignition on. pulling up the ››› Fig. 278 switch when starting off. WARNING ● Press the button  ››› Fig. 278. At the same time step hard on the brake pedal or, if the The electronic parking brake is not discon- The improper use of the electronic parking engine is running, press the accelerator pedal nected until the  button is released. This brake can cause accidents and serious injury. slightly. can facilitate starting off when a heavy load is towed ››› page 332. ● Never use the electronic parking brake to ● The control lamp of button ››› Fig. 278 (ar- stop the vehicle, unless it is an emergency. row) and the red  control lamp on the in- Automatic activation of the electronic Braking distances can be considerably lon- strument panel go out. parking brake when exiting the vehicle in- ger, since, under certain circumstances, correctly only the rear wheels brake. Always use the Automatic release of the electronic park- foot brake. ing brake upon moving off In vehicles with automatic transmission, the ● Never accelerate from the engine when a electronic parking brake is activated auto- The electronic parking brake is automatically gear range or a gear is engaged and the matically when exiting the vehicle incorrectly switched off when starting if, after the driver's engine is running. The vehicle could move, if: door is closed and the driver's seat belt fas- even if the electronic parking brake is acti- tened, any of the following situations take ● The selector lever is in the D/S or R position vated. place: or in the Tiptronic selector gate. CAUTION ● In vehicles with automatic transmission: a ● AND: the vehicle is stationary. gear range is engaged or the vehicle is ● AND: the driver door is open. To prevent the vehicle from unintentionally switched to another one and the accelerator moving when parking it, first apply the electronic parking brake and then remove pedal is lightly pressed. Emergency brake function your foot from the brake pedal. ● In vehicles with manual transmission: the Only use the emergency brake function if you clutch pedal is pressed fully before starting are unable to stop the vehicle with the foot Note off and the accelerator is pedal lightly press- brake ››› . ed. ● In vehicles with a manual gearbox, re- ●  ● To facilitate certain manoeuvres there are Pull and hold the ››› Fig. 278 button in leasing the clutch and accelerating at the exceptions that allow the automatic parking this position to forcefully stop the vehicle. At same time automatically disconnects the brake to be released without the driver's seat the same time, an acoustic warning can be electronic parking brake. belt being fastened. heard. ● If the vehicle battery is flat, it will not be possible to disconnect the electronic

300 Braking and parking parking brake. Use the jump-start The control lamp on button   Conditions for keeping the vehicle station- ››› page 51. ››› Fig. 280 remains on while the Auto Hold ary with the Auto Hold function function is connected. ● When the electronic parking brake is ap- ● The driver door must be closed. plied or released, noises may be heard. Once connected, the Auto Hold function as- ● The driver's seat belt must be fastened. sists the driver in keeping the vehicle station- ● The system performs automatic and au- ● The engine is running. dible tests sporadically in the parked vehi- ary at repeated intervals or for a certain peri- cle if some time elapses without the elec- od of time with the engine running, for exam- Switching the Auto Hold function on and tronic parking brake being used. ple, when going up a slope, when stopped at off traffic lights or in heavy traffic with intermit- tent stops. Pulse button   ››› . The control lamp on the button goes out when the Auto Hold Auto Hold Function When connected, the Auto Hold function au- function is switched off. tomatically prevents the vehicle from rolling when stationary without pressing the brake Automatically engaging and disengaging pedal. the Auto Hold function After detecting that the vehicle is stationary If the Auto Hold function was switched on with and the brake pedal has been released, the the   button before disconnecting Auto Hold function holds the vehicle. The driv- the ignition, the function will remain on after Fig. 279 Related video er can lift their foot off the brake pedal. the ignition is re-connected. When the driver touches the accelerator If the Auto Hold function was not switched on, pedal or accelerates slightly to continue driv- it will automatically remain off next time the ing, the Auto Hold function releases the brake. ignition is engaged. The vehicle moves according to the slope of the road. The Auto Hold function connects automatically if the following conditions are met If the vehicle is stationary and one of the con- (all points must be met at the same time ditions required by the Auto Hold function is ››› ): impaired, it disconnects itself and the button's control light goes out ››› Fig. 280. The elec- 1. The vehicle is kept stationary with the tronic parking brake connects automatically, brake pedal on a flat surface or on a Fig. 280 In the lower part of the centre con- if necessary, to park the vehicle safely ››› . slope. sole: Auto Hold function button. 2. The engine rotates “correctly”. »

301 Driving

The Auto Hold function is automatically hill or stop it sufficiently, for example, on  It lights up turned off if the following conditions are slippery or frozen surfaces. met: ABS faulty or does not work.

1. If any of the conditions mentioned on Note The control lamps light up together when the ››› page 301, Conditions for keeping Before entering a car wash, always switch ignition is switched on and should turn off af- the vehicle stationary with the Au- off the Auto Hold function, because if the ter approximately 2 seconds. This is the time to Hold function are no longer met. electronic parking brake is automatically taken for the function check. 2. If the engine is running irregularly or an connected, it may cause damage. anomaly is detected. 3. If the engine is turned off or stalls. Brake assist systems 4. Manual gearbox: The clutch and the ac- Stabilisation and brake as- Electronic Stability Control (ESC) celerator are pressed at the same time. sistance systems The ESC helps to improve safety. It reduces Automatic gearbox: If the accelerator is the tendency to skid and improves the stabili- pressed Control lamps ty and roadholding of the vehicle. The ESC 5. Automatic gearbox: If any of the tyres detects critical handling situations, such as has only minimal contact with the  It lights up vehicle understeer or oversteer, or wheelspin ground, e.g. in the case of axle articula- on the driving wheels. It stabilises the vehicle tion. Fault in the ESC or ABS, or disconnection caused by by braking individual wheels or by reducing the system. the engine torque. The warning lamp will WARNING The ESC works in combination with the ABS. If the flash on the instrument panel when the ESC is ABS fails, the lamp also lights up. The smart technology incorporated into intervening . the Auto Hold function cannot defy the The ESC includes the anti-lock brake system laws of physics; it only works within the lim-  Flashes (ABS), the hydraulic brake assist (HBA), the its of the system. The greater convenience ESC or ASR activated. traction control system (ASR), electronic dif- provided by the Auto Hold function should ferential lock (EDS), electronic torque control never tempt you to take any risk that may compromise safety.  It lights up (XDS) and tractor-trailer sway mitigation*. ● Never leave the vehicle running and with ASR manually deactivated. ESC also helps stabilise the vehicle by the Auto Hold function switched on. changing the torque. Or: ESC in Sport mode ››› page 304. ● The Auto Hold function cannot always The ASR can be deactivated when wheel spin keep the vehicle stationary uphill or down- is desirable ››› page 304.

302 Braking and parking

Anti-lock brake system (ABS) To prevent the disc brake of the braked wheel The XDS can detect and correct this effect ABS prevents the wheels from locking up un- from overheating, the EDL cuts out automati- via the sensors and signals of the ESC. cally if subjected to excessive loads. The ve- der braking until the vehicle has reached a Via the ESC, the XDS will brake the inside hicle can still be driven. The EDL will switch on virtual standstill. You can continue to steer the wheel and counter the excess driving torque again automatically when the brake has vehicle even when the brakes are on full. of that wheel. This means that the requested cooled down. Keep your foot on the brake pedal and do not trajectory is much more precise. pump the brakes. You will feel the brake pedal XDS works in combination with the ESC and is pulsate while the ABS is working. Tractor-trailer sway mitigation* always active, even when ASR is disconnec- If the vehicle is pulling a trailer, it will control If the running gear or brake system is modi- ted, or when the ESC is in Sport mode or dis- the following: tractor-trailers tend to sway. fied, the effectiveness of the ABS could be se- connected. When the swaying of the trailer is felt by the verely limited. vehicle and detected by the ESC, it will auto- Multi-collision brake matically brake the towing vehicle within the Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA) limits of the system and mitigate the sway. In an accident, the multi-collision brake can The brake assist system can reduce the re- Tractor-trailer sway mitigation is not available help the driver by braking to avoid the risk of quired braking distance. The braking force is in all countries ››› page 338. skidding during the accident and causing automatically boosted if you press the brake other collisions. pedal quickly in an emergency. You must Electronic engine torque management The multi-collision brake works for front, side keep pressing the brake pedal until the dan- (XDS) or rear accidents, when the airbag control ger has passed. When taking a curve, the driveshaft differen- unit records its activation level and the acci- tial allows the outer wheel to turn at a higher dent takes place at a speed of over 10 km/h Traction control system (ASR) speed than the inner wheel. In this way, the (6 mph). The ESC automatically brakes the In the event of wheelspin, the traction control wheel that is turning faster (outer wheel) re- vehicle, as long as the accident has not dam- system reduces the engine torque to match ceives less drive torque than the inner wheel. aged the ESC, the brake hydraulics or the on- the amount of grip available. This helps the This may mean that in certain situations the board network car to start moving, accelerate or climb a torque delivered to the inner wheel is too The following actions control automatic brak- gradient. high, causing the wheels to spin. On the other ing during the accident: hand, the outer wheel is receiving a lower Electronic differential lock (EDL) drive torque than it could transmit. This can ● When the driver presses the accelerator, When the EDL detects wheelspin, it brakes cause a loss of grip on the drive axle, in this the automatic braking does not take place. » the spinning wheel and directs the power to case the front axle, which results in under- the other driven wheel. This function is active steer or “lengthening” of the trajectory. up to approximately 100 km/h (62 mph). 303 Driving

● When the braking pressure through press- ● Accelerate with caution on slippery sur- the engine is running and includes the ABS, ing the brake pedal is greater than the sys- faces (for example, icy or snow-covered). EDS and ASR systems. tem’s braking pressure the vehicle will brake Despite the control systems, the driven The ASR function should only be switched off automatically. wheels could spin, affecting the stability of in situations in which traction is insufficient. ● Multi-collision braking will not be available the vehicle: risk of accident! if ESC is malfunctioning. Depending on the finishes and versions, there is the possibility of disconnecting only the Note WARNING ASR or activating the ESC in “Sport” mode. ● The ABS and ASR will only operate cor- Driving at high speed on icy, slippery wet rectly if the four wheels have identical Disconnecting and connecting the ASR ground can result in loss of vehicle control tyres. Any differences in the rolling radius and serious injury to the driver and passen- of the tyres can cause the system to re- ● The ASR can be disconnected and connec- gers. duce engine power when this is not desired. ted using the Easy Connect system page 82. In vehicles with a driver informa- ● The ESC, ABS, ASR, EDS and the electron- ● The regulating processes of the systems ››› tion system* the corresponding indication will ic torque control system cannot exceed the can make noises due to their operation. limits imposed by the laws of physics. Al- be displayed. ● If the warning lamp  or  lights up, ways bear this in mind, especially on wet or there could be a fault ››› page 79. When the ASR is disconnected, the control slippery roads. If you notice the systems  cutting in, you should reduce your speed ● Any modifications made to the vehicle warning light lights up on the instrument immediately to suit the road and traffic (for example, to the engine, brake system, cluster. conditions. Do not be encouraged to take running gear or to the combination of risks by the presence of more safety sys- wheels and tyres) may affect the operation Disconnecting and connecting the ESC in tems. If you do, an accident may occur. of the ABS, ASR and EDS. “Sport” mode ● Please remember that the accident risk ● In “Sport” mode, the ESC can be discon- always increases if you drive fast, espe- nected and connected using the Easy Con- cially in corners or on a slippery road, or if Connecting and disconnecting the nect system ››› page 82. In vehicles with a you follow too close behind the vehicle in ESC and ASR driver information system* the corresponding front of you. The ESC, ABS, brake assist, indication will be displayed. EDS and the electronic torque control sys- The ESC is switched on automatically when tem cannot prevent accidents: risk of acci- the engine is started, and only works when When “Sport” mode is connected, the inter- dents! ventions of the ESC to stabilise the vehicle,

304 Braking and parking

1) 2) and the anti-slip regulation (ASR ) interven- ESC in “Snow” mode the driving wheels could spin and the vehi-  tions are limited. In addition, the control Turn the Driving Experience button to select cle could skid. lamp lights up on the instrument panel. the “Snow” mode and connect it ››› page 264. Traction control system (ASR) 2) Note ESC in “Offroad” mode interventions adjust to the adhesion of snowy If the ASR is disconnected or the Sport Turn the Driving Experience button to select roads. mode is selected, cruise control* will be the Offroad mode and connect it To disconnect the “Snow” mode, select a dif- switched off. page 264. The interventions of the ESC, as ››› ferent driving mode. well as of the ASR, EDS and the ABS, adapt to irregular terrain. WARNING In the following exceptional situations it may The ESC Sport mode should be activated Parking make sense to activate the Offroad mode to only when traffic conditions and the ability allow the wheels to spin: of the driver allow it. Danger of skidding! To park the vehicle ● With ESC in Sport mode, the stabilising ● When “swinging” the vehicle to get it un- When parking your vehicle, all legal require- stuck. function will be limited to allow for a sportier drive. The driving wheels could spin and ments should be observed. ● Driving in deep snow or on loose surfaces. the vehicle could skid. Always note the following points when park- ● When driving on rough terrain with much of ing the vehicle: the car's weight is lifted off the wheels (axle WARNING articulation). ● Park the vehicle on a suitable surface ››› . You should only activate the Offroad Mode ● ● Connect the electronic parking brake Steep descents with braking on unpaved or disable the ASR if the experience of the page 299. terrain. driver and traffic conditions allow it. Dan- ››› ger of skidding! ● For an automatic gearbox, move the selec- For your safety we recommend that you turn tor lever to position P. off the Offroad mode when it is not absolute- ● With the Offroad mode activated, the ly necessary. stabilisation function is limited. In particu- ● Switch the engine off and remove the key lar, if the road is too smooth and slippery, from the ignition. Turn the steering wheel To disconnect the “Offroad” mode, select a slightly to engage the steering lock. » different driving mode.

1) In vehicles with 4-wheel drive, the ASR is disconnected completely ››› . 2) Only for 4Drive models. 305 Driving

● With a manual gearbox, engage first gear Note Help with parking and ma- on flat ground and slopes, or even reverse gear on hills, and release the clutch pedal. In vehicles with automatic transmission, the key can only be removed from the ignition noeuvring ● When leaving the vehicle, take all keys with when the lever is in position P. you. Assisted parking system

Additionally, on steep slopes and inclines (Park Assist)* Before switching off the engine, rotate the steering wheel so that if the vehicle should Introduction move, it will be held by the kerb. The Park Assist system is an additional ● On slopes, turn the front wheels so that ParkPilot function ››› page 314 and helps the they are against the edge of the kerb. driver to: ● Uphill, turn the wheels towards the centre of ● find a suitable parking space, the road. ● select a parking mode, WARNING ● park driving in reverse in suitable perpen- ● Avoid parking the vehicle where the hot dicular and parallel spaces, exhaust system could ignite inflammable ● park driving forwards in suitable perpendic- materials, such as dry grass, low bushes, ular spaces, spilt fuel or flammable materials. ● exit a parking space driving forwards from a ● Do not leave passengers inside a closed parallel space. vehicle, they may not be able to open doors or windows. Locked doors hinder the In vehicles with a Park Assist system and fac- possibility of a rescue. tory infotainment system, the front, rear and ● Children should not be left alone in the side areas are represented, and the position vehicle. They could tamper with the hand- of obstacles is shown relative to the vehicle. brake or the gears, which could cause the The Park Assist system is subject to certain vehicle to move without control. limitations inherent to the system and its use ● Depending on weather conditions, it may requires special attention by the driver ››› . become extremely hot or cold inside the vehicle. This can be fatal.

306 Help with parking and manoeuvring

WARNING WARNING not apply it directly unless very briefly and always from a distance of more than 10 cm. The technology used in the park assist sys- Quick turns of the steering wheel when tem involves a series of limitations inherent parking or exiting a parking space with ● A registration plate or plate holder on the in the actual system and in the use of ultra- Park Assist can cause serious injury. front with larger than the space for the registration plate, or a registration plate that is sonic sensors. The use of Park Assist should ● Do not hold the steering wheel during curved or warped can cause: never tempt you to take any risk that may manoeuvres to park or exit a parking space compromise safety. The system is not a re- until the system requests it. Doing so disa- – false detections, placement for driver awareness. bles the system during the manoeuvre, re- – loss of sensor visibility. ● Any accidental movement of the vehicle sulting in the parking being cancelled. – cancellation of the parking manoeuvre could result in serious injury. or defective parking. ● Adapt your speed and driving style at all CAUTION ● If one of the ultrasonic sensors is dam- times to suit visibility, weather, road and ● aged, the area corresponding to that group traffic conditions. In certain circumstances, the ultrasonic sensors do not detect objects such as trail- of sensors (front or rear) is deactivated and ● Certain surfaces of objects and gar- er tongues, bars, fences, posts or thin trees, cannot be activated until the fault is cor- ments do not reflect the ultrasound sen- or an open (or opening) rear lid, which rected. However, you can still use the sensors' signals. The system cannot detect, at could damage the vehicle. sors of the other bumper as per usual. If least correctly, these objects or people there is a fault in the system, consult a spe- ● Retrofitting of certain accessories to the wearing such clothes. cialist workshop. SEAT recommends visiting vehicle, such as a bicycle rack, may inter- a SEAT dealership for this. ● Ultrasound sensor signals may be affec- fere with the operation of the Park Assist ted by external sound sources. In certain system and cause damage. circumstances this may prevent them from ● Note detecting people or objects. The Park Assist system uses as a reference parked vehicles, curbs and other ob- ● In order to guarantee good system oper- ● The ultrasound sensors have blind spots jects. Make sure that the tyres and wheels ation, keep the ultrasound sensors of the in which obstacles and people are not reg- are not damaged while parking. If necessa- bumper clean, free of snow or ice, and do istered. ry, opportunely interrupt the parking ma- not cover them with adhesives or other ob- ● Monitor the area around the vehicle at all noeuvre to avoid damaging the vehicle. jects. times, since the ultrasound sensors do not ● The ultrasound sensors on the bumper ● Certain sources of noise, such as rough detect small children, animals or certain may be damaged or shifted in the event of asphalt or paving stones and the noise of objects in all situations. a collision, for example, when entering or other vehicles can induce the Park Assist exiting a parking space. system or ParkPilot to give erroneous warn- ● If you use high-pressure or vapour equip- ings. » ment to clean the ultrasound sensors, do

307 Driving

● In order to become familiar with the sys- ● Speed when passing next to the parking ● Press the  button. tem and its functions, SEAT recommends space (parallel parking): do not exceed ap- ● The speed exceeds approximately 7 km/h that you practice operating the Park Assist prox. 40 km/h (25 mph). (4 mph). system in an area where there is not too ● Speed when passing next to the parking ● The driver takes hold of the steering wheel. much traffic or in a car park. space (angle parking): do not exceed approx. ● The parking manoeuvre does not end within 20 km/h (12 mph). 6 minutes from the activation of automatic ● Keep a distance between 0.5 and 2.0 me- steering. Description of the parking assist tres when driving past the parking space. ● There is a fault in the system (the system is system ● Space length (parallel parking): vehicle temporarily unavailable). length + 0.8 meters. ● ASR is switched off. ● Space width (angle parking): vehicle width ● ASR or ESC intervene with regulation. + 0.8 meters. ● The driver door is opened. ● Do not exceed approximately 7 km/h (4 mph) when parking. To restart the manoeuvre it is necessary that none of these things occur and that the  Requirements for leaving the parking button is pressed again. space (only for parallel parking) ● The traction control system (ASR) must be Special characteristics turned on ››› page 304. The Park Assist system is subject to certain Fig. 281 In the upper part of the centre con- ● Space length: length of the vehicle + 0.5 limitations inherent to the system. For exam- sole: button to switch on the Park Assist system. metres. ple, it is therefore not possible to enter or exit a parking space on sharp bends. The components of the Park Assist system ● Do not exceed approximately 7 km/h are the ultrasonic sensors located in the front (4 mph) when exiting the parking space. While entering or exiting a parking space, a and rear bumpers, the  button ››› Fig. 281 to brief signal sounds to prompt the driver to switch the system on and off and the mes- Prematurely stopping or automatically in- change between forward and reverse gears sages on the instrument panel display. terrupting the manoeuvres for parking or (depending on the case). In successive ma- exiting a parking space noeuvres, the assistant tells the driver to Prerequisites for parking Park Assist interrupts the manoeuvres for change gears, at the latest, when the continuous audible signal is given (object present at ● The traction control system (ASR) must be parking or exiting a parking space in any of a distance of ≤30 cm) by Park Pilot. turned on ››› page 304. the following cases:

308 Help with parking and manoeuvring

When the Park Assist system turns the steer- Selecting a parking mode  Reverse parallel parking. ing wheel with the vehicle stationary, the in-  Reverse angle parking. strument panel also displays the symbol .  Forward angle parking. Keep the brake pedal depressed while the symbol remains on the dash panel display to turn the wheels with the vehicle stopped. This Selecting a parking mode after passing in way, the system will require fewer manoeu- front of the space vres to complete the parking action. After activating the Park Assist system and after detecting a parking space, the display on Trailer mode the instrument panel proposes a parking mode. The Park Assist system selects the The Park Assist system cannot be switched parking mode automatically. The selected on if the factory-fitted towing bracket mode is shown on the instrument panel dis- ››› page 332 is electrically connected to a Fig. 282 On the instrument panel display: view play Fig. 282. The reduced display of oth- trailer. of the parking assist system with reduced view. ››› er possible parking modes is also shown ››› Fig. 283. If the mode selected by the sys- After changing a wheel tem does not correspond to the desired If, after changing a wheel, the vehicle stops mode, you can select another mode by entering and exiting parking spaces correct- pressing the  button ››› Fig. 281. ly, the circumference of the new wheel may be different and the system may need to ● The necessary conditions to park with Park adapt to it. The adaptation is automatic and Assist have to be met ››› page 308. takes place during driving. Making turns slow- ● Press the  button. ly and in both directions (20 km/h [12 mph]) ● A control lamp on the  button lights up for a few minutes may contribute to this when the system is switched on. Additionally, adaptation process ››› in Introduction on the selected parking mode is shown on the page 307. instrument panel display and the reduced display shows another parking mode it can be changed to. Fig. 283 On the instrument panel display: indication of parking modes. ● Turn on the corresponding turn signal towards the side of the road where you are Parking assist has the following 3 parking parking. The instrument panel displays the modes: side corresponding to the road. By default, if »

309 Driving

the turn signal is not on, it parks on the right in fic and drive the vehicle past the parking ● Press the  button once. the direction of traffic. space. ● A control lamp on the  button lights up ● If necessary, press the  button again to when the system is switched on. Additionally, change to the next parking mode. Special case of perpendicular parking the selected parking mode is shown on the space to park forwards without driving ● Once you have switched to all possible instrument panel display without reduced past first parking modes, if the  button is pressed display. again, the system switches off. ● The necessary conditions to park with Park ● Release the steering wheel ››› in Intro- Assist have to be met ››› page 308. ● Press the  button again to switch the sys- duction on page 307. tem back on. ● Drive forward towards the parking space while paying attention to traffic and stop the ● Follow the instructions displayed on the in- vehicle. strument panel while paying attention to traf-

310 Help with parking and manoeuvring

Parking with the parking assist system

Fig. 284 On the instrument panel display: parallel parking.  Finding a parking space.  Park- ing position.  Manoeuvring.

Fig. 285 On the instrument panel display: angle parking.  Finding a parking space.  Parking position.  Manoeuvring.

1 Message to move forwards The necessary conditions have to be met to or ››› Fig. 285 . The space is considered 2 Your vehicle park with Park Assist ››› page 308 and the “appropriate” if the display on the instrument parking mode must be selected panel shows the message to park 5 . 3 Parked vehicle ››› page 309. ● Stop the vehicle and, after a brief pause, 4 Parking space detected engage the reverse gear. Parking 5 Message to park ● Release the steering wheel in Intro- ● Look at the display on the instrument panel ››› 6 Message to press the brake pedal duction on page 307. » to see if the space has been detected as “ap- 7 Progress bar propriate” and if the correct position for parking has been reached ››› Fig. 284 

311 Driving

● Please note the following message: Auto- message is displayed on the instrument pan- Leaving a parking space with the matic steering enabled. Pay atten- el and, in some cases, an acoustic signal parking assist system (only for par- tion to your surroundings. While you sounds. keep watch around you, carefully start accel- allel parking) erating up to no more than 7 km/h (4 mph). Progress bars During the parking manoeuvre, the system The progress bar only takes charge of the steering. You, as the ››› Fig. 284 7 and ››› Fig. 285 7 on the driver, have to accelerate, engage the screen of the instrument panel displays the clutch if necessary, change gears and relative distance to be covered. The greater brake. the distance, the fuller the progress bar. ● Reverse until the continuous ParkPilot sig- When driving forward, the content of the pro- nal sounds; OR: reverse until the indication to gress bar decreases upwards, and when remove forward appears on the instrument versing, it decreases downwards. panel display ››› Fig. 284  or ››› Fig. 285  ; OR: reverse until the Park Assist fin- Note Fig. 286 On the instrument panel display: exit ished message appears on the instrument If the manoeuvre is terminated prematurely a parallel parking space. panel display. The progress bar 7 indicates during parking, the result may not be the the distance to cover page 312. ››› best. 1 Parked vehicle ● Press the brake pedal until the parking as- 2 Your vehicle in reverse gear sist system completes the steering wheel turns; OR: until the symbol  goes out on the 3 Progress bar to indicate the distance left instrument panel screen. to cover ● Select first gear. 4 Message giving the proposed manoeuvre to exit the parking space ● Move forward until the continuous ParkPilot signal sounds; OR: move forward until the re- Leaving a parking space (parallel parking) verse indication appears on the instrument panel display. The Park Assist system steers The necessary conditions to exit a parking the vehicle forward and back until it centres it space with Park Assist have to be met in the space ››› Fig. 284  or ››› Fig. 285 . ››› page 308. ● For best results, wait at the end of each ● Press the  button ››› Fig. 281. A control manoeuvre until the Park Assist system has lamp on the  button lights up when the sys- finished turning the steering wheel. The park- tem is switched on. ing manoeuvre ends when a corresponding 312 Help with parking and manoeuvring

● Turn on the corresponding turn signal to- ● The vehicle can exit the space when a cor- Automatic braking to reduce damages wards the road you will enter when exiting the responding message is displayed on the in- Depending on certain conditions, the Park parking space. strument panel and, in some cases, an Assist system can automatically brake the ● Select reverse gear. acoustic signal sounds. Take charge of the vehicle when faced with an obstacle, briefly steering with the turning angle set by the Park ● Release the steering wheel in Intro- actioning and holding down the brake ped- ››› Assist system. duction on page 307. Please note the fol- al ››› . Following this the driver must press lowing message: Automatic steering en- ● Paying attention to the traffic, exit the park- the brake pedal. ing space. abled. Pay attention to your sur- Automatic braking intervention to reduce roundings. While you keep watch around damage leads to the parking manoeuvre fin- you, carefully start accelerating up to no ishing. more than 7 km/h (4 mph). When exiting the Automatic operation of the brakes parking space, the system only takes charge by the parking assist system WARNING of the steering. You, as the driver, have to The automatic braking intervention by Park accelerate, engage the clutch if necessa- Park Assist helps the driver by automatically Assist should never tempt you to take any ry, change gears and brake. braking in certain situations. risk that may compromise safety. The sys- ● Reverse until the continuous ParkPilot sig- The driver is always responsible for braking in tem is not a replacement for driver aware- nal sounds; OR: reverse until the instrument time ››› . ness. panel display shows the forward indication. ● The Park Assist system is subject to cer- The progress bar ››› Fig. 286 3 indicates the Automatic braking intervention to avoid tain limitations inherent to the system. In distance to cover ››› page 312. exceeding the speed limit certain situations, the automatic braking ● Press the brake pedal until the parking as- intervention may only work in a limited way To avoid exceeding the allowed speed of ap- sist system completes the steering wheel or not work at all. prox. 7 km/h (4 mph) when entering or leaving turns; OR: press the brake pedal until the ● Always be ready to use the brakes your- a parking space, the brakes may activate au- symbol  goes out on the instrument panel self! tomatically. After automatically activating screen. the brakes, the manoeuvres to enter or exit a ● The automatic braking intervention will ● Move forward until the continuous ParkPilot parking space may continue. end after approximately 1.5 seconds. After- signal sounds; OR: move forward until the re- wards, brake the vehicle yourself. The brakes are only automatically activated verse indication appears on the instrument once for each attempt to enter or exit a park- panel display. The Park Assist system steers ing space. If the speed of approximately the vehicle forward and back until it can exit 7 km/h (4 mph) is exceeded again, the corre- the space. sponding operation is halted.

313 Driving

Parking aid parking and ma- CAUTION ● If the parking distance warning system is ignored, the vehicle could suffer considera- Parking distance warning system functions noeuvring (ParkPilot) ble damage. can be affected by different factors that can cause damage: ● Damage to the radiator grille, bumper, Introduction wheel arch and vehicle underbody can ● Under certain circumstances, the system modify the orientation of the sensors. This does not detect or display certain objects: These assist systems help you when parking can affect the parking aid function. Have and manoeuvring: – Chains, trailer draw bars, bars, fences, the function checked by a specialised posts and thin trees. workshop. – Park assist plus. It is an assistant that gives – Objects that are located above the a visual and audio warning of obstacles de- ● A number plate or number plate holder sensors, such as protrusions in a wall. tected in front and behind the vehicle with dimensions that exceed the space for ››› page 315. – Objects with certain surfaces or struc- the number plate, or a cured or deformed tures, such as wire mesh fences or pow- number plate can cause false detections or – Rear parking aid. An audio and visual as- der snow. a loss of visibility for the sensors. sistant that warns of obstacles located be- ● Certain surfaces of objects and gar- hind the vehicle page 319. ››› ments do not reflect the ultrasound sen- Note sors' signals. The system cannot detect ● The display on the Easy Connect screen WARNING these objects or people wearing such shows a slight time delay. ● Always pay attention, by looking directly, clothes correctly. ● In certain situations, the system can give to traffic and the area around the vehicle. ● Sensor signals may be affected by exter- a warning even though there is no obstacle Assistance systems are not a replacement nal sound sources. This may prevent them in the detected area; for driver awareness. Responsibility always from detecting people or objects. lies with the driver. – rough or cobbled surfaces or with long ● If the system warns you of the proximity grass, ● The sensors have blind spots in which ob- of a low obstacle, please note that after stacles and people are not detected. Pay being detected by the system, the obstacle – external ultrasound sources, such as special attention to children and animals. in question may disappear from the meas- other vehicles equipped with ultra- ● Always keep visual control of the sur- urement sensors as the vehicle moves clos- sound systems, roundings: use the mirrors for additional er, and the system will no longer warn of its – downpours, heavy snow, hail or dense help. presence. In certain circumstances, ob- exhaust gases, jects such as high kerbs that could damage – if the number plate is not perfectly se- the underside of the vehicle are not detec- cured to the bumper surface, ted. – in gradient changes.

314 Help with parking and manoeuvring

● In order to guarantee good operation, Parking System Plus* B 1.60 m keep the sensors clean, free of snow and C 0.90 m ice, and do not cover them with stickers or Description other objects. As you approach the obstacle, the frequency ● If you use high-pressure or vapour equip- of the audible signals will increase. The signal ment for cleaning, do not apply it directly, will sound continuously at around 0.30 m: unless you do so very briefly, and always Stop! keep a distance of more than 10 cm away. If separation is maintained, the warning vol- ● Fitting certain accessories to the front of ume reduces after about 4 seconds. the vehicle, such as a plate holder with ad- In order to view the entire periphery of the ve- vertising, may interfere with the operation of the Park Assist. hicle, the vehicle must be moved a few metres forwards or backwards. Thus, the missing ● We recommend that you practice park- areas are screened and obstacles at the ing in an area without traffic. sides of the vehicle are displayed C . ● The volume and tone of the signals and Fig. 287 Parking Aid display on the Easy Con- indications can be changed ››› page 319. nect system screen. Special features of ParkPilot with Area ● Please observe information on towing a View trailer ››› page 320. Parking aid plus assists the driver by giving visual and audio warnings about obstacles In the following situations the screened area detected in front of and behind the vehicle. on the side of the vehicle is automatically hidden: The bumpers are fitted with sensors. When an obstacle is detected, it is indicated by audible ● When a vehicle door is opened. signals and in the Easy Connect system ● When the ASR is switched off. ››› Fig. 287. ● When there is ASR or ESC regulation. When moving close to an obstacle, it is possi- ● If the vehicle remains stationary for more ble to know if the obstacle is in front of the ve- than approximately 3 minutes. hicle or behind it by choosing different sounds. The approximate measurement range of the sensors is:

A 1.20 m

315 Driving

Parking Aid operation ● OR: if the vehicle moves backwards. Automatic activation

Automatic disconnection of Parking Aid ● Move the selector lever to position P. ● OR: drive forwards at 15 km/h (9 mph) or faster.

Temporary suppression of sound in Park- ing Aid ● Press the  function button.

Fig. 288 Centre console: parking aid button. Change from reduced view to full view Fig. 289 Miniature indication of automatic ac- ● Select reverse gear. tivation. Manually connecting and disconnecting ● OR: press the car icon on the reduced view. the parking aid When the parking aid plus connects automatically, a diagram of the vehicle and the ● Press the  button once. Switch to the reverse assist image (Rear segments will appear on the left of the dis- View Camera “RVC”) play ››› Fig. 289. Manual disconnection of Parking Aid dis- ● Select reverse gear. play (the audible sounds remain active) It only operates every time the speed is re- ● OR press the RVC function button. duced below 15 km/h (9 mph) for the first ● Press a button on the main menu of the fac- time. tory-assembled infotainment system. A short confirmation signal will be heard and ● OR press the BACK  function button. the button symbol will light up when the sys- If it is switched off using the  button, one of tem is switched on. the following actions must be taken for it to Automatic connection of Parking Aid reactivate automatically: ● Select reverse gear. ● Switch off the ignition and switch it on ● OR: If you drive forward at a speed of less again. than 15 km/h (9 mph) and you encounter an ● OR: drive forward at over 15 km/h (9 mph) obstacle, it is detected when it is approx. less approx. than 95 cm. away. If the automatic connec- ● OR: move the lever into position P and pack tion is activated, a reduced display is shown again. ››› Fig. 289. 316 Help with parking and manoeuvring

● OR: switch the automatic activation on and Visual indication segments If an obstacle is located in the vehicle’s way, off in the Easy Connect system. the corresponding audible warning will sound. The automatic activation of the parking aid can be switched on and off in the Easy Con- When the penultimate segment is displayed, nect system ››› page 82: the vehicle has reached the collision zone. In the collision zone, the obstacles are repre- ● Switch the ignition on. sented in red, including those out of the path. ● Select: infotainment button  > SETTINGS Stop the vehicle! ››› in Introduction on > Parking and manoeuvring. page 314, ››› in Introduction on page 314 ! ● Select Automatic activation. If the box is checked , the function is connected. In the event the car is equipped with the Top View Camera system, Park Assist visual guid- If activated automatically, an audible sound Fig. 290 Parking Aid display on the Easy Con- nect system screen. ance will appear in accordance with the view warning will only be given when obstacles in selected in the Top View Camera system. front are at a distance of less than 50 cm. ap- The optical indication of the segments works prox. as follows: Setting the indications and audio CAUTION – White segments: the obstacle is more signals The automatic connection of the Parking than approx. 30 cm away from the path or in the direction opposite to travel. Aid only works when you are driving slowly. The indications and audio signal settings are If driving style is not adapted to the circum- They are also displayed when the elec- in Easy Connect* ››› page 82. stances, an accident and serious injury or tronic parking brake is activated. damage may be caused. – Yellow segments: the obstacles lie on Automatic activation the vehicle’s path and are at a distance  on –  off. of less than approx. 30 cm away.

– Red segments: obstacles are less than Front volume* approx. 30 cm away. Volume in the front and rear area. With the Media System Plus, Navi System or Navi System Plus, yellow lines show the ex- Front sound settings/sharpness* pected trajectory based on turns of the steer- Sound tone in the front area. » ing wheel.

317 Driving

Rear volume* Trailer mode Depending on the equipment, if the Parking Volume in the rear area. Aid is active, the braking while manoeuvring function activates emergency braking when it detects an obstacle in the vehicle’s path that Rear sound settings/sharpness* could cause a collision, driving forwards or in Sound tone in the rear area. reverse.

Adjust volume The function will not brake if the Parking Aid is activated automatically. For the system to When the parking aid is switched on, the vol- operate, manoeuvring speed must be be- ume of the audio source will be reduced, de- tween 2.5 and 10 km/h (between 1.5 and 6 pending on the selected option. mph) for the front area and between 1.5 and 10 km/h (between 1 and 6 mph) for the rear. Fig. 291 Parking assist display on the screen Following an intervention, the braking while Error messages with trailer attached. manoeuvring function will be inactive in the same direction of travel for 5 metres. Once If a an error or fault message appears on the On vehicles with a factory-fitted trailer hitch, the gear is changed, or the selector lever’s instrument panel in Parking assist, there is a when the trailer is connected, the rear sen- position is changed, the function will be ac- fault. sors will not activate when reverse gear is engaged or button  is pressed. Therefore, any tive again. The Parking Aid’s limitations apply. If the fault doesn't disappear before discon- objects behind or to the side of the vehicle The manoeuvre braking function is set in the necting the ignition, it will not be indicated will not be indicated on the screen and no Easy Connect system with button  > SET- next time the parking aid is connected. audio signals will sound. TINGS > Parking and manoeuvring. If a rear sensor is faulty, only the obstacles in The screen will only display objects detected ●  on – permits the use of the braking while area A are displayed ››› Fig. 287. If a front at the front, and the vehicle's trajectory will manoeuvring function. sensor is faulty, only the obstacles in area B be hidden. are displayed. Symbol  is displayed. ●  off – does not permit the use of the braking while manoeuvring function. We recommend taking the vehicle to a specialised workshop to have the fault repaired. Manoeuvre braking function* Temporary suppression of emergency 3 Only valid with Parking System Plus braking

The emergency braking function is used to ● When the function is deactivated with the minimise damage in the event of a collision. Manoeuvre braking button that appears on

318 Help with parking and manoeuvring the Parking assist screen of the Easy Con- Central area: 1.60 m Manual disconnection of Parking Aid dis- nect system. play (the audible sounds remain active) As you approach the obstacle, the frequency ● Whenever any of the car doors, rear lid or ● of the audible signals will increase. The signal Press a button on the main menu of the fac- bonnet are opened. will sound continuously at around 0.30 m: tory-assembled infotainment system. Stop! ››› in Introduction on page 314, ● OR press the BACK  function button. ››› in Introduction on page 314! Temporary suppression of sound in Park- Rear parking aid* If the separation is maintained, the warning ing Aid volume is reduced after about 4 seconds. Description ● Press the  function button. If you have the Top View Camera* system installed, you can- The rear parking aid is an audible and visual Parking Aid operation not use the temporary suppression of sound assistant that warns of obstacles located be- in Parking Aid. hind the vehicle. Parking Aid connection Change from reduced view to full view There are sensors integrated in the rear ● Select reverse gear. bumper. When they detect an obstacle, you ● Select reverse gear. are alerted by audible warnings and visually Parking Aid disconnection ● OR: on vehicles fitted with reverse assist on the Easy Connect system. ● Place the selector level in position P, N or D (Rear View Camera “RVC”) click on the car If the Top View Camera* is installed, the rear (for automatic gearboxes) or disengage re- icon of the reduced display. parking aid will issue an audible warning verse (for manual gearboxes). about objects near the rear of the vehicle, Switch to the reverse assist image (Rear and the Top View Camera* image will be Set the lever to the N or D position to maintain View Camera “RVC”) available on the Easy Connect screen, giving the system active for approximately 8 sec- ● Select reverse gear. onds before switching off. During that time, a real image of the objects around the car. ● Parking assist will switch off if: OR: press the RVC function button. Make particularly sure that the sensors are not covered by adhesives, residues, dirt and ● The selector lever is moved to position P. Setting the indications and audio signals the like, as this could affect the system's op- ● OR: the vehicle accelerates to approx. The indications and audio signal settings are eration. Cleaning instructions ››› page 377. 15 km/h (9 mph) or faster. in Easy Connect* ››› page 82. The approximate measurement range of the If the Top View Camera* is installed, rear ● Rear volume*: volume in the rear area. rear sensors is: parking aid will be automatically deactivated ● Rear sound settings/treble*: sound Side area: 0.60 m when disengaging reverse gear. tone in the rear area. »

319 Driving

● Lower volume: when the parking aid is Visual indication segments Whenever the obstacle is located in the vehi- switched on, the volume of the audio source cle’s direction of travel, the corresponding will be reduced, depending on the selected audible warning will sound. option. As the vehicle approaches an obstacle, the segments are displayed closer to the vehicle. Error messages When the penultimate segment is displayed, If a an error or fault message appears on the this means that the vehicle has reached the instrument panel in Parking assist, there is a collision zone. In the collision zone, the obsta- fault. cles are represented in red (including those out of the path). Do not continue to reverse If the fault doesn't disappear before discon- in Introduction on page 314, in necting the ignition, it will not be indicated ››› ››› Introduction on page 314! next time the parking aid is connected. Fig. 292 Parking Aid display on the Easy Con- If there is a fault in a sensor, the  symbol is nect system screen. If you are equipped with the Top View displayed on the Easy Connect display. Camera* The distance to the obstacles can be estima- We recommend taking the vehicle to a speci- ted with the help of the segments at the rear Segments are not displayed when the vehicle alised workshop to have the fault repaired. of the vehicle. is equipped with Top View Camera*. The Parking Aid system will issue an audible Towing device The optical indication of the segments works as follows: warning for objects that are near the rear of In vehicles equipped with a towing bracket the vehicle, and the Top View Camera* im- device from the factory, when the trailer is – White segments: the obstacle is more age will be available on the screen, giving a connected, the parking aid will not be activa- than approx. 30 cm away from the path real image of the objects around the car. ted when reverse gear is engaged. or in the direction opposite to travel. They are also displayed when the electronic parking brake is activated. Trailer Assist – Yellow segments: the obstacles lie on the vehicle’s path and are at a distance of less than approx. 30 cm away. Introduction

– Red segments: obstacles are less than Trailer assist helps the driver to reverse and approx. 30 cm away. manoeuvre with a trailer.

320 Help with parking and manoeuvring

By moving the rotary knob of the exterior mir- ● Do not rely solely on the indications on Determine the length of the trailer's draw- rors, the trailer assist directs the trailer that is the instrument cluster display. bar hitched. The driver has to accelerate, change In order for the trailer manoeuvre assistant to gears and brake! Note determine the length of the trailer’s drawbar, drive the vehicle-trailer set through some The trailer manoeuvre assistant automati- System limitations turning manoeuvres or curves. The more pre- cally switches off approx. 10 minutes after Under certain circumstances, the camera cisely the length of the drawbar is deter- being activated. The assistant is also deac- mined, the wider the angles that will be avail- does not detect objects such as trailer draw tivated if the driver does not perform any able when manoeuvring. The assistant subdi- bars, bars, fences, posts or thin trees, or an action over the course of approx. 3 mi- open (or opening) rear lid, which could dam- nutes. vides the maximum available end stops of the age the vehicle. angle indicator into four levels: approx. 30°, 45°, 60° and 75°. In order to guarantee good system operation, keep the camera clean, free of snow or ice, Requirements Note and do not cover it with adhesives or other objects. Do not allow the draw bar to be cov- The following requirements must be met for For technical reasons, the trailer manoeu- ered by external influences. the trailer manoeuvre assistant to work: vre assistant cannot always correctly detect trailers with LED technology taillights. Use the trailer manoeuvre assistant only ● The engine is running. when the rear lid is closed correctly. ● The ESC must be connected. CAUTION ● The driver's door and the rear lid are closed. The trailer maneuver assistant does not take the vehicle’s surrounding as a refer- ● The exterior mirrors are not folded. ence. No obstacle detection takes place. ● There is a non-articulated one or two axle The driver alone has to assess whether it is trailer hitched and electrically connected. possible to manoeuvre safely with the tow vehicle and trailer set. ● Both the tow vehicle and trailer are stopped. ● Always observe the movement of the trailer and, if necessary, actively interrupt ● The maximum bending angle has not been the manoeuvre to avoid damage. Even if exceeded. the trailer manoeuvring assistant is operat- ● The length of the trailer’s drawbar has been ed correctly, on rare occasions the trailer determined. may move in a different way to the setting.

321 Driving

Operating 4 Move the vehicle in the direction of the Automatic brake operation towing device. The trailer manoeuvre assistant helps the 5 Actual trailer position driver by automatically operating the brakes 6 Target trailer position in certain situations. 7 Angle indicator zero position The driver is responsible for braking in time ››› . Manoeuvre with the tow vehicle and trailer The brakes may be applied automatically set and the function deactivated in the following The system requirements must be met situations: ››› page 321. ● A certain speed is exceeded. ● Select reverse gear. Fig. 293 Rotary exterior mirror controls.: ad- ● The steering wheel is grabbed. The vehicle just the trailer angle. ● Press button . brakes automatically until it stops. ● Release the steering wheel ››› . ● If the key  is pressed during the manoeu- ● Tilt the rotary control until the desired di- vre or the driver’s door opens. rection is reached ››› Fig. 293. A representation of the tow vehicle and trailer set is shown WARNING on the instrument cluster screen for guidance The quickly turning steering wheel can purposes ››› Fig. 294. cause serious injuries. ● Reverse by accelerating slowly. Pay atten- ● Do not hold the steering wheel during the tion to your surroundings! manoeuvre until the system requests it. ● If necessary, correct the angle with the ro- ● Exception: If a dangerous situation oc- tary control. Press the control towards the left curs, intervene and take over the steering. Fig. 294 Instrument panel display: engage re- or right: the set will move to the left or right. verse gear Press the control backwards: the vehicle will WARNING follow the trailer. Key of the Fig. 293, ››› Fig. 294: Never allow the automatic operation of ● Reverse and move forwards until the de- brakes to lead you to take any risk that 1 Rotary exterior mirror controls. sired position is reached. compromises safety. The system is not a 2 Trailer orientation to the left ● The manoeuvre ends when a message is replacement for driver awareness. 3 Trailer orientation to the right displayed on the instrument cluster display ● The manoeuvre assist system is subject and, in some cases, an audio signal sounds. to certain limitations inherent to the 322 Help with parking and manoeuvring

system. In certain situations, the automatic ● The system requirements must be met Peripheral view system (Top braking intervention may only work in a ››› page 321. limited way or not work at all. ● The camera is covered with water. View Camera)* ● Always be ready to use the brakes your- ● The vehicle has some type of damage in self! the camera area, e.g. due to a parking im- Introduction ● Automatic brake operation ends after 1.5 pact. Using 4 cameras, the system generates a seconds approx. if the vehicle is stopped. ● The field of view of the camera is blocked representation that is shown on the infotain- After this, brake the vehicle yourself. by an accessory, e.g. a bicycle carrier sys- ment system display. The cameras are loca- tem. ted on the radiator grille, the exterior mirrors Note ● Changes have been made to the paint in and the rear lid. The exterior mirrors cannot be adjusted the camera area and structural modifications The functions and representations of the Area while the assistant is active. The saved set- have been made, e.g. to the front part of the View system may vary depending on whether ting for the passenger’s mirror can be acti- vehicle and the running gear. or not the vehicle has ParkPilot. vated ››› page 121. Solution for all cases WARNING ● Temporarily disconnect the system. The image from the cameras does not Problems and solutions ● Check if one of the causes indicated above make it possible to calculate the distance has occurred. to the obstacles (people, vehicles, etc.) Camera with no visibility, fault message, precisely, so using them could cause seri- ● Once the source of the problem has been the system disconnects ous accidents and injury. eliminated, the system may be reconnected. ● Clean the camera or remove possible ad- ● The camera lenses augment and distort ● If the system still behaves unpredictably, hesives or accessories from it ››› page 378. the visual field and the objects on the have it checked by a specialised workshop. ● Check for visible damage. screen are seen differently and imprecise- ly. The system behaves differently than ex- ● Certain objects may not be shown or may pected not be shown very clearly, for example, posts or thin rails, due to the screen resolu- There can be several causes: tion or if light conditions are insufficient. ● The camera is dirty ››› page 378. In addi- ● The cameras have blind spots in which tion to dirt and snow, camera visibility can be obstacles and people are not registered. reduced by detergent residue or any type of ● The camera lens must be kept free, with- coating. out snow or ice, and should not be covered. » 323 Driving

WARNING ● In certain circumstances, the camera Area View system does not capture objects such as beams, The smart technology incorporated into fences, posts or thin trees, which could the Top View Camera* system cannot over- damage the vehicle. come the limits imposed by the laws of physics and it only works within the limits of ● The system displays the auxiliary lines the system. The greater convenience provi- and boxes regardless of the vehicle's envi- ded by the Area View system should never ronment, no objects are detected. The driv- tempt you to take any risk that may com- er is responsible for determining that the promise safety. If used negligently or invol- vehicle will fit in the parking space. untarily, it may cause serious accidents and injuries. The system is not a replace- CAUTION ment for driver awareness. In order to guarantee good system opera- ● Adapt your speed and driving style to suit Fig. 295 tion, keep the cameras clean, free of snow Viewing the top view system: aerial visibility, weather, road and traffic condi- view. or ice, and do not cover them with adhe- tions. sives or other objects. ● Do not be distracted from the traffic by There are four different views to choose from: ● Never use abrasive cleaning products to looking at the screen. clean the camera lenses. A Front camera area ● Monitor the area around the vehicle at all ● Do not use hot or warm water to remove B times, since the cameras do not capture Right camera area ice or snow from the camera lenses. Doing small children, animals and certain objects C Rear camera area so could damage the lenses. in all situations. D Left camera area ● The use of a number plate may interfere in the views shown on the screen, since the Function buttons Fig. 295: cameras' field of vision may be reduced.  Exit the current display. ● The system will probably be unable to represent all areas clearly.  Adjust the display: bright, contrast and colour. CAUTION  Three-dimensional views ● The camera images are only two-dimen-  Depending on the equipment: connect- sional. Due to a lack of spatial depth, ob- ing and disconnecting the ParkPilot jects that jut out or holes on the road, for sound. example, are more difficult to detect or may not be seen at all. 324 Help with parking and manoeuvring

The aerial view is generated by combining spatial depth, it is difficult or impossible to Connecting and disconnecting the images from all the cameras  make out on-screen any holes there may be ››› Fig. 295. The aerial view can be selected on the ground, objects jutting out from the by pressing the vehicle in the area. ground or parts protruding from other vehicles. Select the corresponding view by pressing the different areas ››› Fig. 295 A to D of the Situations in which the objects or other vehi- aerial view or the reduced aerial view. cles appear to be further away or closer than they really are: Conditions necessary for the use of the ● Area View system On moving from a horizontal plane to a slope. ● The doors and the rear lid must be closed. ● On moving from a slope to a horizontal ● The image must be reliable and clear. For plane. Fig. 296 Centre console: button to manually this reason, for example, the camera lens activate/deactivate the peripheral vision sys- ● If the vehicle is heavily loaded at the rear. must be clean. tem when combined with the park assist sys- ● If the vehicle approaches protruding ob- tem. ● The area around the vehicle must be clear- jects. These objects may be outside the cam- ly and totally visible. eras' angle of visibility. Manual activation ● The area for parking or manoeuvring ● Press button  once ››› Fig. 296. should be a flat surface. Trailer mode ● The vehicle should not be loaded very The infotainment system screen displays the The Area View system conceals, in the rear heavily at the rear. aerial view ››› Fig. 295. If you press the  camera area, all the auxiliary guiding lines button when driving at over 15 km/h (9 mph), ● The driver must be used to the system. when the factory-fitted towing bracket is the image will not be displayed. ● There should be no damage to the vehicle connected electrically to a trailer in the camera area. If the position or installa- ››› page 332. Automatic activation tion angle of the cameras have been changed, e.g. after a rear-end collision, the Note ● Select reverse gear. system should be checked by a specialised In order to become familiar with the system ● OR: The vehicle moves backwards. workshop. and its functions, SEAT recommends that you practice handling the Area View sys- The view of the image of the vehicle's rear Special characteristics tem in an area where there is not too much camera is shown in parallel parking mode traffic or in a car park. with the reduced aerial view. » The images on the area view system cameras are only two-dimensional. Due to a lack of 325 Driving

Manual disconnection Views of the peripheral vision sys-  Adjust the display: bright, contrast and ● Press button  again ››› Fig. 296. tem (modes) colour. ● OR: press a button on the factory-equip- The selected view is displayed on the right ped infotainment system, for example the  side of the screen. The reduced aerial view button. shown on the right side displays the view ● OR: press the  function button. framed in yellow. In addition, the right margin of the screen displays the menu options pos- Automatic off sible and the views (the so-called “modes”) of the camera in question. The active view ● Drive forwards at over 15 km/h (9 mph) ap- (mode) at the time is highlighted. proximately. The reduced aerial view can be hidden by ● OR: switch off the ignition. The Area View pressing the  symbol to thus display the se- system menu disappears immediately. lected view full-screen. The red lines are indicate a distance of approx. 40 cm away from the vehicle.

Aerial views (bird's eye view) Main mode:

Fig. 297 Display on the top view system  The vehicle and its immediate vicinity screen:  Front camera: off-road view.  Rear seen from above are shown. Depending camera: off-road view. on the equipment, the ParkPilot's path may also be displayed.  Depending on the equipment: connecting and disconnecting the ParkPilot Three-dimensional views: sound.  The vehicle and its vicinity seen from  Showing the reduced display. above are shown. The vehicle and its vicinity seen from Hiding the reduced display.   above are shown obliquely.  Exiting the Area View system screen:  The vehicle and its vicinity seen obliquely are shown.

326 Help with parking and manoeuvring

Swipe the infotainment system display with Rear camera views (rear view) Reverse Assist (Rear View your finger in the direction of the arrows to  Angle parking. The area behind the vehi- change the angle of vision in the three-di- cle is shown. Auxiliary lines are shown to Camera)* mensional views of the vehicle and its vicinity. give guidance. Operating and safety warnings Parallel parking. The area directly be- Front camera views (front view)  hind the vehicle is shown. The coloured  Cross traffic. This visualization helps to boxes and auxiliary lines serve as orien- monitor traffic to the left, front and right tation. of the vehicle and can be used, for ex- Off-road or hitching a trailer function. ample, when exiting garages or narrow  The vehicle's rear is presented. exits. Green and red semicircular auxiliary Angle parking. The area in front of the Fig. 298 Related video  lines are displayed in vehicles with a fac- vehicle is shown. Orientation lines are tory-fitted towing bracket. The auxiliary shown to give guidance. lines indicate the distance from the tow- WARNING  Off-road. The area directly in front of the ing bracket. The distance between the ● The reverse assist does not make it possi- vehicle seen from above is shown. For auxiliary lines (green and red) is approx. ble to precisely calculate the distance from example, on a slope, in order to see the 30 cm The orange auxiliary line indi- obstacles and nor can it overcome the sys- area directly in front of the vehicle. cates, according to how the steering tem's own limits, hence its negligent use wheel is turned, the precalculated direc- may cause serious accidents and injuries if Side camera views (side view) tion of the towed device. used without due care. The driver should be aware of his/her surroundings at all times Right and left sides. The areas located   Cross traffic. This visualization helps to to ensure safe driving. directly to the side of the vehicle seen monitor traffic to the left, front and right ● The camera lens expands and distorts from above are represented in order to of the vehicle and can be used, for ex- the field of view and displays the objects navigate possible obstacles more pre- ample, when exiting garages or narrow on the screen in a way that is different from cisely. exits. reality. Distance perception is also distor-    The driver’s or passenger's side seen ted. from above is shown. This makes it ● Due to the screen resolution or light con- possible to visualize the blind spots ditions, some items may be blurry or not along the vehicle. displayed at all. Take care with thin posts, fences, railings or trees that might not be seen on the screen and could damage the vehicle. »

327 Driving

● The reverse assist has blind spots where Note Reverse assist modes it cannot see people or objects. Monitor the ● It is important to take great care and pay Depending on the equipment, the following vehicle's surrounding area at all times. special attention if the driver is not familiar modes are available: ● Keep the camera lens clean, free of ice with the system. and snow, and do not cover it. ● Angle parking: reverse parking perpendic- ● The reverse assist reference lines disap- ular to the road. ● The system is not a replacement for driv- pear when the rear lid is open. er awareness. Supervise the parking ma- ● Parallel parking: reverse parking parallel noeuvre and the vehicle's surrounding area to the road. at all times. ● Introduction Assistance function for hitching a trailer: ● Do not be distracted from the traffic by helps to hitch a trailer. looking at the screen. ● Cross traffic: traffic is monitored in a trans- ● The images are only two-dimensional. verse direction. Protruding objects or holes in the road, for example, are more difficult to detect or may not be seen at all. Connecting and disconnecting ● Vehicle load modifies the representation of the guide lines. The width represented Connect the reverse assist by the lines decreases with vehicle load. Pay special attention to the surroundings ● Select reverse gear. when the inside of the vehicle of the lug- ● OR: press button . gage compartment are loaded. Fig. 299 In the rear lid handle: location of the ● Disconnect the reverse assist In the following situations, objects or oth- reverse assist camera. er vehicles appear to be further away or Drive forward at least 15 km/h (9 mph). closer than they actually are. Pay special A camera installed in the rear lid handle as- attention: sists the driver with reverse parking or ma- – If moving from a flat surface to a slope noeuvring ››› Fig. 299. and vice-versa. Shown on the display The camera image is viewed together with – If the vehicle is heavily loaded. orientation lines projected on the Infotain- The system’s functions and representations – When the vehicle approaches objects ment system screen. Part of the bumper can may vary depending on the equipment. that are not on the ground surface or be seen at the bottom, which can be used by The assistant's image view changes when the that protrude from it. These objects the driver as a reference point. may be outside the camera angle when factory-fitted tow hitch is electronically con- reversing. nected to a trailer ››› page 339. 328 Help with parking and manoeuvring

Reverse assist functions and symbols Yellow lines: vehicle path depending on the Requirements When the reverse assist is connected, you steering angle. To park with reverse assist, the following re- can make adjustments using the function but- Yellow auxiliary boxes: front and rear delimi- quirements must be met: tons. Some adjustments are equipment-de- tation of the parking space (parallel parking). pendent. Green lateral line: point for turning the other ● Do not exceed a speed of approx. 15 km/h  Exit the current display way when parking (parallel parking). (9 mph). ● Parking space width: vehicle width + 0.2 m Switch to angle parking ››› page 330 Red and green frame: outline of the vehicle  (parallel parking). ● Distance: approx. 1 meter from the parking  Switch to parallel parking ››› page 330 space (parallel only). Assistance function for hitching a trailer ● Length of the parking space: approx. 8 m Switch to the trailer hitching assistance  (parallel only) function On vehicles with a factory-fitted towing device, this function can be used to move the To display a real image, the following require-  Switch to cross traffic vehicle close to a tow bar. Due to the high ments must be met:  Adjust the display: brightness, contrast level of magnification of the image in this and colour. mode, objects behind the vehicle are seen ● The luggage compartment rear door is very late. closed.  Switch to park assist ››› page 314 Auxiliary lines are shown in the infotainment ● The surroundings are on a flat surface. Display the parking aid view  system. ● The vehicle should not be loaded very  Hide the parking aid view Red lines: position of the tow hitch. heavily at the rear.  Turn the steering wheel (parallel park- Green lines: distance to the tow hitch. The ing) distance between the lines is approx. 0.1 m  Stop the vehicle (parallel parking) Orange line: precalculated direction of the tow hitch depending on steering wheel rotation. Guide lines Green horizontal lines: extension of the vehi- Cross traffic cle. This visualization helps to monitor traffic be- Red lateral line: when the steering wheel hind the vehicle and can be used, for exam- needs to be turned the other way, a yellow ple, when exiting garages or narrow exits. line turns red (parallel parking). 329 Driving

Parallel parking Parking Parallel parking ● Press the  or  button before passing in front of the selected parking space. ● With reverse assist connected and in working order, press the function button . ● Place the vehicle in front of the parking space ››› Fig. 300 two . ● Reverse while turning the steering wheel so that the yellow lines enter the parking space. The green and yellow lines must match the side boundary lines 3 . ● Stop the vehicle when the red line has reached the rear boundary 4 .

Fig. 300 Display on the Infotainment system Fig. 301 Display on the Infotainment system screen.: parking with reverse assist. screen.: Reverse assist, mode 2.

Key to the Fig. 300: Key to the Fig. 301:  Finding a parking space  Finding a parking space  Go to the selected parking space  Go to the selected parking space  Centre the vehicle inside the parking  Centre the vehicle inside the parking space space 1 Road 1 Road 2 Parking space 2 Obstacle or auxiliary box 3 Lateral boundary of the parking space 3 Lateral boundary of the parking space 4 Rear boundary of the parking space 4 Obstacle or auxiliary box

330 Help with parking and manoeuvring

Parking ● Stop the vehicle. Turn the steering wheel as Camera with no visibility, fault message, ● If necessary, press the  button before far as it’ll go in the opposite direction. the system disconnects passing in front of the selected parking ● Reverse until the STOP signal is shown or ● Clean the camera or remove possible ad- space. until the red line reaches the rear boundary. hesives or accessories from it ››› page 378. ● With reverse assist connected and in work- ● Check for visible damage. ing order, press the function button . ● Turn on the corresponding turn signal on Problems and solutions Possible solution the side of the road where you want to park. ● Temporarily disconnect the system. The system behaves differently than ex- ● Place the vehicle parallel to the parking pected ● Check if one of the causes indicated above space, approx. 1 meter away. has occurred. There can be several causes: ● If obstacles protrude from the auxiliary box- ● Once the source of the problem has been ● The camera is dirty page 378. In addition es, find another parking space or realign the ››› eliminated, the system may be reconnected. vehicle. to dirt and snow, camera visibility can be reduced by detergent residue or any type of ● If the system still behaves unpredictably, ● Select reverse gear. A red frame represents coating. have it checked by a specialised workshop. the target position of your vehicle. ● The system requirements must be met ● Turn the steering wheel until the red frame ››› page 329. is between the auxiliary boxes and has changed to green. Keep the steering wheel in ● The camera is covered with water. this position and start driving slowly. ● The factory-fitted towing bracket must not ● When an arrow appears, reverse. A yellow be electrically connected to a trailer line and a green line appear. The arrow indi- ››› page 339. cates the distance that still has to be cov- ● The vehicle has some type of damage in ered. the camera area, e.g. due to a parking im- ● While reversing, keep the steering wheel in pact. the adjusted position. Adjust the steering ● The field of view of the camera is blocked wheel rotation correctly when an indication by an accessory, e.g. a bicycle carrier sys- appears on the steering wheel symbol . tem. ● Reverse until the STOP signal is shown or ● Changes have been made to the paint in until the green line matches up with the later- the camera area, or structural modifications al boundary of the parking space. have been made to a component such as the running gear.

331 Driving

Towing bracket device* Start-Stop system operates as normal. No drawbar load on the ball joint of the towing special characteristics need to be taken into bracket, but do not exceed the specified lim- account. it. Trailer mode If the system does not recognise the trailer or WARNING the trailer bracket has not been retrofitted by Introduction SEAT, the Start-Stop system must be discon- Never use the trailer to transport people, nected by pressing the corresponding button since it would put their life in danger and is Take into account country-specific regula- in the lower part of the centre console before also prohibited. tions about driving with a trailer and the use driving with the trailer, and it should remain of a towing bracket. off for the rest of the journey ››› . WARNING The vehicle has been developed primarily for Undue use of the towing bracket may carrying people, although it can also be used Vehicles with driving profile selection cause injury and accidents. to tow a trailer if fitted with the corresponding If you are going to be towing a trailer, the use ● Only use the towing bracket if it is in a technical equipment. This additional load has of the Eco driving profile is not recommen- perfect state of repair and is properly se- an effect on the useful life, fuel consumption ded. You are advised to select another of the cured. and vehicle performance and in some cases available driving profiles before beginning to ● can reduce the service intervals. Never modify or repair the towing bracket drive with a trailer. in any way. Driving with a trailer requires more force from ● In order to reduce the danger of injury in Trailer weight/drawbar load the vehicle, and thus more concentration the event of rear-end collisions and to from the driver. Never exceed the authorised trailer weight. If avoid injury to pedestrians and cyclists In winter, winter tyres should be fitted on both you do not load the trailer up to the maximum when parking the vehicle, cover or remove the vehicle and the trailer. permitted trailer weight, you can then climb the tow hook when you are not using a trail- correspondingly steeper slopes. er. ● Maximum vertical load technically permit- The maximum trailer weights listed are only Never fit a towing bracket “with weight distribution” or “load compensation”. The ted on the coupling device applicable for altitudes up to 1000 m above vehicle has not been designed for this type sea level. Since higher altitude decreases en- The maximum technically permitted vertical of towing bracket. The towing bracket gine performance and the ability to climb load of the trailer’s drawbar on the hitch of could fail and the trailer could be released the towing device is 100 kg. slopes, the tow load decreases proportional- from the vehicle. ly. The weight of the vehicle and trailer com- Vehicles with the Start-Stop system bination must be reduced by 10% for every 1000 m of altitude. When possible, operate If the vehicle has a factory-fitted towing the trailer with the maximum authorised bracket or one that is retrofitted by SEAT, the 332 Towing bracket device*

WARNING system must be disconnected manually Technical requirements whenever driving with a trailer. Otherwise Driving with a trailer and transporting the brake system could be damaged and Vehicles that are factory-fitted with a towing heavy or large objects can affect driving could consequently cause a serious acci- bracket meet all the technical and legal re- properties and even cause an accident. dent or injury. quirements for driving with a trailer. ● Always secure the load properly using ● Always disconnect the Start-Stop system belts or straps that are suitable and in If the vehicle is retrofitted with a towing manually when using a towing bracket that good condition. bracket, only a bracket that is authorised for has not been fitted by a SEAT workshop. ● Adapt your speed and driving style at all the maximum authorised load of the trailer times to suit visibility, weather, road and that is to be towed may be fitted. The towing traffic conditions. Note bracket must be suitable for the vehicle and the trailer and must be properly secured to ● Trailers with a high centre of gravity are ● Before hitching or unhitching a trailer, al- the vehicle's chassis. Only use a towing more likely to overturn than those with a ways deactivate the anti-theft alarm bracket that has been authorised by SEAT for low one. ››› page 89. Otherwise, the tilt sensor could cause the alarm to go off. this vehicle. Always check and take into ac- ● Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres. count the towing bracket manufacturer's in- ● Do not drive with a trailer for the engine's ● Take great care when overtaking. structions. Never fit a towing bracket “with first 1000 km ››› page 265. ● Reduce speed immediately if you notice weight distribution” or “load compensation”. ● SEAT recommends that, if possible, the that the trailer is swaying, however slightly. tow hook be removed or covered when it is Towing bracket fitted on the bumper ● Never drive at more than 80 km/h not going to be used. In the event of a rear- (50 mph) when towing a trailer (or at more end collision, the damage to the vehicle Never fit a towing bracket to the bumper or to than 100 km/h (60 mph) in exceptional cir- could be greater if the tow hook is fitted. the area where the bumper is mounted. The cumstances). This also applies in countries ● Some retrofitted towing brackets cover towing bracket should not impair the bum- where driving at higher speeds is permit- the rear towing eye. In these cases, the per's function. Do not make modifications or ted. Take into account the speed limit for towing eye should not be used for tow- repairs to the exhaust system or the brake vehicles with trailers in the corresponding starting or for towing other vehicles. For system. Make regular checks to ensure that country, as it could be less than the speed this reason, if the vehicle has been retrofit- the towing bracket is secure. limit for vehicles without a trailer. ted with a towing bracket, always keep the ● Never attempt to “straighten” the towing tow hook in the vehicle when you remove it. Engine cooling system vehicle and trailer while accelerating. Driving with a trailer increases the load on the engine and cooling system. The cooling sys- WARNING tem should have sufficient coolant and be If the towing bracket has been retrofitted prepared for the additional effort involved in by a non-SEAT workshop, the Start-Stop driving with a trailer. » 333 Driving

Trailer brakes Europe, Asia, Africa, South America and Central ● Never connect the trailer's electric sys- America If the trailer has its own brake system, please tem directly to the electrical connections take the relevant legal requirements into ac- Brake lights (total) 84 Watts of the tail lights or any other power sour- count. Never connect the trailer's brake sys- ces. Only use the connections intended for Turn signal (on each side) 42 watts tem to the vehicle's brake system. providing electric current to the trailer. Side lights (on each side) 50 Watts Tow cable Reverse lights (in total) 42 Watts Always use a cable between the vehicle and Hitching and connecting a trailer the trailer ››› page 334. Rear fog light 42 Watts Australia Trailer tail lights Brake lights (total) 108 Watts The trailer's rear lights should comply with the statutory safety regulations ››› page 334. Turn signal (on each side) 54 Watts

Never connect the trailer's rear lights directly Side lights (on each side) 100 Watts to the vehicle's electric system. If you are not sure that the trailer's electrical connection is Reverse lights (in total) 54 Watts correct, have it checked by a specialised Rear fog light 54 Watts workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT Fig. 302 Schematic representation: assign- dealership for this. WARNING ment of the pins of the trailer's electrical socket. Exterior mirrors If the towing bracket is wrongly fitted or is not the right one, the trailer could become If you cannot see the area behind the trailer detached from the vehicle and cause seri- Pin Meaning with the exterior mirrors of the towing vehicle, ous injury. 1 Left turn signal additional mirrors will have to be installed in accordance with the regulations of the coun- 2 Rear fog light CAUTION try in question. The exterior mirrors should be 3 Earth for pins 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8 adjusted before you start driving and must ● If the rear lights of the trailer are not cor- provide a sufficient field of vision at the rear. rectly connected, the vehicle's electronic 4 Right turn signal system may be damaged. 5 Rear light, right Trailer maximum electricity consumption ● If the trailer absorbs excessive electric current, the vehicle's electronic system Never exceed the values indicated! 6 Brake lights may be damaged.

334 Towing bracket device*

Pin Meaning If the trailer has a 7-contact connector, you ● If the vehicle is locked with the key and the will need to use an adapter cable. In this case anti-theft alarm is activated. 7 Rear light, left the function corresponding to pin 10 will not be available. When the vehicle is locked, the alarm is trig- 8 Reverse lights gered if the electrical connection with the 9 Permanent live Tow cable trailer is cut off.

10 Live charge cable The tow rope must always be securely fixed Before hitching or unhitching a trailer, always to the towing vehicle and loose enough so turn off the anti-theft alarm. Otherwise, the tilt 11 Earth for pin 10 that the vehicle can handle turns smoothly. sensor could cause the alarm to go off. 12 Unassigned However, make sure that the cable does not rub on the ground while driving. Trailers with LED tail lights 13 Earth for pin 9 For technical reasons, trailers fitted with LED Trailer tail lights rear lights cannot be connected to the anti- Power socket for trailer Always check the trailer's rear lights to ensure theft alarm system. The vehicle is fitted with a 13-pole power they are working correctly and that they When the vehicle is locked, the alarm does socket for the connection between the trailer comply with the relevant safety regulations. not go off when the electrical connection and the vehicle. With the engine running, Make sure that the maximum permissible with the trailer is cut if it has rear lights with electrical devices on the trailer receive power power that can be absorbed by the trailer is light-emitting diodes. from the electrical connection (pin 9 and pin not exceeded ››› page 334. 10 of the trailer power socket). If the Eco driving profile was selected when Include in the anti-theft alarm hitching the trailer, this will automatically If the system detects that a trailer has been switch to the Normal profile. If the system connected, the consumers on the trailer will The trailer is included in the anti-theft system cannot detect the attached trailer or if the receive electricity through this connection if the following conditions are met: towing bracket has been retrofitted by an au- (pins 9 and 10). Pin 9 has a permanent live. to repair shop other than SEAT, you must ● If the vehicle is factory-equipped with an This powers, for example, the trailer's interior manually select the Normal profile before anti-theft alarm and towing bracket. lighting. Electrical devices such as a fridge in you start driving with a trailer attached. To re- a caravan only receive electrical power if the ● If the trailer is electrically connected to the connect the Eco profile once the trailer has engine is running (through pin 10). towing vehicle through the trailer power sock- been unhitched, switch the ignition off and et. To avoid overloading the electrical system, back on once. » you cannot connect the ground wires of pin ● If the electrical systems of the vehicle and 3 , pin 11 or pin 13 to each other. trailer are in perfect condition and have no faults or damage.

335 Driving

WARNING be placed on the towing bracket and the correct figures for your specific model, which trailer, and both the vehicle and the trailer may be lower than these figures, are given in If the cables are improperly or incorrectly can be damaged. the vehicle documentation. The information in connected, it may lead to an excessive the vehicle documentation takes precedence amount of current supplied to the trailer, at all times. which can cause abnormalities in the entire Note vehicle electronic system, as well as acci- To promote safety while driving, SEAT recom- ● In case of anomalies in the electrical sys- dents and serious injuries. mends making the most of the maximum ver- tems of the vehicle or trailer, as well as in ● Ensure that any repairs that need to be the anti-theft alarm system, have them in- tical load technically permissible on the carried out on the electrical system are spected by a specialised workshop. coupling device ››› page 332. An insufficient carried out by a specialised workshop. vertical load has a negative influence on the ● If the trailer accessories consume energy behaviour of both the vehicle and trailer. ● Never connect the trailer's electric sys- through the power socket to the trailer and tem directly to the electrical connections the engine is turned off, the battery will dis- The vertical load increases the weight on the of the tail lights or any other power sour- charge. rear axle, reducing the vehicle's carrying ca- ces. ● If the vehicle battery is running low, the pacity. electrical connection with the trailer will be WARNING automatically cut. Gross combination weight of the towing Contact between the pins of the trailer vehicle and trailer power socket can cause short circuits, The gross combination weight is the actual overloading of the electrical system or fail- Trailer loading weight of the loaded vehicle plus the actual ure of the lighting system, and consequent- weight of the loaded trailer. ly can cause accidents and serious injuries. Technically permissible maximum trailer In some countries trailers are classified into ● Never connect the pins of the trailer pow- weight and vertical load on the coupling distinct categories. SEAT recommends ob- er socket to each other. device taining information from a specialised work- ● Make sure any work on bent pins is car- The technically permissible maximum trailer shop regarding which type of trailer is most ried out by a specialised workshop. weight is the weight that the vehicle can tow suitable for your vehicle. ››› . The vertical load on the coupling is ex- CAUTION erted vertically from above on the hook of the Trailer loading towing bracket. Do not leave the trailer connected to the The weight of the towing vehicle and trailer vehicle when parked; place it on its support The information on the maximum trailer must be balanced. In order to do this, the wheel or its supports. If the vehicle rises or weight and vertical load on the coupling de- load must be as close as possible to the max- falls due, for example, to a variation of the vice contained in the type plate of the towing imum vertical load technically permissible on load or a burst tyre, increased pressure will bracket are experimental values only. The the coupling point, and it must be evenly 336 Towing bracket device* distributed between the back and front of the WARNING ● The trailer weight, as well as the gross com- trailer: bination weight of the towing vehicle and A shift in weight could jeopardize the stabil- trailer, change the centre of gravity and the ity and security of the towing vehicle and ● Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavy properties of the vehicle. objects are as near to the axle as possible or trailer, which could lead to accidents and ● If the towing vehicle is empty and the trailer above it. serious injuries. is loaded, then the load distribution is incor- ● Always load the trailer correctly. ● Secure the trailer load properly. rect. Under these conditions, drive slowly and ● Always secure the load properly using with extra caution. Tyre pressure belts or straps that are suitable and in good condition. Set the tyre pressure of the trailer tyres in ac- Hill starts with a trailer cordance with the trailer manufacturer's rec- Depending on the slope of the hill and the ommendations. combination weight of the towing vehicle and Driving with a trailer When towing a trailer, inflate the tyres of the trailer, the vehicle might start rolling backwards slightly when you first start up. towing vehicle with the maximum allowable Adjusting the headlights pressure ››› page 365. The front part of the vehicle may be raised For hill-starting with a trailer, do the following: WARNING when the trailer is connected and the light ● Press and hold the brake pedal. may dazzle the rest of the traffic. If the maximum permissible axle weight, the ● Press the  button once to disconnect the maximum load technically permissible on electronic parking brake page 299. Specific features of driving with a trailer ››› the coupling point, the maximum author- ● If the vehicle is equipped with a manual ised vehicle weight or the gross combina- ● If your trailer has an overrun brake, brake gearbox, push the clutch pedal all the way tion weight of the towing vehicle and trailer gently at first and then rapidly. This will pre- down. are exceeded, accidents and serious inju- vent the jerking that can be caused by the ries may occur. locking of trailer wheels. ● Put the vehicle into first gear or turn the selector lever to position D/S page 253. ● Never exceed the values indicated! ● Due to the gross combination weight of the ››› ●  ● The actual weight on the front and rear towing vehicle and trailer, the braking dis- Pull out the button and hold it in that po- axles must never exceed the maximum per- tance increases. sition to immobilise the towing vehicle and trailer with the electronic parking brake. missible axle weight. The weight on the ● When going down a slope, go into a lower front and rear axles must never exceed the gear (if using a manual gearbox or the tip- ● Release the brake pedal. maximum permissible weight. tronic automatic gearbox mode) to take ad- ● Start driving slowly. To do this, in the case of vantage of the braking power provided by the a manual gearbox, slowly release the clutch engine. Otherwise, the braking system could pedal. » overheat and even fail. 337 Driving

● Do not release the  button until the en- Stabilisation of the towing vehicle WARNING gine has sufficient power to start driving. and trailer combination The enhanced safety provided by the elec- WARNING tric stability control of the vehicle and trail- The stabilisation of the vehicle and trailer er should not lead you to take any risks that If a trailer is pulled incorrectly, this may combination is an additional function of the could compromise your safety. lead to loss of control of the vehicle and electronic stability control (ESC). ● Adapt your speed and driving style at all serious injury. If the vehicle and trailer stabilisation system times to suit visibility, weather, road and ● Driving with a trailer and transporting detects that the trailer is weaving, it takes ac- traffic conditions. heavy or large objects will change the ve- tion on the steering control to reduce the ● Accelerate with caution when the road is hicle handling and braking distances. weaving of the trailer. slippery. ● Always drive cautiously and carefully. ● When adjusting any settings, stop accel- Brake earlier than usual. Vehicle and trailer combination stabilisa- erating. ● Adapt your speed and driving style at all tion requirements times to suit visibility, weather, road and ● The vehicle is factory-equipped with a tow- traffic conditions. Slow down, especially WARNING ing bracket or has been retro-fitted with a when driving down hills or slopes. The electric stability control for the vehicle compatible towing bracket. ● Accelerate with particular care and cau- and trailer may not correctly detect all ● tion. Avoid sudden braking and manoeu- The ESC and ASR are active. The control driving conditions.   vres. lamp or is not lit up on the instrument ● When the ESC is switched off, the stabili- cluster. ● Take great care when overtaking. Reduce sation of the towing vehicle and trailer is al- speed immediately if you notice that the ● The trailer is connected to the towing vehi- so switched off. trailer is swaying, however slightly. cle through the trailer power socket. ● The stability system does not always de- ● Never attempt to “straighten” the towing ● The vehicle is travelling at over 60 km/h tect light trailers, so it may not stabilise vehicle and trailer while accelerating. (approx. 37 mph). these correctly. ● Take into account the speed limit for vehi- ● The maximum vertical load technically per- ● When driving on surfaces with poor grip, cles with a trailer, as it could be lower than missible is not being exceeded on the cou- the trailer can even interfere with the stability system. for vehicles without a trailer. pling device. ● Trailers with a high centre of gravity can ● The trailer has a rigid draw bar. tip over without having previously weaved. ● If the trailer has brakes, it must be equipped ● If a trailer is not attached, but a connec- with a mechanical overrun brake. tor is plugged into the power socket (e.g. installation of a bicycle rack with lights),

338 Towing bracket device*

repeated automatic braking may occur in ● Switch off the engine. The control lamp  extreme driving conditions. ● Open the rear lid. ● If the warning light on the button ● Pull the ››› Fig. 303 button briefly. The tow ››› Fig. 303  flashes, this means that the hook unlocks electrically and automatically tow hook has not been attached properly or is damaged ››› . Electrically unlocking trailer turns outwards. The button's control lamp flashes. ● If the warning lamp ››› Fig. 303  remains hook* ● Finish remove the tow hook by hand until on with the rear lid open, the tow hook is cor- you feel and hear that it has engaged and rectly in place both when extracted and Description the control lamp on the button stays on. when covered. ● Close the rear lid. The control light of the lamp switches off ap- ● Hitching and connecting a trailer proximately 1 minute after closing the read lid. ››› page 334. WARNING Retracting the tow hook Undue use of the towing bracket may ● Stop the vehicle and apply the electronic cause injury and accidents. parking brake. ● Only use the tow hook if it is properly en- ● Switch off the engine. gaged. ● Always ensure that no person, animal or ● Unhook the trailer and interrupt the electri- object is to be found in the path of the tow cal connection between it and the vehicle. If hook. Fig. 303 On the right side of the luggage com- you are using an adapter, remove it from the partment: button for unlocking the tow hook. trailer's power socket. ● Never use a tool or instrument while the tow hook is moving. The towing bracket’s hook is located in the ● Open the rear lid. ● Never press the ››› Fig. 303 button when bumper. Tow hooks for electrical unlocking ● Pull the ››› Fig. 303 button briefly. The tow there is a trailer hooked to the vehicle or cannot be removed. hook unlocks electrically. when a carrier system or other accessories There should be no person, animal or object ● Turn the tow hook under the bumper with are mounted on the tow hook. in the path of the tow hook ››› . your hand until you feel and hear that it en- ● If the tow hook is not attached properly, gages and the control lamp on the button re- do not use it. Instead, go to a specialised Unlocking the tow hook and removing it mains on continuously. workshop and have the towing bracket checked. » ● Stop the vehicle and connect the electronic ● Close the rear lid. parking brake ››› page 299.

339 Driving

● If you detect any fault in the electrical must be mounted as close to the vehicle as Retrofitting a towing bracket system or in the towing bracket, contact a possible (tow hook). specialised workshop and ask them to Description check it. WARNING ● If the ball has a diameter of less than 49 The incorrect use of the tow hitch with a bi- mm at any one point, do not use the towing cycle rack mounted on the tow hook can bracket under any circumstances. cause accidents and injury. ● Never exceed the maximum weight or the CAUTION limits indicated above. If you clean the vehicle with high-pressure ● The bicycle rack may not be mounted to or steam devices, do not point the jet di- the neck of the hook below the ball be- rectly towards the retractable tow hook or cause, due to the shape of the neck and the trailer power socket, as this may dam- depending on the rack model, the rack age the joints or remove the grease neces- could be incorrectly mounted on the vehi- sary for lubrication. cle. ● Always read and take the manufacturer assembly instructions into account. Note At extremely low temperatures, the tow CAUTION hook may be impossible to operate. In this case, place the vehicle in a warmer loca- If the maximum weight and limits indicated tion (for example, a garage). above are exceeded, the vehicle may suffer considerable damage. ● Never exceed the values indicated! Fitting a bicycle carrier on the retractable towbar Note SEAT recommends removing, as far as pos- The maximum allowed weight of the carrier sible, all removable parts of the bicycles system, including the load, is 75 kg. The carri- before setting off. These parts include, for Fig. 304 Limits and attachment points for ret- er system should not protrude more than 700 example, baskets and saddlebags, child rofitting a towing bracket. mm backwards from the spherical head. On- seats or batteries. This improves aerody- ly carrier systems on which up to 3 bikes can namics and the centre of gravity of the rack SEAT recommends that towing brackets be be mounted are allowed. Heavier bicycles system. retrofitted at a specialised workshop. For

340 Towing bracket device* example, it may very well be necessary to ces. Only use suitable connectors to con- adjust the cooling system or mount thermal nect the trailer. protection plates. SEAT recommends visiting ● The towing bracket should be retrofitted a SEAT dealership for this. only at a specialised workshop. If a towing bracket is retrofitted, the distance specifications should always be kept in mind. WARNING The distance between the centre of the ball If the towing bracket is badly fitted or un- head and the road ››› Fig. 304 D must never suitable, the trailer may separate from the be less than indicated. This also applies when vehicle while driving. This could cause seri- the vehicle is fully loaded, including the tech- ous accidents and fatal injuries. nically permissible maximum vertical load on the coupling device. Note Distance specifications ››› Fig. 304: ● Only use towing brackets that have been A Attachment points (lower part of the vehi- approved by SEAT for the model in ques- cle) tion. ● In some versions, the fitting of a conven- B 1090 mm tional towing hook solution is not recom- C 65 mm min. mended. Please consult your Technical D 391 mm Service. E 348 mm F 595 mm G 1,050 mm

WARNING If the cables are improperly or incorrectly connected, this may lead to malfunctions in the entire vehicle electronic system, as well as to accidents and serious injuries. ● Never connect the trailer's electric system to the electrical connections of the tail lights or any other unsuitable power sour-

341 Practical tips

Practical tips ● Place it in the space on the hinge of the cle. In an accident the canister could be open flap ››› Fig. 305. damaged and could leak. ● Start refuelling. The tank is full as soon as ● If, in exceptional circumstances, you Checking and refilling lev- the pump’s automatic nozzle cuts off the fuel have to carry a spare fuel canister, please supply. Do not try to put in more fuel after the els observe the following points: nozzle cuts out, as this will fill the expansion – Never fill fuel into the spare fuel canis- chamber in the fuel tank. ter if it is inside or on top of the vehicle. Refuelling ● Unscrew the cap by turning it to the right as This could cause an explosion. Always far as it will go. place the canister on the ground to fill it. Refuelling ● Close the lid. – Insert the filling nozzle as far as possi- The correct fuel grade for your vehicle is giv- ble into the spare fuel canister. en on a sticker on the inside of the fuel tank – If the spare fuel canister is made of flap. Further notes on fuel can be found at metal, the filling nozzle must be in con- ››› page 343. tact with the canister during filling. This helps prevent an electrostatic charge The capacity of your vehicle's fuel tank is giv- building up. en in ››› page 389. – Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in the WARNING luggage compartment. Fuel vapour is explosive. Risk of fatal accident! Fuel is highly flammable and can cause serious burns and other injuries. Fig. 305 Fuel tank flap with tank cap attach- CAUTION ● When refuelling, turn off the engine, the ed. auxiliary heater ››› page 161 and turn off the ● If any fuel is spilt onto the vehicle, it ignition for safety reasons. should be removed immediately. It could The fuel tank flap is on the rear right of the otherwise damage the paintwork. vehicle. ● Do not smoke when filling the fuel tank or a canister. Naked flames are forbidden in ● Never run the tank completely dry. The The flap that covers the tank cap is unlocked the vicinity due to the risk of explosion. catalytic converter can be damaged. and locked automatically using the central ● Observe legislation governing the use, ● When filling the fuel tank after having run locking. storage and carrying of a spare fuel canis- it completely dry on a vehicle with a diesel engine, the ignition must be switched on for ● Open the fuel tank flap by pressing on the ter in the vehicle. at least 30 seconds before starting the en- left side. ● For safety reasons we do not recommend gine. When you then start the engine it may carrying a spare fuel canister in the vehi- ● Unscrew the cap by turning it to the left. 342 Checking and refilling levels

take longer than normal (up to one minute) One way to resolve this is to pour the fuel in age of ethanol in the petrol. “E5” means, to start firing. very slowly. for example, an ethanol ratio of 5% max. 2 Diesel with biodiesel (“B” stands for Bio- For the sake of the environment diesel). The number indicates the percentage of biodiesel in the diesel. “B7” Do not overfill the fuel tank, it may cause Fuel types means, for example, a proportion of bio- the fuel to overflow if it becomes warm. diesel of max. 7%. 1) Identification of fuels 3 Natural gas: “CNG” means Compressed Note Natural Gas. There is no emergency mechanism for the manual release of the fuel tank flap. If necessary, request assistance from special- Type of petrol ised personnel. 3 Valid for: vehicles with petrol engines

Note The correct grade of petrol is listed inside the Diesel vehicles are fitted with a protective fuel tank flap. device that prevents the insertion of the The vehicle is equipped with a catalytic con- 1) wrong fuel hose . It is only possible to re- verter and must only be run on unleaded fuel with Diesel nozzles. Fig. 306 Identification of fuels according to petrol. The petrol must comply with the ● If the pump nozzle is worn, damaged, or if European Union (EU) Directive 2014/94/ standard EN 228 and be sulphur-free. Fuels it is very small, it is possible that it will not with a 10% ethanol ratio can be refuelled be able to open the protective device. Be- Fuels are identified by different symbols on (E10)2). The types of petrol are differentiated fore trying to insert the pump nozzle by the pump and on your vehicle's tank flap. The by using the octane numbers (RON) or via turning it, try a different pump or request identification serves to prevent confusion the anti-knock index (AKI). » specialist help. when choosing the fuel. ● If you fill the tank from a reserve fuel canister, the protective device will not open. 1 Petrol with ethanol (“E” stands for Etha- nol). The number indicates the percent-

1) Depending on country 2) Follow the regulations of the country you are driving in. 343 Practical tips

Super unleaded petrol 95 octane petrol or CAUTION ● In countries in which there is no sulphur- normal 91 octane petrol at least free fuel, it is also allowed to use low sul- ● Fuels high percentage of ethanol, e.g. phur content fuel. We recommend refuelling with super 95 oc- E30 - E100 button must not be used. The tane petrol (91 AKI). If not available, normal 91 fuel system would be damaged. Exception: octane petrol (87 AKI) (with a slight power vehicles with Totalflex engine ››› page 344, loss) may be used. Ethanol fuel. Ethanol fuel ● A single refuelling with leaded fuel or 3 Valid for: vehicles with Totalflex engines Super unleaded petrol, 95 octanes at other metal additives entails a permanent least deterioration of the effectiveness of the You can recognise vehicles with Totalflex en- You should use super 95 octane petrol (91 catalytic converter. gines1) by label on the fuel tank lid with with AKI) at least. ● Only use fuel additives that have been the marking “Petrol/ethanol”. approved by SEAT. The products that con- If super is not available, if necessary, use nor- Vehicles with Totalflex engine can run with tain substances to increase the octane rat- unleaded petrol (95 octane / 91 AKI) accord- mal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI). In this case only ing or decrease knocking may contain met- use moderate engine speeds and a light al additives that damage the engine and ing to ANP No. 57 and with fuels with any high throttle. Refuel with super as soon as possi- catalytic converter. This type of products percentage of ethanol. The vehicle is refuel- ble. must not be used. led in the same way as petrol refuelling. ● Do not use fuels shown in the pump as Also consider that ››› page 343, Type of pet- Unleaded super plus 98 octane petrol or containing metals. LRP (lead replacement rol super 95 octane petrol at least petrol) fuels contain high concentrations of We recommend refuelling with super plus 98 metal additives. Risk of engine damage! Note octane petrol (93 AKI). If not available: super ● High engine speed and full throttle can SEAT recommends filling the tank exclu- 95 octane petrol (91 AKI) (with a slight power damage the engine when using petrol with sively with petrol every 10,000 km to de- loss). an octane rating lower than the correct crease impurities that using E100 ethanol grade for the engine. If super is not available, if necessary, use nor- fuel might have left in the engine. mal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI). In this case only use moderate engine speeds and a light Note throttle. Refuel with super as soon as possi- ● Fuel with an octane rating higher than the ble. one required by the engine can be used.

1) This motor is only available in some markets. 344 Checking and refilling levels

Diesel Risk of damaging the fuel system and the If this message is ignored, the yellow warning lamp  will come on when the remaining 3 Valid for: vehicles with diesel engines engine! Obtain technical assistance. range is less than 1000 km. The indication Please note the information on the inside of that in XXX km it will no longer be possible to the fuel tank flap. restart the engine will appear on the instru- AdBlue® ment panel display. We recommend you use Diesel according to standard EN 590. If the yellow indicator lamp is ignored, when Information about AdBlue® remaining range of 0 km is displayed, it will The diesel can thicken at very low tempera- no longer be possible to restart the engine. tures, thus affecting the start or operation of The red warning lamp  will light up. the engine. Ask your service station attendant ® if their diesel is suitable for winter use. AdBlue is a registered brand of the German Association of the Automotive Industry (VDA) Water in the fuel filter1) and is also known as AUS32 or DEF (Diesel Exhaust Fluid). If your vehicle has a diesel engine and is Fig. 307 Related video equipped with a fuel filter with a water sep- CAUTION arator, the instrument panel may display the The consumption of AdBlue® depends on Filling the AdBlue® tank excessively can your personal driving style, the temperature following warning:  Water in the fuel cause damage to the tank. filter. If this is the case, take the vehicle to of the system and on the outdoor tempera- a specialised workshop so that they can ture when the vehicle is used. drain the fuel filter. ® AdBlue freezes at temperatures of -11 °C (+13 Control and warning lamps °F). The system has heating elements that CAUTION guarantee its operation even at low tempera- It lights up red ● Never use of FAME (biodiesel), petrol, tures.  heating oil, other fuels or thinning agents The capacity of the AdBlue® tank is approx. The engine cannot be restarted! The AdBlue level as they can cause severely damage the 18 litres. is too low. fuel system and the engine. Stop the vehicle in a suitable, safe and flat area then top up with the minimum required quantity of AdBlue ● If the wrong fuel has been filled, do not When the range is less than 2400 km the ››› page 346. » start the engine under any circumstances. instrument panel screen displays a message requesting an AdBlue® refill.

1) Depending upon country. 345 Practical tips

® ● Unscrew the tank cap by turning it in an an- and They light up red Fill AdBlue   ti-clockwise direction. The engine cannot be restarted! Fault in the ● Please observe the manufacturer's instruc- AdBlue system. tions, indicated on the refill bottle. Contact a specialised workshop. Have the system checked there. ● Check the expiry date. ● Remove the cap of the refill bottle.  It lights up yellow ● Insert the neck of the bottle in the tank filler The AdBlue reserve is low. neck vertically and screw the bottle on by Refill AdBlue within the next kilometres (or miles) that hand, by turning it in a clockwise direction. are indicated ››› page 346. SEAT recommends con- ● Press the refill bottle in the direction of the tacting a specialised workshop. filler neck and hold it in this position. Fig. 308 AdBlue tank cap. ● Wait until the contents of the refill bottle  and  They light up yellow have been poured into the AdBlue® tank. Do Operations prior to refilling There is a fault in the AdBlue system or unsuitable not compress or break the bottle! Park the vehicle on a flat surface and turn off AdBlue fluid has been used. ● Turn the bottle in a counter-clockwise di- the ignition. If the vehicle is on a slope or on a Contact a specialised workshop. Have the system rection and gently pull it upwards ››› . checked there. curb, the level indicator may not detect the ® refill properly. ● The AdBlue tank is full when no more liquid Several warning and control lamps should comes out of the bottle. If a warning message about AdBlue® levels light up for a few seconds when the ignition is ● Screw on the tank cap in a clockwise direc- appears on the dash panel display, fill at switched on, signalling that the function is be- tion until it is tightly closed. least the minimum amount required (ap- ing verified. They will switch off after a few prox. 5 litres) Only after adding this amount ● Close the fuel tank flap. seconds. will the system detect that AdBlue® has been Operations before driving WARNING added and you will be able to start the engine again. The maximum amount that can ● After refilling the tank, only switch on the ig- Observe the safety warnings ››› in Con- be refilled is 11 litres. nition. trol and warning lamps on page 81. ● Leave the ignition on for at least 30 sec- Fill with a refill bottle onds for the system to detect the fluid load. Only use AdBlue® that complies with ISO ● Make sure you wait for at least 30 seconds 22241-1. Only use original containers. before starting the engine! ● Open the tank cover ››› Fig. 308. 346 Checking and refilling levels

Refilling the dispenser with AdBlue ● Never pour AdBlue® into the fuel tank. Control lamps Valid for vehicles with selective catalytic re- This could result in engine damage. duction. ● Do not carry the refill bottle inside the  It lights up vehicle. If there is a leak (due to tempera- Fault in the emission control system. ● Open the tank cap. ture changes or damage to the bottle), the Reduce speed and drive carefully to the nearest spe- ● AdBlue® may damage the vehicle. Turn the SCR tank cap anti-clockwise cialised workshop to have the engine checked. ››› Fig. 308. ● Add AdBlue until the nozzle stops for the For the sake of the environment  Flashes first time. Dispose of the refill bottle in an environ- Combustion failures that can damage the catalytic ● Close the SCR tube by turning it clockwise ment-friendly manner. converter. until you hear a click. Reduce speed and drive carefully to the nearest spe- Note cialised workshop to have the engine checked. WARNING You can buy refill bottles that are adequate ® AdBlue should only be stored in the origi- for AdBlue® use at SEAT dealerships .  It lights up nal container, which should be tightly closed and kept in a safe place. Particulate filter blocked ››› page 348.

It lights up CAUTION Engine management and  ● When refilling, the nozzle grip should be emissions control system Fault in the petrol engine management. aligned downward. Otherwise the nozzle Have the engine checked as soon as possible by a specialised workshop. will not connect automatically. Introduction ● Do not try to add any more additive after When the ignition is switched on, the  (Electronic the nozzle has stopped for the first time. Power Control) lights up and should go off once the WARNING The AdBlue tank could overflow and AdBlue engine has started. could spill out. ● Due to the high temperatures reached by ● Only use AdBlue® that complies with ISO the exhaust gas scrubbing system, you  It lights up 22241-1. Only use original containers. should not park your vehicle near a surface that can catch fire easily. Fire hazard! Diesel engine preheating system. ● Never mix AdBlue® with water, fuel or ad- The engine can be started straight away when the ditives. Any type of damage caused by ● Do not apply wax underneath the vehicle lamp switches off. » such a mixture will not be covered by the around the area of the exhaust system: Fire warranty. hazard!

347 Practical tips

 Flashes atmosphere. The catalytic converter can also cle is moving. See Manual. The partic- be damaged by overheating. ulate filter needs cleaning (regeneration). Fault in the diesel engine management. Have the engine checked as soon as possible by a CAUTION Regeneration of the petrol particulate fil- specialised workshop. Never run the fuel tank completely dry be- ter (only for 2.0l TSI engines) cause an irregular fuel supply can cause Note Requirements for the regeneration journey: ignition faults. This allows unburnt fuel to the engine is at operating temperature. While the control lamps , ,  or  are enter the exhaust system, which could on, there might be faults in the engine, fuel cause overheating and damage the cata- ● Drive at a speed of at least 80 km/h ››› consumption may go up and the engine lytic converter. ● Completely remove your foot from the ac- might lose power. celerator pedal for a few seconds to let the For the sake of the environment vehicle roll with the gear engaged. Even when the emission control system is ● Consider the legal speed limits as well as Catalytic converter working perfectly, there may be a smell of the recommended gears. sulphur from the gases on occasions. This To maintain the useful life of the catalytic ● Repeat this procedure (accelerate and let depends on the sulphur content of the fuel roll) until the control lamp turns off. converter used. This can quite often be avoided by ● Only use unleaded petrol with petrol en- changing to another brand of fuel. This procedure involves an autonomous par- gines. ticulate filter cleaning process and may take ● Never run the fuel tank dry. some time. ● When changing or adding engine oil, do not Particulate filter If the warning lamp does not turn off, go im- exceed the necessary amount ››› page 354, 3 Valid for: vehicles with petrol or diesel particu- mediately to a specialised workshop to repair Topping up the engine oil. late filters the fault. ● Never tow the vehicle to start it, use jump The particulate filter eliminates most of the leads if necessary ››› page 51. Regeneration of the petrol (except the TSI soot from the exhaust gas system. Under nor- 2.0l engine) and diesel particulate filter If you should notice misfiring, uneven running mal driving conditions the filter cleans itself. If the filter does not clean itself (e.g. if short Requirements for the regeneration journey: or loss of power when the car is moving, have the engine is at operating temperature. the vehicle inspected by a specialised work- journeys are made continuously), it becomes blocked with soot and the following indica- shop. In general, the emissions warning lamp ● Drive at a speed of between 50-120 km/h tion is displayed to the driver:  Particu-  will light up when any of these symptoms (31-75 mph). This increases the temperature occur. If this happens, any unburnt fuel can late filter: cleaned while the vehi- and burns the soot in the filter ››› . enter the exhaust system and escape into the 348 Checking and refilling levels

● Consider the legal speed limits as well as the particulate filter is not affected. Also parking brake. If the vehicle has a manual the recommended gears. avoid making short trips all the time. gearbox, place the lever in neutral; if it has ● End the regeneration journey once the con- an automatic gearbox, place the selector trol warning lamp has gone out. lever in position P. Wait for the engine to cool down. If the warning lamp stays on after 30 minutes Engine compartment ● Never open the bonnet if you see steam of running in regeneration mode, have a spe- or drips of coolant being released from the cialised workshop repair the fault Working in the engine compart- engine compartment. Wait until no steam ment or coolant can be seen before opening the WARNING bonnet. Always adjust your speed to suit the weath- ● Keep children away from the engine er conditions, roads, braking distance and compartment. traffic if the particulate filter is in its regen- ● Never spill liquids used for vehicle opera- eration phase. Route recommendations tion on the engine compartment, as these should never make you disregard each may catch fire (e.g. the antifreeze in cool- country's specific traffic regulations. ant). Fig. 309 Related video ● Avoid causing short-circuits in the elec- CAUTION trical system, particularly at the points Always be aware of the danger of injury and where the jump leads are attached ● When the exhaust system detects that scalding as well as the risk of accident or fire ››› page 51. The battery could explode. the particulate filter is close to saturation, when working in the engine compartment the self-cleaning function of this system (e.g. when checking and refilling fluids). ● If working inside the engine compart- recommends optimal driving for this func- ment, remember that, even when the ignition. Always observe the warnings listed below tion is switched off, the radiator fan may ● Due to the high temperatures caused by and follow all general safety precautions. start up automatically, and therefore there is a risk of injury. the regeneration of the particulate filter, it The vehicle's engine compartment is a pois possible that the radiator fan will acti- tentially hazardous area ››› . ● Never cover the engine with additional in- vate after stopping the engine, even it its sulating materials such as a blanket. Risk of operating temperature has not been WARNING fire! reached. ● Do not unscrew the cap on the coolant When work is done in the engine compart- ● Noise, smells and high idle speeds can expansion tank when the engine is hot. The ment, injuries, burns, accidents and even occur during regeneration. cooling system is under pressure. » fires can occur. ● Always use the correct engine oil and the ● Switch the engine off, remove the key correct fuel to make sure the useful life of from the ignition and apply the electronic 349 Practical tips

● Protect face, hands and arms by cover- ● Observe the following additional warn- Opening and closing the bonnet ing the cap with a large, thick rag to protect ings if work on the fuel system or the elec- against escaping coolant and steam. trical system is necessary: ● Always make sure you have not left any – Always disconnect the battery from the objects, such as cleaning cloths or tools, in on-board network. the engine compartment. – Do not smoke. ● If you have to work underneath the vehi- – Never work near naked flames. cle, you must use suitable stands additionally to support the vehicle, there is a risk of – Always keep an approved fire extin- accident!. A hydraulic jack is insufficient for guisher immediately available. securing the vehicle and there is a risk of injury. For the sake of the environment ● If any work has to be performed when the ● Inspect the ground underneath your vehi- Fig. 310 Release lever in the driver's footwell area. engine is started or with the engine running, cle regularly so that any leaks are detec- there is an additional, potentially fatal, ted at an early stage. If you find spots of oil safety risk from the rotating parts, such as or other fluids in the area where it was the drive belts, alternator, radiator fan, etc., parked, have your vehicle inspected at the and from the high-voltage ignition system. workshop. You should also observe the following: ● Service fluids leaks are harmful to the en- – Never touch the electrical wiring of the vironment. For this reason you should make ignition system. regular checks on the ground underneath – Ensure that jewellery, loose clothing your vehicle. If you find spots of oil or other and long hair do not get trapped in ro- fluids, have your vehicle inspected in a tating engine parts. Danger of death. specialised workshop. Before starting any work remove jewellery, tie back and cover hair, and wear Note Fig. 311 Cam under the bonnet tight-fitting clothes. In right-hand drive vehicles* some brake – Never accelerate with a gear engaged Opening the bonnet fluid reservoirs are on the other side of the without taking the necessary precau- engine compartment Fig. 312. The bonnet is released from inside the vehi- tions. The vehicle could move, even if ››› the handbrake is applied. Danger of cle. death. Before opening the bonnet, make sure that the windscreen wiper arms are in place against the windscreen. 350 Checking and refilling levels

● Open the door and pull the lever under the ● Release the bonnet stay and replace it in its WARNING dashboard ››› Fig. 310 1 . support. Make sure that the bonnet is properly ● To lift the bonnet, press the release catch ● At a height of approximately 30 cm let it fall closed. If it opens when driving, it can under the bonnet upwards ››› Fig. 311 2 . The so it locks. cause an accident. arrester hook under the bonnet is released. If the bonnet does not close, do not press ● The bonnet can be opened. Release the downwards. Open it again and let it fall as CAUTION bonnet stay and secure it in the fixture de- mentioned above. signed for this in the bonnet. To avoid damage to the bonnet and to the windscreen wiper arms, only open it when the windscreen wipers are in place against Closing the bonnet the windscreen. ● Slightly lift the bonnet.

Checking levels

Fig. 312 Diagram for the location of the various elements.

From time to time, the levels of the different fill with incorrect fluids, otherwise serious 1 Coolant expansion tank ››› page 355 fluids in the vehicle must be checked. Never damage to the engine may be caused. 2 Engine oil level dipstick ››› page 353 » 351 Practical tips

3 Engine oil filler cap ››› page 354 If the recommended engine oil is not availa- ● Only in exceptional circumstances, if the 4 Brake fluid reservoir ››› page 357 ble, in the event of an emergency you can engine oil level is too low ››› page 353 and change the oil once with a maximum of 0.5 L you cannot obtain the oil specified for your 5 Battery (under the cover) page 358 ››› of the next oil until the next oil change: vehicle, you can use a small quantity of oil 6 Windscreen washer reservoir (once) conforming to the specifications ››› page 357 – Petrol engines: standard VW 504 00, VW 506 00, VW 506 01, VW 505 00, VW 502 00, VW 508 00, ACEA C3 or VW 505 01 or ACEA B3/ACEA B4 (up to 0.5 l) Note API SN. ››› page 352. The layout of parts may vary depending on – Diesel engines: standard VW 507 00, the engine. VW 505 01, ACEA C3 or API CK-4. Engine oil additives

Have the oil changed by a specialised work- No type of additive should be mixed with the shop. engine oil. The deterioration caused by these additives is not covered by the warranty. Engine oil Using engine oil that is compliant with the VW 504 00 standard instead of VW 508 00 Note General notes could increase consumption and the vehicle’s Before a long trip, we recommend finding CO emissions. 2 an engine oil that conforms to the corre- The engine comes with a special, multi-grade sponding VW specifications and recom- oil that can be used all year round.  mend keeping it in the vehicle. This way, the Because the use of high-quality oil is essen- Recommended by SEAT correct engine oil will always be available tial for the correct operation of the engine for a top-up if needed. and its long useful life, when topping up or SEAT recommends using original SEAT oil to changing oil, use only those oils that comply guarantee high SEAT engine performance. with VW standards. We recommend that the oil change be done Vehicles with diesel particulate filter* by a technical service or specialised work- Only VW 507 00 engine oil, with reduced ash shop. formation, may be used in diesel engines equipped with particulate filter. Using other If the engine oil level is too low types of oil will cause a higher soot concen- You can get information about the correct en- tration and reduce the life of the DPF. There- gine oil for your vehicle at your workshop. fore:

● Avoid mixing this oil with other engine oils. 352 Checking and refilling levels

Engine oil specifications  It lights up yellow Checking oil level – Park the vehicle in a horizontal position. Diesel engines Check the engine oil level as soon as possible. Replace oil as soon as you have the opportunity to – Briefly run the engine at idle speed until the Type of Specifica- Engine type do so ››› page 354. operating temperature is reached and then Service tion stop. It flashes yellow Set Service  – Wait for about two minutes. With particulate and Flexible VW 507 00 Fault in the oil level sensor. filter (DPF)a) Service Inter- – Pull out the dipstick. Wipe the dipstick with Have the check done by a specialised workshop. Un- vals a clean cloth and insert it again, pushing it til then it is advisable to check the oil level every time in as far as it will go. Without particu- Set Service VW 505 01b) you refuel. late filter (DPF) Intervals VW 506 01b) – Then pull it out once more and check the oil WARNING level ››› Fig. 313. Top up with engine oil if a) Only use recommended oils, otherwise you may damage the engine. Observe the safety warnings ››› in Con- necessary. b) trol and warning lamps on page 81. If the quality of the fuel available in the country The oil must leave a mark between zones A does not fulfil the EN 590 (for diesel) standard. and C . It can never go above zone A .

Checking the engine oil level ● Zone A : do not add oil. Warning lamp ● Zone B : you can add oil but keep the level in that zone.  It lights up red ● Zone C : add oil until zone B .  Do not carry on driving! Depending on how you drive and the condi- Engine oil pressure too low. Switch off the engine. Check the engine oil level. tions in which the vehicle is used, oil consumption can be up to 0.5 l/1000 km. Oil If this warning lamp  starts to flash, and is accom- consumption is likely to be higher for the first panied by three audible warnings, switch off the en- 5,000 km. For this reason the engine oil level gine and check the oil level. If necessary, add more must be checked at regular intervals, prefera- oil ››› page 354. bly when filling the tank and before a journey. » If the warning lamp  flashes although the oil level Fig. 313 Engine oil dipstick. is correct, stop driving. Do not even run the engine at idle speed! Obtain technical assistance. The engine oil dipstick indicates the level of the oil. 353 Practical tips

WARNING Before opening the bonnet, read and observe damage to the engine and catalytic con- the warnings ››› in Working in the engine verter. Contact a specialised workshop. Any work carried out in the engine com- compartment on page 349. partment or on the engine must be carried out cautiously. For the sake of the environment Topping up engine oil ● When working in the engine compart- The oil level must never be above zone ● Unscrew cap from engine oil filler opening ment, always observe the safety warnings ››› Fig. 313 A . Otherwise oil can be drawn in Fig. 314. ››› page 349. ››› through the crankcase breather and leak ● Carefully add oil in small quantities (no into the atmosphere via the exhaust sys- CAUTION more than 0.5 l). tem. ● To avoid adding too much oil, whenever you If the oil level is above area A , do not start the engine. This could result in damage to add a certain amount, wait about 2 minutes Note and recheck the oil level page 353. the engine and catalytic converter. Con- ››› Before a long trip, we recommend finding tact a Technical Service. ● If necessary, add some more oil. an engine oil that conforms to the corre- ● When the oil level reaches at least zone sponding VW specifications and recommend keeping it in the vehicle. This way, the ››› Fig. 313 B , unscrew the engine oil filler Topping up the engine oil cap carefully ››› . correct engine oil will always be available for a top-up if needed. The position of the oil filler opening is shown in the corresponding engine compartment illustration ››› page 351. Engine oil change Engine oil specification ››› page 353. We recommend that you have the engine oil WARNING changed by a Technical Service.

Oil is highly inflammable! Ensure that no oil WARNING comes into contact with hot engine components when topping up. Only change the engine oil yourself if you have the specialist knowledge required! Fig. 314 In the engine compartment: Engine oil CAUTION ● Before opening the bonnet, read and ob- filler cap. serve the warnings ››› page 349. If the oil level is above area ››› Fig. 313 A , ● Wait for the engine to cool down. Hot oil do not start the engine. This could result in may cause burn injuries.

354 Checking and refilling levels

● Wear eye protection to avoid injuries, Cooling system WARNING such as acid burns, caused by splashes of If there is not enough anti-freeze in the oil. Coolant specifications coolant system, the engine may fail lead- ● When removing the oil drain plug with ing to serious damage. your fingers, keep your arm horizontal to The engine cooling system is supplied from ● Ensure that the percentage of additive is help prevent oil from running down your the factory with a specially treated mixture of correct for the lowest expected ambient arm. water and at least 40 % of the additive temperature in the zone in which the vehi- ● Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes into G12evo (TL-VW 774 J), purple. This mixture cle is to be used. contact with engine oil. gives the necessary frost protection down to ● When the outside temperature is very ● Engine oil is poisonous! Used oil must be -25°C (-13°F) and protects the light alloy low, the coolant could freeze and the vehi- stored in a safe place out of the reach of parts of the engine cooling system against cle would be immobilised. children. corrosion. It also prevents scaling and considerably raises the boiling point of the cool- CAUTION CAUTION ant. The original additives should never be To protect the cooling system, the percent- No additives should be used with engine oil. mixed with coolants which are not ap- This could result in engine damage. Any age of additive must always be at least 40 %, proved by SEAT. damage caused by the use of such addi- even in warm climates where anti-freeze pro- ● If the fluid in the expansion tank is not tives would not be covered by the factory tection is not required. purple but is, for example, brown, this indi- warranty. If for weather reasons further protection is cates that the G12evo additive has been necessary, the proportion of additive may be mixed with an inadequate coolant. The For the sake of the environment increased, but only up to 60 %; otherwise an- coolant must be changed as soon as possible if this is the case! ● We recommend that you change the en- tifreeze protection will diminish and this will gine oil and the filter at a technical service worsen cooling. centre. When the coolant is topped up, use a mixture For the sake of the environment ● Never pour oil down drains or into the of distilled water and at least 40 % of the Coolants and additives can contaminate ground. additive G12evo for optimal protection the environment. If any fluids are spilled, ● Use a suitable container when draining against corrosion. Mixing G12evo with G13 they should be collected and correctly dis- the used oil. It must be large enough to hold (TL-VW 774 J), G12 plus-plus (TL-VW 774 G), posed of, with respect to the environment. all the engine oil. G12 plus (TL-VW 774 F), G12 (red) or G11 (green blue) engine coolants decreases protection again corrosion and should be avoided.

355 Practical tips

Refilling coolant Checking coolant level WARNING – Park the vehicle in a horizontal position. ● The cooling system is under pressure. Do – Switch the ignition off. not unscrew the cap on the coolant expansion tank when the engine is hot: risk of – Read off the coolant level on coolant ex- burns! pansion tank. When the engine is cold, the ● Store the antifreeze in its original con- coolant level should be between the marks tainer and keep it out of reach of children. ››› Fig. 315. When the engine is hot, it may ● If working inside the engine compart- be slightly above the upper mark. ment, remember that, even when the ignition is switched off, the radiator fan may Topping up coolant start up automatically, and therefore there – Wait for the engine to cool down. is a risk of injury. Fig. 315 In the engine compartment: marking on coolant expansion tank. – Cover the coolant expansion tank cap with a cloth and carefully unscrew it to the left CAUTION ››› . If you run out of coolant in the expansion – Top up the coolant only if there is still cool- tank, park the car in a safe place and do ant in the expansion tank, otherwise you not continue driving. Obtain technical assistance. could damage the engine. If there is no coolant in the expansion tank, do not continue driving. You should obtain professional assistance ››› . – If there is still some coolant in the expansion tank, top up to the upper mark.

Fig. 316 Engine compartment: coolant expan- – Top up with coolant until the level becomes sion tank cap. stable.

The coolant tank is located in the engine – Screw the cap back on correctly. compartment ››› page 351. If there is a coolant leak, take the vehicle spe- Top up coolant when the level is below the  cialised workshop to have the cooling system (minimum) mark. examined.

356 Checking and refilling levels

Brake fluid Changing brake fluid CAUTION We recommend that you have the brake fluid Brake fluid should not come into contact Check and refill the brake fluid changed by a Technical Service. with the vehicle paintwork, as it is abrasive.

WARNING For the sake of the environment If the brake fluid level is low or unsuitable/old brake fluid is used, the brake sys- Brake fluid is an environmental pollutant. tem may fail or braking power may be re- Collect any spilt service fluids and allow a duced. professional to dispose of them. ● Check the brake system and the brake fluid level regularly! ● When the brake fluid is used and brakes Windscreen washer reservoir are subjected to extreme braking forces, bubbles of vapour form in the brake sys- Checking the level of the window Fig. 317 Engine compartment: brake fluid res- tem. These bubbles can significantly re- ervoir cap. duce braking power, notably increasing washer tank and refilling it braking distance, and could result in the to- The brake fluid reservoir is located in the en- tal failure of the brake system. gine compartment ››› page 351. ● Be sure to always use the correct brake fluid. Only use brake fluid that expressly Checking the brake fluid level meets the VW 501 14 standard. The brake fluid level must be between the  ● You can buy VW 501 14 standard brake and  markings. fluid in a SEAT dealership or a SEAT Official Service. If none is available, use only high- However, if the brake fluid level goes down quality brake fluid that meets DIN ISO 4925 noticeably in a short time, or drops below the CLASS 4 standards, or USA Standards  mark, there may be a leak in the brake FMVSS 116 DOT 4. system. Seek specialist assistance. A warning ● The replacement brake fluid must be Fig. 318 In the engine compartment: window light on the instrument panel display monitors new. washer tank cap. the brake fluid level ››› page 79. ● Brake fluid should be stored in the closed The window washer tank is in the engine In right-hand drive vehicles the brake fluid original container in a safe place out of compartment page 351. » reservoir is on the other side of the engine reach of children. Risk of poisoning! ››› compartment. 357 Practical tips

Check the water level in the windscreen CAUTION ids could cause serious malfunctions and washer reservoir regularly and top up as re- engine damage! quired. If the water from the windscreen washer does not contain enough anti-freeze, it may ● Lack of window washer fluid causes the The window washer tank contains liquid de- freeze on the windscreen and rear window, view through the windscreen to be ob- tergent for the windscreen and rear window. reducing forward and rear visibility. scured. ● In winter, ensure the windscreen washer ● Open the bonnet  ››› page 349. contains enough anti-freeze. ● The window washer tank is marked with the ● In cold conditions, you should not use the  Battery symbol on the cap. windscreen wiper system unless you have ● Check there is enough windscreen water in warmed the windscreen with the ventila- the reservoir. tion system. The antifreeze could freeze on General information the windscreen and reduce visibility. Plain water is not enough to clean the wind- The battery is located in the engine compart- screen and headlights. We recommend that ment and is almost maintenance-free. It is CAUTION you always add a product to the windscreen checked as part of the Inspection Service. washer fluid. Never mix an unsuitable antifreeze or other Nevertheless, check the terminals are clean similar additives with the windscreen wash- and have the correct tightening torque, espe- Recommended windscreen wipers er water. A greasy layer may be formed on cially in summer and winter. the windscreen which will impair visibility. ● For the hottest seasons we recommend All work on batteries requires specialist ● Use clean water with a window cleaner summer G 052 184 A1 for clear glass. Propor- knowledge. Please refer to a SEAT Official recommended by SEAT. tions of the mixture in the washer fluid tank: Service or a workshop specialising in batter- 1:100 (1 part concentrate per 100 parts wa- ● If necessary, add a suitable antifreeze to ies: risk of burns or exploding battery! ter). the water in the reservoir. The battery must not be opened. Never try ● All year round, G 052 164 A2 for clear glass. to change the fluid level of the battery. Oth- CAUTION Approximate proportion of the winter mixture, erwise explosive gas is released from the bat- up to -18°C (0°F): 1:2 (1 part concentrate per 2 ● Do not mix cleaning products recommen- tery that could cause an explosion. parts water); otherwise, a 1:4 proportion of ded by SEAT with other products. This mixture in the washer fluid tank. could lead to flocculation and may block Battery warning indications the windscreen washer jets. The capacity of the window washer tank can  Wear eye protection. ● When topping up service fluids, make ab- be found in page 389. ››› solutely certain that you fill the fluids into  Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear pro- the correct reservoirs. Using the wrong flu- tective gloves and eye protection. Rinse any splashes of electrolyte with plenty of water.

358 Checking and refilling levels

 Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking are Winter conditions ● Keep children away from acid and bat- prohibited. During the winter, the starting power may be teries.  The battery should only be charged in a well- reduced, and if necessary, the battery should ● Before working on the electrical system, ventilated zone. Risk of explosion! be charged ››› you must switch off the engine, the ignition and all electrical devices. The negative ca-  Keep children away from acid and batteries! WARNING ble on the battery must be disconnected. When a light bulb is changed, you need on- Always be aware of the danger of injury ly switch off the light. Disconnecting the battery and chemical burns as well as the risk of The battery should only be disconnected in accident or fire when working on the bat- ● Deactivate the anti-theft alarm by un- exceptional cases. When the battery is dis- tery and the electrical system: locking the vehicle before you disconnect the battery! The alarm will otherwise be connected, some of the vehicle's functions ● Wear eye protection. Protect your eyes, triggered. are lost. These functions will require resetting skin and clothing from acid and particles after the battery is reconnected. containing lead. ● When disconnecting the battery from the vehicle on-board network, disconnect first ● Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear When disconnecting the battery from the ve- the negative cable and then the positive protective gloves and eye protection. Do hicle on-board network, disconnect first the cable. not tilt the batteries. This could spill acid negative cable and then the positive cable. through the vents. ● Switch off all electrical devices before reconnecting the battery. Reconnect first Deactivate the anti-theft alarm* before you ● Neutralise any electrolyte splashes on the positive cable and then the negative disconnect the battery Otherwise the alarm the skin, eyes or clothing with a soapy solu- cable. Never reverse the polarity of the will be triggered. tion, and rinse off with plenty of water. If connections. This could cause an electrical acid is swallowed by mistake, consult a fire. If the vehicle is not used for long periods doctor immediately. ● Never charge a frozen battery, or one The vehicle has a system for monitoring the ● Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking which has thawed. This could result in ex- are prohibited. When handling cables and current consumption when the engine is left plosions and chemical burns. Always re- electrical equipment, avoid causing sparks unused for long periods of time ››› page 361. place a battery which has frozen. A flat and electrostatic charge. Never short the Some functions, such as the interior lights, or battery can also freeze at temperatures battery terminals. High-energy sparks can the remote door opening, may be temporarily close to 0°C (+32°F). disabled to prevent the battery from running cause injury. ● Ensure that the vent hose is always con- ● A highly explosive mixture of gases is re- flat. These functions will come back on as nected to the battery. soon as the ignition is switched on and the leased when the battery is under charge. ● Never use a defective battery. This could engine started. The batteries should be charged in a well- ventilated room only. cause an explosion. Replace a damaged battery immediately. »

359 Practical tips

CAUTION Checking the battery electrolyte Charging or changing the battery ● Do not expose the battery to direct sun- level If you often drive short distances or if the ve- light over a long period of time, as the in- hicle is not driven for long periods, the battery tense ultraviolet radiation can damage the The electrolyte level should be checked reg- should be checked by a specialised work- battery housing. ularly in high-mileage vehicles, in hot countries and in older batteries. shop between the scheduled services. ● If the vehicle is left standing in cold con- If the battery has discharged and you have ditions for a long period, protect the bat- ● Open the bonnet and then lift the cover tery from “freezing”. If it freezes it will be problems starting the vehicle, the battery that protects the front part of the battery damaged. might be damaged. If this happens, we rec- ››› in Working in the engine compart- ommend you have the vehicle battery ment on page 349. checked by a Technical Service where it will ● Check the colour display in the "magic eye" be re-charged or replaced. Warning lamp on the top of the battery. ● If there are air bubbles in the window, tap Charging the battery  It lights up the window gently until they disperse. The vehicle battery should be charged by a Alternator fault. The position of the battery is shown in the specialised workshop only, as batteries using special technology have been installed and The control lamp lights up when the ignition is corresponding engine compartment diagram ››› page 351. they must be charged in a controlled environ- switched on. It should go out when the engine ment. has started running. The “magic eye” indicator, located on the top If the control lamp  lights up while driving, of the battery changes colour, depending on Replacing a vehicle battery the charge state and electrolyte level of the the alternator is no longer charging the bat- The battery has been developed to suit the battery. tery. You should immediately drive to the conditions of its location and has special nearest specialised workshop. There are two different colours: safety features. If the battery must be replaced, consult a technical service for infor- You should avoid using electrical equipment ● Black: correct charge status. that is not absolutely necessary because this mation on electromagnetic compatibility, the ● will drain the battery. Transparent/light yellow: the battery must size and maintenance, performance and be replaced. Contact a specialised work- safety requirements of the new battery in shop. your vehicle before you purchase one. SEAT recommends you have the battery replaced by a technical service.

360 Checking and refilling levels

Start-Stop systems (››› page 250) are equip- disposed of appropriately and must not be Battery diagnosis ped with a special battery. Therefore, it must disposed of with ordinary household waste. The battery diagnosis function constantly only be replaced with a battery of the same registers the condition of the battery. Sensors specifications. detect the battery voltage, battery current Your vehicle is equipped with an intelligent and battery temperature. This enables the power management system to control the Energy management system to calculate the current power level distribution of electrical energy ››› page 361. and charge condition of the battery. The power management function ensures Optimisation of the starting ca- that the battery is charged much more effi- pacity Residual current management ciently than on vehicles without a power The residual current management reduces management system. To maintain this func- The power management controls the distri- power consumption while the vehicle is tion after replacing the battery, we recom- bution of electrical energy and thus helps to parked. It controls the supply of power to the mend that the replacement battery used is of ensure that there is always enough power various electrical devices while the ignition is the same make and type as the original fitted available to start the engine. switched off. The system takes the battery di- battery. To make proper use of the power If a vehicle with a conventional electrical sys- agnosis data into consideration. management function after the battery has tem is left parked for a long time, the battery been changed, have the battery coded to the Depending on the power level of the battery, will gradually lose its charge because certain power management mode at a specialised switch off the individual electrical devices electrical devices, such as the electronic workshop. one after the other to prevent the battery gearbox lock continues to draw current even from losing too much charge and to ensure when the ignition is off. In some cases there WARNING that the engine can be started reliably. may not be enough power available to start ● Always use only maintenance free bat- the engine. Dynamic power management teries that do not run flat alone and whose properties, specifications and size corre- Your vehicle is equipped with an intelligent While the vehicle is moving, this function dis- spond to the standard battery. The specifi- power management system to control the tributes the available power to the various cations are indicated on the battery case. distribution of electrical energy. This signifi- electrical devices and systems according to cantly improves reliability when starting the ● Before starting any work on the batteries, their requirements. The power management you must read and observe the warnings engine, and also prolongs the useful life of the ensures that on-board systems do not con- ››› in General information on page 359. battery. sume more electrical power than the alterna- The main functions incorporated in the power tor can supply, and thus maintains the maxi- For the sake of the environment management system are battery diagnosis, mum possible battery power level. » residual current management and dynam-  Batteries contain toxic substances such ic power management. as sulphuric acid and lead. They must be 361 Practical tips

Note current they are using. This limits the amount reduce the current they are consuming. Heat- of power consumed and helps to ensure reli- ing systems in particular use a large amount ● Neither is the power management system able starting even after a long period. Some of electrical power. If you notice, for instance, able to overcome the given physical limits. convenience functions, such as remote vehi- that the seat heating* or the rear window Please remember that the power and use- cle opening, may not be available under cer- heater is not working, they may have been ful life of the battery are limited. tain circumstances. These functions will be temporarily switched off or regulated to a ● When there is a risk that the vehicle will restored when you switch on the ignition and lower heat output. These systems will be not start, the alternator power failure or start the engine. available again as soon as sufficient electri- low battery charge level warning lamp will cal power is available. be shown  ››› page 79. With the engine switched off You may also notice that the engine runs at a For example, if you listen to the sound system slightly faster idling speed when necessary. with the engine switched off the battery will Flat battery This is quite normal, and no cause for con- run down. cern. The increased idling speed allows the alternator to meet the greater power require- Starting ability has first priority. If the energy consumption means there is a ment and charge the battery at the same risk that the engine will not start, a text will Short trips, city traffic and low temperatures time. appear in vehicles with a driver information all place a heavy load on the battery. In system*. these conditions a large amount of power is consumed, but only a small amount is sup- This driver indicator tells you that you must plied. The situation is also critical if electrical start the engine so that the battery can re- devices are in use when the engine is not run- charge. ning. In this case power is consumed when none is being generated. When the engine is running In these situations you will be aware that the Although the alternator generates electrical power management system is intervening to power, the battery can still become dis- control the distribution of electrical power. charged while the vehicle is being driven. This can occur when a lot of power is being con- When the vehicle is parked for long peri- sumed but only a small amount supplied, es- ods pecially if the battery is not fully charged initially. If you do not drive your vehicle for a period of several days or weeks, the power manage- To restore the necessary energy balance, the ment will gradually shut off the electrical de- system will then temporarily shut off the elec- vices one by one or reduce the amount of trical devices that are using a lot of power, or 362 Wheels

Wheels Low profile tyres Foreign objects inserted in the tyre Low profile tyres have a wider tread, a larger ● Do not remove foreign bodies if they have Wheels and tyres wheel diameter and a lower sidewall height. penetrated through the tyre wall! Therefore, its driving behaviour is more agile. ● If the vehicle comes with a tyre mobility system, where necessary seal the damaged General notes Low profile tyres may deteriorate more quickly than standard tyres, for instance due to tyre as shown in section ››› page 42. Use a specialised workshop for repair or replace- – When driving with new tyres, be especially strong knocks, potholes, manhole covers and ment. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT careful during the first 500 km (300 miles). kerbs. Correct tyre pressure is very important ››› page 365. dealership for this. – If you have to drive over a kerb or similar obstacle, drive very slowly and as near as To avoid damage to tyres and wheels, drive The sealant at the lower part of the tyre tread possible at a right angle to the obstacle. with special care when driving on roads in wraps around the foreign body and provision- poor condition. ally seals the tyre. – Check from time to time if the tyres are Visually check your wheels every 3000 km. damaged (punctures, cuts, cracks or Tyres with directional tread pattern dents). Remove any foreign objects em- If the tyres or rims have received a heavy im- An arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the di- bedded in the treads. pact or have been damaged, have a special- rection of rotation on single drive tyres. Al- ised workshop check whether or not it is nec- – Damaged wheels and tyres must be re- ways note the direction of rotation indicated essary to change the tyre. placed immediately. when mounting the wheel. This makes sure – Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres. Low profile tyres may deteriorate more quick- that optimal use is made of tyre properties in ly than standard tyres. terms of aquaplaning, grip, excessive noise – Replace any missing valve caps as soon as and wear. possible. Concealed damage – Mark the wheels before taking them off so Damage to tyres and rims is often not readily Subsequent fitting of accessories that they rotate in the same direction when visible. If you notice unusual vibration or the If you wish to change or fit wheels, rims or put back. car pulling to one side, this may indicate wheel trims, we recommend that you consult – When removed, the wheels or tyres should that one of the tyres is damaged. Reduce with a SEAT Official Service centre for advice be stored in a cool, dry and preferably dark speed immediately if there is any reason to regarding current techniques. place. suspect that damage may have occurred. In- spect the tyres for damage. If no external Speed symbols damage is visible, drive slowly and carefully The speed rating indicates the maximum to the nearest specialised workshop and speed permitted for the tyres. » have the car inspected. 363 Practical tips

P max. 150 km/h (93 mph) New wheels and tyres event of a puncture, and the vehicle should Q max. 160 km/h (99 mph) be driven with care. Refit the normal road It is best to have all wheels and tyres serviced wheel as soon as possible. R max. 170 km/h (106 mph) by a specialised workshop. There they have In vehicles with four-wheel drive, the 4 wheels S max. 180 km/h (112 mph) the required knowledge, the special tools and must be fitted with tyres of the same brand, the corresponding spare parts. T max. 190 km/h (118 mph) type and tread so that the traction system is U max. 200 km/h (124 mph) ● Even winter tyres lose their grip on ice. If you not damaged by a difference in the number H max. 210 km/h (130 mph) have installed new tyres, drive the first 500 of turns of the wheels. Therefore, in the event of a puncture, only a spare wheel with the V max. 240 km/h (149 mph) km carefully and at a moderate speed. same perimeter as normal tyres should be ● All four wheels must be fitted with tyres of Z max. 240 km/h (149 mph) used. the same type, size (rolling circumference) W max. 270 km/h (168 mph) and, if possible, tread pattern. Manufacturing date Y max. 300 km/h (186 mph) ● When changing tyres, do not change just The manufacturing date is also indicated on one; change at least two on the same axle. Some manufacturers use the letters “ZR” for the tyre sidewall (or on the inside face of the tyres with a maximum authorised speed ● If you want to equip your vehicle with a wheel): above 240 km/h (149 mph). combination tyres and rims that are different to those fitted in the factory, inform your spe- DOT ... 2218 ... WARNING cialised workshop before purchasing them it means, for example, that the tyre was man- ● New tyres do not have maximum grip dur- ››› ufactured in the 22nd week of 2018. ing the first 500 km. Drive particularly The sizes of the rims and tyres approved for carefully to avoid possible accidents. WARNING your vehicle are listed in the vehicle docu- ● Never drive with damaged tyres. This mentation (e.g. EC Certificate of Conformity ● Use only combinations of tyres and rims, may cause an accident. or COC document1)). The vehicle documen- as well as suitable wheel nuts, approved by ● If you notice unusual vibrations or if the tation varies depending on the country of res- SEAT. Otherwise the vehicle may be dam- vehicle pulls to one side when driving, stop idence. aged, causing an accident. the vehicle immediately and check the ● For technical reasons it is not possible to tyres. If the type of spare wheel is different form the use wheels of other vehicles; in some cases normal wheels — e.g. in the case of winter ● Never use old tyres or those with an un- not even wheels from the same vehicle tyres or particularly wide tyres — the spare known history of use. model should be used. wheel should only be used temporarily in the

1) COC = certificate of conformity. 364 Wheels

● Always ensure that the tyres you have ● Never mount used tyres if you are not ● Adjust tyre pressure to the load being car- chosen have adequate clearance. When sure of their “previous history”. ried by the vehicle ››› Fig. 319. selecting replacement tyres, do not rely ● In vehicles with a tyre pressure indicator, entirely on the nominal tyre size marked on save the modified tyre pressure ››› page 369. the tyre, since the nominal tyre size can dif- ● Avoid fast cornering and hard acceleration. fer significantly depending on the manu- Tyre life facturer. Lack of clearance can damage ● Inspect the tyres for irregular wear from the tyres or the vehicle and, as a result, en- time to time. danger road safety. Risk of accident! ● Only use tyres that are over 6 years old in Tyre pressure an emergency, and drive with due care. The tyre inflation pressures are listed on a ● The fitting of tyres with run-flat proper- sticker on the rear of the front left door frame ties is not permitted on your vehicle! Pro- ››› Fig. 319. hibited use can cause accidents or can damage your vehicle. Insufficient or excessive pressure greatly reduces the useful life of the tyres and adverse- ● If decorative hubcaps are subsequently ly affects vehicle performance and ride. Cor- fitted, make sure that they allow enough air rect inflation pressures are very important, in to cool the braking system. Risk of acci- especially at high speeds. dent! Depending on the vehicle, tyre pressure can For the sake of the environment be adjusted to medium load to improve driving comfort (tyre pressure  ››› Fig. 319). Old tyres must be disposed of according to When driving with comfort tyre pressure fuel the laws in the country concerned. Fig. 319 Location of the tyre pressure sticker. consumption may increase slightly. The tyre pressure must be adjusted accord- Note Correct inflation pressures and sensible driving to the load the vehicle is carrying. If the ● A SEAT Service Centre should be consul- ing habits will increase the useful life of your vehicle is going to carry the maximum load, ted to find out whether wheels or tyres of tyres. the tyre pressure should be increased to the different sizes to those originally fitted by ● Check tyre pressure at least once a month, maximum value indicated on the sticker SEAT can be fitted, and to find out about ››› Fig. 319. » the combinations allowed between the and also prior to any long trip. front axle (axle 1) and the rear axle (axle 2). ● The tyre pressure should only be checked when the tyres are cold. Do not reduce the pressure of warm tyres. 365 Practical tips

Do not forget the spare wheel when checking WARNING Tread wear indicators the tyre pressures: Keep this spare wheel inflated to the highest pressure required for the Unsuitable handling of the wheels and tyres may lead to sudden tyre pressure los- road wheels. ses, to tread separation or even to a blow- In the case of a minimised temporary spare out. wheel (125/70 R18) inflate to a pressure of 4.2 ● The driver is responsible for ensuring that bar as indicated on the tyre pressure label all of the vehicle tyres are correctly infla- ››› Fig. 319. ted to the right pressure. The recommended tyre pressure is indicated on the label Driving style ››› Fig. 319. Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hard ● Check tyre pressures regularly and en- braking (squealing tyres) all increase tyre sure they are maintained at the pressures Fig. 320 Tyre profile: tread wear indicators. wear. indicated. Tyre pressure that is too low could cause overheating, resulting in tread detachment or even burst tyres. Wheel balance ● When the tyres are cold, tyre pressure The wheels on new vehicles are balanced. should be that indicated on the label However, certain circumstances may lead to ››› Fig. 319. imbalance (run-out), which is detected as vi- ● Regularly check the cold inflation pres- brations in the steering wheel. sure of the tyres. If necessary, change the Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced, tyre pressure of the vehicle tyres while they as they otherwise cause excessive wear on are cold. steering, suspension and tyres. A wheel must ● Regularly check your tyres for damage also be rebalanced when a new tyre is fitted and wear. Fig. 321 Interchanging tyres. or if a tyre is repaired. ● Never exceed the maximum permitted speed or loads specified for the type of Wear indicators around 1.6 mm high can be Incorrect wheel alignment tyre fitted on your vehicle. found on the base of the original tyre treads, Incorrect running gear alignment causes ex- ordered at regular intervals and running cessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of the For the sake of the environment across the tread ››› Fig. 320. The letters "TWI" vehicle. If you notice excessive tyre wear, you Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel con- or triangles on the sidewall of the tyre mark should check wheel alignment at a SEAT Of- sumption. the position of the wear indicators. ficial Service.

366 Wheels

1) The minimum permitted profile depth have ● The speed has to be adapted according- tightening torque is too high, the wheel nuts been reached when the tyres have worn ly, otherwise there is a risk of losing control and threads can be damaged. down to the wear indicators. Replace the over the vehicle. tyres with new ones ››› . CAUTION Changing wheels around See ››› page 48 to find out the recommen- Wheel nuts ded tightening torque for wheel nuts for To ensure that the wear is equal on all tyres steel and alloy rims. the wheels should be changed round from The wheel nuts are matched to the rims. time to time according to the system When installing different wheels (for instance ››› Fig. 321. The useful life of all the tyres will alloy wheels or wheels with winter tyres) it is then be about the same time. important to use the correct wheel nuts with Winter tyres the right length and correctly shaped bolt WARNING heads. This ensures that wheels are fitted se- – Winter tyres must be fitted on all four wheels. The tyres must be replaced at the latest curely and that the brake system functions when the tread is worn down to the tread correctly. – Only use winter tyres that are approved for wear indicators. Failure to follow this in- The wheel nuts must be clean and turn easily. your vehicle. struction could result in an accident. A special adapter is required to turn the anti- – Please note that the maximum permissible ● Particularly in difficult driving conditions theft wheel nuts* ››› page 45. speed for winter tyres may be lower than such as wet or icy roads. It is important that for summer tyres. the tyre tread be as deep as possible and be approximately the same on the tyres of WARNING – Also note that winter tyres are no longer ef- both the front and the rear axles. Wheel nuts should never be greased or fective when the tread is worn down. ● The scant driving safety due to insuffi- oiled. – After fitting the wheels you must always cient tread depth is particularly evident in ● Use only wheel nuts which belong to the check the tyre pressures. When doing so, vehicle handling, when there is a risk of wheel. take into account the correct tyre pressures “aquaplaning” in deep puddles of water ● If the prescribed torque of the wheel nuts listed on the rear of the front left door frame and when driving through corners, and is too low, they could loosen whilst the ve- ››› page 365. braking is also adversely affected. hicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the In winter road conditions winter tyres will considerably improve vehicle handling. The »

1) Follow the regulations of the country you are driving in. 367 Practical tips

design of summer tyres (width, rubber com- Using winter tyres with V-rating Snow chains pound, tread pattern) gives less grip on ice Please note that the generally applicable and snow. This applies particularly to vehicles 240 km/h (149 mph) speed for winter tyres Snow chains must only be fitted to the front equipped with wide section tyres or with with the letter V is subject to technical re- wheels, even on vehicles with four-wheel high speed tyres (code letters H, V or Y on strictions; the maximum permissible speed drive. the sidewall). for your vehicle may be significantly lower. ● Check that they are correctly seated after The maximum speed limit for these tyres de- Only use winter tyres of the correct type ap- driving for a few yards; correct the position if pends directly on the maximum axle weights proved for your vehicle. The sizes of these necessary, in accordance with the manufac- for your car and on the listed weight rating of tyres are specified in the vehicle's documents turer's fitting instructions. (e.g. EC Certificate of Conformity or COC1)). the tyres being used. ● Keep your speed below 50 km/h (30 mph). The vehicle documentation varies depending It is best to contact a SEAT Official Service to ● If there is a danger of being trapped de- on the country of residence. check the maximum speed which is permissi- spite having mounted the chains, it is best to Winter tyres lose a great deal of their proper- ble for the V-rated tyres fitted on your car on disable the driving wheels (ASR) in the ESC ties when the tread is worn down to a depth the basis of this information. ››› page 304, Connecting and disconnect- of 4 mm. ing the ESC and ASR. WARNING The performance of winter tyres is also severely impaired by ageing, even if the tread is Exceeding the maximum speed permitted Snow chains will improve braking ability as still much deeper than 4 mm. for the winter tyres fitted on your car can well as traction in winter conditions. cause tyre failure, resulting in a loss of con- For technical reasons snow chains may only A code letter indicating the speed limit is trol of the vehicle – risk of accident. stamped on all winter tyres ››› page 363. be used with the following wheel rim/tyre combination. Vehicles capable of exceeding these speeds For the sake of the environment must have an appropriate sticker attached When winter is over, change back to sum- 215/65 R17 Chains with links of maximum 9 mm so that it is visible to the driver. Suitable stick- mer tyres at an appropriate moment. In Other dimensions do not allow chains ers are available from the SEAT Official Serv- temperatures above +7°C (+45°F), perform- ice and specialised workshop. Please note ance will be improved if summer tyres are Remove any central wheel trims and the rim the regulations to this effect in your country. used. Fuel consumption, wear and noises ring before fitting snow chains. “All-weather” tyres can also be used instead while driving will all be reduced. of winter tyres.

1) COC = certificate of conformity. 368 Wheels

WARNING Tyre pressure loss indicator Tyre monitor system The use of unsuitable or incorrectly fitted chains could lead to serious accidents and Control lamp damage. ● Always the appropriate snow chains.  It lights up ● Observe the fitting instructions provided The inflation pressure of one or more wheels is much by the snow chain manufacturer. lower than the value set by the driver, or the tyre has ● Never exceed the maximum permitted structural damage. speeds when driving with snow chains. In addition, a audible warning sounds and a text message is displayed on the instrument panel screen. CAUTION  Stop the vehicle! Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible. Check all tyres and pressures. Replace Fig. 322 Instrument panel: warning of loss of ● Remove the snow chains to drive on any damaged tyres. tyre pressure. roads without snow. Otherwise they will impair vehicle handling, damage the tyres The tyre monitor indicator compares wheel and wear out very quickly.  Flashes revolutions and, with this information, the ● Wheel rims may be damaged or scratch- System fault tread of each wheel using the ABS sensors. ed if the chains come into direct contact The control lamp flashes for approximately 1 minute with them. SEAT recommends the use of and then lights up permanently. If the rolling circumference of one or more covered snow chains. If the tyre is inflated correctly, switch the ignition off wheels has changed, the tyre monitoring indi- and on again. Re-calibrate the tyre pressure loss in- cator will indicate this on the instrument pan- dicator ››› page 370. If the fault continues, go to a el through a warning lamp and a warning to specialised workshop. the driver ››› Fig. 322. When only one specific tyre is affected, its position within the vehicle Several control and warning lamps light up will be indicated. for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on while the function is verified. They will  Loss of pressure: Check left switch off after a few seconds. tyre pressure!

WARNING Wheel tread change Observe the safety warnings ››› in Con- The wheel diameter changes when: trol and warning lamps on page 81. ● Tyre pressure is changed manually. ● Tyre pressure is insufficient. » 369 Practical tips

● The tyre structure is damaged. With the wheels under very heavy loads, the in the system, an audible warning will ● The vehicle is unbalanced because of a tyre pressure must be increased to the total sound. recommended tyre pressure before calibra- load. ● Driving on dirt tracks for a long period of tion ››› Fig. 319. ● The wheels on an axle are subject to a time or driving in a sporty style can tempo- heavier load (e.g. with a heavy load). rarily deactivate the TPMS. The control WARNING lamp shows a fault, but disappears when ● The vehicle is fitted with snow chains. When the tyres are inflated at different road conditions or the driving style change. ● The temporary spare wheel is fitted. pressures or at a pressure that is too low ● Do not only rely on the tyre monitoring ● The wheel on one axle is changed. then a tyre may be damaged resulting in a system. Regularly check your tyres to en- loss of control of the vehicle and a serious sure that the tyre pressure is correct and There may be a delay in the reaction of the or fatal accident. that the tyres are not damaged due to tyre  monitoring indicator or it may not indi- ● If the lamp  lights up, reduce speed im- puncture, cuts, tears and impacts/dents. cate anything under certain circumstances mediately and avoid any sudden turning or Remove objects from the tyres only when (e.g. sporty driving, snow-covered or un- braking manoeuvre. Stop when possible, they have not pierced the tyres. paved roads, or when driving with snow and check the tyre pressure and status. ● The tyre monitoring indicator does not chains). ● The tyre monitoring system can only op- function when there is a fault in the ESC or erate correctly if all of the tyres are infla- ABS ››› page 302. Calibrating the tyre monitoring indicator ted to the correct pressure when cold. After changing the tyre pressure or replacing ● If a tyre has not been punctured and it one or more wheels, the tyre monitoring indi- does not have to be changed immediately, cator must be recalibrated. Do the same, for drive to the nearest specialised workshop example, when the front and rear wheels are at a moderate speed and have the tyre swapped. checked and inflated to the correct pressure. ● Switch the ignition on. ● Store the new inflation pressure in the Easy Note Connect system with the button  > SET- ● Driving for the first time with new tyres at TINGS > Tyres ››› page 82 . a high speed can cause them to slightly ex- pand, which could then produce an air When driving, the system self-calibrates the pressure warning. tyre pressure provided by the driver and the wheels fitted. After a long journey with varied ● If excessively low tyre pressure is detec- speeds the programmed values are collected ted with the ignition on, an audible warning and monitored. will sound. In the event that there is a fault 370 Wheels

Spare wheel Removing the temporary spare wheel (5- seat vehicles) Location and use of the temporary ● Lift and hold up the floor panel to remove the temporary spare wheel››› page 138. spare wheel ● Turn the thumb wheel anti-clockwise ››› Fig. 323. ● Take out the temporary spare wheel.

Removing the temporary spare wheel (7- seat vehicles) ● Remove the luggage compartment floor. Fig. 324 In the luggage compartment: remove the subwoofer. ● Pull up on the bottom, side cords of the 3rd row of seats until latching in the upper posi- The temporary spare wheel is stored under tion. the floor panel in the luggage compartment ● Remove the transversal side wall. and is attached by a thumbnut. ● Turn the thumb wheel anticlockwise Fig. 323 In the luggage compartment: load The temporary spare wheel has been de- Fig. 3231). floor raised. ››› signed to be used for short periods of time. ● Take out the temporary spare wheel. Have the tyres checked and replaced as ● To put the temporary spare wheel back in soon as possible at a SEAT Official Service or place, proceed in the reverse order. » at a specialised workshop. The spare wheel must not be switched for a spare wheel from another vehicle.

1) If the vehicle is outfitted with the Beats Audio system with a subwoofer*, before removing the spare wheel, proceed as instructed in ››› page 372. 371 Practical tips

Getting the spare wheel out of vehicles WARNING switch off during the journey. Switch off the with BEATS Audio 10 speakers (with sub- system when starting off. woofer)* Keep in mind that the standard wheel is wider than the emergency spare wheel, so To remove the spare wheel, you must first re- the 3rd row of seats cannot be completely move the subwoofer. lowered when that standard wheel is placed in the emergency spare wheel well. ● Lift and secure the luggage compartment ● Do not drive if the 3rd row of seats is not floor as explained in ››› page 138. correctly fastened by the anchors. Risk of ● Disconnect the subwoofer ››› Fig. 324 1 serious injury. speaker cable. ● Turn the securing wheel in an anti-clock- WARNING wise direction ››› Fig. 324 2 . ● After fitting the temporary spare wheel, ● Remove the subwoofer speaker and the check the tyre pressures as soon as possi- spare wheel. ble. Failure to do so may cause an acci- ● When re-mounting the spare tyre, place the dent. The tyre pressure is listed on the back subwoofer on the base of the wheel rim with of the left front door frame ››› Fig. 319. care. When doing so, the tip of the “FRONT” ● Do not drive at over 80 km/h (50 mph) arrow on the subwoofer should point forward. when the temporary spare wheel is fitted ● Reconnect the speaker cable and firmly ro- on the vehicle: risk of accident! tate the securing wheel clockwise so that the ● Never travel more than 200 km using a subwoofer system and wheel are firmly in temporary spare wheel. place. ● Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and fast cornering: risk of accident! Chains ● Never use more than one temporary For technical reasons, snow chains must not spare wheel at the same time, risk of acci- be used on the temporary spare wheel. dent. ● No other type of tyre (normal summer or If you have a puncture on one of the front winter tyre) may be fitted on the compact wheels when using snow chains, fit the tem- temporary spare wheel rim. porary spare wheel in place of one of the rear ● wheels. Fit the snow chains on the rear wheel If you are driving using the spare wheel, the ACC system could automatically that you have removed and replace the punctured front wheel with this wheel. 372 SEAT Maintenance Programme

Maintenance Service works ● Make sure that any repairs are carried In the Digital Maintenance Plan, your SEAT out by a SEAT authorised service or speci- authorised service or specialised workshop alised workshop. SEAT Maintenance Pro- documents the following information: CAUTION gramme ● When each one of the services was carried out. SEAT cannot be held liable for any damage to the vehicle due to insufficient work or of ● Whether a specific repair has been sugges- Service intervals lack of availability of spare parts. ted, e.g. changing the brake pads in the near future. Service work and the Digital Main- Note tenance Plan ● If you have expressed a special request for the maintenance. Your Service Advisor will Regular services on the vehicle not only maintain its value, but also its correct oper- Log of services performed (“Digital Main- write the work order. ation and road safety. For this reason, con- ● The components or fluids that were tenance Plan”) duct the services in accordance with SEAT changed. The SEAT dealership or a specialised work- guidelines. shop records Service receipts in a central ● The date of the next service. system. Thanks to this comprehensive docu- The Long Life Mobility Warranty is valid until mentation of the service history, it is possible the next inspection. This information is docu- Set Service or Flexible Service In- to reproduce the services performed any mented in all checks performed. tervals time. SEAT recommends requesting a Service receipt after every service carried out con- The type and the volume of the service may Services are classified as oil change service taining all the services carried out on the sys- vary from one vehicle to another. A special- and inspection. The service interval display tem. ised workshop will be able to provide specific on the instrument panel display serves as a information on the jobs for your vehicle. Whenever there is a new service the receipt is reminder of the next service. replaced with a current one. WARNING Depending on the features, the engine and The Digital Maintenance Plan is not avail- the conditions of use of the car, either the If the services are insufficient or not per- able in some markets. In this case, your Fixed service or the Flexible service will be formed and if the service intervals are not SEAT dealer will inform you about the cur- observed, the vehicle may be immobilised applied for an oil change service.. » rent documentation of the work. in traffic cause an accident and severe injuries.

373 Maintenance

How to know which type of service needs Particular characteristics of the Flexible Information about the terms of use to his vehicle Service ● Check the tables below: Regarding the Flexible Service, the oil The service intervals and groups are usually change service only has to be performed based on normal conditions of use. Oil change servicea) when the vehicle needs it. To calculate when If, on the other hand, the vehicle is under ad- you have to carry out this service, take into verse conditions of use, some of the work Type of PR No. Service interval account the individual conditions of use and must be carried out before the next service service personal driving style. A major component of period or even between service intervals. Every 5000 km or after the flexible service the use of LongLife oil in- QI1 Conditions of use adverse include: 1 yearb) stead of conventional engine oil. ● Every 7500 km or after Bear in mind the information about the speci- The use of fuel with a high sulphur content. QI2 1 yearb) fications of the engine oil according to the ● Frequent short trips. Fixed VW standard ››› page 353. Every 10000 km or after ● Letting the engine idle for a long period of QI3 1 yearb) If you do not want to the flexible service time, as in the case of taxis. you can select the fixed service However, Every 15000 km or after ● Using the vehicle in areas with thick dust. QI4 a fixed service may affect service costs 1 yearb) ● Frequent driving with a trailer (depending The Service Advisor will gladly advise you. According to the service in- on equipment). QI6 Flexible terval display Service interval display ● Using the vehicle mostly in situations with a lot of traffic and stops (e.g. in a city). a) The data are based on normal conditions of use. At SEAT, the dates of the services are indica- ● b) Whatever happens first. ted by the service interval display on the in- Using the vehicle mostly in winter. strument panel ››› page 77 or in the Vehicle This applies especially for the following a) settings menu of the infotainment system Inspection Service parts (depending on equipment): ››› page 82. According to the service interval display The service interval display gives information ● Dust and pollen filter a) The data are based on normal conditions of use. for service dates that involve an engine oil ● Air Care allergen filter Bear in mind the information about the speci- change or an inspection. When the time for ● Air filter the corresponding service comes, additional fications of the engine oil according to the ● Toothed chain VW standard ››› page 353. work required, such as the change of brake fluid and the spark plugs, can be carried out. ● Particulate filter ● Engine oil

374 SEAT Maintenance Programme

The Service Advisor of your specialised ● Your SEAT authorised service placing complete sets, such as: light engine, workshop will gladly inform you about the ● Your specialised workshop gearboxes, heads, control units, electrical need of performing service work between components, etc. normal service intervals, always considering Due to technical reasons (continuous devel- These parts are, approved parts, and are the the conditions of use of your vehicle. opment of components) the sets of services same as the factory parts, which are also ap- may vary. Your SEAT authorised service or proved spare parts. WARNING specialised workshop is always receiving up- If the services are insufficient or not per- dates in time. formed and if the service intervals are not Original accessories observed, the vehicle may be immobilised in traffic and cause accidents and severe We recommend you only use SEAT Original injuries. Additional service offers Accessories and SEAT approved accessories ● Have the services conducted at author- Approved spare parts for your vehicle. The reliability, safety and ised SEAT services or specialised work- suitability of these accessories have been in- shops. Original SEAT Spare Parts have been con- spected specifically for this type of vehicle. ceived for their vehicles and approved by SEAT cannot be held liable for the safety and CAUTION SEAT, with a special emphasis on safety. suitability of parts from other manufacturers. SEAT cannot be held liable for any damage These parts correspond exactly to the manu- to the vehicle due to insufficient work or of facturer's requirements in terms of design, lack of availability of spare parts. accuracy of the measurements and materi- SEAT Service Mobility als. The original SEAT Spare Parts have been conceived exclusively for your vehicle. For this Since the moment you purchase your SEAT Service sets reason, we always recommend the use of vehicle you will be able to enjoy the benefits Original SEAT Spare Parts. SEAT cannot be and coverage of the SEAT Mobility Service. held liable for the safety and suitability of Sets of services include all the maintenance For the first two years after the purchase, parts from other manufacturers. works needed to ensure the safety and the your new SEAT vehicle is automatically cov- smooth running of the vehicle (depending on ered by the SEAT Mobility Service without ad- the conditions of use and the features of ditional costs. the vehicle, such as the engine, gearbox, or Approved spare parts If you wish to enjoy this service after this peri- operating fluids). Maintenance services are od, you can extend SEAT Mobility as long as divided into inspection and review services. Approved spare parts, following the manu- you carry out the recommended Inspection Consult the details of the jobs required for facturer's requirements, are an additional » your vehicle at: service to you, offering the possibility of re- 375 Maintenance

and Maintenance Services at a SEAT Author- Vehicle maintenance Washing the vehicle ised Service. The longer you take to clean the tanks, e.g. If your SEAT vehicle is immobilised due to a remains of insects, bird excrements, tree resin fault or an accident, our assistance services Maintenance and cleaning or anti frost salt adhered to your vehicle, the will help you keep moving. Basic observations more damage it can cause to the surface. Take into account that the SEAT Mobility High temperatures, for instance strong sun- Service differs depending on the country in Regular and careful care helps to maintain light, further intensify the damage. which the vehicle was purchased. For further the value of your vehicle. In addition, it may Before washing the car, soften the dirt using information ask your SEAT dealership or the become a prerequisite to demand the war- plenty of water. SEAT website in your country. ranty in the event of corrosion damage and deficiencies in the paint coat of the body- To remove encrusted dirt such as insects, bird work. droppings or tree resin, use a lot of water and a microfibre cloth. Warranty Specialised workshops have the necessary care products. Please follow the instructions Have the underside of the vehicle washed af- Fault-free operation warranty for application on the packaging. ter the end of the anti frost salts in winter.

SEAT Authorised Services ensure the perfect WARNING High pressure cleaning equipment condition of new vehicles. Check the pur- ● Cleaning products and other materials When washing the vehicle with a high-pres- chase agreement or complementary addi- used for car care can be damaging to your sure cleaner, always follow the operating in- tional documentation provided by your Tech- health if misused. structions for the equipment. This applies nical Service to see the conditions and the ● Always keep care products in a safe particularly to the operating pressure and the terms of the warranty. Consult further infor- place, out of the reach of children. Danger distance between the spraying water. Do not mation in this regard in your SEAT Official of poisoning! aim the jet directly to the side window gas- Service. kets, doors, covers or the panoramic sunroof*; the same applies to tyres, rubber ho- For the sake of the environment ses, soundproofing material, sensors* or ● When purchasing car care products, camera lenses*. Keep a distance of at least chose products that are compatible with 40 cm. the environment. Do not remove snow and ice with a high- ● The waste from car-care products should pressure cleaner. not be disposed of with ordinary household waste.

376 Vehicle maintenance

Do not use a nozzle that sprays the water out Apply the product with a microfibre cloth. To view mirrors must always be folded/de- in a direct stream or one that has a rotating avoid damaging the surface of the paint, do ployed electrically! jet for forcing off dirt. not apply too much pressure. ● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. The water temperature must not exceed Rinse with plenty of water. Then clean it with Risk of damaging the paint job! 60°C. a neutral cleaning product and a soft microfi- ● Do not use sponges, abrasive household bre cloth. sponges or similar to clean insect remains. Automatic car washes Risk of damaging the surface! Rinse the vehicle again with plenty of water Spray the vehicle before starting the car and then leave it to dry. Remove traces of ● Vehicle parts with matte paint: wash. water with a leather cloth. – Do not use polish or hard wax. Risk of Make sure that the windows and the panor- damaging the surface! WARNING amic sunroof* are closed and the windscreen – Never select washing programs that in- wipers are deactivated. Bear in mind the in- ● Only wash the vehicle with the ignition clude the use of wax. This could dam- structions of the car wash tunnel operator, switched off or according to the specifica- age the appearance of matte paint. especially if your vehicle has detachable tions of the car wash tunnel operator. Risk – Do not put stickers or magnets on parts parts. of accident! with matte paint, as removing them ● When cleaning the underbody or the in- may damage the paint. Use of car washes without brushes if possible. side of the wheel arches, protect yourself from sharp or pointy metal parts. Risk of For the sake of the environment Washing by hand cut! The car should only be washed in special Clean your vehicle from top to bottom with a ● After cleaning the brakes could act more wash bays. These places are prepared to soft sponge or with a brush. Only use clean- slowly due to moisture or, in winter, the ice prevent oily water from getting into the ing products that do not contain solvents. on the brake discs and pads. Risk of acci- public drains. dent! In this case the brakes should be Washing vehicles with a matte paint by dried by pressing the brake pedal several hand times. Cleaning and maintenance instruc- To prevent damage to the vehicle when washing it, first remove the thicker dust and CAUTION tions dirt. To remove traces of insects, grease and ● Before washing the vehicle in an auto- The cleaning and maintenance of individual fingerprints, it is best to use a special cleaner matic car wash, please make sure to re- components of the vehicle can be checked in for matte paint. tract the exterior mirrors to prevent them the following tables. The contents should be from being damaged. Electric exterior rear- understood merely as a recommendation. Go to your specialised workshop if you have » 377 Maintenance

special questions or parts that are not listed. Wheels Problem Solution Take he general considerations into account Problem Solution Have your specialised work- ››› in Take special care with... on Corrosion page 381. Antifreeze salt Water shop take care of this

Brake abrasion Acid-free special cleaning The water does dust product not create drop- Maintain with hard wax (at Cleaning the exterior lets on the clean least 2 times a year) paint End exhausts Windscreen wipers Treat with suitable wax and ap- Problem Solution Problem Solution No shine de- ply paint preservative after- Antifreeze salt Water, if a steel cleaning prod- spite sober main- wards if the wax used does not Dirt Soft cloth with wipers uct is required tenance/paint contain preservative ingredi- ents

Headlights / Tail lights Covers / Trims Tanks, e.g. insect Immediately soften with water remains, bird Problem Solution and remove with a microfibre Problem Solution droppings, tree cloth sap, road salt Dirt Soft sponge with neutral soap Dirt Neutral soap solutiona), if a a) solution steel cleaning product is re- Fat-based dirt, Delete immediately with a neu- quired e.g. cosmetic a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in tral soap solutiona) and a soft products or 1 litre of water a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in cloth sunscreen 1 litre of water Sensors / Camera lenses a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in Paint Problem Solution 1 litre of water Problem Solution Sensors: soft cloth with a sol- Carbon fibre parts vent-free cleaning product Check the paint's colour code Problem Solution Dirt Camera lenses: soft cloth with Paint flaws in an authorised service and re- an alcohol-free cleaning prod- store with a touch-up pencil Dirt Clean the same way as pain- uct ted parts page 376 Spilled fuel Immediately rinse with water ››› Hand brush/Anti frost spray Snow/ice with no solvents Apply rust remover and then Environmental rust apply hard wax. Go you your tank specialised workshop if you have any queries

378 Vehicle maintenance

Decoration slides Displays/instrument panel Problem Solution Problem Solution Problem Solution Grease-based Apply a neutral soap solutiona). Dirt Soft sponge with neutral soap Dirt Soft cloth with a liquid crystal dirt, e.g. oil, make- Absorb the dissolved grease solutiona) display cleaner up, etc. and paint particles drying with an absorbent cloth, in case you a) must treat it with water after- Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in Control panels 1 litre of water wards Problem Solution Special dirt, e.g. Special stain remove: dry with Dirt Soft brush, then soft cloth with pens, nail polish, an absorbent cloth, if applica- Interior cleaning neutral soap solutiona) dispersion paint, ble, apply neutral soap solution shoe cream etc. afterwardsa) Windows a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in 1 litre of water Problem Solution 1 litre of water Seat belts Dirt Apply windscreen cleaner and Natural leather Problem Solution then dry with a cloth Problem Solution a) Covers / Trims Dirt Neutral soap solution , allowed to dry before retracting Recent dirt Cotton cloth with neutral soap solutiona) Problem Solution a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in Water-based dirt, Recent stains: absorbent cloth a) 1 litre of water Dirt Neutral soap solution e.g. coffee, tea, Dry stains: stain remover suita- blood etc. ble for leather a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in Fabrics, artificial, Alcantara leather 1 litre of water Problem Solution Grease-based Recent stains: absorbent cloth dirt, e.g. oil, make- and suitable stain remover for Plastic parts Particles of dirt Vacuum cleaner up, etc. leather Problem Solution stuck to surfaces Dry stains: grease solvent spray Dirt Damp cloth Water-based dirt, Absorbent cloth and neutral e.g. coffee, tea, soap solutiona) Special dirt, e.g. Stain remover suitable for Encrusted dirt Neutral soap solutiona), if pos- blood etc. pens, nail polish, leather » sible solvent-free plastic clean- dispersion paint, er shoe cream etc. a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in 1 litre of water 379 Maintenance

Problem Solution Camera lenses ● The ambient rust deposits must not be re- ● Do not use hot or warm water to remove ice moved through friction. Risk of damaging the Care Apply preservative cream regu- or snow from the camera lenses. Risk of paint job! larly to protect from sunlight. cracking the lens! ● Use a colour preservative if re- Remove cosmetic products and sunlight quired ● To clean the camera lens, never use abra- immediately. Risk of damaging the paint job! sive cleaning products or products with alco- a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in hol. Risk of scratches and cracks! Displays/instrument panel 1 litre of water ● The screens, the instrument panel and the Carbon fibre parts Windows trim around it must not be cleaned dry. Risk of ● Remove snow and ice from windows and scratches! Problem Solution exterior mirrors with a plastic scraper only. To ● Make sure that the instrument panel is Dirt Clean like plastic parts avoid scratches, the scraper should only be switched off and cooled down before clean- pushed in one direction and not moved to ing. and fro. ● Make sure that no liquid leaks between the Take special care with... ● Never remove snow or ice from windows instrument panel and the trim. Risk of dam- and rearview mirrors with warm or hot water. age! Risk of cracks on the windows! Headlights/tail lights Control panels ● Do not clean the headlights/tail lights with ● To prevent damage to the heating of the ● Make sure that no liquid leaks into the con- a dry cloth or sponge. rear window, do not put stickers over the heating elements. trol panels. Risk of damage! ● Do not use cleaning products that contain alcohol. Risk of cracks! Covers/trims Seat belts ● Do not use cleaning products or chrome ● Do not remove the seat belts to clean them. Wheels based cleaning agents. ● Seat belts and their components must nev- ● Do not use for paint wax or other abrasive er be cleaned with chemical products, nor products. Paint should they be allowed to come into contact ● If the protective coating on the paint of the ● The vehicle must be free from dirt and dust with corrosive liquids, solvents or sharp ob- rim has been damaged due to stone impacts, before applying wax or care products. Risk of jects. Risk of damaging the fabric! scratches, etc., the damage should be re- scratches! ● If you find any damage to the belt webbing, paired immediately. ● Do not apply wax or care products if the belt fittings, the belt retractor or the buckle, vehicle is exposed to direct sunlight. Risk of ask your specialised workshop to replace the damaging the paint job! belt in question.

380 Accessories and modifications to the vehicle

Fabrics/artificial leather/Alcantara leath- longed period in the bright sun, it is best to Accessories and modifi- er cover the leather. ● Do not treat artificial leather/Alcantara cations to the vehicle leather with leather cleaning products, sol- WARNING vents, wax polish, shoe cream, stain removers Do not use water-repellent coatings on the Accessories, spare parts and or similar products. windscreen. In bad visibility conditions ● If the stain is very hard to remove, take the such as humid weather, darkness or when repair work vehicle to a specialised workshop to have it the sun is in its lowest point, visibility may removed there. This will prevent damage. be impacted. Risk of accident! Such coat- Introduction ings can also cause the windscreen wiper ● Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hard blades to make noise. sponges, etc. to clean. Always ask your dealer or specialist retailer for advice before purchasing accessories ● Do not turn on seat heating* to dry the Note and replacement parts. seats. ● Remains of insects can be removed much Your vehicle is designed to offer a high stand- ● Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, riv- more easily with previously treated paint. ard of active and passive safety. For this rea- ets or belts can damage the surface. ● Regular car care treatments can prevent son, we recommend that you ask a SEAT Offi- ● Open Velcro, e.g. on clothes can damage deposits of ambient rust. cial Service for advice before fitting accesso- the seat upholstery. Make sure that Velcro ries or replacement parts. Your SEAT Official fasteners are closed. Service has the latest information from the manufacturer and can recommend accesso- Natural leather Remove the vehicle from traffic ries and replacement parts which are suita- ● Never use solvents, wax polish, shoe cream, If you want to leave your vehicle stationary ble for your requirements. They can also an- spot removers or similar products on leather. for a long period of time, contact a qualified swer any questions you might have regarding ● Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, riv- workshop. They will gladly inform you about official regulations. ets or belts can damage the surface. the necessary measures, such as anti-corro- We recommend you to use only SEAT acces- ● Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hard sion protection, Service and storage. sories and Genuine SEAT parts®. SEAT has sponges, etc. to clean. Also take into account instructions regarding tested these parts and accessories for suita- ● Do not turn on seat heating* to dry the the vehicle's battery ››› page 358. bility, reliability and safety. SEAT Official seats. Services have the necessary experience and facilities to ensure that the parts are installed ● Avoid exposing leather to direct sunlight for correctly and professionally. » long periods, otherwise it may tend to lose some of its colour. If the car is left for a pro-

381 Maintenance

Any retro-fitted equipment which has a di- We therefore recommend that all work should Mobile radio transmitters rect effect on the vehicle and/or the way it is be performed by a SEAT Official Service us- Commercial mobile telephones or radio ® driven, such as a cruise control system or ing genuine SEAT parts . equipment might interfere with the electron- electronically-controlled suspension, must ics of your vehicle and cause malfunctions. be approved for use in your vehicle and bear WARNING This may be due to: the e mark (the European Union's authorisa- Incorrectly performed modifications or tion symbol). other work on your vehicle can lead to mal- ● No external aerial. If any additional electrical devices are fit- functions and cause accidents. ● External aerial incorrectly installed. ted which do not serve to control the vehicle ● Transmitting power more than 10 W. itself (for instance a refrigerator box, laptop or ventilator fan, etc.), they must bear the  Radio telephones and office equip- You must, therefore, do not operate portable mobile telephones or radio equipment inside sign (manufacturer conformity declaration in ment the European Union). the vehicle without a properly installed external aerial . Radio transmitters (fixed installation) ››› WARNING Any retrofit installations of radio transmitters Please note also that the maximum range of Accessories, for example telephone hold- in the vehicle require prior approval. SEAT the equipment can only be achieved with an ers or cup holders, should never be fitted generally authorises in-vehicle installations external aerial. on the covers, or within the working range of approved types of radio transmitters provi- of the airbags. Otherwise, there is a danger ded that: Business equipment of injury if the airbag is triggered in an acci- Retrofit installation of business or private dent. ● The antenna is installed correctly. equipment in the vehicle is permitted, provi- ● The aerial is installed on the exterior of the ded the equipment cannot interfere with the vehicle (and shielded cables are used to- driver's immediate control of the vehicle and Technical modifications gether with non-reflective aerial trimming). that any such equipment carries the  mark. ● The effective transmitting power does not Any retrofit equipment that could influence Unauthorised modifications to the electronic exceed 10 Watts at the aerial base. the driver's control of the vehicle must have a components, software, wiring or data transfer type approval for your vehicle and must carry in the vehicle may cause malfunctioning. A SEAT Official Service and specialised work- the e mark. You will appreciate that your SEAT dealership shop will be able to inform you about options cannot be held liable for any damage for installing and operating radio transmitters WARNING with a higher transmitting power. caused by modifications and/or work per- Mobile telephones or radio equipment formed incorrectly. which is operated inside the vehicle without

382 Accessories and modifications to the vehicle a properly installed external aerial can create excessive magnetic fields that could cause a health hazard.

Note ● The posterior fitting of electric and electronic equipment in this vehicle affects its licence and could lead to the withdrawal of the vehicle registration document under certain circumstances. ● Please use the mobile telephone/radio operating instructions.

383 Information for the user

Data from the driving assist systems are also vehicle's ODB (“On-Board-Diagnose”) inter- Information for the user recorded. This includes data such as whether face while the vehicle is switched on. the systems were inactive or active and if SEAT will not have access to EDR data unless such action had an impact on the vehicle’s Information for the user the owner (or, in “Leasing” cases, the lessee dynamic behaviour, changing its path in the or hirer) gives their consent. There may be ex- aforementioned situations, accelerating or ceptions to this, depending on legal or con- Information stored by the decelerating the vehicle. tractual provisions. Depending on vehicle equipment, this in- control units Due to legal requirements in safety-related cludes data from systems such as: products, SEAT may use the EDR data for Storage of accident data (Event ● Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) field research and in order to improve vehicle Data Recorder) system quality. Any data used for the purpo- ● Emergency brake assistance system (Front ses of research will be treated anonymously Assist). Your vehicle has an event data recorder (in other words, no reference will be made to (EDR). ● Park Pilot system the vehicle, their owner or the lessee/hirer). The EDR’s function is to record data in the ● Parking aid system (Park Assist). event of a mild or serious accident. These da- ● Lane Assist ta are used to support the analysis of how dif- Other important information ferent vehicle systems behaved. The EDR data are only recorded in specific accident situations. No data are recorded in The EDR records, over a reduced time range normal driving conditions. Environmental compatibility (normally 10 seconds or less), dynamic driving data and data from the restraint systems, No audio or video data inside or around the Environmental protection is a top priority in such as: vehicle are recorded. Under no circumstan- the design, choice of materials and manufac- ces are personal data such as name, age, or ture of your new SEAT. ● How different vehicle systems worked. gender recorded. Nevertheless, third parties ● Whether the driver and the occupants were (such as criminal proceedings authorities) Constructive measures to encourage re- wearing their seat belts. may relate the contents of the EDR data to cycling other data sources and create a personal ● How hard the acceleration or brake pedal reference in the context of an accident inves- ● Joints and connections designed for easy was pressed. tigation. dismantling. ● Vehicle speed. ● Modular construction to facilitate disman- In order to read the EDR data it is necessary tling. These data will provide a better understand- to access (if legally permitted to do so) the ing of the circumstances of the accident. ● Increased use of single-grade materials. 384 Information for the user

● ● Plastic parts and elastomers are marked in Use of systems for the recovery of residual www.seat.com/generalinfo  accordance with ISO 1043, ISO 11469 and heat (thermal recovery, enthalpy wheels, ISO 1629. etc.). ● The use of water-soluble paints. Choice of materials Table of correspondences

● Use of recycled materials. The table of correspondences will help you to ● Use of compatible plastics in the same part Recycling of electrical or electron- associate the name of the device in the dec- if its components are not easily separated. ic devices laration of compliance with the features of ● Use of recycled materials and/or materials the vehicle and the terminology used in the originating from renewable sources. All electrical or electronic devices (EED) that on-board documentation. are not permanently fitted in the vehicle must ● Reduction of volatile components, including be marked with the following symbol: Features of the Name of the device odour, in plastic materials. vehicle according to the dec- ● Use of CFC-free coolants.  laration of compliance Ban on heavy metals, with the exceptions This symbol indicates that EED must not be dictated by law (Annex II of ELV Directive discarded as home waste but through selec- Radiofrequency re- FS09, FS12A, FS12P, FS1477, 2000/53/EC): cadmium, lead, mercury, tive waste collection. mote control (vehicle) FS94 hexavalent chromium. Radio frequency re- Sender STH SEAT - mote control (auxili- 50000914 Manufacturing methods ary heater) Information about the EU Di- Telestart ● Reduction of the quantity of thinner in the protective wax for cavities. rective 2014/53/EU Auxiliary heating 50000864 / D208L VW

● Use of plastic film as protection during vehi- Telestart cle transport. Simplified EU compliance declaration Bluetooth MIB2 Entry ● Use of solvent-free adhesives. MIB Standard 2 ● Use of CFC-free coolants in cooling sys- Your vehicle has different radioelectrical devi- tems. ces. The manufacturers of these devices de- MIB2 Main-Unit ● Recycling and energy recovery from resi- clare that they comply with Directive A580 / A270 » dues (RDF). 2014/53/EU when legally required. ● Improvement in the quality of waste water. The full text of the EU compliance declaration is available online at the following address: 385 Information for the user

Features of the Name of the device Features of the Name of the device Features of the Name of the device vehicle according to the dec- vehicle according to the dec- vehicle according to the declaration of compli- laration of compli- laration of compliance ance ance

Wireless hotspot MIB2 Main-Unit Instrument panel eNSF Antenna amplifiers 6F0.035.225 6F9.035.225 A580 / A270 Immobilizer integrated in 3V5.035.577.A dashboard module 7N0.035.552.J Keyless Access Sys- MQB-B B instrument cluster 7N0.035.552.K tem 7N0.035.552.Q Antenna FM/AM Antenna Base 5F4.035.225 Radar sensors for as- ARS4-B 5F4.035.225.A sistance systems Antennas MQB27 Small/Big 5F4.035.225.B MRRevo14F family 5F9.035.225 BSD3.0 Antennas KSA Small Fam III 5F9.035.225.A 5F9.035.225.B Central control unit 5WK50254 5Q0.035.507 Roof Antenna 575,035,225 575.035.225.A 5WK50474 GNSS Antenna VAG 575.035.225.B 720166002 5FJ.035.225 Infotainment system MIB2 Entry 5FJ.035.225.A 8S7.035.503.B MIB Standard 2 5FJ.035.225.B

MIB2 Main-Unit A580 / A270 Addresses of the manufacturers Wireless charging WCH-183 According to the Directive 2014/53/EU, all WCH-185 relevant components must include the address of the manufacturer. 5G0.980.611 The address of the manufacturers of compo- Connection to the ex- UMTS/GSM-MMC nents that, due to their size or nature, cannot ternal antenna of the car UMTS/GSM-MMC-AG2 include a sticker are listed below, as long as it is legally required: LTE-MBC-EU

386 Information for the user

Radioelectrical Radioelectrical Addresses of the Addresses of the equipment fitted equipment fitted manufacturers manufacturers in the vehicle in the vehicle

Della KGaA Hueck & Co. ADC Automotive Distance Radiofrequency remote Rixbecker Straße 75 Control Systems GmbH control key 59552 Lippstadt, Peter-Dornier-Straße 10 GERMANY Radar sensors for as- 88131 Lindau, GERMANY Digades gmbH sistance systems Robert Bosch GmbH Äußere Weberstraße 20 Postfach 16 61 Radio frequency re- 02763 Zittau, GERMANY 71226 Leonberg, GERMANY mote control (auxiliary Webasto Thermo & heater) Comfort SE Friedrichshafener Str. 9 82205 Gilching, GERMANY

Frequency bands, station power

Radioelectrical equipmenta) Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models

433.05-434.78 MHz 10 mW (ERP)

433.05-434.79 MHz 10 mW Radiofrequency remote control (vehicle) All SEAT models 868.0-868.6 MHz 25 mW

434.42 MHz 32 µW

868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 0.24 mW, / –6.3 dBm e.r.p. Ateca and Tarraco Radio frequency remote control (auxiliary heater) 868.0-868.6 MHz (868.3 MHz) 3.1 mW, / 4.8 dBm e.r.p. Alhambra

868.0-868.6 MHz (868.3 MHz) 23.5 mW, / 13.7 dBm e.r.p. Alhambra Auxiliary heating 868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 23.5 mW, / 13.7 dBm e.r.p. Ateca and Tarraco »

387 Information for the user

Radioelectrical equipmenta) Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models

2402-2480 MHz 6 dBm Bluethooth All SEAT models 2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm

Wireless hotspot 2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm Leon, Ateca and Tarraco

GSM 900: 880-915 MHz 33 dBm

GSM 1800: 1710-1785 MHz 30 dBm Ibiza, Arona, Leon, Ateca, Alhambra WCDMA FDD I: 1920-1980 MHz 24 dBm and Tarraco

WCDMA FDD lll: 1710-1785 MHz 24 dBm

LTE FDD1: 1920-1980 MHz 23 dBm Connection to the external antenna of the car LTE FDD3: 1710-1785 MHz 23 dBm

LTE FDD7: 2500-2570 MHz 23 dBm Tarraco LTE FDD8: 880-915 MHz 23 dBm

LTE FFD20: 832-862 MHz 23 dBm

LTE FFD20: 703-748 MHz 23 dBm

Keyless Access 434.42 MHz 32 µW Ibiza, Arona, Leon, Ateca and Tarraco

28.2 dBm Leon and Alhambra 76 GHz-77 GHz Radar sensors for assistance systems 35.0 dBm Ibiza, Arona, Ateca and Tarraco

24050-24250 MHz 20 dBm Arona, Ateca, Tarraco and Alhambra

Wireless charging 110-120 kHz 10 W Ibiza, Arona, Leon, Ateca and Tarraco

Instrument panel 125 kHz 40 dBµA/m All SEAT models

a) The commissioning or authorisation of radioelectrical technology may be restricted in some European countries, forbidden or only allowed with additional requirements.

388 Indications about the technical data

Vehicle identification data tation provided to the purchaser of the vehi- Technical data cle at the time of purchase. Vehicle ID number Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions de- Indications about the The vehicle ID number can be found in the pend on the equipment/features of each indi- following places: vidual vehicle, as well as on the driving style, technical data road conditions, traffic conditions, environ- ●  In the infotainment system using button > mental conditions, load or number of passen- Important information SETTINGS > Service > Vehicle ID num- gers. ber. Introduction ● One the vehicle's data label. ● In front, under the windscreen. Filling capacities The values indicated in the technical data ● To the right in the engine compartment. may differ depending on optional equipment Tank level or version of the model, as well as in the case Type plate Petrol and die- Vehicles with front-wheel drive: of special vehicles and equipment for certain sel engines 58 l, 7 l reserve countries. The type plate is located on the vehicle’s right hand door frame. Vehicles for certain export Vehicles with four-wheel drive: The information in the official vehicle docu- countries do not have a type plate. 60 l, 8.5 l reserve mentation takes precedence at all times. Capacity of the windscreen washer fluid container Abbreviations used in the Technical Speci- Fuel consumption fications section Windscreen washer approx. 3.2 litres fluid container kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement. Approved consumption values are derived from measurements performed or supervised Pferdestärke (horsepower), formerly PS by certified EU laboratories, according to the used to denote engine power. legislation in force at the time (for more infor- Weights rpm, 1/min Revolutions per minute - engine speed. mation, see the Publications Office of the Eu- ropean Union on the EUR-Lex website: © Eu- Load on the roof Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque. ropean Union, http://eur-lex.europa.eu/) and The maximum authorised roof load for your Cetane number, indication of the die- apply to the specified vehicle characteristics. CZ vehicle is 75 kg. » sel combustion power. The values relating to fuel consumption and Research octane number, indication of CO2 emissions can be found in the documen- RON the knock resistance of petrol. 389 Technical data

Empty weight, total weight, axle loads The empty weight of the vehicle with driver (75 kg) was calculated according to the (EU) 1230/2012 standard. Optional equipment can increase the empty weight, which means that the possible useful load decreases propor- tionally.

Trailer weight The maximum permitted drawbar load on the ball head of the towing device is 80 kg.

WARNING The values indicated for the maximum permitted weights must not be exceeded. There is a risk of accident and damage!

390 Indications about the technical data

Engine specifications

Petrol engines 1.4 TSI 1.5 TSI Start-Stop ACT® 2.0 TSI Start-Stop

Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 110 (150)/5,000-6,000 110 (150)/5,000-6,000 140 (190)/4,200-6,000

Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 250/1,500-3,500 250/1,500-3,500 320/1,500-4,100

No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 4/1,395 4/1,498 4/1,984

Fuel Super 95 / Normal 91 (with a slight power loss) ROZ

Gearbox DSG manual DSG DSG

Top speed (km/h) 199 (5) 201 (5) 201 (5) 211 (6)

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 9.4 9.7 9.7 8

Maximum authorized weight (kg) (5/7 seats) 2,230 / 2,350 2,220 / 2,330 2,200 / 2,370 2,380 / 2,520

Diesel engines 2.0 TDI

Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 110 (150)/3,500-4,000 140 (190)/3,500-4,000

Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 340/1,750-3,000 400/1,750-3,250

No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 4/1,968 4/1,968

Fuel Diesel according to standard EN 590, min. 51 CN

Gearbox manual DSG DSG 4Drive

Top speed (km/h) 202 (6) 198 (6) 210 (7)

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 9.8 9.8 8.0

Maximum authorized weight (kg) (5/7 seats) 2,290 / 2,410 2,410 / 2,540 2,410 / 2,550

391 Technical data

Dimensions

Fig. 325 Dimensions.

392 Indications about the technical data

››› Fig. 325 TARRACO

A Front projection (mm) 926

B Rear projection (mm) 1,019

C Wheelbase (mm) 2,790

D Length (mm) 4,735

E Fronta) track (mm) 1,585

F Backa) track (mm) 1,574

G Width (mm) 1,839

1,658b) H Height at kerb weight (mm) 1,674c)

I Ground clearance between the axles (mm) 192

J Front projection angle limited by the bumper maximum 19.1°

K Rear projection angle limited by the bumper maximum 21.4°

Turning radius (m) 11.9 a) This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim. Values for wheel 215/65 R17 ET38. b) Distance to the roof. c) Dimension to the roof bars.

393

Index

Adjust Anti-puncture kit ...... 41, 42 Index fold down the front passenger’s backrest . . 130 check after 10 minutes ...... 44 front seats ...... 123 components ...... 43 Numbers and Symbols headrest ...... 126 inflating the tyre ...... 43 4Drive ...... 265 lights ...... 116 sealing the tyre ...... 43 rear seat ...... 125 Anti-puncture set ...... 42 A seats ...... 12 Anti-theft alarm system ...... 96 ABS seat with memory ...... 128 trailer ...... 335 see Anti-lock brake system ...... 302 time ...... 75 Anti-trap function ACC ...... 277 vehicle menu ...... 82 sunroof ...... 109 radar sensors ...... 279 Adjusting the seat belt ...... 20 sunshade blind (glass roof) ...... 109 Access aid for the third row ...... 129 Airbags ...... 23 windows ...... 106 Accessories ...... 381 description ...... 24 Antifreeze ...... 355 Active cylinder management (ACT) Airbag system ...... 23 App status indication ...... 67 activation ...... 25 SEAT Media Control ...... 186 Adaptive Cruise Control ...... 277 control lamp ...... 25 Apple CarPlay™ ...... 183, 184 control and warning lamp ...... 278 deactivation of the front airbag ...... 27 Aspects to think about before starting the ve- function to prevent overtaking on the right . 283 description ...... 24 hicle ...... 11 indications on the screen ...... 279 front airbags ...... 25 ASR malfunction ...... 277 how it works ...... 25 see Traction control system ...... 302 operating ...... 280 Air conditioning Assistance systems radar sensors ...... 279 Climatronic ...... 154 ACC ...... 277 special driving situations ...... 284 manual air conditioning ...... 155 adaptive cruise control ...... 277 temporarily deactivating ...... 283 usage instructions ...... 157 assisted parting system (Park Assist) ...... 306 AdBlue Air recirculation ...... 158 Auto Hold function ...... 301 control and warning lamps ...... 345 Air vents ...... 158 blind spot detector (BSD) with parking assistant (RCTA) ...... 291 information ...... 345 Alternator connecting ...... 79 loading ...... 346 warning lamp ...... 360 cruise control ...... 268 minimum filling capacity ...... 345 AM ...... 190 disconnecting ...... 79 specification ...... 346 Ambient lighting ...... 117 driver alert system ...... 71 tank capacity ...... 345 Android Auto™ ...... 183, 185 Emergency Assist ...... 290 Additional heating Anti-lock brake system ...... 302 emergency braking (Front Assist) ...... 273 see Auxiliary heating ...... 161 Anti-puncture ...... 42, 43 hill descent control (HDC) ...... 261 parking aid Plus ...... 315 395 Index

peripheral view system (Top View Cam- AUX-IN ...... 244 Bluetooth® era) ...... 323 external audio source ...... 208 connect audio source ...... 208 PreCrash system ...... 22 Auxiliary heating ...... 161 Bonnet ...... 349, 351 rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) ...... 291 activate ...... 163 opening and closing ...... 350 rear parking aid ...... 319 connecting ...... 161 Brake fluid ...... 357 road sign detection system messages ...... 72 disconnecting ...... 161 Brakes ...... 298 speed limiter ...... 270 electricity consumers ...... 164 brake fluid ...... 357 traffic jam assist ...... 289 programming ...... 163 brake servo ...... 298 Trailer assist ...... 320 radio-operated remote control ...... 162 braking assistant ...... 302 tyre control ...... 369 remote control range ...... 162 electronic parking brake ...... 299 tyre pressure loss indicator ...... 369 special characteristics ...... 161, 164 emergency brake function ...... 300 Assisted start ...... 51 usage instructions ...... 164 new brake pads ...... 298 Audible warning Average fuel consumption ...... 65 Braking assistant ...... 302 control and warning lamps ...... 79 Braking system lights ...... 109 B warning lamp ...... 297 unbuckled seat belt ...... 16 Backrest of the rear seat BSD Auto Hold ...... 301 folding ...... 131 see blind spot detector (BSD) ...... 291 Auto Hold Function ...... 301 raise ...... 131 BSD Plus ...... 288 Auto Lock (central locking) ...... 90 Bag hooks ...... 141, 148 Automatic car wash ...... 377 Battery ...... 88 C disconnecting the Auto Hold function ...... 301 change on the remote control (independ- Camera Automatic dipped beam headlight control . . . 110 ent heating) ...... 162 cleaning ...... 74 Automatic gearbox ...... 254 Before starting the vehicle ...... 11 Lane Assist ...... 286 control lamp ...... 254 Belt tightening ...... 21 Capacities downhill assistant ...... 258 Bicycle carrier AdBlue tank ...... 345 driving tips ...... 256 fitting onto the coverable tow hook ...... 340 window washer water ...... 357 emergency release of the selector lever. . . 260 max. load rating ...... 340 Care kick-down ...... 257 Biodiesel ...... 345 see Cleaning the vehicle ...... 376 launch-control program ...... 258 Blind spot detector (BSD) ...... 291, 292 Catalytic converter ...... 348 operating fault ...... 257 control lamps ...... 292 Central armrests ...... 133 selector lever lock ...... 255 driving situations ...... 295 Central locking ...... 89 selector lever positions ...... 254 how it works ...... 293 anti-theft alarm ...... 96 steering wheel with shift paddles ...... 256 indication on the exterior mirror ...... 293 central locking switch ...... 92 tiptronic ...... 254, 256 malfunction ...... 291 emergency lock ...... 99 towing ...... 54 trailer ...... 297 Keyless Access ...... 92 396 Index

remote control key ...... 91 Closing ...... 89 engine management ...... 347 selective unlocking system ...... 91 bonnet ...... 350 engine oil ...... 353 settings ...... 90 rear lid ...... 101 ESC ...... 302, 304 Cetane index (diesel fuel) ...... 345 sunroof ...... 107 fuel reserve ...... 76 Change the wiper blades ...... 49 sunshade blind (glass roof) ...... 108 gear change ...... 260 Changing a wheel ...... 45 windows ...... 104 hill descent control ...... 261 subsequent work ...... 49 Clutch (lamp) ...... 259 Lane Assist ...... 286 wheel nuts ...... 46 Coming Home ...... 114 lights ...... 109 Changing parts ...... 381 Communication between the Infotainment particulate filter ...... 347, 348 Checking levels System and mobile devices ...... 180 press on the brake ...... 273, 278 engine compartment ...... 351 Connectivity ...... 180 rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) ...... 292 Check lists Full Link ...... 180 refuelling ...... 76, 342 reverse assist (Rear View) ...... 329 SEAT Media Control ...... 186 remote control (independent heating) . . . . . 162 Childproof locks WLAN access point ...... 187 replacement ...... 254 electric windows ...... 104 Connectivity Box ...... 244 seat belt ...... 16 Child seats Connectors speed limiter ...... 270 group classification ...... 31 faults ...... 151 Start-Stop ...... 250 ISOFIX/i-Size system ...... 37 Control and warning lamps ...... 79 steering column lock ...... 262 ISOFIX system ...... 35 adaptive cruise control ...... 278 tow hook ...... 339 safety instructions ...... 32 adBlue ...... 345 tyre pressure loss indicator ...... 369 securing with the seat belt ...... 39 airbags ...... 27 Controls Top Tether system ...... 35, 38 airbag system ...... 25 rear seat ...... 125 Cleaning the vehicle alternator ...... 360 Controls and displays high pressure cleaning equipment ...... 376 anti-lock brake system ABS ...... 302 overview ...... 63 special care ...... 380 ASR ...... 302, 304 Controls on the steering wheel ...... 85 vehicle exterior ...... 378 audible warning ...... 79 Convenience close function vehicle interior ...... 379 blind spot detector (BSD) ...... 292 windows ...... 105 wash the vehicle ...... 376 braking system ...... 297 Convenience open function Climate control cruise control (GRA) ...... 268 windows ...... 105 auxiliary heating ...... 161 diesel preheating system ...... 347 Cooling system controls ...... 157 EDL ...... 302 check the coolant ...... 356 setting the temperature ...... 157 electromechanical steering ...... 262 refilling coolant ...... 356 Climatronic ...... 154 electronic parking brake ...... 297 Copyright ...... 198 Clocks emissions control ...... 347 information ...... 174 set the time ...... 75 engine coolant ...... 76 397 Index

Correct sitting position ...... 12 Drink holder Electric driver ...... 12 bottle holder ...... 148 windows ...... 104 Cruise control ...... 268 in the front part of the centre console . . . . . 149 Electric devices ...... 150 control and warning lamp ...... 268 in the rear central armrest ...... 150 Electric windows ...... 104 operation ...... 270 Driver Electrolyte ...... 360 see Correct sitting position ...... 12 Electromechanical steering ...... 262 D Driver alert system ...... 71 lamp ...... 262 DAB ...... 190 Driving Electronic differential lock ...... 302 see: RADIO ...... 192 driving on flooded roads ...... 268 Electronic engine torque management Dangers of not using the seat belt ...... 18 economical ...... 266 (XDS) ...... 303 Data label ...... 389 parking on inclines ...... 306 Electronic immobilizer ...... 99, 249 Data transfer ...... 180 park on upward slopes ...... 306 Electronic parking brake ...... 299 Deactivation of cylinders safe ...... 11 lamp ...... 297 see Active cylinder management (ACT) . . . . 67 trips abroad ...... 116, 268 Electronic self-locking ...... 302 Deactivation of the front airbag ...... 27 with trailer ...... 337 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ...... 302 Delayed shutdown (Infotainment system) . . . 170 Driving data ...... 69 Emergencies ...... 41 Diesel Driving data indicator ...... 69 anti-puncture kit ...... 42 engine oil ...... 352 Driving mode...... 264 bulbs ...... 61 particulate filter ...... 348 Driving on flooded roads ...... 268 changing a wheel ...... 45 refuelling ...... 345 Driving profile ...... 264 changing the battery ...... 360 Display of road signs on the instrument panel DSG ...... 254 emergency vehicle towing ...... 54 activate ...... 73 Duplicate keys ...... 87 hazard warning lights ...... 115 deactivate ...... 73 Dust and pollen filter ...... 152 jump leads ...... 51 Disposal DVD ...... 206, 212 replace a blown fuse ...... 59 seat belt tensioners ...... 21 settings ...... 213 vehicle tool kit ...... 41 Distance control Dynamic headlight range control ...... 116 Emergency Assist ...... 290 see Adaptive Cruise Control ...... 277 connecting ...... 290 Door cylinder ...... 99 E disconnecting ...... 290 Door handle ...... 99 E10 see Emergency Assistant ...... 290 Door lock ...... 99 see Ethanol (fuel) ...... 344 Emergency brake function ...... 300 Doors ...... 98 Easy Connect ...... 82 Emergency braking assist system child lock ...... 100 Easy Open ...... 92 indications on the screen ...... 273 Downhill assistance function ...... 258 special characteristics ...... 103 malfunction ...... 273 Downhill assistant ...... 258 EDL operation ...... 276 Drawers ...... 148 see Electronic differential lock ...... 302 radar sensors ...... 275 398 Index

system limitations ...... 277 Engine compartment ...... 349, 351 Environment temporarily deactivating ...... 276 battery ...... 358 ecological driving ...... 266 Emergency braking warning ...... 116 brake fluid ...... 357 environmental compatibility ...... 384 Emergency call ...... 41 coolant ...... 355, 356 refuelling ...... 342 Emergency call service ...... 41 engine oil ...... 354 Environmental tip Emergency locking of the front passenger opening and closing ...... 350 refuelling ...... 342 door ...... 99 safety instructions ...... 349 Equipment ...... 381 Emergency opening window washer tank ...... 357 ESC driver's door ...... 99 Engine coolant ...... 355 electronic stability control (ESC) ...... 302 rear lid ...... 104 check the level ...... 356 multi-collision brake ...... 303 Emergency operation control lamp ...... 76 Sport mode ...... 304 front passenger door ...... 99 G12evo ...... 355 Ethanol (fuel) ...... 344 gear selector lever ...... 260 G12 plus-plus ...... 355 Event Data Recorder ...... 384 Emissions control system G13 ...... 355 Exhaust gases ...... 347 AdBlue ...... 345 specifications ...... 355 Exterior mirrors catalytic converter ...... 348 temperature indicator ...... 76 driving with a trailer ...... 334 control lamp ...... 347 warning lamp ...... 76 folding ...... 121 particulate filter ...... 348 Engine failure heated ...... 121 Energy management ...... 361 control lamp ...... 347 settings ...... 121 Engine Engine management ...... 347 Exterior view ...... 7 assisted start ...... 51 control lamp ...... 347 External antenna ...... 382 noises ...... 247 Engine oil running in ...... 265 change ...... 352, 354 F Start-Stop system ...... 250 checking the oil level ...... 353 Fabrics: clean ...... 379 start (driver instructions with the mechani- consumption ...... 353 Factors that have a negative influence on cal contact) ...... 249 dipstick ...... 353 safe driving ...... 11 Engine and ignition inspection service ...... 352 Fastening rings ...... 139 automatic ignition disconnection ...... 246 maintenance frequencies ...... 352 Filling capacities emergency start ...... 249 refill ...... 354 fuel tank ...... 389 My Beat ...... 250 specifications ...... 352, 353 window washer tank ...... 389 preheat the engine ...... 247 Engine oil pressure Filling the tank ...... 342 starting the engine ...... 247 control lamp ...... 353 FM ...... 190 starting the engine with Press & Drive . . . . . 247 Engine specifications ...... 391 Fog lights with cornering light function ...... 114 switching off the engine ...... 248 Folding table ...... 147

399 Index

Four-wheel drive ...... 265 Fuses ...... 57 Hill descent control (HDC). snow chains ...... 266 colour coded ...... 58 control lamp ...... 261 towing ...... 54 fuse box ...... 58, 59 Horn ...... 63 winter tyres ...... 266 preparations for replacing fuses ...... 59 Frequency band recognise blown fuses ...... 59 I AM ...... 190 replace ...... 59 Identification of fuels ...... 343 change ...... 190 Identifying letters on engine (LDM) DAB ...... 190 G display ...... 69 FM ...... 190 GALA (speed-dependent volume) ...... 176 Inertia mode ...... 259 Front airbags ...... 25 Gear-change recommendation ...... 261 Information profiles ...... 65 Front Assist Gearbox DSG Infotainment buttons ...... 170 see Emergency braking assist system . . . . . 273 see Automatic gearbox ...... 254 Infotainment System ...... 165 Front passenger front airbag Gear change automatic playback (SCAN) ...... 195 control lamp ...... 25 engage the gears (manual change) ...... 253 AUX-IN ...... 208 Fuel manual gearbox ...... 253 Bluetooth® audio ...... 208 diesel ...... 345 Gear indication ...... 261 Bluetooth® settings ...... 242 ethanol ...... 344 Glasses case ...... 147 CD or DVD player ...... 206 fuel gauge ...... 76 Glove compartment ...... 146 change the volume ...... 171 identification ...... 343 checkboxes ...... 171 petrol ...... 343 H DVD ...... 212 refuelling ...... 342 Handbrake DVD settings ...... 213 saving ...... 266 see Electronic parking brake ...... 299 factory settings ...... 174 Fuel consumption Hangers ...... 148 FM, AM, DAB settings) ...... 196 inertia disconnection ...... 266 Hazard warning lights ...... 115 function buttons ...... 171 why does consumption increase? ...... 347 HDC general instructions for use ...... 170 Fuel gauge ...... 76 see Hill descent control (HDC)...... 261 image settings ...... 214 control lamp ...... 76 Head-on collisions and the laws of physics . . . 18 images main menu ...... 213 Fuel tank cap Head-protection airbags infotainment buttons ...... 170 opening and closing ...... 342 safety instructions ...... 30 initial configuration ...... 174 Fuel tank flap Headlights input window ...... 172 opening and closing ...... 342 trips abroad ...... 116 Internet access ...... 188 Full Link ...... 180 Headrest ...... 125, 126, 127 Jukebox (SSD) ...... 209 pairing ...... 183 Heating and fresh air ...... 155 Media settings ...... 214 settings ...... 183 memory card ...... 207 Function buttons ...... 171 mute ...... 171 400 Index navigation ...... 215 Infotainment system: ...... 82 K navigation settings ...... 225 Inspection ...... 352, 373 Keyless Access on-screen keyboard ...... 172 Inspection service ...... 352 Easy Open ...... 92 overview of the unit ...... 167 Instrument panel ...... 64 Keyless Entry ...... 92 phone settings ...... 242 control and warning lamps ...... 79 Keyless Exit ...... 92 preset buttons ...... 193 digital (SEAT Digital Cockpit) ...... 65 Press & Drive ...... 246 Radio mode ...... 190 indications on the screen ...... 67, 68 special characteristics ...... 94 road signs indication ...... 224 menu structure ...... 68 starting the engine ...... 247 rotary/push buttons ...... 170 service intervals display ...... 77 unlocking and locking the vehicle ...... 92 safety instructions ...... 165 use with the multifunction steering wheel . . . 78 Keyless Access lock and ignition system: scroll button ...... 172 Instrument panel display ...... 65, 67 see Keyless Access ...... 92 scroll (screen) ...... 172 Instrument panel lighting ...... 117 Keyless Entry search on lists ...... 172 Interferences caused by mobile phones . . . . . 170 see Keyless Access ...... 92 selecting, tuning and saving stations ...... 194 Interior door handle ...... 63 Keyless Exit share a WLAN connection ...... 188 Interior mirror see Keyless Access ...... 92 sound distribution (Balance and Fader) . . . . 176 anti-dazzle ...... 121 Keys station logos ...... 193 Interior monitoring and the anti-tow system assign a key ...... 87 switching on and off ...... 170 activation ...... 97 changing the battery ...... 88 system settings ...... 174 Interior view ...... 10 instructions for the driver (mechanical con- Telephone mode ...... 233 Interlock button ...... 255 tact) ...... 249 text entry ...... 172 iPod adapter ...... 145 remote control ...... 87 touch screen ...... 171 ISOFIX ...... 35 spare key ...... 87 traffic information ...... 195 ISOFIX system ...... 35 synchronise ...... 89 updating navigation data ...... 215 unlock and lock ...... 91, 99 USB ...... 207 J vehicle key ...... 87 user profile settings ...... 242 Jack ...... 41 Key switch ...... 27 Vehicle menu ...... 229 position points ...... 47 Kick-down voice control ...... 177 Jukebox (SSD) ...... 209 automatic gearbox ...... 257 voice control settings ...... 179 Jump leads ...... 51 volume and sound settings ...... 176 Jump start ...... 51 L wait time ...... 170 description ...... 51 Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) ...... 188 Lane Assist ...... 286 WLAN ...... 188 control and warning lamp ...... 286 WLAN audio ...... 211 Lane Assist system WLAN settings ...... 211 see Lane Assist ...... 286 401 Index

Launch-control (automatic transmission) . . . 258 Loading the luggage compartment M Leather: clean ...... 379 fastening rings ...... 139 Main beam assist ...... 113 Leaving a parking space with the parking as- general advice ...... 134 Main beam headlight lever ...... 112 sist system ...... 312 luggage compartment ...... 101, 134 Maintenance Leaving Home ...... 114 positioning the load ...... 134 see Service ...... 373 Levels control ...... 389 positioning the luggage ...... 134 Maintenance frequencies ...... 352 Lift the vehicle ...... 47 roof carrier system ...... 144 Malfunctions Light Assist ...... 113 trailer ...... 336 adaptive cruise control ...... 277 Lights ...... 109 trapdoor for long loads ...... 141 assisted parting system (Park Assist) ...... 306 audible warnings ...... 109 Load on the roof ...... 144 clutch ...... 259 AUTO ...... 110 technical data ...... 144 emergency brake assistance system (Front coming home ...... 114 Lock and unlock Assist) ...... 273 control and warning lamps ...... 109 in the locking cylinder ...... 99 PreCrash system ...... 22 control lighting ...... 117 with Keyless Access ...... 92 replacement ...... 260 controlling the lights ...... 109 with the central locking switch...... 92 sunroof ...... 106 cornering light ...... 114 Luggage compartment ...... 101, 134 towing device ...... 334 daylight ...... 110 cover ...... 135 Manual gearbox ...... 253 dipped beam headlights ...... 109 electric opening and closing ...... 101 towing ...... 54 dynamic headlight range control ...... 116 emergency unlocking ...... 104 Mats ...... 15 fog light ...... 111 enlarge ...... 137 Media fog light with cornering light function ...... 114 features of the electric rear lid ...... 102 changing track ...... 204 instrument lighting ...... 117 luggage compartment lighting ...... 117 copyright ...... 198 interior lights ...... 117 net bag ...... 140 indications and symbols ...... 203 leaving home ...... 114 net partition ...... 142 main menu ...... 202 main beam headlight lever ...... 112 opening and closing controlled by sensors playback modes ...... 202 main beam headlights ...... 109 (Easy Open) ...... 103 playback order ...... 201 motorway light ...... 111 placing the third row of seats in the cargo requirements for data media ...... 198 reading lights ...... 117 floor position ...... 137 select track ...... 205 side lights ...... 109 unfolding and folding the net partition. . . . . 142 switching the Media source ...... 203 switch ...... 110 Luggage compartment floor unreadable CD or DVD ...... 206 switching on and off ...... 110 7-seater vehicles ...... 139 MEDIA turn signal lever ...... 112 variable (5-seater vehicles) ...... 138 settings ...... 214 welcome light ...... 115 Luggage compartment shelf ...... 135 Lumbar support ...... 123 Memory card ...... 207 Memory function ...... 128

402 Index

MirrorLink ...... 184 Net bag rear lid ...... 101 Mirrors luggage compartment ...... 140 rear lid with electric opening and closing . . 101 adjusting the exterior mirrors ...... 121 Net for luggage sunroof ...... 107 anti-dazzle interior ...... 121 luggage compartment ...... 140 tank cap ...... 342 see also Mirrors ...... 121 Net partition ...... 142 windows ...... 104 Mobile ...... 382 unfolding and folding ...... 142 with the central locking switch...... 92 Mobile phones ...... 382 Noise Operating fault Mobile Signal Amplifier ...... 244 adaptive cruise control ...... 277 automatic gearbox ...... 257 Multi-collision brake ...... 303 auxiliary heating ...... 164 Operation in winter Multifunction display ...... 69 brakes ...... 298 battery ...... 358 Multifunction steering wheel ESC ...... 302 diesel ...... 345 with voice control ...... 85 parking brake ...... 299 heated windscreen washer jets ...... 119 Multimedia ...... 244 tyres ...... 363, 367 salt on the roads ...... 120 My Beat ...... 250 Number of seats ...... 13 snow chains ...... 368 tyres ...... 367 N O Original accessories ...... 375 Navigation ...... 215 Octane (petrol) ...... 343 Original SEAT Spare Parts ...... 375 change view ...... 221 Odometer ...... 65 Overview (left hand drive) ...... 8 entering the destination ...... 217 partial ...... 68 Overview (right hand drive) ...... 9 import vCards ...... 224 total ...... 68 indications and symbols ...... 217 Offroad Navigation ...... 227 P main menu ...... 217 Oil change ...... 354 Painting the vehicle my destinations ...... 219 One-touch signalling function ...... 112 care ...... 378 navigation with images ...... 224 Opening ...... 89 Panoramic sliding sunroof offroad navigation ...... 227 bonnet ...... 350 see Sunroof ...... 106 predictive navigation ...... 224 rear lid ...... 101 Park Assist road signs indication ...... 224 sunroof ...... 107 see the assisted parking system (Park As- route ...... 219 sunshade blind (glass roof) ...... 108 sist) ...... 306 selecting the destination on the map ...... 218 tank cap ...... 342 Parking ...... 305 settings ...... 225 windows ...... 104 at an angle with the reverse assist ...... 330 special destinations (POI) ...... 221 Opening and closing ...... 89 in parallel with the reverse assist ...... 330 split screen ...... 221 bonnet ...... 350 with the assisted parking system (Park As- traffic bulletins (TRAFFIC) ...... 223 by remote control ...... 91 sist) ...... 311 updating the installing navigation data . . . . 216 doors ...... 98 in the locking cylinder ...... 99 403 Index

Parking aid Parking distance warning system Problems and solutions automatic activation ...... 316 see Parking aid ...... 314, 315, 319 Trailer assist ...... 323 braking during the manoeuvre ...... 318 Parking (automatic transmission) ...... 256 Properties of oils ...... 353 fault ...... 318, 320 ParkPilot parking aid plus ...... 315 see Parking aid ...... 314, 315, 319 R rear parking aid ...... 319 Particulate filter ...... 348 Radar sensors ...... 275, 279 see the assisted parking system (Park As- Pedals ...... 13, 15 Radio sist) ...... 306 Peripheral view system (Top View Camera) . 323 frequency change ...... 190 sensors and camera: clean ...... 378 display ...... 325 indications and icons ...... 190 setting the indications and audio sig- menus ...... 326 main menu ...... 190 nals ...... 317, 319 modes ...... 326 preset buttons ...... 193 surroundings warning ...... 315 special characteristics ...... 325 save station logos ...... 193 towing device ...... 320 usage instructions ...... 325 RADIO trailer mode ...... 318 Petrol additional DAB services ...... 192 visual indication ...... 317, 320 additives ...... 343 additional DAB stations ...... 192 Parking aid system particulate filter ...... 348 automatic playback (SCAN) ...... 195 see Parking aid ...... 314, 315, 319 refuelling ...... 343 DAB memories ...... 192 Parking aid system (Park Assist) ...... 306 Power socket DAB operation ...... 192 angle parking ...... 311 12 Volts ...... 150 DAB radio text ...... 192 automatic brake operation ...... 313 faults ...... 151 DAB slideshow ...... 192 automatic interruption ...... 308 Power sockets DAB station information ...... 192 conditions for leaving a parking space . . . . . 312 trailer ...... 335 DAB transmission standards ...... 192 leaving a parking space (only when paral- Power steering indication of station names ...... 191 lel parked) ...... 312 see Electromechanical steering ...... 262 radio text (RDS) ...... 191 malfunction ...... 306 PreCrash system ...... 22 RDS ...... 191 parallel parking ...... 311 Front Assist monitoring system ...... 22 selecting, tuning and saving stations ...... 194 parking conditions ...... 311 indications on the screen ...... 22 set a station name ...... 191 stop early ...... 308 malfunction ...... 22 settings ...... 196 Parking brake selecting the driving profile ...... 22 station tracking by RDS ...... 191 automatic connection ...... 300 Preheating system tracking of DAB stations on FM ...... 192 automatic disconnection ...... 300 control lamp ...... 347 traffic information (TP) ...... 195 connecting ...... 299 Preheat the engine ...... 247 Radio-operated remote control disconnecting ...... 300 Press & Drive see Keys ...... 87 emergency brake function ...... 300 start button ...... 246 Radio screen: clean ...... 379 starting the engine ...... 247 Radio telephones ...... 382 404 Index

Radio text (RDS) ...... 191 Reverse assist (Rear View) Safe security system ...... 95 Rain sensor ...... 120 angle parking ...... 330 Safety function control ...... 120 check list ...... 329 child safety ...... 31 Raise the vehicle ...... 47 cross traffic ...... 329 child seats ...... 31 RCTA ...... 296 hitching a trailer ...... 329 safe driving ...... 11 see Rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) ...... 291 parallel parking ...... 330 Safety equipment ...... 11 RDS ...... 191 requirements ...... 329, 331 Safety instructions automatic station tracking ...... 191 settings ...... 331 head-protection airbags ...... 30 RDS Regional ...... 191 usage instructions ...... 331 seat belt tensioners ...... 21 Rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) ...... 291, 296 Reverse (automatic gearbox) ...... 254 side airbags ...... 29 control lamp ...... 292 Revolution counter ...... 65, 75 using child seats ...... 32 Rear fog light Road signs using seat belts ...... 17 control lamp ...... 109 shown on the display ...... 73 Save fuel Rear lid ...... 101, 104 Road signs detection system ...... 73 inertia mode ...... 259 see also Luggage compartment ...... 101 how it works ...... 72 Seat belt height adjustment ...... 21 Rear mounting limited operation ...... 74 Seat belts ...... 16 towing device ...... 340 shown on the display ...... 73 adjustment ...... 19 Rear parking aid ...... 319 speed warning ...... 73 control lamp ...... 16 Rear Traffic Alert ...... 296 trailer ...... 74 fitting the seat belt strap ...... 20 Rear View Camera ...... 327 windscreen damage ...... 74 protective function ...... 16 Rear window wiper ...... 118 Roof carrier ...... 143 purpose ...... 16, 23 Recognition of road signs ...... 225 fix the crossbars ...... 144 safety instructions ...... 17 Refuelling Roof carrier system ...... 143 seat belt height adjustments ...... 21 control lamp ...... 76 Roof rack ...... 143 unfastened ...... 18 fuel gauge ...... 76 Rotary/push knobs ...... 170 Seat belt tensioners ...... 21 opening the fuel tank flap...... 342 Rotation direction control lamp ...... 25 Releasing the seat belt ...... 19 tyres ...... 48 SEAT Digital Cockpit ...... 65 Remote control key Running in information profiles ...... 65 unlock and lock ...... 91 new brake pads ...... 298 navigation map ...... 66 Remote control (independent heating) ...... 162 new engine ...... 265 SEAT Drive Profile ...... 263 changing the battery ...... 162 new tyres ...... 363 Seat functions Repair work ...... 381 access aid for the third row ...... 129 Reverse assist ...... 327 S Seat heating ...... 159 Reverse assist system ...... 327 Safe ...... 249 SEAT Media Control ...... 186 Safe driving ...... 11 data transmission and control functions . . . 187 405 Index

Seats Service interval display ...... 374 Sport Mode ...... 304 access aid for the third row ...... 129 Service intervals ...... 77 SSD adjusting the headrests ...... 126 Service Menu see Jukebox (SSD) ...... 209 adjusting the rear seat ...... 125 identifying letters on engine ...... 69 Stabilisation of the towing vehicle and trailer electric settings ...... 124 restart the oil service ...... 69 combination ...... 338 fitting the headrest ...... 127 restart Trip ...... 69 Start-Stop ...... 250 fold down the front passenger’s backrest . . 130 service intervals display ...... 69 Start-Stop system folding down and raising the rear seat time ...... 69 disconnect and connect ...... 252 backrest ...... 131 Service notification: consult ...... 78 driver indications ...... 250 heating ...... 159 Set of vehicle keys ...... 87 how it works ...... 250 incorrect positions ...... 14 Shift paddles (automatic transmission) ...... 256 lamps ...... 250 manual adjustment ...... 123 Side airbags stopping and starting the engine ...... 250 memory function ...... 128 safety instructions ...... 29 the engine does not turn off ...... 250 number of seats ...... 13 Signal amplifier ...... 244 the engine starts by itself ...... 250 removing the headrest ...... 127 SMS ...... 240 Starter button ...... 246 third row seats ...... 137 Snow chains ...... 368 Start the engine by towing ...... 53 SEAT Service Mobility ...... 375 four-wheel drive ...... 266 special characteristics ...... 52 Seat's Mobility Service ...... 375 Spanner symbol ...... 77 Station Selective catalytic reduction ...... 345 Spare parts ...... 381 set a station name ...... 191 Selective unlocking system ...... 91 Spare wheel ...... 371 Station names ...... 191 Selector lever lock ...... 255 Special characteristics Station tracking ...... 191 Selector lever (automatic gearbox) AUX mode ...... 208 Status display ...... 68 emergency unlocking ...... 260 high pressure cleaning equipment ...... 339 ACT ...... 266 positions ...... 254 peripheral view system (Top View Cam- active cylinder management status (ACT) . . 67 Service era) ...... 325 adaptive cruise control ...... 279 Digital Maintenance plan ...... 373 towing ...... 52, 55 compass indication ...... 68 flexible service ...... 373 tow start ...... 52 doors, bonnet and rear lid open ...... 67 inspection ...... 373 trailer mode ...... 337 ECO ...... 68 oil change service ...... 373 volume reduction ...... 170 Emergency brake assistance system (Front proof of Service ...... 373 Speed limiter ...... 270 Assist) ...... 273 services ...... 373 control lamp ...... 270 gear-change recommendation ...... 67 service sets ...... 375 indication on display ...... 271 instrument panel ...... 67 service works ...... 373 operating ...... 272, 273 odometer ...... 68 set service intervals ...... 373 Speed symbol ...... 363 outside temperature ...... 67 terms of use ...... 374 Speed warning ...... 70 PreCrash system ...... 22 406 Index

road signs ...... 73 Storing objects Telephone SEAT Drive Profile ...... 263 bag hooks ...... 141 Bluetooth® profiles ...... 234 selector lever positions ...... 67, 254 fastening rings ...... 139 Bluetooth® settings ...... 242 service intervals ...... 77 fold down the front passenger’s backrest . . 130 call lists ...... 241 speed limiter ...... 271 loading the trailer ...... 336 enter telephone number ...... 238 speed warning ...... 68 net bag ...... 140 favourites (quick access to the phone time ...... 75 positioning the load ...... 134 book) ...... 241 tyre control ...... 369 positioning the luggage ...... 134 general information ...... 233 warning and information messages ...... 70 roof carrier ...... 143 indications and symbols ...... 237 Steering roof carrier system ...... 143, 144 main menu ...... 236 control lamp ...... 262 trailer ...... 332 pairing a mobile phone ...... 235 electromechanical steering ...... 262 trailer mode ...... 337 phonebook ...... 239 steering assist ...... 262 trapdoor for long loads ...... 141 places with special regulations ...... 234 Steering assist ...... 262 Sun blind ...... 123 settings ...... 242 Steering wheel Sun protection ...... 123 short messages (SMS) ...... 240 adjust ...... 14 Sunroof ...... 106 user profile settings ...... 242 controls ...... 85 anti-trap function ...... 109 voice control ...... 177 shift paddles (automatic transmission) . . . . 256 closing ...... 107 Temperature indicator Storage compartment ...... 145 malfunction ...... 106 exterior ...... 67 drawers ...... 148 opening ...... 107 Third row of seats folding table ...... 147 sunshade blind ...... 108 place in the cargo floor position ...... 137 glasses case ...... 147 Sunshade blind Time glove compartment ...... 146 anti-trap function (glass roof) ...... 109 adjust ...... 69, 75 glove compartment light ...... 117 sunroof ...... 108 Tiptronic (automatic transmission) . . . . . 254, 256 in the front central armrest ...... 147 Switch To change the battery in the roof console ...... 147 hazard warning lights ...... 115 of the vehicle key ...... 88 on-board documentation ...... 146 To park the vehicle ...... 305 on the driver's side ...... 146 T Top Tether ...... 35, 38 on the front passenger side ...... 146 Technical data ...... 389 Top Tether System ...... 35, 38 other object holders ...... 148 fuel consumption ...... 389 Top View Camera Storage compartment accessories load on the roof ...... 144 see the Peripheral view system (Top View see Storage ...... 145 vehicle dimensions ...... 392 Camera) ...... 323 Storage of accident data ...... 384 vertical load on the tow hitch ...... 332 Torque weights ...... 389 wheel nuts ...... 48 Technical modifications ...... 382 407 Index

Towable loads loading ...... 336 Tyre monitor system ...... 369 loading the trailer ...... 336 malfunction ...... 334 Tyre pressure ...... 365 Tow cable ...... 334, 335 parking aid ...... 318, 320 Tyre pressure loss indicator Tow hook power socket ...... 335 tyre pressure loss indicator ...... 369 control lamp ...... 339 retrofitting a towing bracket ...... 340 Tyre profile ...... 366 unlocking electrically ...... 339 special characteristics ...... 297 Tyre repair kit ...... 41 Towing device stabilisation of the towing vehicle and trail- see also Anti-puncture kit ...... 42 fitting a bicycle carrier ...... 340 er combination ...... 338 Tyre repairs ...... 42 fitting later ...... 340 tail lights ...... 334, 335 Tyres malfunction ...... 334 technical requirements ...... 333 accessories ...... 363 tow hook with electric unlocking ...... 339 towable loads ...... 336 change ...... 45 Towing the vehicle ...... 52, 54 towing cable ...... 334, 335 directional tread pattern ...... 48 automatic gearbox ...... 54 Trailer assist ...... 320 foreign objects inserted ...... 363 four-wheel drive ...... 54 trailer mode ...... 337 new tyres ...... 364 front towline anchorage ...... 55 unlocking the tow hook electrically ...... 339 speed symbol ...... 363 manual gearbox ...... 54 vertical load on the tow hitch ...... 332, 336 tread wear indicators ...... 366 rear towline anchorage ...... 56 Trailer Assist ...... 320 tyre pressure ...... 365 special characteristics ...... 52, 55 automatic brake operation ...... 322 useful life ...... 365 tow bar ...... 54 check list ...... 321 with directional tread pattern ...... 363 towing cable ...... 54 malfunction ...... 320 Tyre tread depth ...... 366 towing prohibited ...... 54 operating ...... 322 Tyre wear ...... 366 with towing device ...... 54 problems and solutions ...... 323 Traction control system ...... 302 see Trailer Assist ...... 320 U Traffic information (TP) ...... 195 Trailer mode Unlock and lock Traffic Jam Assist ...... 289 see Trailer ...... 332 by remote control ...... 91 malfunction ...... 289 Transportation of children ...... 31 doors ...... 98 situations where it has to be disconnected . 289 Trapdoor for long loads ...... 141 with Keyless Access ...... 92 Trailer ...... 332 Trips abroad with the central locking switch...... 92 adjusting the headlights ...... 337 headlights ...... 116 USB ...... 244 anti-theft alarm ...... 335 petrol ...... 268 connecting external data media ...... 207 blind spot detector (BSD) ...... 297 Turning off the lights ...... 109 error messages ...... 207 connecting ...... 334 Turning on the lights ...... 109 USB/AUX-IN input...... 244 exterior mirrors ...... 334 Turn signal lever ...... 112 USB port ...... 145 hitching ...... 334 Tyre Mobility System LED tail lights ...... 334, 335 see Anti-puncture kit ...... 42 408 Index

V W Window washer window washer lever ...... 118 Vanity mirror ...... 123 Warning symbols Window washer system ...... 357 Vehicle see Control and warning lamps ...... 79 Window washer water data label ...... 389 Warning triangle ...... 115 check ...... 357 identification data ...... 389 Warranty ...... 376 filling quantities ...... 357 identification number ...... 389 Washing the vehicle refill ...... 357 parking on inclines ...... 306 conserving the exterior of the vehicle . . . . . 376 Windscreen heating ...... 154 parking on upward slopes ...... 306 high pressure cleaning equipment ...... 376 Windscreen washer ...... 118 raise ...... 47 sensors ...... 306 Windscreen wipers ...... 118 unlocking and locking with Keyless Access . 92 special characteristics ...... 103 functions ...... 119 vehicle ID number ...... 389 Weights ...... 389 lift the blade ...... 49 Vehicle battery Welcome light ...... 115 rain sensor ...... 120 assisted start ...... 51 Wheel balance ...... 365 reposition the blade ...... 49 charge level ...... 361 Wheel nuts ...... 46, 367 service position ...... 49 charging ...... 360 anti-theft device ...... 45, 46 special characteristics ...... 118 disconnect and connect ...... 78, 358 caps ...... 45 thermal washing ejectors ...... 119 electrolyte level ...... 360 torque ...... 48 Winter conditions energy management ...... 361 Wheels sunroof ...... 106 replacement ...... 360 change ...... 45, 48 trailer ...... 332 winter operations ...... 358 changing ...... 366 Winter tyres ...... 367 Vehicle care changing a wheel ...... 45 four-wheel drive ...... 266 wiper blade service position ...... 49 new wheels ...... 364 Wiper and rear window wiper blades Vehicle conservation products ...... 376 snow chains ...... 368 cleaning ...... 50 Vehicle dimensions ...... 392 spare wheel ...... 371 replacement ...... 50 Vehicle maintenance ...... 376 wheel nuts ...... 367 service position ...... 49 Vehicle seats ...... 13 Wheel spanner ...... 41 Wiper blades Vehicle tool kit ...... 41 Wheel trim cleaning ...... 378 Vehicle wallet compartment ...... 146 remove ...... 45 Wireless Charger ...... 244 Vertical load on the tow hitch ...... 332 Window controls ...... 104 Wireless charging ...... 244 loading the trailer ...... 336 Windows WLAN ...... 187 Voice control automatic opening/closing ...... 105 connect external audio source ...... 211 available languages ...... 177 automatic operation ...... 105 convenience closing ...... 105 X convenience opening ...... 105 XDS ...... 303 409

Vehicle identification data Confirmation of receipt of documentation and vehicle keys Model: The following items were delivered YES NO with the vehicle: Vehicle Registration: On-board documentation Vehicle identification number: First key

Date of vehicle registration Second key or vehicle delivery: Correct working order of all keys was checked SEAT Official Service: Location:

This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose. Telephone: ❀ © SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.11.19 5FJ012720BD

Owner’s manual

Tarraco Inglés (11.19) SEAT Tarraco

5FJ012720BD (11.19)

Inglés SEAT Appendix to Owner’s manual SEAT Tarraco FR

Multifunction steering wheel

Multifunction steering wheel Buttons available depending on the version Symbol Function Symbol Function Open the drive assist menu in the in- Functions  Turn: Turn volume up/down strument panel 1 Press: Mute volume  Modify the programmed ACC dis- Turn: Search in the instrument panel tance menu. In Navigation mode, turn to increase/decrease map size in SEAT 2 Digital Cockpit Press: Select the highlighted option in the instrument panel

Radio: Search for the previous/next   station. Media: Short press: previous/next track; long press: fast forward/rewind Fig. 1 Controls on the steering wheel. Activate phone menu (answer call,  end call)

Switch between media and radio  sources   Change the instrument panel menu (previous/next)

 Enable/disable voice control  Change digital panel views

Connect/disconnect the Cruise con-  trol system / ACC / Speed limiter Fig. 2 Controls on the steering wheel. : Activate ACC / Cruise control sys- The steering wheel includes multifunction   tem / Limiter modules from where it is possible to control : Reset programmed ACC speed or the audio, telephone, navigation, voice con- cruise control system trol and assist functions without the driver   : Increase programmed speed needing to be distracted from the road. : Decrease programmed speed 1 Seats

Seats Folding table* Opening the folding table ● Pull the table up, in the direction of the ar- Adjusting the backrest of the front row, until it catches ››› Fig. 4. passenger seat Folding the table or adjusting its inclination The foldable table can be used at different inclinations.

● Press the unlocking lever under the table ››› Fig. 5 1 and keep it that way. ● Adjust: Adjust the inclination of the table by Fig. 4 Front left seat: folding table. pressing the lever. ● Fold: Push the table downwards while pressing the lever. Fig. 3 Front passenger seat: adjusting the seat backrest Drink holder

A drink holder is built into the folding table 2 . ● Move the lever in the direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 3, and adjust the backrest to the de- With the foldable table extended, remove the sired position. drink holder 2 following the direction of the arrow. To store the drink holder, insert it into WARNING the table against the direction of the arrow. Serious injuries can be caused if the pas- Fig. 5 Front left seat: folding table with drinks WARNING senger seat backrest is lowered or lifted holder. without due care and attention. The table must always be closed while Depending on the model version, at the rear driving to decrease the risk of injuries. of the front seats, there may be “plane-style” folding tables for passengers in the rear seats.

2 ACC - Adaptive Cruise Control*

ACC - Adaptive Cruise Con- ● Adjusting the default distance level at the Setting speed start of your journey ››› page 4. ● To program the speed, press the  or  but- trol* ● Adjusting the driving profile ››› page 4. tons to the desired speed. The speed adjustment is made at 10 km/h (5 mph) intervals. ACC operation Connecting and activating the ACC ● If you wish to increase speed by intervals of To connect and activate the ACC, the posi- 1 km/h (1 mph), press the button  or to de- tion of the gear lever and the vehicle speed crease it press button . must all be taken into account. The set speed can be changed when the ve- ● With manual transmission, the gear lever hicle is stopped or during driving. must be in any gear except first. The speed must be greater than 30 km/h (18 mph) ap- Setting your distance level prox. With automatic transmission, the gear ● To increase or decrease the distance level lever must be in position D or S. It can be acti- press the button . vated from 0 km/h (0 mph) but the system is automatically programmed at a speed of 30 The instrument cluster screen displays the Fig. 6 On the multifunction steering wheel: km/h (18 mph). Attention, the vehicle may selected distance level. There are 5 distance buttons to operate the ACC suddenly accelerate! levels to choose from. SEAT recommends lev- ● To activate the ACC press the  ››› Fig. 6 el 3. The set distance can be changed when When the ACC is connected, the green con- button on the multifunction steering wheel. At the vehicle is stopped or while driving. trol lamp  will light up on the instrument this time, the ACC is not active and there is no cluster, and the programmed speed and programmed speed. Disconnecting and deactivating the ACC ACC status will be displayed on the screen. ● Then press button  ››› Fig. 6. At this mo- ● To disconnect the ACC, press the button . An ACC deactivated message appears and What ACC settings are possible? ment the ACC is activated and the current speed and distance are programmed. The the function is totally deactivated. ● Connecting and activating the ACC picture on the instrument cluster will change If you do not wish to disconnect the ACC, just ››› page 3. to Active mode. ● Setting your speed ››› page 3. to switch it temporarily to inactive mode While ACC is active, the vehicle travels at a (Standby), disconnect it by pressing the but- ● Setting your distance ››› page 3. set speed and distance from the vehicle ton  and reconnect it or step on the brake ● Disconnecting and deactivating the ACC ahead. Both speed and distance can be pedal. » ››› page 3. changed at any time.

3 Adjusting the default distance level at the start of your journey

It will also switch to inactive mode (Standby) if the vehicle is stopped and the driver door is opened.

Adjusting the default distance level at the start of your journey In wet road conditions, you should always set a larger distance with regard to the vehicle in front than when driving in dry conditions. In the Infotainment system, you can pre-select the distance level when connecting the ACC from: Very close, Close, Medium, Far and Very far using the function button  > Driver assistance > ACC.

Changing the driving profile In vehicles with SEAT Drive Profile, the driving profile selected can have an influence on the ACC’s acceleration and braking behaviour. In vehicles without SEAT Drive Profile, the behaviour of the ACC can also be affected if any of the following drive profiles are selected in the Infotainment system:

● Normal ● Sport ● Eco ● Convenience

In this case, you should access the ACC settings using the function button  > Driver assistance > ACC. 4 SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook. All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print. Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form. SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act. All rights on changes are reserved. ❀ This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose. © SEAT S.A. Inglés 5FJ012720FB (02.20)

5FJ012720FB